GE Fanuc Automation: Computer Numerical Control Products
GE Fanuc Automation: Computer Numerical Control Products
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
Applicable models The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Product Name Abbreviations
NOTE
Some functions described in this manual may not be applied
to some products.
For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS manual
(B–62752EN).
PREFACE B–62753EN–1/01
Signal description Relation of interface signals among the CNC, the PMC and the machine
tool is shown below:
G000– X000–
Path 1
F000– Y000–
PMC Machine
G1000– tool
Path 2
F1000–
NOTE
1 In two–path control, the signals of the same functions are
prepared for both of path 1 and path 2. These signals
have suffix #1 and #2 to their signal names on path 1 and
path 2, respectively.
When a signal is common to both paths, the signal is
prepared only to path 1 and the suffix #1 and #2 are not
attached.
2 In the context, signals are described on path 1 only. Refer
to Appendix A.1.2 List of addresses for two–path control
for signals on path 2.
3 For the signals, a single data number is assigned to 8
bits. Each bit has a different meaning.
B–62753EN–1/01 PREFACE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD
In an item where both T series and M series are described, some signals
are covered with shade ( ) in the signal address figure as shown
below. This means either T series or M series does not have this signal.
Upper part is for T series and lower part is for M series.
[Example 1]
Signal EXLM, ST is a common signal, STLK is for T series only and
RLSOT and RVS are for M series only.
#7 #6 #2 #1 #0
T series
G007 RLSOT EXLM ST STLK RVS
M series
Bit
0 or 1
Bit axis
Byte
0 – 127 In some parameters, signs
g are ig-
g
Byte axis 0 – 255 nored.
Word
0– 32767
Word axis
2–word
0– 99999999
2–word axis
NOTE
1 For the bit type and bit axis type parameters, a single
data number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a
different meaning.
2 The axis type allows data to be set separately for each
control axis.
3 The valid data range for each data type indicates a
general range. The range varies according to the
parameters. For the valid data range of a specific
parameter, see the explanation of the parameter.
PREFACE B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC
Notation of parameters
other than bit type and
bit axis type
Data No. Data
NOTE
In an item where both T series and M series are
described, parameters having different meanings
between the T series and M series and parameters that
are valid only for the T or M series are indicated in two
levels as shown below. Parameters left blank are
unavaliable.
[Example 1]
Parameter 5010 has different meanigs for the T series and M series.
[Example 2]
DPI is a parameter common to the M and T series, but GSB and GSC
are parameters valid only for the T series.
#7 #6 #0
GSC GSB DPI T series
3401
DPI M series
[Example 3]
The following parameter is provided only for the M series.
T series
1450
F1 digit feed . . . M series
B–62753EN–1/01 PREFACE
Related Manuals The table below lists manuals related to MODEL C of Series 16, Series
18, Series 160 and Series 180.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).
Manuals related to the The table below lists manuals related to the Control Motor α series.
Control Motor α series
Table 2 Manuals related to the Control Motor α series
Document
Document name Major contents Major usage
number
Specification
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series Characteristics
B–65142E
DESCRIPTIONS External dimensions
Connections Selection of motor
Specification Connection of motor
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series Characteristics
B–65152E
DESCRIPTIONS External dimensions
Connections
Specifications and
functions Selection of
FANUC CONTROL MOTOR AMPLIFIER Installation amplifier
B–65162E
α series DESCRIPTIONS External dimensions and Connection of
maintenance area amplifier
Connections
Start up the system
Start up procedure
FANUC CONTROL MOTOR α series (Hardware)
B–65165E Troubleshooting
MAINTENANCE MANUAL Troubleshooting
Maintenance of motor
Maintenance of motor
Initial setting
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series
B–65150E Setting parameters Start up the system
PARAMETER MANUAL
Description of parameters ((Software))
Initial setting Turning the system
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series
B–65160E Setting parameters (Parameters)
PARAMETER MANUAL
Description of parameters
B–62753EN–1/01 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
i
Table of contents B–62753EN–1/01
ii
B–62753EN–1/01
iii
Table of contents B–62753EN–1/01
iv
B–62753EN–1/01
v
Table of contents B–62753EN–1/01
vi
B–62753EN–1/01
14.MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
14.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
14.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)
/ AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
14.3 SKIP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
14.3.1 Skip Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
14.3.2 High–speed Skip Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
14.3.3 Multi–step Skip (T Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
14.3.4 Torque Limit Skip (T Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042
14.3.5 Continuous High–speed Skip Function (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
14.4 ENTERING COMPENSATION VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
14.4.1 Input of Offset Value Measured A (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
14.4.2 Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
14.4.3 Input of Measured Workpiece Origin Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062
vii
Table of contents B–62753EN–1/01
APPENDIX
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
A.1.1 List of Addresses (One–Path Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
A.1.2 List of Addresses (Two–path Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
A.2.1 List of Signals (In order of functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
A.2.2 List of Signals (In order of symbols) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208
A.2.3 List of Signals (In order of addresses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226
viii
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1 AXIS CONTROL
1
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.1
CONTROLLED AXES
General
Parameter
1010 Number of CNC–controlled axes
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
2
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Set the maximum number of axes that can be controlled by the CNC.
[Example] Suppose that the first axis is the X axis, and the second and subsequent
axes are the Y, Z, A, B, and C axes in that order, and that they are
controlled as follows:
X, Y, Z, and A axes: Controlled by the CNC and PMC
B and C axes: Controlled by the PMC
Then set this parameter to 4 (total 4: X, Y, Z, and A)
015 TOO MANY AXES COM- The number of the commanded axes ex-
MANDED ceeded that of simultaneously controlled
(M series) axes. Correct the program.
Note
NOTE
When the 9” CRT is fitted, the overall position display screen
and the position display screen for manual handle interrupt
can display up to eight axes. The positions of the 9th and
10th axes are not displayed on these screens when used
with 2–path control having nine or more axes.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.2.1 Controlled Axes
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
3
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.2
SETTING EACH AXIS
1.2.1
Name of Axes
General Each axis that is controlled by the CNC (including those controlled by the
PMC) must be named. Select and set names from among X, Y, Z, A, B,
C, U, V, and W (with parameter 1020).
The names of the basic axes, however, are fixed (X, Y, and Z for the M
series and X and Z for the T series). The names of additional axes can be
selected, as desired, from the names other than those for the basic axes.
The same name cannot be assigned to more than one axis.
With 2–path control, the name of basic axis for one path is fixed; the
names of additional axes can be optionally selected from axes names
except axes names of basic axes by using parameter No. 1020. For one
path, the same axis name cannot be assigned to multiple axes, but the
same axis name can be used with the other path.
Parameter
1020 Name of the axis used for programming for each axis
Y 89 V 86 B 66
Z 90 W 87 C 67
NOTE
1 In the T series, when G code system A is used, neither U,
V, nor W can be used as an axis name. Only when G code
system B or C is used, U, V, and W can be used as axis
names.
2 The same axis name cannot be assigned to more than one
axis.
3 When the secondary auxiliary function is provided, address
B cannot be used as an axis name. In the T series, when
CCR, #4 of parameter 3405, is set to 1, address A and C
may not be used with functions such as chamfering, corner
R, or direct drawing dimensions programming.
4
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Note
NOTE
With 2–path control, when information (such as the current
position) about each axis is displayed on the CRT screen,
an axis name may be followed by a subscript to indicate a
path number (e.g.,X1 and X2). This is axis name to help the
user to easily understand which path an axis belongs to.
When writing a program, the user must specify X, Y, Z, U,
V, W, A, B, and C without attaching a subscript.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.2.2 NAMES OF AXES
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN)
5
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.2.2
Increment System
General The increment system consists of the least input increment (for input ) and
least command increment (for output). The least input increment is the
least increment for programming the travel distance. The least command
increment is the least increment for moving the tool on the machine. Both
increments are represented in mm, inches, or degrees.
The increment system is classified into IS–B and IS–C (Tables 1.2.2(a)
and 1.2.2 (b)). Select IS–B or IS–C using bit 1 (ISC) of parameter 1004.
When selecting IS–C, the option of increment system 1/10 is necessary.
Table 1.2.2 (a) Increment system IS–B
Least input increment Least command increment
Metric mm 0.001mm(Diameter) 0.0005mm
system input
0.001mm(Radius) 0.001mm
machine
0.001deg 0.001deg
inch 0.0001inch(Diameter) 0.0005mm
inp t
input
0.0001inch(Radius) 0.001mm
0.001deg 0.001deg
Inch mm 0.001mm(Diameter) 0.00005inch
s stem
system inp t
input
0.001mm(Radius) 0.0001inch
machine
0.001deg 0.001deg
inch 0.0001inch(Diameter) 0.00005inch
inp t
input
0.0001inch(Radius) 0.0001inch
0.001deg 0.001deg
6
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
NOTE
Diameter programming is used only for T series. Whether
diameter programming or radius programming is used is
selected by parameter DIAx (No. 1006#3) on each axis.
Also, parameter IPR (No. 1004#7) can make the least input
increment of IS–B and IS–C ten times the least command
increment on each axis.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 INI
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1001 INM
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1004 IPR ISC
IPR ISC ISA
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
7
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
IS–A cannot be used at present.
IPR Whether the least input increment for each axis is set to a value 10 times as
large as the least command increment is specified, in increment systems
of IS–B and IS–C.
0 : The least input increment is not set to a value 10 times as large as the
least command increment.
1 : The least input increment is set to a value 10 times as large as the least
command increment.
If IPR is set to 1, the least input increment is set as follows:
Input increment Least input increment
NOTE
For IS–A, the least input increment cannot be set to a value
10 times as large as the least command increment.
When inch of input is specified, the least input increment
does not become 10 times as large as the least command
increment.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 DIAx
NOTE
When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before
continuing operation.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.2.3 Increment System
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
8
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.2.3
Specifying the
Rotation Axis
General Bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter 1006 can be used to set each axis to a linear
axis or rotation axis. Bit 1 (ROSx) of parameter 1006 can be used to select
the rotation axis type, A or B, for each axis. See the explanation of the
parameters for details of types A and B.
When the roll over function is used, the values displayed for absolute
coordinates are rounded by the shift amount per rotation, as set in
parameter No. 1260. This can prevent coordinates for the rotation axis
from overflowing. Displayed values for relative coordinates are also
rounded by the angle corresponding to one rotation when bit 2 (RRLx) of
parameter No. 1008 is set to 1. The roll–over function is enabled by
setting bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter 1008 to 1.
For an absolute command, the coordinates after the tool has moved are
values set in parameter No. 1260, and rounded by the angle corresponding
to one rotation. The tool moves in the direction in which the final
coordinates are closest when bit 1 of parameter No. 1008 is set to 0. For
an incremental command, the tool moves the angle specified in the
command.
9
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
0 0 Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.
(2) All coordinate values are linear axis type.
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type
(Refer to parameter No. 3624)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1008 RRLx RABx ROAx
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
10
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
NOTE
ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for
which ROTx, #0 of parameter No. 1006, is set to 1)
NOTE
RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
NOTE
1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter
No. 1260.
NOTE
1 After setting the parameter, turn off the power once and turn
it on again to operate the machine.
2 This parameter is valid only when ROAx = 1.
11
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
Rotary axis roll–over function cannot be used together with
the indexing function of the index table.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.21.2 Rotary Axis Roll–over
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
12
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.2.4
Controlled Axes
Detach
General These signals release the specified control axes from control.
When attachments are used (such as a detachable rotary table), these
signals are selected according to whether the attachments are mounted.
The signals can also be used for switching the C axis and spindle on lathes.
When multiple rotary tables are used in turn, the tables must use motors
of the same model. Absolute pulse coders cannot be used.
Signal
[Operation] When the signals are 1, the control unit operates as follows:
1) Position control is not executed at all. Servo motor excitation is cut.
2) Servo alarm on the axis is ignored.
3) Axis interlock signal is assumed to be zero on the detached axis.
4) A command for automatic or manual operation is effective for the axis,
but do not execute the command. The command is accepted but the
operation is restrained, because the axis interlock is 0. In an automatic
operation, the execution may stop and hold at at block.
5) Position display also displays the position of the detached axis.
13
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G124 DTCH8 DTCH7 DTCH6 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 RMVx
NOTE
RMVx is valid when RMBx in parameter 1005 is 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 RMBx MCCx
14
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
MCCx When an axis is released from control, control for the MCC signal for the
corresponding servo amplifier is
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
NOTE
If the servo motor for an axis is connected to a 2–axis or
other multiaxis amplifier, releasing the axis from control
causes servo alarm 401 (V ready off) to be output. This
alarm can be disabled by this parameter. When the servo
motor is disconnected from the CNC, however, servo alarm
401 is output, regardless of the value of the parameter, due
to the nature of multiaxis amplifier.
Caution
CAUTION
When a 2–axis or 3–axis amplifier is used, releasing only
one axis from control results in the output of servo alarm 401
(V ready off). Use 1–axis amplifiers for those axes to be
released from control, e.g., by replacing the rotary table.
Note
NOTE
1 Controlled axis detach signals DTCH1 <G124#0>, DTCH2
<G124#1>, and DTCH3 <G124#2> can be changed from 1
to 0 or from 0 to 1 when the power is first turned on or when
no movement is being executed along the corresponding
axis. If these signals are changed from 0 to 1 when the tool
is moving along the corresponding axis, the axis is released
from control upon completion of the movement.
2 For these signals to be attached, parameter no. 1005#7
must be set, indicating the axes are detachable.
3 Setting parameter no. 0012#7 from the MDI panel detaches
the axes in the same way as these signals.
4 Those axes that are released from control lose their
reference positions. Reference position return must,
therefore, be performed for the axes prior to executing move
commands for the axes. Specifying a move command
before reference position return has been performed
causes alarm 224 to be output (the alarm can be disabled
by setting bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter 1005).
15
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.2.5
Outputting the
Movement State of an
Axis
General The movement state of each axis can be output to the PMC.
Signal
16
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
[Output condition] “1” indicates the corresponding axes are moving in the minus direction,
and “0” indicates they are moving in the plus direction.
CAUTION
These signals maintain their existing condition during a
stop, indicating the direction of the axes’ movement before
being stopped.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F102 MV8 MV7 MV6 MV5 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1
Parameter
Setting the output format
of the axis–in–movement #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
signal 3003 MVG MVX
17
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Caution
CAUTION
Axis moving signals and axis moving direction signals are
output in both automatic and manual operations.
1.2.6
Mirror Image
General Mirror image can be applied to each axis, either by signals or by
parameters (setting input is acceptable). All movement directions are
reversed during automatic operation along axes to which a mirror image
is applied.
X
B
A B’
Z
0
When M1 signal turned to “1” at point A
Signal
18
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
MI 1
1 ..... Applies mirror image to the 1st axis.
2 ..... Applies mirror image to the 2nd axis.
3 ..... Applies mirror image to the 3rd axis.
: :
: :
The mirror image signal can be turned to “1” in the following cases:
a) During offset cancel;
b) When the CNC is in the automatic operation stop state and not in the
feed hold state.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
19
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 MIRx
Warning
WARNING
1 When programmable mirror image and ordinary mirror
image are specified at the same time, programmable mirror
image is applied first.
2 No programmable mirror image affects mirror image check
signals MMI1 to MMI8 <F108>.
Caution
CAUTION
Even when the mirror image is applied, commands which do
not actuate mirror image (such as automatic reference
position return and manual operation) do not affect mirror
image check signals MMI1 to MMI8 <F108>.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.7 Mirror Image
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
20
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.2.7
Follow–up
General When position control is disabled for the controlled axes (when the servo
is off, during emergency stop, or during a servo alarm), if the machine is
moved, a positional error occurs. Follow–up is a function for changing
the current position of the CNC and reset the error counter to zero,
assuming a command corresponding to the error has been specified.
You can select whether to perform follow–up for axes for which the servo
is turned off.
Follow–up is always performed during emergency stop or a servo alarm.
When follow–up is not When signal *FLWU is 1 or bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter 1819 is 1,
performed for axes for follow–up is not performed. The error is added to the error counter as a
which the servo is servo error. In this case, the machine moves to compensate for the error
turned off when the servo off signal changes to 0.
In general, follow–up is not used if the machine is mechanically clamped
when position control is disabled for the controlled axes.
When follow–up is When *FLWU is “0”, the follow-up function is engaged. The present
performed for the axes position of the CNC is changed to reset the error counter to zero. The
for which the servo is machine tool remains in a deviated position, but since the present position
turned off of the CNC changes correspondingly, the machine moves to the correct
position when the absolute command is next applied.
In general, follow–up should be used when motors are driven by
mechanical handles.
Signal
Follow–up signal
*FLWU <G007#5>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Select whether to perform follow–up when the servo is turned off for those
axes for which bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter 1819 is 0.
[Operation] 0: Performs follow–up.
1: Does not perform follow–up.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G007 *FLWU
21
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1819 FUPx
CAUTION
When the index table indexing function (M series) is used,
be sure to set FUPx of the 4th axis to 1.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL 1.2.8 Servo Off (Mechanical handle)
(This manual)
22
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.2.8
Servo off (Mechanical
handle)
General Place the controlled axes in the servo off state; that is, they stop the current
to the servo motor, which disables position control. However, the
position detection feature functions continuously, so the current position
is not lost.
These signals are used to prevent the servo motors from overloading when
the tools on the axes are mechanically clamped under certain machining
conditions on the machine, or to move the machine by driving the motors
by mechanical handles.
Signal
[Operation] These signals place those axes for which the signals are 1 in the servo off
state (the current to the servo motor is stopped), thus disabling position
control. However, the position detection feature continues to function, so
the current position is not lost.
These signals are provided for the controlled axes on a one–to–one basis.
A number appended to a signal represents a controlled axis number.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G126 SVF8 SVF7 SVF6 SVF5 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1
23
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Caution
CAUTION
1 In general, interlock is applied to an axis while the servo off
signal for that axis is 1.
2 When one of these signals turns to “1”, the servo motor is
turned off. The mechanical clamp is done by using the
auxiliary function. Set the timing for the auxiliary function,
mechanical clamp and servo off signals as shown in the
diagram below. The clamp command auxiliary function
should be executed only after the distribution end signal
(DEN) turned to “1”.
Machine
clamp
Servo off state
SVF1, ...
FIN
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL 1.2.7 Follow–up
(This manual)
24
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.2.9
Position Switch
General Position switch signals can be output to the PMC while the machine
coordinates along a controlled axes are within a specified ranges.
Signal
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F070 PSW08 PSW07 PSW06 PSW05 PSW04 PSW03 PSW02 PSW01
25
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
Setting the
correspondence
between the position
switch signals and the
controlled axes
6910 Axis corresponding to the first position switch
NOTE
Set 0 for those position switch numbers that are not to be
used.
Maximum operation
range 6930 Maximum operation range of the first position switch
26
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Minimum operation
range 6950 Minimum operation range of the first position switch
27
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
[Unit of data]
Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
28
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.3
ERROR
COMPENSATION
1.3.1
Stored Pitch Error
Compensation
General If pitch error compensation data is specified, pitch errors of each axis can
be compensated in detection unit per axis.
Pitch error compensation data is set for each compensation position at the
intervals specified for each axis. The origin of compensation is the
reference position to which the tool is returned.
Pitch error compensation data can be set with external devices such as the
Handy File (see Operator’s manual). Compensation data can also be set
directly with the MDI panel.
The following parameters must be set for pitch error compensation. Set
the pitch error compensation value for each pitch error compensation
position number set by these parameters.
In the following example, 33 is set for the pitch error compensation
number at the reference position.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Reference position
–1
Compensation magnification
parameter (No. 3623)
–2
Compensation number parameter Compensation interval
for the compensation position hav- parameter (No. 3624)
ing the smallest value (No. 3621)
Compensation
31 32 33 34 35 36 37
position number
Compensation +3 –1 –1 +1 +2 –1 –3
value to be set
29
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Procedure for displaying and setting the pitch error compensation data
3 Press the continuous menu key , then press chapter selection soft
Continuous menu key
key [PITCH].
The following screen is displayed:
and .
5 Enter a value with numeric keys and press the [INPUT] soft key.
30
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Explanations
Specifying the To assign the compensation positions for each axis, specify the positive
compensation point direction or the negative direction in reference to the compensation
position No. of the reference position. If the machine stroke exceeds the
specified range on either the positive direction or the negative direction,
the pitch error compensation does not apply beyond the range.
Compensation point 1024 compensation positions from No. 0 to 1023 are available on the
number pitch error setting screen. Assign arbitrary positions for each axis using
parameters.
The number of the compensation position at the reference position
(parameter 3620), number of the compensation position having the
smallest value (parameter 3621), and number of the compensation
position having the largest value (parameter 3622) must be set for each
axis.
The name of each axis is displayed before the smallest compensation
position number on the pitch error setting screen.
Examples
For linear axis ⋅ Machine stroke: –400 mm to +800 mm
⋅ Interval between the pitch error compensation positions: 50 mm
⋅ No. of the compensation position of the reference position: 40
If the above is specified, the No. of the farthest compensation position in
the negative direction is as follows:
No. of the compensation position of the reference position – (Machine
stroke on the negative side/Interval between the compensation
positions) + 1
= 40 – 400/50 + 1= 33
No. of the farthest compensation position in the positive direction is as
follows:
No. of the compensation position of the reference position + (Machine
stroke on the positive side/Interval between the compensation
positions)
= 40 + 800/50= 56
The correspondence between the machine coordinate and the
compensation position No. is as follows:
31
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
No 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 56
+2 +1 +1 –2 0 –1 0 –1 +2 +1 0 –1 –1 –2 0 +1 +2 1
–2
Reference –3
position
–4
32
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
45.0 315.0
(61) (68)
(60)
(62) (67)
(+)
90.0 270.0
(63) (66)
(64) (65)
135.0 225.0
180.0
Compensation values are output at the positions indicated by .
33
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
+3
68 +2
(60)
+1 68
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 (60) 61 62
45 90 135 180 225 270 315 0 45 90 135 180 225 270 315 0 45 90 (deg)
–1
–2
–3
–4
Parameter
3620 Number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference position
for each axis
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
34
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
NOTE
This value must be larger than set value of parameter (No.
3620).
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
3624 Interval between pitch error compensation positions for each axis
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
35
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Warning
WARNING
1 Compensation value range
Compensation values can be set within the range from –7
x compensation magnification (detection unit) to +7 x
compensation magnification (detection unit). The
compensation magnification can be set for each axis within
the range from 0 to 100 in parameter 3623.
2 Intervals of compensation positions
The pitch error compensation positions are arranged with
equally spaced. Set the space between two adjacent
positions for each axis to the parameter (No. 3624).
3 Pitch error compensation of the rotary axis
For the rotating axis, the interval between the pitch error
compensation positions shall be set to one per integer of the
amount of movement (normally 3605) per rotation. The sum
of all pitch error compensation amounts per rotation must be
made to 0. Also, set the same compensation value to a
position and the same position with one rotation.
4 Conditions where pitch error compensation is not
performed
Note that the pitch error is not compensated in the following
cases:
· When the machine is not returned to the reference
position after turning on the power. This excludes the
case where an absolute position detector is employed.
· If the interval between the pitch error compensation
positions is 0.
· If the compensation position Nos. on the positive or
negative direction do not fall within the range of 0 to
1023.
· If the compensation position Nos. do not conform to the
following relationship:
Negative side Reference position < Positive side
36
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III 8.6.3 Inputting pitch error compensation data
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN) III 8.6.4 Outputting pitch error compensation data
37
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.3.2
Backlash
Compensation
General
Backlash compensation Function for compensating for lost motion on the machine. Set a
compensation value in parameter No. 1851, in detection units from 0 to
"9999 pulses for each axis.
Backlash compensation More precise machining can be performed by changing the backlash
for each rapid traverse compensating value depending on the feedrate, the rapid traverse or the
and cutting feed cutting feed.
Let the measured backlash at cutting feed be A and the measured backlash
at rapid traverse be B. The backlash compensating value is shown below
depending on the change of feedrate (cutting feed or rapid traverse) and
the change of the direction of movement.
Change of feedrate Cutting feed to Rapid traverse Rapid traverse Cutting feed to
cutting feed to rapid traverse to cutting feed rapid traverse
Change of direction
of movement
@ = (A–B)/2
@ The positive or negative direction for compensating values is the
direction of movement.
α α
A B
⇒ ⇒
: Overrun
38
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1800 RBK
1852 Backlash compensating value used for rapid traverse for each axis
Caution
CAUTION
The backlash compensation for each rapid traverse and
cutting feed is not performed until the first reference position
return is completed after the power is turned on. Under this
state, the normal backlash compensation is performed
according to the value specified in parameter No. 1851
irrespective of a rapid traverse and a cutting feed.
Note
NOTE
When backlash compensation is applied separately for
cutting feed and rapid traverse, jog feed is regarded as
cutting feed.
39
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.3.3
Straightness
Compensation
General For a machine tool with a long stroke, deviations in straightness between
axes may deteriorate machining accuracy. For this reason, when an axis
moves, other axes are compensated in detection units to improve
straightness. This improvement results in better machining accuracy.
When an axis (parameter Nos. 5711 to 5713) moves, the corresponding
compensation axis (parameter Nos. 5721 to 5723) is compensated.
That is, the compensation axis is compensated at the pitch error
compensation point (See 1.3.1) of the moving axis.
0 1 2 3 60 61 126 127
a g
e
b
Parameter
5711 Axis number of moving axis 1
[Classification] Input
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Axis number (When 0, compensation is not performed.)
[Valid data range] 1 to Number of controlled axes
Set the axis numbers of moving axes.
40
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
[Classification] Input
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Axis number (When 0, compensation is not performed.)
[Valid data range] 1 to Number of controlled axes
Set the axis numbers of compensation axes.
[Classification] Input
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Number
(Compensation point numbers in stored pitch error compensation)
[Valid data range] 0 to 128 number of controlled axes
Set four compensation points for each moving axis.
41
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
[Classification] Input
42
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Note
NOTE
1 The straightness compensation function can be used after
a moving axis and its compensation axis have returned to
the reference position.
2 After setting parameters for straightness compensation, be
sure to turn off the NC power.
3 Set parameters for straightness compensation according to
the following conditions:
S The compensation at a compensation point must be
within the range –128 to 127.
S Compensation points must be set so that “abcd”
is satisfied.
S Compensation points must exist between the
compensation point with the largest positive value and
that with the largest negative value in the stored pitch
error compensation data for each axis. Four
compensation points can be set to 0 at a time. In this
case, compensation is not performed.
4 To add the straightness compensation function option, the
stored pitch error compensation option is needed.
In this case, the number of compensation points of each
axis between the compensation point with the largest
positive value and that with the largest negative value in the
stored pitch error compensation data must be equal to or
less than 128.
5 Straightness compensation data is superposed on stored
pitch error compensation data and output.
43
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.4.1
Parameters Related to
Servo
CAUTION
The relations among the least command increment,
detection unit, CMR, and DMR are as specified below.
Least command increment = CMR detection unit
Move amount per revolution of motor
Detection unit =
DMR number of pulses of detector per revolution
44
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1800 CVR
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APCx APZx OPTx
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
WARNING
When an absolute position detector is used, after primary
adjustment is performed or after the absolute position
detector is replaced, this parameter must be set to 0, power
must be turned off and on, then manual reference position
return must be performed. This completes the positional
correspondence between the machine position and the
position on the absolute position detector, and sets this
parameter to 1 automatically.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1816 DM3x DM2x DM1x
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
45
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
When the flexibly feed gear is used, do not use these
parameters. Set the numerator and denominator of DMR
to an appropriate values in parameters 2084 and 2085
respectively.
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
46
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
NOTE
When command multiply is 1 to 48, the set value must be
determined so that an integer can be set for command
multiply.
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
47
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
48
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.4.2
Absolute Position
Detection
General Even when the power to the CNC is turned off, a battery–powered pulse
coder stores the current position. No reference position return is required
when the power to the CNC is turned on next.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APCx
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
49
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.5
SETTINGS RELATED
WITH COORDINATE
SYSTEMS
1.5.1
Machine Coordinate
System
General Machine coordinate system is a coordinate system set with a zero point
proper to the machine system.
A coordinate system in which the reference position becomes the
parameter-preset (No. 1240) coordinate value when manual reference
position return is performed, is set. With G53 command, the machine
coordinate system is selected and the axis can be moved at rapid traverse
to the position expressed by the machine coordinates.
Parameter
1240 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis in the machine
coordinate system
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
Warning
WARNING
Since the machine coordinate system must be set before
the G53 command is specified, at least one manual
reference position return or automatic reference position
return by the G28 command must be performed after the
power is turned on. This is not necessary when an
absolute–position detector is attached.
50
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.8.1 MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
1.5.2
Workpiece Coordinate
System/Addition of
Workpiece Coordinate
System Pair
Setting a workpiece A workpiece coordinate system can be set using one of three methods:
coordinate system (1) Method using G92 (G50 for G code system A)
A workpiece coordinate system is set by specifying a value after G92
(G50) in the program.
(2) Automatic setting
If bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No. 1201 is set beforehand, a workpiece
coordinate system is automatically set when manual reference
position return is performed.
This method can be used when no option is specified for the workpiece
coordinate system.
(3) Input using the CRT/MDI panel
Six workpiece coordinate systems can be set beforehand using the
CRT/MDI panel.
Selecting a workpiece The user can choose from set workpiece coordinate systems as described
coordinate system below.
(1) Selecting a workpiece coordinate system set by G92 (G50) or
automatic workpiece coordinate system setting
Once a workpiece coordinate system is selected, absolute commands
work with the workpiece coordinate system.
(2) Choosing from six workpiece coordinate systems set using the
CRT/MDI panel
By specifying a G code from G54 to G59, one of the workpiece
coordinate systems 1 to 6 can be selected.
51
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Changing workpiece The six workpiece coordinate systems specified with G54 to G59 can be
coordinate system changed by changing an external workpiece zero point offset value or
workpiece zero point offset value.
Three methods are available to change an external workpiece zero point
offset value or workpiece zero point offset value.
(1) Inputting from the CRT/MDI panel
(2) Programming by G10 or G92 (G50)
(3) Changing an external workpiece zero point offset value
ZOFS2 ZOFS3
ZOFS1 ZOFS4
Workpiece
coordinate
ZOFS5 system 5 (G58)
EXOFS
ZOFS6
Machine zero Workpiece
coordinate
system 6 (G59)
EXOFS : External workpiece zero point offset value
ZOFS1AZOFS6 : Workpiece zero point offset value
Changing an external workpiece zero point offset value or workpiece zero point
offset value
52
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Workpiece coordinate When the coordinate system actually set by the G92 (G50) command or
system shift (T series) the automatic coordinate system setting deviates from the programmed
workpiece coordinate, the set coordinate system can be shifted.
Set the desired shift amount in the workpiece coordinate system shift
memory.
X
x X–Z: Coordinate system in programming
x–z : Current set coordinate system with shift
ÂÂÂ amount 0
ÂÂÂ
(coordinate system to be modified by
shifting)
ÂÂÂ
O’
ÂÂÂ z
Shift
Z
O
Set the shift amount from O’ to O in the workpiece coordinate system shift memory.
Addition of workpiece Besides the six workpiece coordinate systems (standard workpiece
coordinate system pair coordinate systems) selectable with G54 to G59, 48 or 200 additional
(M series) workpiece coordinate systems (additional workpiece coordinate systems)
can be used.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1201 AWK ZPI ZPR
53
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1202 G50 EWS EWD
X X X X
EWD=0 EWD=1
Z Z (Shifted workpiece
coordinate system)
EXOFS –EXOFS
Z (Original workpiece
Z
coordinate system)
EWS Shift value of the workpiece coordinate system and external workpiece
zero point offset value are
0 : Stored in the separate memory areas.
1 : Stored in the same memory area, that is, the shift and the offset values
are the same.
G50 When the CNC has commands G54 to G59 specifying workpiece
coordinate systems (optional function), if the G50 command for setting a
coordinate system (or the G92 command in G command system B or C) is
specified,
0 : The G50 (or G92) command is executed without an alarm.
1 : P/S alarm No. 010 is issued and the G50 (or G92) command is not
executed.
54
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1221 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system1 (G54)
1222 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system2 (G55)
1223 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system3 (G56)
1224 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system4 (G57)
1225 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system5 (G58)
1226 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system6 (G59)
1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate
system setting is performed
55
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1251 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate
system setting is performed with inch input
NOTE
This parameter is valid when ZPI in parameter 1201 is set
to 1.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.8.2 WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
56
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.5.3
Rotary Axis Roll Over
General The roll–over function prevents coordinates for the rotation axis from
overflowing. The roll–over function is enabled by setting bit 0 (ROAx)
of parameter 1008 to 1.
For an incremental command, the tool moves the angle specified in the
command. For an absolute command, the coordinates after the tool has
moved are values rounded by the angle corresponding to one rotation set
in parameter No. 1260. The tool moves in the direction in which the final
coordinates are closest when bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008 is set
to 0. Displayed values for relative coordinates are also rounded by the
angle corresponding to one rotation when bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No.
1008 is set to 1.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
0 0 Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.
(2) All coordinate values are linear axis type.
(Not rounded in 0 to 360_)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to
parameter No. 3624)
57
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1008 RRLx RABx ROAx
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
NOTE
ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for
which ROTx, #0 of parameter No. 1006, is set to 1)
NOTE
RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
NOTE
1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter
No. 1260.
NOTE
When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before
continuing operation.
58
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Note
NOTE
This function cannot be used together with the indexing
function of the index table (M series).
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.21.2 ROTARY AXIS ROLL–OVER
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
59
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.6
SIMPLE
SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL
WARNING
1 Before using the synchronization error check function, set
identical values for the reference positions of the master
and slave axes.
2 To clear the alarm, first increase the maximum
synchronization error set in parameter 8314, then press the
reset key. Next, perform handle operations or other manual
operations so that the machine coordinates agree. Then,
restore the original value in parameter 8314.
3 If an alarm is detected during a synchronous operation, set
the signals indicating that a synchronous operation is in
progress (G138, G140) to off, then follow the procedure for
clearing an alarm.
NOTE
If the synchronization error check function is not used, set
parameter 8314 to 0.
60
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Synchronization If the agreement between the positions of the master and slave axes is lost
compensation function when the system power is turned off, the function compensates for the
difference between them. After performing a follow–up at power on, the
function sends compensation pulses to the slave axis to adjust its position
such that it agrees with that of the master axis. This function is enabled
only when the slave axis of synchronization control supports the
absolute–position detection function.
WARNING
1 The synchronization compensation function is enabled
after reference position returns have been performed. The
function is not executed if the parameter is set before
reference position returns are performed.
2 The synchronization compensation function is not executed
when the servo alarm is eliminated.
CAUTION
The synchronization deviation is processed as a position
error on the slave axis while at rest. The position error is
displayed as diagnostic data 300, in the same units as used
to detect the error. If the error exceeds the value set in
parameter 8315, servo alarm 410 is triggered. The alarm
can be cleared by pressing the reset key. As the position
error for the slave axis remains even after the alarm is
cleared, however, the positions must be adjusted.
NOTE
1 To use the synchronization compensation function, set the
SOF bit, bit 1 of parameter 8301, to 1.
2 The synchronization compensation function is also enabled
when emergency stop is canceled.
61
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
<M series>
62
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as described below:
– In jog, handle, or incremental feed mode, the control unit supplies the
move command, specified for the master axis, to both the master and
slave axes of synchronization control.
The master axis is specified with a parameter.
Signal address
T series #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G138 SYNC8 SYNC7 SYNC6 SYNC5 SYNC4 SYNC3 SYNC2 SYNC1
M series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G138 SYNC8 SYNC7 SYNC6 SYNC5 SYNC4 SYNC3 SYNC2 SYNC1
Parameter
T series
8311 Axis number of master axis in synchronous control
63
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
The axis number settings are: 0 for the first axis, 1 for the second axis, 2
for the third axis, and so on.
Example) To set the 3rd axis to teh master axis and the 4th axis to the slave
axis, set as follows:
No. 8311
1st axis 00
2nd axis 20
3rd axis 00
4th axis 00
This parameter sets the mirror image function. When 100 or a greater
value is set with this parameter, the mirror image function is applied to
synchronous control. Set this parameter to the slave axis.
M series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3105 SMF
NOTE
This parameter is valid when simplified syncronous contorol
is applied according to the setting of parameter No. 8311
(master and slave axes can be arbitrarily selected).
64
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8301 SOR
Select a master axis and slave axis for simple synchronous control. Set
a master axis number for the slave axis side.
Example: When using the first axis (X–axis) as the master axis, and the
third axis (Z–axis) as the slave axis, set parameter No. 8311 as follows:
NOTE
Specifying the third axis (Z–axis) as the master axis, and the
first axis (X–axis) as the slave axis is not allowed. The
master axis number must always be smaller than the slave
axis number.
8313 Limit of the difference between the amount of positioning deviation of the master
and slave axes
65
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
T series
Number Message Description
66
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
M series
Number Message Description
Servo alarm
Number Message Description
Diagnostic data
Caution
CAUTION
1 When a manual reference position return is executed,
identical movements are performed along the master and
slave axes until deceleration commences. Subsequently,
grids are detected separately.
2 Pitch error compensation and backlash compensation are
executed separately for the master and slave axes.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.21.1 Simple synchronous control
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
67
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.7
TANDEM CONTROL
(M SERIES)
General If a single motor cannot produce sufficient torque to move a large table,
for example, this function allows two motors to be used. By means of this
function, two motors can be used to perform movement along a single
axis.
Positioning is carried out only for the master axis. The slave axis is used
only to produce a torque. By means of this function, double the amount
of torque can be obtained.
Table
Master axis
Ball screw
Slave axis
Sample application
The CNC generally processes the two axes of tandem control as a single
axis. In the management of servo parameters and the monitoring of servo
alarms, however, the two axes are handled individually.
68
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
PC PC
Power Power
line line
Servo Servo
amplifier amplifier
PWM PWM
Rotor Rotor
position position
Current Current
loop loop
Re- Re-
verse? verse?
Aver-
age?
PRM: Parameter
Scale
PRM.1815#1
Specified (Example)
pulse
69
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Explanations
Axis configuration in To specify the axis configuration in tandem control, follow the procedure
tandem control below:
(1) Tandem control can be performed for up to four pairs of axes.
(2) In terms of controlled axes, the pair of axes is handled as two separate
axes. In terms of CNC–controlled axes (command axes), the pair of
axes is handled as a single axis (master axis). Specify the number of
CNC–controlled axes with parameter 1010, excluding the slave axis
of tandem control. The slave axis must be handled as if it were
controlled only by the PMC.
(3) The pair of axes is handled as two separate axes in the management of
servo parameters and the monitoring of servo alarms.
(4) Assign two consecutive numbers, that is one odd and one even
number, to the master and slave axes as their servo axis numbers
(parameter 1023). Assign the smaller number to the master axis.
(Example) If the servo axis number of the master axis (parameter
1023) is set to 1, specify servo axis number 2 for the corresponding
slave axis. If the servo axis number of the master axis is set to 3,
specify servo axis number 4 for the corresponding slave axis.
(5) If tandem control is performed for two or more pairs of axes, assign
servo axis numbers to the master and slave axes in identical order.
(6) Specify a unique axis name for the slave axis.
(7) The slave axis is handled as a controlled axis. Set the NDPx bit (bit
0 of parameter 3115) to 1 to suppress the position display.
The following sample axis configuration is for a machine with six axes
X, Y, Z, A, B (PMC axis), and C. The X–axis and Y–axis are the master
axes of tandem control.
Number of controlled axes (optional parameter): 6
Number of CNC controlled axes (parameter 1010): 3
70
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Preload function By adding an offset to the torque controlled by the position (velocity)
feedback device, the function can apply opposite torques to the master and
slave axes so that equal and opposite movements are performed for both
axes. This function can reduce the effect of backlash on the master and
slave axes caused by the tandem connection of the two motors via a gear.
This function, however, cannot reduce backlash between the ball screw
and table or other backlash inherent to the machine.
If a preload of x is set for the master axis and –x for the slave axis, the
opposing preload torques are continuously applied to the two axes, even
at rest, as shown below:
CAUTION
1 Specify as low a preload as possible. Avoid specifying a
preload higher than the rated torque. Too high a preload will
trigger an overload alarm because the specified torques
continue to be applied, even at rest. A preload that is very
slightly higher than the frictional force is recommended.
Thus, the recommended preload may be about one–third of
the rated torque.
2 If the motors rotate in opposite directions (different signs are
specified in parameter 2022), specify the preload values
with the same sign.
Velocity feedback As shown in the block diagram of tandem control, the motor of the slave
average function axis is not subject to velocity control. A machine with a large amount of
backlash may become unstable if the motor of the slave axis vibrates as
a result of backlash in the gear. This can be overcome by applying
velocity control to the slave axis also. This velocity feedback average
function is enabled when bit 2 of parameter 2008 is set to 1.
Improved stability of a The following two functions can increase the stability and position gain
closed–loop system of a closed–loop system having a linear scale:
Dual position feedback function
Machine velocity feedback function
For details of these functions, refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR a
series PARAMETER MANUAL (B–65150E) or the ”FANUC AC SER-
VO AMPLIFIER Maintenance Manual (B–65005E).”
Notes on stability of An important factor affecting stability in tandem control is the capability
tandem control of back feed. Back feed is to cause movement along either the master or
slave axis from the other axis, via the transmission mechanism connecting
the two axes. A machine without this capability may be inclined to
become unstable and require adjustments.
71
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Connection of axis The DI/DO signals, generally connected to each axis, must be connected
signals only to the master axis of two axes of tandem control. The signals need
not be connected to the slave axis. The following signals, however, may
have to be connected depending on the application.
i) Controlled axis detach signal and servo off signal
Connect these signals so that the master and slave axis signals are
simultaneously input.
ii) Overtravel limit signal
Connect the signal so that 1 is always output as the overtravel limit
signal for the slave axis.
If the slave axis stroke limit must also be detected, connect the signals so
that the signal detected on the slave axis is sent to the overtravel limit
signal of the master axis.
Connecting motors Connect the motors according to the servo axis numbers. Connect the
feedback cable of the slave axis.
Axis control
Feedback cable for motor of master axis
JF1
Servo alarms Motor overload and other servo alarms are displayed separately for the
master and slave axes.
Parameter
Setting data The parameters that are generally set for each axis can, when set for axes
(parameters) under tandem control, be classified into the following three groups:
i) Parameters in which identical values must be set for the master and
slave axes
ii) Parameters that must be specified only for the master axis (The
corresponding parameter for the slave axis is not used.)
iii) Parameters for which different values may be set for the master and
slave axes
72
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
WARNING
Note that, if different values are set for the master and slave
axes in a parameter of type i), the operations for the two
axes of tandem control will not be performed correctly.
73
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
74
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1817 TAN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2008 VFBAVE
75
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
417 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS– Illegal values are set for parameter 1010,
PARAMETER INCORRECT 1023, or 1817 when tandem control is per-
formed.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.21.4 Tandem control
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
76
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.8
SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL
CAUTION
1 The term synchronous control used here only refers to an
operation in which issuing the same move command to two
different servo systems at one time. Note that synchronous
control does not involve out–of–synchronization
compensation, in which the deviation between two servo
motors is constantly checked and one of the servo motors
is subjected to compensation to reduce the deviation.
2 The term parking means to issue no move command to a
servo system. No coordinate values are updated during
parking. However appropriate parameter setting can
change absolute or relative coordinate systems.
3 If synchronous control is terminated during automatic
operation, a move command or coordinate system setting
may not be specified for the synchronous slave axis in the
current block and one block that follows it (or two blocks for
tool–tip radius compensation).
77
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Automatic setting of
workpiece coordinate
system
Explanation When synchronous control is started for a workpiece coordinate system,
it is possible to specify the workpiece coordinate system automatically.
When synchronous control for a workpiece coordinate system is
terminated, it is possible to return the workpiece coordinate system to
ordinary machining (not synchronous control). The explanation of the
workpiece coordinate system used during synchronous control follows:
For example, when synchronous control is used to move an axis
differently from the way originally specified, the master axis may be
placed in a parking state, while the slave axis is allowed to move. In such
a case, it will be convenient if a coordinate system used to represent the
current position of the slave axis is used as a workpiece coordinate system
for the master axis. Conventionally, this workpiece coordinate system
must be specified by program when synchronous control is started,
because the workpiece coordinate system does not originally belong to
the master axis. This automatic workpiece coordinate system setting
function for synchronous control sets up this workpiece coordinate
system automatically. This function can also resume the original
workpiece coordinate system for the master axis automatically. This
function does not work for the slave axis.
Setting and command In addition to setting ordinary synchronous control, parameters must be
specified as follows:
(1) To set up a workpiece coordinate system for synchronous control
automatically when starting synchronous control
Set parameter No. 8163 (SPMx) to “1”. (Master axis parameter
only)
Set parameter No. 8165 with the coordinates of the master axis
when both master and slave axes are at the reference position.
(2) To resume the ordinary workpiece coordinate system
automatically when synchronous control is terminated
Set parameter No. 8163 (SPSx) to “1”. (Master axis parameter
only)
Set parameter No. 1250 with the workpiece coordinates of the
master axis when the master axis is at the reference position.
This synchronous control can be specified using the G0138 signal
similarly to the ordinary synchronous control. When the signal is raised
to start synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate system for the
master axis is automatically set up. Likewise, when the signal is dropped
to terminate synchronous control, the original workpiece coordinate
system for the master axis is set automatically.
Workpiece coordinate (1) Workpiece coordinate system for synchronous control
value calculation method
(Master axis workpiece coordinate value)
= (parameter No. 8185 for the master axis)
" (slave axis machine coordinate value) . (1)
) (master axis machine coordinate value) (2)
(1) ):Master axis parameter SCDx = 0
*:Master axis parameter SCDx = 1
(2) Master axis parameter SCMx = 1 only
78
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Signal
Synchronous control
axis selection signals
SYNC1 to SYNC8 <G138>
79
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Synchronous control
under way signals
SYN1O to SYN8O <F118>
CAUTION
Whether each axis is under synchronous control does not
always match whether the corresponding selection signal
(synchronous control axis selection signal) has been issued
or not. For example, if these signals are set to “1” during an
alarm, they are ignored. If a servo alarm occurs during
synchronous control, it is terminated automatically. Before
attempting to perform synchronous control, always check
the state of these signals.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0138 SYNC4 SYNC3 SYNC2 SYNC1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0122 PK8 PK7 PK6 PK5 PK4 PK3 PK2 PK1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0118 SYN4O SYN3O SYN2O SYN1O
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8160 NRS
80
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8162 PKUx SMRx
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8163 SCDx SCMx SPSx SPMx
NOTE
When a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at
the start of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate
system is calculated from the current machine coordinates
and the workpiece coordinates of each axis at the reference
position set in parameter No. 8185.
NOTE
When a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at
the end of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate
system is calculated from the current machine coordinates
and the workpiece coordinates for each axis at the
reference position set in parameter No. 1250.
81
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
SCDx The positive (+) directions of the master axis and slave axis in the
coordinate system in synchronous control are:
0 : Identical.
1 : Opposite.
8180 Master axis with which an axis is synchronized under synchronous control
225 Axis recomposition error This alarm occurs under either of the fol-
lowing conditions. (It is detected when syn-
chronous control is specified.)
(1) There is an error in axis number pa-
rameter setting.
(2) There is an error in a control command.
226 A move command was issued A move command was issued to an axis to
to a synchronous axis. be synchronized with another axis.
82
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
CAUTION
1 Acceleration/deceleration control, pitch error
compensation, backlash compensation, and stored stroke
limit check are carried out regardless of synchronous
control.
2 A move command should not be issued to a synchronous
slave axis during synchronous control.
83
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 More than one axis can be placed in synchronous state at
the same time. However, an axis cannot be synchronized
with more than one axis simultaneously.
2 Synchronous control and simplified synchronous control
cannot be specified simultaneously.
Restrictions imposed
during synchronous Function During synchronous control
control Acceleration/deceleration control The same type of acceleration/decelera-
tion control is performed for the synchro-
nous axes, but different time constants are
used.
Post–interpolation linear accelera- Not carried out for any axes during synchro-
tion/deceleration nous control.
Feedrate clamping The axes are clamped at the feedrate of the
master axis.
Reference position return A reference position return is possible for
the master axis unless it is in a parking
state. In a parking state, only automatic ref-
erence position return (G28) is possible for
the master axis (*1).
Reference position return check Possible (*2)
PMC axis control Possible for other than synchronous slave
axes.
Polar coordinate interpolation and Possible
cylindrical interpolation
Handle interrupt Performed regardless of synchronous con-
trol
Axial mirror image Each signal originally belonging to a partic-
ular axis is effective for that axis.
Machine lock Each signal originally belonging to a partic-
ular axis is effective for that axis.
External deceleration The signals for the master axis are effective
for the slave axes.
Skip function Ineffective for slave axes.
84
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
WARNING
If a reference position return command is issued for a
synchronous master axis during synchronous control, it is
executed normally for the master axis, but the slave axis
does not return to their reference position (the slave axis
only moves in synchronization with the reference position
return of the master axis) except for an automatic reference
position return (G28) issued when the master axis is in a
parking state, in which case the amount of movement is
calculated so that the slave axis returns to its reference
position provided that a reference position return has been
carried out for the slave axis. If more than one slave axis
belongs to one master axis, a reference position return
command is executed so that the lowest–numbered slave
axis returns to its reference position. A return to the second
(third or fourth) reference position by the G30 command
works in the same way as G28.
CAUTION
If a reference position return check (G27) is specified during
synchronous control, the master and slave axes move to the
specified position. Upon completion of axis movement, a
check is made to see whether the master axis is at its
reference position (no check is made for the salve axes)
unless the master axis is in a parking state, in which case
a check is made to see whether the lowest–numbered slave
axis is at its reference position after completion of
positioning.
Reading the coordinate The following list summarizes how positional information such as
values during custom macro system variables and current coordinates from the PMC
synchronous control window are read during synchronous control.
Positional information During synchronous control
Absolute coordinate Readable
85
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL(For Lathe) II.20.4 Synchronous control
(B–62754EN)
86
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.9
SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL AND
COMPOSITE
CONTROL (T SERIES
(TWO–PATH
CONTROL))
1.9.1 The T series CNC has two independent control paths. For example, it can
Overview be used to control two turrets of a multiple–turret lathe independently.
The axes (such as X1–and Z1–axes) belonging to path 1 are controlled by
commands in path 1, and the axes (such as X2– and Z2–axes) belonging
to path 2 are controlled by commands in path 2.
D Independent control in
each path
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Workpiece 2
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Workpiece 1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
X2 Z2
Machining is performed by a path
1 program. Turret 2
87
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Turret 1
X1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ Workpiece
Turret 1
X1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Tail stock
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Workpiece 1
B1
Z1 (synchronized with the Z1–axis)
88
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Turret 1
Machining is performed by
a path 1 program. X1
Workpiece 1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ Workpiece 2
Z1 Z2
X2
89
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Machining is performed by a
Turret 1 path 1 program.
X1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Workpiece 1
Z1 X2
Turret 2
Z2
1.9.2 An axis in one path can be synchronized with another axis in the same path
Synchronous control or an axis in another path. This is done by issuing the same move
commands for one axis (synchronous master axis) to another axis
(synchronous slave axis). Using parameter SMRx (bit 0 of parameter No.
8162) can cause the slave axis to move in the direction opposite to that
of the master axis. It is possible to place either the master or slave axis
in a parking state. The term parking here means to discontinue giving
move commands to a servo system. No coordinates are updated in the
parking state. Note however that absolute and relative coordinates can be
updated using parameter PKUx (bit 2 of parameter No. 8162).
90
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.9.2.1 Parameter No. 8180 specifies which axis is to be synchronized with which
Setting axis.
(Example)
To synchronize the Z1–axis with the Z2–axis:
Parameter No. 8180z of path 1 = 2
To synchronize the Y2–axis with the X1–axis:
Parameter No. 8180y of path 2 = 1
To synchronize the Y1–axis with the X1–axis:
Parameter No. 8180y of path 1 = 201
Turret 1
X1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Z1 Z2 (synchronized with the Z1–axis)
(Example 2) Synchronizing the X2– and Z2–axes with the X1– and
Z1–axes (balanced cutting)
91
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Z1
Turret 1
X1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
X2
Turret 2
Z2
Turret 1
X1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ Tail stock
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Workpiece 1
B1
Z1 (synchronized with the Z1–axis)
(2) Moving an axis in one path using move commands for an axis in the
other path (The master axis parks and the slave axis moves.)
(3) Updating the coordinates of an axis in one path by the amount of
movement for an axis in the other path (The master axis moves and the
slave axis parks.)
Using method (2) or (3) can control one motor from both paths.
(Example 4) Sharing one motor with the Z1– and Z2–axes
(assuming that the motor is linked to the Z1–axis)
92
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Turret 1
X1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
synchronizing the Z1–axis with the
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Z2–axis). At this point, the Z2–axis is
kept in a parking state. The coordi-
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
nates of both Z1– and Z2–axes are up-
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
dated.
Z1
X2
Turret 2
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
X2
Turret 2
Because the coordinates of both Z1– and Z2–axes are updated, move
commands can be executed immediately, without resetting up the
coordinate system, when the synchronization state is switched.
93
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.9.2.6 The term synchronous control used here only refers to an operation in
Out–of–synchronization which the same move command is issued to two different servo systems
detection at one time. Note that synchronous control does not involve
out–of–synchronization compensation, in which the positional deviation
between two servo motors is constantly checked and one of the servo
motors is subjected to compensation to reduce the deviation. However,
using parameter SERx (bit 1 of parameter No. 8162) can specify detection
of out–of–synchronization.
If out–of–synchronization is detected, synchronous control is
immediately terminated, turning off the servo ready signal.
CAUTION
Out–of–synchronization detection is not applied to
synchronous control within one path.
94
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
95
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Caution
CAUTION
1 The same least command and input increments must apply
to both master and slave axes.
2 If synchronous control that involves automatic coordinate
system setting is started or terminated during automatic
operation, a move command or other commands that
reference the current position of an axis may not be
specified in the current block and one or two (during tool–tip
radius compensation) blocks, except when the M code in
the current block does not involve buffering.
96
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Note
NOTE
1 If more than one slave axis is synchronized with one master
axis, the master axis is set with the workpiece coordinate
system that corresponds to the current position of the first
slave axis that is synchronized with the master axis.
2 The tool offset is taken into account when the coordinate
system is set up. So, the coordinate system is set up
normally even when tool geometry compensation is
applied.
1.9.3 Move commands can be interchanged between an axis in one path and an
Composite Control axis in the other path. In other words, when a machining program is
executed for one path, actual machining can be performed with an axis in
the other path. Coordinate systems can also be switched automatically
between independent control and composite control.
1.9.3.1 Parameter No. 8183 of path 2 specifies the axes between which
Setting commands are to be interchanged.
1.9.3.2 Use M codes for wait, beginning, and terminating composite control in
Programming a machining program in the stated order. It is also possible to begin and
terminate composite control without using M codes.
1.9.3.3 When composite control begins or ends (when an M code is issued), the
Signal operation composite control axis selection signals MIX1 to MIX7 for the target axis
in path 1 (from the PMC to the CNC) are changed from “0” to “1” (to
begin composite control) or from “1” to “0” (to end composite control).
97
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.9.3.4 Suppose that a machine has the X1– and Z1–axes belonging to path 1 and
Examples of applications the X2– and Z2–axes belonging to path 2 and that a workpiece moves
along the Z1– and Z2–axes as directed by move commands. The
following examples interchange commands between the X1– and
X2–axes.
(1) Independent control
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Workpiece 2
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Workpiece 1
Z1 Z2
X2
Turret 2
Machining is performed by a path 1 program.
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Z1 Turret 2 Z2
X2
During composite control, the X2– and Z1–axes are moved by a path 1
program, and the workpiece coordinates of the X–axis in path 1 indicate
the position of turret 2. Similarly, the X1– and Z2–axes are moved by a
path 2 program, and the workpiece coordinates of the X–axis in path 2
indicate the position of turret 1.
98
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.9.3.5 The composite control function does not switch the spindle speed
Spindle control command or the feed per rotation command based on feedback pulses
from the position coder. Therefore, the spindle speed command and
feedback pulses should be switched using the following signals. (See
Section 9.4.2 for details.)
S Spindle command selection signal SLSPA <G063#2> and SPSPB
<G063#3>
S Spindle feedback selection signal SLPCA <G064#2> and SLPCB
<G064#3>
1.9.3.6 A preset offset or tool–tip radius compensation is not changed when the
Tool offset during control mode is switched between independent control and composite
composite control control. It is necessary to reset the offset using a T code after the control
mode is switched.
N190 ..... ;
N200 M55 ; (This M code starts composite control.)
N210 ..... ;
N220 ..... ;
N230 ..... ;
In this example, not only block N200 but also block N210 (and N220
during tool–tip radius compensation) cannot issue a move command to
the X–axis. However, if the M55 code does not involve buffering, it can
be issued in block N210 to move the X–axis or update its coordinates.
For other than the X–axis, block N210 can issue move commands.
99
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.9.4.1 Parameter No. 8186 specifies between which axes move commands are
Setting to be superimposed.
1.9.4.2 Use M codes for wait, beginning, and terminating superimposed control
Programming in a machining program in the stated order. It is also possible to begin and
terminate superimposed control without using M codes.
100
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.9.4.4 Suppose that a workpiece on the spindle (Z1–axis) that moves along the
Examples of applications axis is to be cut with a tool in path 1 and a tool in path 2 simultaneously.
This example superimposes the amount of movement of the Z1–axis on
that of the Z2–axis.
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Workpiece 1
Z1 X2
Turret 2
Z2
1.9.4.5 Because the amount of movement of the master axis is added to that of
Feedrate the slave axis, the resulting speed of the slave axis may become much
more larger than a normal speed (such as rapid traverse speed specified
in a parameter). To solve this problem, it is necessary to set feedrates that
are used only during superimposed control. The feedrates and time
constants that are used only during superimposed control include:
S Rapid traverse rate: Parameter No. 8190
S Rapid traverse override F0 rate: parameter No. 8191
S Rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration time constant:
Parameter No. 8192
S Maximum cutting feedrate: Parameter No. 8193
(S Manual rapid traverse rate:
Parameter No. 8190 or 1424 whichever is smaller)
101
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
These special parameters are used for both master and slave axes during
superimposed control. Appropriate values should be specified with the
resulting feedrate taken into account. When superimposed control begins
or ends during automatic operation, it is impossible to switch the
maximum cutting feedrate in the current block and the next block. If an
M code that does not involve buffering is used to direct superimposed
control to begin or end, the maximum cutting feedrate is switched in a
block next to the current block. The rates other than the maximum cutting
feedrate are switched immediately when superimposed control begins or
ends.
1.9.5
Signal
Synchronous control
axis selection signals
SYNC1 to SYNC7
<G138#0 to G138#6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals perform synchronous control.
[Operation] When one of these signals becomes “1”, the control unit:
S Begins synchronous control in such a way that the corresponding axis
becomes a slave axis.
The axis with which the slave axis is synchronized is determined by
parameter No. 8180.
102
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Superimposed control
axis selection signals
OVLS1 to OVLS7
<G190#0 to G190#6>
Synchronous/composite/
superimposed control
under way signals
SYN1O to SYN7O
<F118#0 to F118#6>
103
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
CAUTION
Whether each axis is under synchronous, composite, or
superimposed control does not always match whether the
corresponding selection signal (synchronous control axis
selection, composite control axis selection, or
superimposed control axis selection signal) has been
issued or not. For example, if these signals are set to “1”
during an alarm, they are ignored. If a servo alarm occurs
during these types of control, they are terminated
automatically. Before attempting to perform these types of
control, always check the state of these signals.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G122 PK7 PK6 PK5 PK4 PK3 PK2 PK1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G128 MIX7 MIX6 MIX5 MIX4 MIX3 MIX2 MIX1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G138 SYNC7 SYNC6 SYNC5 SYNC4 SYNC3 SYNC2 SYNC1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G190 OVLS7 OVLS6 OVLS5 OVLS4 OVLS3 OVLS2 OVLS1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F118 SYN7O SYN6O SYN5O SYN4O SYN3O SYN2O SYN1O
1.9.6
Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8160 NRS SPE ZSI XSI MXC
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid for setting tool compensation values
for the X– or Z axis and setting shift of the workpiece
coordinate system for the Z–axis.
2 This parameter cannot be used when mixed control is
applied to paths for which different minimum command
increments (metric or inch) are specified.
104
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
XSI When MXC = 1, the machine coordinates along the X–axis for the other
path subject to mixed control are fetched:
0 : With the sign as is
1 : With the sign inverted
ZSI When MXC = 1, machine coordinates along the Z–axis for the other path
subject to mixed control are fetched:
0 : With the sign as is
1 : With the sign inverted
SPE The synchronization deviation is:
0 : The difference between the positioning deviation of the master axis
and that of the slave axis.
1 : The difference between the positioning deviation of the master axis
and that of the slave axis plus the acceleration/deceleration delay.
NOTE
When the master and slave axes have different
acceleration/deceleration time constants, set 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8161 CZM NMR
NOTE
Mixed control is not stopped only when bit 0 (FUP) of
parameter No. 1819 is set to 1. If follow–up is disabled with
the follow–up signal (*FLWU <G007 bit 5> =1), mixed
control is stopped.
CZM When two Cs contour axes are subject to mixed control, the function for
mixing zero point return commands for Cs contour axes is:
0 : Not used
1 : Used
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8162 MUMx MCDx MPSx MPMx OMRx PKUx SERx SMRx
105
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
When both master and slave axes move in synchronization,
the positioning deviations of the corresponding axes are
compared with each other. If the difference is greater than
or equal to the value specified in parameter No. 8181, an
alarm occurs. When either axis is in the parking or
machine–locked state, however, the synchronization
deviation is not detected.
WARNING
Set the parameter to 1 for any axes for which polar
coordinate interpolation will be specified. Otherwise,
coordinates may shift when single block stop or feed hold
is specified in polar coordinate interpolation mode.
NOTE
When the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set
at the start of composite control, it is calculated from the
following: Current machine coordinates and the workpiece
coordinates at the reference point of each axis (parameter
No. 8184).
106
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
NOTE
When the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set
at the end of composite control, it is calculated from the
following: Current machine coordinates and the workpiece
coordinates at the reference point of each axis under
composite control (parameter No. 1250)
MCDx The axes to be replaced with each other under composite control have the
coordinate systems placed:
0 : In the same direction. Simple composite control is applied. (The axes
of paths 1 and 2 move in the same direction.)
1 : In opposite directions. Mirror–image composite control is applied.
(The axes of paths 1 and 2 move in opposite directions.)
This parameter determines the direction in which an axis moves. The
parameter is also used to automatically set the coordinate system when
composite control is started or terminated.
X1 X2
MCDz MCDz
0 0
Z1 Z2
X1
MCDz MCDz
0 1
Z1 Z2
X2
X1 X2
MCDz MCDz
1 0
Z1 Z2
X1
MCDz MCDz
1 1
Z1 Z2
X2
107
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
Upon the execution of a move command along an axis for
which MUMx is set to 1 during mixed control, alarm P/S 226
is issued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8163 SCDx SCMx SPSx SPMx MDXx
NOTE
Set the parameters SPMx, SPSx, SCMx, and SCDx for the
master axis. These settings are referenced during
automatic workpiece coordinate setting for the master axis
at the start of synchronous control.
NOTE
When a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at
the start of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate
system is calculated from the current machine coordinates
and the workpiece coordinates of each axis at the reference
position set in parameter No. 8185.
NOTE
When a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at
the end of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate
system is calculated from the current machine coordinates
and the workpiece coordinates for each axis at the
reference position set in parameter No. 1250.
108
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
8180 Master axis with which an axis is synchronized under synchronous control
109
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
between the positioning deviation of the slave axis and that of the master
axis. Set this parameter to the slave axis.
(Positioning deviation of the master axis) (Positioning deviation of the slave axis)
NOTE
Specify this parameter only for path 2.
110
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
X1m ∆Z2m
ÄÄ
ÄÄ Z1m
Refernce point X1
of path 1 ∆X2m
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ
workpiece coordinate
system of path 2
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ
Zero point of the
workpiece coordinate
system of path 1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ Z1
ÀÀÀÀÀ
Z2
∆X1m
X2
∆Z1m
Z2m Ä
Refernce point
of path 2
X2m
111
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
(∆X1m, ∆Z1m) are the coordinates of the reference point of path 2 on the
workpiece coordinate system of path 1. (∆X2m, ∆Z2m) are the coordinates of
the reference point of path 1 on the workpiece coordinate system of path 2.
∆X1m is specified for the X–axis of path 1 and ∆X2m for the X–axis of path 2.
112
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
This parameter specifies the axis number of the master axis under
superimposed control.
When zero is specified , the axis does not become a slave axis under
superimposed control and the move pulse of another axis is not super
imposed.
Set a rapid traverse rate for each of the axes when the rapid traverse
override of the axes (master and slave axes) under superimposed control is
100%.
This parameter specifies the F0 velocity of rapid traverse override for each
of the axes (master and slave axes) under superimposed control.
113
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
This parameter specifies the maximum cutting feedrate for an axis under
superimposed control.
1.9.7.1
P/S alarms
Number Message Description
114
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.9.7.2
Servo alarms
Number Message Description
115
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.9.8
Definition of Warning,
Caution, and Note
1.9.8.1
Items common to
synchronous,
composite, and
superimposed control
WARNING
1 When synchronous, composite, or superimposed control
begins or ends, the target axes must be at a stop.
2 All axes subjected to synchronous, composite, or
superimposed control must have the same least command,
detection increment, and diameter/radius specification.
Otherwise, the amount of movement will differ from one axis
to another.
3 When an axis is under synchronous, composite, or
superimposed control, do not change the parameters
related to that axis.
4 Before starting synchronous, composite, superimposed
control, make sure that for the target axis, a reference
position return after power–on has been made or a
reference position has been set up according to the
absolute pulse coder.
5 Before starting synchronous, composite, or superimposed
control after an emergency stop, servo–off, or servo alarm
is released, be sure to make a return to the reference
position and set up the necessary coordinate system.
CAUTION
Acceleration/deceleration control, pitch error
compensation, backlash compensation, and stored stroke
limit check are carried out regardless of synchronous or
composite control. During superimposed control, these
operations except acceleration/deceleration are performed
on the position where superimposed pulses have been
added.
116
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
NOTE
1 More than one axis can be subjected to synchronous,
composite, or superimposed control. On the other hand, an
axis cannot be synchronized with more than one axis
simultaneously. Moreover, an axis under composite control
cannot be synchronized with another axis or cannot doubly
be subjected to composite control.
2 Synchronous, composite, or superimposed control cannot
be performed between a linear axis and a rotation axis.
3 Synchronous, composite, or superimposed control cannot
be specified simultaneously with simplified synchronous
control. Synchronous control within one path provides the
same functions as simplified synchronous control.
1.9.8.2
Items related only to
synchronous control WARNING
1 The same acceleration/deceleration time constants and
servo parameters should be used for axes subjected to
synchronous control as much as possible. If there is a large
difference in a set value between the axes, a deviation will
occur in the actual movement of the machine.
2 The workpiece coordinate system of a synchronous slave
axis is not affected by the synchronous master axis
operations that affect workpiece coordinate systems but do
not cause the machine to move, such as workpiece
coordinate system set/shift and geometry offset
commands.
3 If a wear offset command or tool–tip radius compensation
is performed for the synchronous master axis, the travel
path of the slave axis is shifted by the offset, but the shift is
not set as an offset (no offset vector is created).
CAUTION
A move command should not be issued to a synchronous
slave axis during synchronous control.
117
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.9.8.3
Restrictions imposed
during synchronous,
composite, and
superimposed control
Acceleration/deceleration The acceleration/decelera- The acceleration/decelera- The move pulses that are ef-
control tion control for the master tion control originally speci- fective after acceleration/de-
axis is performed also for fied for one path is used celeration for the superim-
the synchronous slave axes, also for the other path, but posed control master axis
but different time constants different time constants are are added to those for the
are used. used (*3). slave axes.
Feedrate clamping The axes are clamped at the The axes in both paths are The axes are clamped to the
feedrate of the master axis. clamped at the feedrate orig- feedrate specified for super-
inally specified for one path. imposed control.
Reference position return A reference position return is A reference position return is Impossible for superim-
possible for the master axis possible for axes not under posed control slave axes.
unless it is in a parking composite control. For axes
state. If the master axis is in under composite control,
a parking state, only auto- only an automatic reference
matic reference position re- position return (G28) is pos-
turn (G28) is possible for the sible.
master axis. (⇒ Section
1.9.2.5)
PMC axis control Possible for other than syn- Possible Possible
chronous slave axes.
Handle interrupt Performed regardless of Possible for axes having Performed regardless of su-
synchronous control. nothing to do with composite perimposed control (*5).
control.
Mirror image Each signal originally be- Signals originally specified Signals for the master axis
longing to a particular axis is for one path are effective for are effective as superim-
effective for that axis (*1). the other path (*4). posed control pulses (*5).
Machine lock Each signal originally be- Signals originally specified Signals for the master axis
longing to a particular axis is for one path are effective for are effective as superim-
effective for that axis (*1). the other path (*4). posed control pulses (*5).
118
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Interlock The signals for the synchro- Signals originally specified Signals for the master axis
nous master axis are effec- for one path are effective for are effective as superim-
tive for the synchronous the other path (*4). posed control pulses (*5).
slave axes (*2).
Override The signals for the synchro- Signals originally specified Signals for the master axis
nous master axis are effec- for one path are effective for are effective as superim-
tive for the synchronous the other path (*4). posed control pulses (*5)
slave axes (*2).
External deceleration The signals for the synchro- Signals originally specified Signals for the master axis
nous master axis are effec- for one path are effective for are effective as superim-
tive for the synchronous the other path (*4). posed control pulses (*5)
slave axes (*2).
Skip function Impossible for slave axes. Possible for axes having Possible.
nothing to do with composite
control.
Automatic tool compensation Impossible for slave axes. Possible for axes having Impossible for superim-
nothing to do with composite posed control slave axes.
control.
Direct tool compensation Impossible for slave axes. Possible (*7) Impossible for superim-
measurement input B posed control slave axes.
Follow–up Impossible during synchro- Impossible during composite Impossible during superim-
nous control. control. posed control.
Program restart Impossible for a program in- Impossible for a program in- Impossible for a program in-
volving synchronous control. volving composite control. volving superimposed con-
trol.
Cs contour control Synchronous control is pos- Composite control is pos- Superimposed control is
sible (*6). sible (*6). possible (*6).
Spindle positioning Synchronous control is im- Composite control is impos- Superimposed control is im-
possible. sible. possible.
(*1) Processed after synchronization pulses are sent to the slave axes.
(*2) After it is processed on the master side, synchronization pulses are
sent.
(*3) Composite control pulses and acceleration/deceleration type are
sent. The time constant for the slave axis is used.
(*4) Composite control pulses are sent after processed on the master side.
(*5) Performed normally for move commands originally intended to the
master or slave axes, but not performed on the slave side for
superimposed control pulses received from the master axis.
(*6) Restricted to a combination of Cs axes. Necessary signal operations
and orientation should be performed for each axis separately. Also
specify parameter CZM (bit 1 of parameter No. 8161).
(*7) Specify parameters MXC, XSI, and ZSI (bits 0, 1, and 2 of parameter
No. 8160).
119
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
End of each block Readable only for the mas- Readable (*1) Readable (*2)
ter axis
Skip signal position Readable only for the mas- Unreadable Readable (*2)
ter axis
120
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.9.8.6
Status output signals for
an axis under
synchronous,
composite, or
superimposed control
Axis moving signal MVn S The master axis moving S The moving signal for an S The master axis moving
F0102/F1102 signal becomes ”1” when axis to which a move com- signal works as usual.
(See Section 1.2.5.) the master or slave axis is mand is originally issued S The slave axis moving sig-
moving. becomes ”1”. The moving nal reflects the state of
S The slave axis moving sig- signal for the axis that is ac- movement due to a com-
nal is always ”0” (*1). tually moving does not be- mand for the slave axis
come ”1” (*1). rather than superimposed
control pulses.
Axis movement direction sig- S The master axis movement S The axis movement direc- S The master axis movement
nal MVDn F0106/F1106 direction signal indicates tion signal indicates the ac- direction signal indicates
(See Section 1.2.5.) the direction in which the tual movement direction the direction in which the
master axis is moving. (that is, direction after com- master axis is moving.
S The slave axis movement posite control mirror image S The slave axis movement
direction signal indicates processing). direction signal indicates
the direction of movement the direction of movement
after synchronous control after superimposed control
mirror image processing. pulses are added.
Axis in position signal INPn S The master axis in position S The in position signal for an S The master axis in position
F0104/F1104 signal becomes “1” when axis in a path for which a signal works as usual.
(See Section 7.2.6.1.) both master and slave axes move command is issued S The slave axis in position
are in position. reflects the state of the axis signal is always “1”.
S The slave axis in position that is driven by that move
signal is always “1”. command.
(*1) A positional deviation check does not depend on the state of this
signal. If move command pulses have been output to a motor (either
master or slave), parameter No. 1828 is used as a limit. Otherwise,
parameter No. 1829 is used.
121
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.9.9
Examples of
Applications
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ
Spindle S1 Spindle S2
X2
Turret 2
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Spindle S1 Spindle S2
Turret 2
122
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
123
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
In this example, assume that M61 clamps the workpiece and sets signal
G1138#1 SYNC2 to “1” and that M62 resets signal G1138#1 SYNC2 to
“0” and unclamps the workpiece.
NOTE
It is necessary to make the speed of spindle S1 equal that
of spindle S2. For example, issue spindle commands of
path 1 to both S1 and S2.
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ
Spindle S1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ Spindle S2
X2
Turret 2
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Spindle S1
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ Spindle S2
Turret 2
Interpolation for the X1– and Z2–axes can be carried out by either of the
following two methods.
124
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1. The path 2 program directs the X2– and Z2–axes, synchronizes the
X1–axis with the X2–axis, and causes the X2–axis to park. The
path 1 program issues no move command.
2. Composite control is performed in which move commands are
switched between the X1–axis in one path and the X2–axis in the
other path. Path 1 does not issue move commands.
The following sections describe a case in which synchronous control is
used and a case in which composite control is used, separately.
125
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
In this example, assume that M55 begins control of turret 1 in path 2 and
that M56 terminates control of turret 1 in path 2.
NOTE
When the X–axis is under synchronous control, path 1
cannot issue a move command to the X1–axis, but can
move the Z1–axis.
126
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Reference position
150.0mm
of turret 1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ
Z2
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ
X2
127
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 It is not always necessary to cause a coordinate system to
be set up automatically when composite control begins or
ends. If automatic coordinate system setting is not
specified, an appropriate coordinate system is set by
program.
2 When the X–axis is under composite control, the X2–axis
can be moved in path 1 using move commands for the
X–axis.
3 The above parameter setting specifies that turret 1 is
located on the negative side of the X–coordinate in the
workpiece coordinate system of path 2. So, for example, to
move turret 1 toward the center of the workpiece, specify
U+10, and to move it away from the center, specify U–10
(note the sign is a minus). If this is inconvenient, set the
following parameters as follows:
Bit 6 of parameter No. 8162 (MCDx) = 0
Parameter No. 8184x = 150000
This parameter setting specifies that turret 1 be located
virtually on the positive side of the X–coordinate.
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Z2
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Virtual position of turret 1 X2
MCDx (No.8162#6) =0
No. 8184x =150000
128
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.9.9.3
Independent control and
interpolation between
the X1– and Z2–axes and
between the X2– and (1) Machine configuration
Z1–axes (a) Independent control
Z2
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ Spindle S2
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Spindle S1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Z1
129
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
(b) Interpolation between the X1– and Z2–axes and between the X2– and
Z1–axes
Z2
Workpiece 2 and turret 1 are
controlled by a path 2 program.
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ Spindle S2
X1
Turret 1
Turret 2
X2
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
Spindle S1
ÀÀÀÀÀ Workpiece 1 and turret 2 are
controlled by a path 1 program.
Z1
130
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Z2
ÀÀÀÀÀ
180.0mm Reference position
ÀÀÀÀÀ
for turret 1
Reference position
for turret 2 X2
X1 120.0mm
200.0mm
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ Z1
131
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
In this example, assume that M55 begins composite control (sets signal
G0128#0 MIX1 to “1”) and that M56 terminates composite control (resets
signal G0128#0 MIX1 to “0”).
NOTE
It is not always necessary to cause a coordinate system to
be set up automatically when composite control begins or
ends. If automatic coordinate system setting is not
specified, an appropriate coordinate system is set by
program.
132
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.9.9.4
Independent control and (1) Machine configuration
superimposed control
for the Z1– and Z2–axes (a) Independent control
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ
Spindle S1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ Spindle S2
X2
Turret 2
Z2
A workpiece mounted on
spindle S1 is machined using Turret 1
paths 1 (X1– and Z1–axis) and X1
2 (X2– and Z2–axes). Z1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀ
Spindle S1
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀ Spindle S2
X2
Turret 2
Z2
133
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
134
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
WARNING
When using constant surface speed control, be careful
about which path has the spindle command that is effective
for spindle S1.
NOTE
The speed of spindle S1 (feedback pulses from the position
coder) is specified for both paths 1 and 2.
N0200 ········
N0240 ········
The blocks with G10 to G11 must be run when the Z2– or
Y1–axis is not under synchronous or composite control.
135
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
(2) The G0128, G0138, G0190, G1128, G1138, or G1190 signal has
not risen.
⇒ Synchronous, composite, or superimposed control begins on
the positive–going edge of the G0128, G0138, G0190, G1128,
G1138, or G1190 signal. If synchronous, composite, or
superimposed control ends because of a reset or alarm, merely
releasing the reset or alarm cannot restart synchronous,
composite, or superimposed control. It is also necessary to raise
the signal.
136
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
(2) The axis number specified in a parameter is greater than the number
of controllable axes.
⇒ The axis number of a synchronous master axis, an axis under
composite control, or the master axis under superimposed
control in one path must not be greater than the number of
controllable axes in the other path (or in the same path if
synchronous control is performed within one path).
NOTE
Before the P/S225 alarm that occurs when synchronous,
composite, or superimposed control is terminated can be
reset, it is necessary to place the machine in an emergency
stop state.
137
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
138
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
139
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.10
B–AXIS CONTROL
(T SERIES)
General This function sets an axis (B–axis) independent of the basic controlled
axes X1, Z1, X2, and Z2 and allows drilling, boring, or other machining
along the B–axis, in parallel with the operations for the basic controlled
axes. The X2 and Z2 axes can be used in two–path control mode
X1
First
tool post
Z1
Third
Workpiece tool post
B
Z2
Second
tool post
X2
Format
Registering operation
programs G101–G100 : Starts registering the first program.
G102–G100 : Starts registering the second program.
G103–G100 : Starts registering the third program.
G100 : Ends registering of the programs.
Three operations (programs) on the B–axis can be registered. (In two–
path control mode, three programs can be registered for each tool post.)
The B–axis operation program must be specified in the blocks between
G101, G102, or G103 and G100, allowing it to be discriminated from the
normal NC program.
The registered operation is started upon executing the corresponding M
code, described below.
O1234 ;
…
Normal NC program
G101 ; Starts registering of a B–axis
operation program.
…
Normal NC program
M30 ;
Note) In the block of G101, G102, G103, or G100, specify no other codes.
140
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Parameter 8251:
M code used to start operation of the first program
Parameter 8252:
M code used to start operation of the second program
Parameter 8253:
M code used to start operation of the third program
O1234 ;
…
Starts executing the registered B–axis operation. In
M** ; subsequent blocks, the normal NC program and the
B–axis operation program are executed in parallel.
…
(** is specified in parameters 8251 to 8253.)
M30 ;
Example
01234 ;
G50 X100. Z200. ;
G101 ; Starts registering of an
G00 B10. ; operation program.
M03 ;
G04 P2500 ; Blocks of the B–axis
G81 B20. R15. F500 ; operation program
G28 ;
G100 ; Ends registering of the
G00 X80. Z50. ; operation program.
G01 X45. F1000 ;
…
G00 X10. ;
M** ; Command used to start the
G01 Z30. F300 ; programmed operation
…
M30 ;
D Single–motion operation
G110 [operation command];
A single–motion operation for the B–axis can be specified and
executed as shown above. Such an operation need not be regis-
tered as a special (first to third) program. Nor does it need to be
by a special command, as described above.
141
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Explanations
Specifying two–path One of the following three two–path control modes can be selected:
control mode 1 B–axis control is executed for either tool post 1 or 2.
2 B–axis control is executed separately for tool posts 1 and 2.
3 Identical B–axis control is executed for tool posts 1 and 2.
The mode is selected according to the value specified for parameter 8250
for each tool post.
Codes that can be used The following 13 G codes, and the M, S, and T codes of the miscellaneous
in a B–axis operation functions, can be used in a B–axis operation program:
program Code Description
G00 Positioning (rapid traverse)
G04 Dwell
142
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
NOTE
In two–path control mode, the system uses the actual
spindle speed, calculated from the feedback signal output
by the position coder connected to the tool post to which the
controlled axis belongs.
143
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 Range of commands of M, S, and T codes
2 An M, S, or T code must not be specified in a block
containing another move command. The M, S, and T codes
must not be specified in an identical block.
3 Usually, normal NC operation and B–axis operation are
independent of each other. Synchronization between
operations can be established by coordinating the
miscellaneous functions of the normal NC program and
B–axis operation program.
Upon receiving M50 of both the normal NC program and the B–axis
program in the PMC ladder, the completion signals (FIN and EFINg) are
turned ”1”. G00 X666 of the normal NC program and G81 B444 R111
F222 of the B–axis program are executed simultaneously.
Custom macro
Custom macro variables (local variables, common variables, system
variables #****) can be used in an operation program between G101,
G102, or G103 and G100.
1. The value of the macro variable is calculated not from the data existing
upon execution of the B–axis operation, but from the data existing at
registration of the operation program.
2. An instruction that causes a branch to a location beyond the range of
G101, G102, or G103 to G100 is processed without being checked.
3. In the two–path control mode, tool posts 1 and 2 use different macro
variables.
Operation program When a new operation program is registered, the previous operation
program is automatically deleted.
If an error is detected in an operation program to be registered, the
program is initialized but is not registered.
Modal In the same way as a normal NC program, the B–axis operation program
can use the following as modal data: modal G codes, F codes, and P, Q,
and F codes in the canned cycle. These codes do not affect the modal
information of the normal NC program. When a B–axis operation
program is started (by G101, G102, or G103), the initial modal data is set
for the program. It is not affected by the previous modal information.
144
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Example)
:
G01 X10. F1000 ;
G101 (G102, G103) ;
B10. ;
G01 B–10. F500 ;
G100 ;
X–10. ;
:
D Operation start The MST bit (bit 7 of parameter 8240) specifies the method used to start
command the B–axis operation as described below:
If the MST bit is set to 1, the B–axis operation is started when the M code
to start the operation is executed.
If the MST bit is set to 0, the B–axis operation is started when the M code
used to start the operation is executed and the PMC outputs the
completion signal (FIN).
Up to five M codes for starting the programs can be stored. The programs
corresponding to these M codes are executed in succession. (In two–path
control mode, up to five codes can be stored for each tool post.)
Example)
When the first, second, and third programs are started by M40, M41,
and M42, respectively
O1234. ;
:
:
M40 ; M code for starting the first program
M41 ; M code for starting the second program
M42 ; M code for starting the third program
M40 ; M code for starting the first program
M41 ; M code for starting the second program
:
:
M30 ;
145
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Specifying absolute or The amount of travel along the B–axis can be specified in either absolute
incremental mode or incremental mode. In absolute mode, the end point of travel along the
B–axis is programmed. In incremental mode, the amount of travel along
the B–axis is programmed directly.
The ABS bit (bit 6 of parameter 8240) is used to set absolute or
incremental mode. When the ABS bit is set to 1, absolute mode is
selected. When the ABS bit is set to 0, incremental mode is selected. The
mode is specified with this parameter when the program is registered.
Specifying a tool offset The T**; command shifts the end point of the specified B–axis travel, in
either the positive or negative direction, by the amount specified with the
B–axis offset screen. If this function is used to set the difference between
the programmed tool position and actual tool position in machining, the
program need not be modified to correct the tool position.
The value specified with parameter 8257 is assigned to the auxiliary
function to cancel the offset. The subsequent nine numbers are assigned
to the tool offset functions. These auxiliary function numbers are
displayed on the B–axis offset screen. For details, see Operator’s Manual.
Single–motion operation If a G110 block is specified, a single–motion operation along the B–axis
can be specified and executed. In single–motion operation mode, a single
block results in a single operation. The single–motion operation is
executed immediately provided if it is specified before the B–axis
operation is started. If the operation is specified while a registered
program is being executed, the operation is executed once that program
has terminated.
After the specified single–motion operation has been executed, the next
block is executed.
:
G110 G01 B100. F200 ; Block for single–motion
operation along B–axis
G00 X100. Z20. ;
:
Program memory An operation program is registered in program memory as a series of
different blocks of the move, dwell, auxiliary, and other functions.
Program memory can hold a desired number of blocks, up to a maximum
of 65535 blocks for each program. If the program memory contains no
free space when an attempt is made to register a B–axis program, P/S
alarm 5033 is output. Six blocks require 80 characters of program
memory. A canned cycle (G81 to G86) is also registered as a series of
blocks, such as travel and dwell.
The entire program memory is backed up by battery. The programs
registered in program memory are thus retained even after the system
power is turned off. After turning the system power on, the operation can
be started simply by specifying the M code for starting the program.
146
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Example)
:
G101 ;
G00 B10. ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One block
G04 P1500 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One block
G81 B20. R50. F600 ; . . . . . . . . Three blocks
G28 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One block
M15 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One block
G100 ;
: (Total 7 blocks)
Reset When the NC is reset by pressing the MDI reset key or by the issue of an
external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, or emergency stop, B–axis
control is also reset. The reset signal (ECLRg) can reset only B–axis
control.
PMC–controlled axis A B–axis operation can be executed only when the B–axis can be
controlled by the PMC. For details, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine tool builder.
Limitations
Single–motion operation
1. Only a single–motion operation can be specified with G110.
G110 G00 B100. ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OK
G110 G28 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OK
G110 G81 B100. R150.0 F100 ; . . . P/S alarm No.5034
2. A canned cycle (G81 to G86), and other operations containing
multiple motions, cannot be specified with G110.
If an inhibited operation is specified, P/S alarm No.5034 is output.
3. modal information specified with G110 does not affect the subsequent
blocks. In the G110 block, the initial modal value specified at the start
of the operation becomes valid, irrespective of the modal information
specified the previous blocks.
Example)
When the MDG bit (bit 1 of parameter 8241) is set to 1 and the
MDF bit (bit 2 of parameter 8241) is set to 1
G98 G00 X100. F1000 ; . . . . . . . . . . (1)
G110 B200. F2 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2)
X200. ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3)
G01 X200. ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4)
Block (2) instigates cutting feed (G01) at 2.0 mm/rev (G99).
Block (3) instigates rapid traverse (G00).
Block (4) instigates cutting feed (G01) at 1000 mm/min (G98).
4. During tool–tip radius compensation, two or more G110 blocks cannot
be specified in succession. If such blocks are specified in succession,
P/S alarm No. 5041 is output. To specify two or more G110 blocks
in succession for a B–axis operation, register the blocks as a program
with G101, G102, or G103 and G100.
147
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Examples
Absolute or incremental
mode
Absolute or incremental mode
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
(1) (200)
(2) (350)
(450)
⋅ Dwell
(200)
(3) (350)
(550)
⋅ Dwell
(200)
(00)
Rapid traverse, Cutting feed, Dwell (***) Absolute value
Incremental mode Absolute mode
G101 (G102, G103) ; G101 (G102, G103) ;
(1) G01 B200. F100 ; (1) G01 B200. F100 ;
(2) G82 B100. R150. P5000 F200 ; (2) G82 B450. R350. P5000 F200 ;
(3) B200. R150. P5000 ; (3) B550. R350. P5000 ;
(4) G00 B–100. ; (4) G00 B100. ;
G100 ; G100 ;
: :
M** ; M** ;
: :
M30 ; M30 ;
<Program 2>
G101 ;
G00 B300. ; (Absolute mode)
:
G100 ;
:
M30 ;
148
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Tool offset
Example)
When parameter 8257 is set to 50
Auxiliary function used to cancel the offset: T50
Auxiliary functions used to adjust a tool offset: T51 to T59
10 0 10 20 30 40 50
(350)
(Absolute mode)
(1) (10)
(20)
(2)
(3) (30)
(4) (25)
(5) (5)
(6) (0)
(Incremental mode)
(1) (0)
(20)
(2)
(3) (0)
(4) (35)
(5) (35) ⋅
(6) (0)
Program
G101 (G102, G103) ;
(1) G01 B10. F100 ;
(2) T51 ;
(3) G00 B20. ;
(4) T52 ;
(5) B0. ;
(6) T50 ;
G100 ;
:
M**;
: Where the offset of T51 is 10.0 and the offset
of T52 is 5.0
149
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8240 MST ABS SOV TEM REF
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8241 MDF MDG FXC
150
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8242 COF
151
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
8251 M code (G101) for specifying the start of first program operation
8252 M code (G102) for specifying the start of second program operation
8253 M code (G103) for specifying the start of third program operation
This parameter sets the clearance used for peck drilling cycle G83.
152
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
G83
q q : Depth of cut
d d : Clearance
q
d
Rapid traverse
q Cutting feed
d
Point B
153
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Caution
CAUTION
B–axis control uses the PMC axis control interface. This
means that, before a B–axis command can be executed,
the axis used as the B–axis must be placed under PMC axis
control. To specify operations such as single block and feed
hold, use PMC axis control signals.
Referring to Section 15.1, set the PMC axis control
parameters and signals.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.2.7 Displaying the B–axis Operation State
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN)
III.11.4.14 Setting and Displaying B–axis Tool Com-
pensation
154
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.11
ANGULAR AXIS
CONTROL /
ARBITRARY
ANGULAR AXIS
CONTROL
General When the angular axis makes an angle other than 90° with the
perpendicular axis, the angular axis control function controls the distance
traveled along each axis according to the inclination angle. For the
ordinary angular axis control function, the X–axis is always used as the
angular axis and the Z–axis is always used as the perpendicular axis. For
angular axis control B, however, arbitrary axes can be specified as the
angular and perpendicular axes, by specifying parameters accordingly.
A program, when created, assumes that the angular axis and perpendicular
axis intersect at right angles. However, the actual distance traveled is
controlled according to an inclination angle.
+Z (perpendicular axis)
θ : Inclination angle
Explanations When the angular axis is the X–axis and the perpendicular axis is the
Z–axis, the amount of travel along each axis is controlled according to the
formulas shown below.
The distance to be traveled along the X–axis is determined by the
following formula :
Xp
Xa
cos
The distance traveled along the Z–axis is corrected by the inclination of
the X–axis, and is determined by the following formula:
Za Zp– 1 Xp tan
2
The speed component along the X–axis of feed rate is determined by the
following formula:
Fp
Fa
cos
Xa, Za, Fa:Actual distance and speed
Xp, Zp, Fp:Programmed distance and speed
155
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Method of use The angular and perpendicular axes to which angular axis control is to be
applied must be specified beforehand, using parameters (No. 8211 and
8212).
Parameter AAC (No. 8200#0) enables or disables the inclined axis
control function. If the function is enabled, the distance traveled along
each axis is controlled according to an inclination angle (No. 8210).
Parameter AZR (No. 8200#2) enables angular axis manual reference
point return only with a distance along the angular axis.
If perpendicular/angular axis control disable signal NOZAGC has been
set to 1, the angular axis control function is enabled only for the angular
axis. In such a case, the move command for the angular axis is converted
to angular coordinates. The perpendicular axis is not affected by the move
command for the angular axis.
Absolute and relative An absolute and a relative position are indicated in the programmed
position display Cartesian coordinate system. Machine position display
Machine position display A machine position indication is provided in the machine coordinate
system where an actual movement is taking place according to an
inclination angle. However, when inch/metric conversion is performed,
a position is indicated which incorporates inch/metric conversion applied
to the results of inclination angle operation.
Signal
Perpendicular/angular
axis control disable
signal NOZAGC
<G063#5> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Disables angular axis control for the perpendicular axis.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit behaves as follows:
· Converts an angular axis move command to angular coordinates. The
perpendicular axis is, however, not affected by an angular axis move
command.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G063 NOZAGC
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8200 AZR AAC
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
156
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Warning
WARNING
1 After inclined axis control parameter setting, be sure to
perform manual reference point return operation.
2 If bit 2 (AZK) of parameter No. 8200 has been set to 0, such
that manual reference position return along the angular axis
also causes movement along the perpendicular axis, once
manual reference position return has been performed along
the angular axis, also perform manual reference position
return along the perpendicular axis.
3 Once the tool has been moved along the angular axis with
perpendicular/angular axis control disable signal NOZAGC
set to 1, manual reference position return must be
performed.
4 Before attempting to manually move the tool along both the
angular and perpendicular axes simultaneously, set
perpendicular/angular axis control disable signal NOZAGC
to 1.
157
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
1 If an inclination angle close to 0° or ±90° is set, an error can
occur. A range from ±20° to ±60° should be used.
2 Before a perpendicular axis reference point return check
(G37) can be made, angular axis reference point return
operation must be completed.
3 For arbitrary angular axis control, if the same axis number
has been specified in both parameters No. 8211 and 8212,
or if a value outside the valid data range has been specified
for either parameter, the angular and perpendicular axes
will be as follows:
Angular axis: First axis
Perpendicular axis: Second axis
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.21.5 Augular axis control/axis control
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
158
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1.12
CHOPPING
FUNCTION
(M SERIES)
General When contour grinding is performed, the chopping function can be used
to grind the side face of a workpiece. By means of this function, while
the grinding axis (the axis with the grinding wheel) is being moved
vertically, a contour program can be executed to instigate movement
along other axes.
In addition, a servo delay compensation function is supported for
chopping operations. When the grinding axis is moved vertically at high
speed, a servo delay and acceleration/deceleration delay occur. These
delays prevent the tool from actually reaching the specified position. The
servo delay compensation function compensates for any displacement by
increasing the feedrate. Thus, grinding can be performed almost up to the
specified position.
There are two types of chopping functions: that specified by
programming, and that activated by signal input. For details of the
chopping function activated by signal input, refer to the manual provided
by the machine tool builder.
Format
Explanations
Chopping activated by Before chopping can be started, the chopping axis, reference position,
signal input upper dead point, lower dead point, and chopping feedrate must be set
using the parameter screen (or the chopping screen).
Chopping is started once chopping start signal CHPST has been set to 1.
This signal is ignored, however, during chopping axis movement.
When chopping hold signal *CHLD is set to 0 during chopping, the tool
immediately moves to point R. Again setting the chopping hold signal to
1 restarts chopping.
Chopping can also be stopped by setting chopping start signal CHPST to
0, but only when chopping was started by using that signal.
159
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 Switching to manual mode or suspending automatic
operation, by means offeed hold, does not stop chopping.
2 In chopping mode, a chopping axis move command or
canned cycle command cannot be specified.
3 If a G81.1 command is specified during chopping started by
the signal, chopping is not stopped. If point R, the upper
dead point, lower dead point, or chopping feedrate has
been modified by using the G81.1 command, chopping is
continued, but using the modified data.
4 The use of chopping start signal CHPST to start chopping
is not enabledimmediately after power–on; it is not enabled
until the completion of manual reference position return.
Chopping feedrate From the start of chopping to point R, the tool moves at the rapid traverse
(feedrate of movement to rate (specified by parameter No. 1420).
point R)
The override function can be used for either the normal rapid traverserate
or chopping feedrate, one of which can be selected by setting CPRPD (bit
0 of parameter No. 8360).
When the chopping feedrate is overridden, settings between 110% and
150% are clamped to 100%.
Chopping feedrate Between point R, reached after the start of chopping, and the point where
(feedrate of movement the chopping is canceled, the tool moves at the chopping feedrate
from point R) (specified by parameter No. 8374).
The chopping feedrate is clamped to the maximum chopping feedrate (set
with parameter No. 8375) if the specified feedrate is greater than the
maximum chopping feedrate.
The feedrate can be overridden by 0% to 150% by applying the chopping
feedrate override signal.
Setting chopping data Set the following chopping data:
Chopping axis: Parameter No. 8370
Reference point (point R): Parameter No. 8371
Upper dead point: Parameter No. 8372
Lower dead point: parameter No. 8373
Chopping feedrate: Parameter No. 8374
Maximum chopping feedrate: Parameter No. 8375
All data items other than the chopping axis and maximum chopping
feedrate can be set on the chopping screen.
160
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
For details of how to set chopping data on the chopping screen, refer to
the operator’s manual (III 11.4.13 Displaying and Setting Chopping
Data.)
Chopping after the upper When the upper dead point or lower dead point is changed while chopping
dead point or lower dead is being performed, the tool moves to the position specified by the old
point has been changed data. Then, chopping is continued using the new data.
While chopping is being performed, data can be changed only on the
chopping screen. Changing the data on the parameter screen has no effect
on the current chopping operation.
When movement according to the new data starts, the servo delay
compensation function stops the servo delay compensation for the old
data, and starts the servo delay compensation for the new data.
The following describes the operations performed after the data has been
changed.
(1) When the upper dead point is changed during movement from the
upper dead point to the lower dead point
The tool first moves to the lower dead point, then to the new upper
dead point.
Once movement to the lower dead point has been completed, the
previous servo delay compensation is set to 0, and servo delay
compensation is performed based on the new data.
(2) When the lower dead point is changed during movement from the
upper dead point to the lower dead point
The tool first moves to the previous lower dead point, then to the upper
dead point, and finally to the new lower dead point.
Once movement to the upper dead point has been completed, the
previous servo delay compensation is set to 0, and servo delay
compensation is performed based on the new data.
161
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
(3) When the upper dead point is changed during movement from the
lower dead point to the upper dead point
The tool first moves to the previous upper dead point, then to the lower
dead point, and finally to the new upper dead point.
Once movement to the lower dead point has been completed, the
previous servo delay compensation is set to 0, and servo delay
compensation is performed based on the new data.
(4) When the lower dead point is changed during movement from the
lower dead point to the upper dead point
The tool first moves to the upper dead point, then to the new lower
dead point.
Once movement to the upper dead point has been completed, the
previous servo delay compensation is set to 0, and servo delay
compensation is performed based on the new data.
162
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Servo delay When high–speed chopping is performed with the grinding axis, a servo
compensation function delay and acceleration/deceleration delay occur. These delays prevent the
tool from actually reaching the specified position. The control unit
measures the difference between the specified position and the actual tool
position, and automatically compensates for the displacement of the tool.
To compensate for this displacement, an amount of travel equal to the
distance between the upper and lower dead points, plus an appropriate
compensation amount, is specified. When a chopping command is
specified, the feedrate is determined so that the chopping count per unit
time equals the specified count. When the difference between the
displacement of the tool from the upper dead point and the displacement
of the tool from the lower dead point becomes smaller than the setting of
parameter No. 8377, after the start of chopping, the control unit performs
compensation.
When compensation is applied, the chopping axis moves beyond the
specified upper dead point and lower dead point, and the chopping
feedrate increases gradually.
When the difference between the actual machine position and the
specified position becomes smaller than the effective area setting
(parameter No. 1826), the control unit no longer applies compensation,
allowing the tool to continue moving at its current feedrate.
A coefficient for the compensation amount for the displacement
generated by the servo delay incurred by chopping and the delay incurred
during acceleration/deceleration can be specified in parameter No. 8376.
Point R
L1 L3 L5
Lower dead point
Time
Displacement between the tool and the upper dead point: L2, L4, L6
Displacement between the tool and the lower dead point: L1, L3, L5
Compensation starts when:
| L3 – L2 | < (parameter No. 8377)
When the following condition is satisfied, compensation is no longer applied,
and the tool continues to move at its current feedrate:
| L6 | < effective area setting (parameter No. 1826)
163
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Background editing When an alarm or battery alarm is issued during background editing, the
tool does not stop at point R.
Single block signal Even when single block signal SBK is input during chopping, chopping
continues.
Part program storage When this function is used, a part program storage length of
length approximately 0.6 m is required.
Limitations
Workpiece coordinate While chopping is being performed, do not change the workpiece
system coordinate system for the chopping axis.
PMC axis When the chopping axis is selected as the PMC axis, chopping is not
started.
Mirror image While chopping is being performed, never attempt to apply the mirror
image function about the chopping axis.
Move command during If a move command is specified for the chopping axis while chopping is
chopping being performed, a P/S 5050 alarm is issued.
164
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Look–ahead control This function does not support the look–ahead control function.
Program restart When a program contains G codes for starting chopping (G81.1) and
stopping chopping (G80), an attempt to restart that program results in a
P/S 5050 alarm being output.
When a program that does not include the chopping axis is restarted
during chopping, the coordinates and amount of travel set for the
chopping axis are not affected after the restart of the program.
Point R
(Z110. )
Signal
165
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 If an attempt to start chopping using chopping start signal
CHPST is ignored, set the signal to 0 then back to 1.
2 This signal is not enabled until the comletion of manual
reference position return.
Chopping feedrate
override signals *CHP8
to *CHP0
<G051#0 to G051#3>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Overrides the chopping feedrate.
[Operation] The actual feedrate during chopping becomes the specified feedrate
multipled by the override value specified with this signal. The following
table lists the correspondence between the signal states and the override
value:
166
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Chopping–in–progress
signal CHPMD <F039#2>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Posts notification of chopping in progress.
[Operation] This signal is set to 1 in the following case:
· Upon chopping start signal CHPST being set to 1 to start chopping
This signal is set to 0 in the following cases:
· Upon chopping start signal CHPST being set to 0 to stop chopping
· Upon chopping being terminated by a reset.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G051 *CHLD CHPST *CHP8 *CHP4 *CHP2 *CHP0
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8360 CHPX CPRPD
167
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Valid data range : For IS–A and –B, 240000 mm/min or 9600 inches/min
For IS–C, 100000 mm/min or 4800 inches/min
168
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.21.6 Chopping function (G80, G81.1)
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN) III.11.4.13 Displaying and setting chopping data
169
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
1.13
SIMPLE ELECTRIC
GEAR BOX (G80, G81)
(M SERIES)
Example control axis The 4th axis is always assigned as the workpiece axis.
configuration
Another servo axis is dedicated to the tool axis, which is connected to the
spindle motor and for which the rotational position must be read directly
by the digital servo system (this axis is called the EGB axis). The
workpiece and EGB axesmust be assigned to consecutive servo axes. The
following figure illustrates the axis configuration when the 4th axis is
assigned as the workpiece axis and the5th axis as the EGB axis. In such
a case, optional board 2 is required, the 4thaxis being connected to the 3rd
servo axis, while the 5th axis is connected tothe 4th servo axis.
a pulses/rev
Position
detec-
CNC tor
Tool axis rotation command Spindle
Spindle amplifier motor
JA7A Tool axis
(JA8A)
PC Position coder
170
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Notes
NOTE
1 No dummy connector is required for the EGB axis command
connector.
2 The EGB axis error counter value varies during
synchronization.
Examples When the Z–axis is used as the EGB axis in a 4–axis configuration
When the 1st and 2nd servo axes are used When the 3rd and 4th servo axes are used
X–axis: No.1023 ... 3 (JV3 and JF3 connectors) X–axis: No.1023 ... 1 (JV1 and JF1 connectors)
Y–axis: No.1023 ... 4 (JV4 and JF4 connectors) Y–axis: No.1023 ... 2 (JV2 and JF2 connectors)
EGB axis: No.1023 ... 2 (JF22 connector) EGB axis: No.1023 ... 4 (JF24 connector)
Workpiece axis: No.1023 ... 1 (JV1 and JF1 con nectors) Workpiece axis: No.1023 ... 3 (JV3 and JF3 connectors)
Format
Explanations
Synchronization control 1 Start of synchronization
When synchronization mode is set with G81, the synchronization
switch of the EGB function is closed, and synchronization between the
tool axis and workpiece axis starts. At this time, synchronization
mode signal SYNMOD is turned on. During synchronization, the
rotation of the tool axis and workpiece axis is controlled so that the
relationship between T (number of teeth) and L (number of hob
threads) can be maintained. Moreover, the synchronous relationship
is maintained regardless of whether the operation is automatic or
manual during synchronization.
G81 cannot be specified again during synchronization. Moreover, the
specification of T, L, Q, and P cannot be modified during
synchronization.
171
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
4 Cancellation of synchronization
The position of the workpiece axis after travel during synchronization
is reflected in the absolute coordinates when synchronization is
canceled; from this point, absolute command programming is enabled
for the workpiece axis. By setting bit 0 (HBR) of parameter No. 7700
to 0, synchronization can also be canceled upon reset.
* The synchronization mode is canceled by a servo alarm, PS000
alarm, or emergency stop.
172
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Synchronization mode
Synchronization termina-
tion command (G80)
Helical gear When a helical gear is to be produced, the compensation of workpiece axis
compensation rotation is needed according to the travel distance on the Z–axis (axial
feed).
173
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
where
Compensation angle: Signed absolute value (deg)
Z : Amount of travel on the Z–axis after the specification of G81
(mm or inch)
P : Signed gear helix angle (deg)
T : Number of teeth
Q: Module (mm) or diametral pitch (inch–1)
–Z –Z –Z –Z
C : + C : + C : + C : +
Z : + Z : + Z : – Z : –
P : + P : – P : + P : –
Compensation Compensation Compensation Compensation
direction : + direction : – direction : – direction : +
–Z –Z –Z –Z
C : – C : – C : – C : –
Z : + Z : + Z : – Z : –
P : + P : – P : + P : –
Compensation Compensation Compensation Compensation
direction : – direction : + direction : + direction : –
2 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 0 (Items (a) to (d) are
the same as for 1.)
174
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
–Z –Z –Z –Z
C : – C : – C : – C : –
Z : + Z : + Z : – Z : –
P : + P : – P : + P : –
Compensation Compensation Compensation Compensation
direction : + direction : – direction : – direction : +
175
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Limitations
Feed hold during For retract movement, the feed hold capability is disabled.
retraction
Retraction when alarm is This function does not include a retract function used when an alarm is
issued issued.
Rapid traverse during In synchronization mode, a cutting feedrate can be specified for the
synchronization workpiece axis (4th axis). Rapid traverse cannot be specified using G00.
Maximum speed The maximum speeds of the tool axis and workpiece axis depend on the
detectors used.
G code command during During synchronization, G00, G28, G27, G29, G30, G53, G20, and G21
synchronization cannot be specified.
Drilling canned cycle When this function is used, the drilling canned cycle cannot be used.
Examples O1000 ;
N0010 M19 ; Performs tool axis orientation.
N0020 G28 G91 C0 ; Performs reference position return
operation of the workpiece axis.
N0030 G81 T20 L1 ; Starts synchronization between the tool
axis and workpiece axis.
(The workpiece axis rotates 18° when
the tool axis makes one rotation.)
N0040 S300 M03 ; Rotates the tool axis at 300 rpm.
N0050 G01 X F ; Makes a movement on the X–axis
(for cutting).
N0060 G01 Z F ; Makes a movement on the Z–axis
(for machining).
––––––––––––––––;
––––––––––––––––;
N0100 G01 X F ; Makes a movement on the X–axis
(for retraction).
N0110 M05 ; Stops the tool axis.
N0120 G80 ; Cancels synchronization between the
tool axis and workpiece axis.
N0130 M30 ;
Signal
176
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
Retract completion
signal RTRCTF <F065#4>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Posts notification of the completion of retraction.
[Operation] This signal is set to 1 in the following case:
· Upon the completion of retraction
This signal is set to 0 in the following case:
· Upon the completion of retraction, when a move command follows
immediately after
NOTE
The retract signal is not accepted while the retract
completion signal is set to 1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G066 RTRCT
Parameter When setting the parameters for the simple electric gear box, note the
following:
(1) Set SYNMOD (bit 0 of parameter No. 2011) to 1 for the workpiece
(4th) axis and EGB axis.
177
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
(2) If FFALWY (bit 1 of parameter No. 2011) is set to 1, the values set in
parameters No. 2068 and 2069 are used as the feed–forward factor and
velocity loop feed–forward factor, respectively. For details, refer to
”Feed–forward setting” in ”Geometric error suppression function” in
the FANUC AC SERVO AMPLIFIER Maintenance Manual.
(3) Set the servo parameters for the EGB axis (No. 2000 and subsequent
parameters) such that they do not conflict with the settings made for
the 4th (workpiece) axis.
(4) Set the command multiplication (CMR) for the EGB axis (No. 1820)
in the same way as for the 4th axis.
(5) The following EGB axis parameters need not be set:
· Reference counter capacity (No. 1821)
· In–position width (No. 1826)
· Excessive error while moving/stopped (No. 1828 and 1829)
· Stored stroke limits (No. 1320 to 1327)
(6) The flexible feed gear for the EGB axis (No. 2084 and 2085) is set
automatically upon the execution of a synchronization mode
command.
(7) Set the servo axis numbers in parameter No. 1023, using as many bits
as the number of servo axes.
(Example)
When using the Y–axis as the EGB axis in a 4–axis When using the 5th axis as the EGB axis in a 6–axis
configuration configuration
No. 1023 1st axis: . . . . . . . . . 1 No. 1023 1st axis: . . . . . . . 1
No. 1023 2nd axis: . . . . . . . . 2 No. 1023 2nd axis: . . . . . . 4
No. 1023 3rd axis: . . . . . . . . . 5 No. 1023 3rd axis: . . . . . . . 2
No. 1023 4th axis: . . . . . . . . . 3 No. 1023 4th axis: . . . . . . . 3
No. 1023 5th axis: . . . . . . . 4
No. 1023 6th axis: . . . . . . . 6
NOTE
Set this parameter when applying feed–forward control to
rapid traverse also.
178
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7700 HDR HBR
NOTE
After setting this parameter, the power must be turned off
then on again.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7730 RTRx
179
1. AXIS CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
This parameter sets the feedrate during retraction for each axis.
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn off the power. Then,
turn the power back on to enable the setting.
NOTE
1 You cannot specify four because the fourth axis is used as
the workpiece axis.
2 For a machine using the inch increment system, linear
axes cannot be used as the EGB axis.
7772 Number of position detector pulses per rotation about tool axis
180
B–62753EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
This parameter specifies the number of pulses per rotation about the tool
axis (on the spindle side), for the position detector.
NOTE
Specify the number of feedback pulses per rotation about
the tool axis for the position detector, considering the
gear ratio with respect to the position coder.
7773 Number of position detector pulses per rotation about workpiece axis
Reference item
181
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
182
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
2.1
EMERGENCY STOP
General If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator’s panel, the
machine movement stops in a moment.
Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Signal
Emergency stop
*ESP<X008#4,G008#4>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Outputting an emergency stop signal stops the machine instantly.
[Operation] When the emergency stop signal *ESP turns to “0”, the emergency stop
is applied to the machine and the CNC is reset. This signal is controlled
by the B contacts of a pushbutton switch. The emergency stop signal turns
the servo ready signal (SA) to “0”.
Overtravel detection by this CNC is handled by the stored stroke check
function, and a limit switch for normal overtravel detection is not needed.
To prevent the machine from moving beyond the software limit through
servo feedback error, always install a stroke end limit switch (shown in
Fig. 2.1 (b) below).
183
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Relay power
Emergency stop temporary release
supply
EMG
SK
Spark killer
WARNING
Software limit setting point and operating point of limit switch
for emergency stop
The stop point by the software limit goes beyond the setting
point by as much as the following distance.
R (mm)
7,500
R: Rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
The actual stopping point may exceed the position set by a
parameter (Nos.1320 and 1321) by as much as R/7500
(mm). Set the limit switch for emergency stop including the
allowance for the above value.
ÄÄÄÄ
R
ÄÄÄÄ
7,500
ÄÄÄÄ
The machine stops in this Set the limit switch for emergency stop in
range. this range.
184
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X008 *ESP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G008 *ESP
Reference item
AC SERVO MOTOR series DESCRIPTIONS B–65002E
AC SERVO MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65142E
185
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
2.2
CNC READY SIGNAL
General When the CNC is turned on and becomes ready for operation, the CNC
ready signal is set to 1.
Signal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F001 MA
186
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
Power off
Power on
60A100 msec
Servo ready
signal (SA)
Brake on
Overload
Reset
Reset Emergency stop
1 to 2 seconds About 1 second
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 SA
187
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
2.3
OVERTRAVEL
CHECK
2.3.1
Overtravel Signal
General When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool
limit switch, the tool decelerates and stops because of working the limit
switch and an OVER TRAVEL is displayed.
Signal
Overtravel signal
*+L1 to *+L8<G114>
*+L1 to *–L8<G116>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Indicates that the control axis has reached its stroke limit. There are
signals for every direction in every control axis. The +/– in the signal
name indicates the direction and the number corresponds to the control
axis.
+ L 1
188
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
Command pulse
deceleration
V
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
Servo system delay
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
VR
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
t
TR 1
L1=VR(t1+t2+ +TS) · [mm or inch]
2 60000
L1:Deceleration distance
VR: Rapid traverse speed (mm/min or inch/min)
t1: Limit switch signal delay time (from limit switch operation to *+L
signal turn off (ms))
t2: Receiver delay time 30ms
TR: Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant (ms)
TS: Servo system time constant (ms)
NOTE
Servo system time constant TS is 33 msec when the servo
unit is adjusted to the standard setting.
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
VC
ÄÄÄÄ
t1 t2
*+L limit switch
TR 1
L2=VC(t1+t2+ +TS) · [mm or inch]
2 60000
L2:Deceleration distance
Vc: Maximum feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
t1, t2, Ts: Same as (i).
189
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Releasing overtravel Press the reset button to reset the alarm after moving the tool to the safety
direction by manual operation. For details on operation, refer to the
operator’s manual of the machine tool builder.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G114 *+L8 *+L7 *+L6 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3004 OTH
WARNING
For safety, usually set 0 to check the overtravel signal.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.6.2 Overtravel
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
190
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
2.3.2
Stored Stroke Check 1
General When the tool exceeds a stored stroke check, an alarm is displayed and
the tool is decelerated and stopped.
When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool
can be moved in the reverse direction from which the tool came.
Parameters (Nos. 1320, 1321 or Nos. 1326, 1327) set boundary. Outside
the area of the set checks is a forbidden area. The machine tool builder
usually sets this area as the maximum stroke.
Signal
191
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G007 RLSOT EXLM
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G110 +LM8 +LM7 +LM6 +LM5 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G112 –LM8 –LM7 –LM6 –LM5 –LM4 –LM3 –LM2 –LM1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1300 BFA LZR LMS
BFA LZR LMS
NOTE
When the absolute–position detector is being used, and the
reference position is already set at power–on, the stored
stroke check is checked immediately after the power is
turned on, regardless of the setting of this bit.
1320 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1321 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction each axis
192
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
WARNING
1 For axes with diameter specification, a diameter value must
be set.
2 When the parameters are set as follows, the stroke
becomes infinite:
parameter 1320 < parameter 1321
For movement along the axis for which infinite stroke is set, only
incremental commands are available. If an absolute command is issued
for this axis, the absolute register may overflow, and normal movement
will not result.
1326 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1327 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction each axis
NOTE
The EXLM signal is enabled only when LMS, #2 of
parameter 1300, is set to 1.
Caution
CAUTION
In setting a forbidden area, if two points to be set are the
same, all area is forbidden in check 1.
193
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
1 Parameter LZR (bit 6 of No. 1300) selects whether each
check becomes effective after the power is turned on and
manual reference position return or automatic reference
position return by G28 has been performed or immediately
after the power is turned on.
2 For the 2–path control, set a forbidden area for each path.
3 Parameter BFA (bit 7 of No. 1300) selects whether an alarm
is displayed immediately before the tool enters the
forbidden area or immediately after the tool has entered the
forbidden area.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.6.3 Stroke check
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
194
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
2.3.3
Stored Stroke
check 2, 3
General Three areas which the tool cannot enter can be specified with stored
stroke check 1, stored stroke check 2,and stored stroke check 3.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Stored stroke
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
check 3
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Stored stroke
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
check 2
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
Stored stroke check 1
ÇÇÇ
: Forbidden area for the tool
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
(X, Y, Z)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
(I, J, K)
(1) Forbidden area is inside.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(X, Y, Z)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(I, J, K)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ (2) Forbidden area is outside.
195
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Stored stroke check 2 Parameters (Nos. 1322, 1323) or commands set these boundaries. Inside
or outside the area of the check can be set as the forbidden area. Parameter
OUT (No. 1300#0) selects either inside or outside as the forbidden area.
In case of program command a G22 command forbids the tool to enter the
forbidden area, and a G23 command permits the tool to enter the forbid-
den area. Each of G22; and G23; should be commanded independently of
another commands in a block.
The command below creates or changes the forbidden area:
G 22X_Z_I_K_;
A(X,Z)
B(I,K)
X>I,Z>K
X-I>ζ
Z-K>ζ
G 22X_Y_Z_I_J_K_;
(X,Y,Z)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(I,J,K)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
X>I,Y>J,Z>K
X-I> ζ (In least command increment)
Y-J> ζ (In least command increment)
Z-K> ζ ((In least command increment)
ζ is the distance the tool travels in 8 ms. It is 2000 in least
command increments when the feedrate is 15 m/min.
Fig. 2.3.3 (d) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a
program (M series)
196
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
A(X1,Z1)
B(X2,Z2)
X1>X2,Z1>Z2
X1-X2> ζ
Z1-Z2> ζ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ A(X,Y,Z)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
B(I,J,K) ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
X>I,Y>J,Z>K
X-I> ζ (In least command increment)
Y-J> ζ (In least command increment)
Z-K> ζ (n least command increment)
Stored stroke check 3 Set the boundary with parameters Nos. 1324 and 1325. The area inside
the boundary becomes the forbidden area.
Checkpoint for the The parameter setting or programmed value (XZIK) depends on which
forbidden area part of the tool or tool holder is checked for entering the forbidden area.
Confirm the checking position (the top of the tool or the tool chuck) before
programming the forbidden area.
If point C (The top of the tool) is checked in Fig. 2.3.3 (g), the distance
“c” should be set as the data for the stored stroke check function. If point
D (The tool chuck) is checked, the distance “d” must be set.
197
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
d
D
c
B
The position of the
tool after reference
position return
b
A a
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Forbidden area boundary
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Fig. 2.3.3 (h) Setting the forbidden area (M series)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Setting the forbidden area over lapping
198
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
Effective time for a Parameter LZR (bit 6 of No. 1300) selects whether each check becomes
forbidden area effective after the power is turned on and manual reference position return
or automatic reference position return by G28 has been performed or
immediately after the power is turned on.
After the power is turned on, if the reference position is in the forbidden
area of each check, an alarm is generated immediately (Only in G22 mode
for stored stroke check 2).
Releasing the alarms When the tool has become unmovable in the forbidden area, push the
emergency stop button to release the forbidden condition and move the
tool out of the forbidden area in the G23 mode; then, if the setting is
wrong, correct it and perform the reference position return again.
Change from G23 to When G23 is switched to G22 in the forbidden area, the following results.
G22 in a forbidden area (1)When the forbidden area is inside, an alarm is informed in the next
move.
(2)When the forbidden area is outside, an alarm is informed immediately.
Creating the forbidden For the 2–path control, set a forbidden area for each tool post.
area for the 2–path
control
Signal
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G007 RLSOT3
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1300 BFA LZR RL3 OUT
199
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
When the absolute–position detector is being used, and the
reference position is already set at power–on, the stored
stroke check is checked immediately after the power is
turned on, regardless of the setting of this bit.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1310 OT3x OT2x
1322 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the positive direction on each axis
1323 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the negative direction on each axis
Set the coordinate values of stored stroke checks 2 in the positive and
negative directions for each axis in the machine coordinate system. OUT,
#0 of parameter 1300, sets either the area outside or the area inside
specified by two checks as the inhibition area.
WARNING
For axes with diameter specification, a diameter value must
be set.
200
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
1324 Coordinate value of stored stored check 3 in the positive direction on each axis
1325 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the negatice direction on each axis
Set the coordinate values of stored stroke checks 3 in the positive and
negative directions for each axis in the machine coordinate system. The
area inside the checks set in the parameters is forbidden.
Warning
WARNING
1 In setting a forbidden area, if the two points to be set are
the same, the area is as follows:
(1)When the forbidden area is check 1, all areas are
forbidden areas.
(2)When the forbidden area is check 2 or check 3, all areas
are movable areas.
2 In setting a forbidden area, if the two points are set in the wrong
order, the area is set as follows:
(1) When the forbidden area is check 1, the stroke check becomes
infinite.
(2) When the forbidden area is check 2 or 3, a quadrangle with the
two points assumed as vertexes is set as the check.
201
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
Parameter BFA (bit 7 of No. 1300) selects whether an alarm
is displayed immediately before the tool enters the
forbidden area or immediately after the tool has entered the
forbidden area. (check 1, 3 only)
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.6.3 Stroke check
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
202
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
2.3.4
Chuck/Tailstock Barrier
(T series)
Signal
0 Disabled Disabled
G23
1 Disabled Disabled
When the G23 command (stored stroke check off) is specified, the
tailstock barrier is disabled regardless of the *TSB signal. When the G22
command (stored stroke check on) is specified, the tailstock can be
disabled by setting the signal to 1.
This signal is used to select whether the tailstock area is forbidden, when
machining a workpiece by attaching and detaching the tailstock to and
from the workpiece according to M commands.
203
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G060 *TSB
Parameter
Profile of a chuck
1330 Profile of a chuck
204
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
A
W1
L1
W W
W1 CX CX
L1
Z Z
CZ CZ
Symbol Description
TY Profile of a chuck (0: Chuck which holds a workpiece on the inner
surface, 1: Chuck which holds a workpiece on the outer surface)
CX X coordinate of a chuck
CZ Z coordinate of a chuck
L Dimensions of the claw of a chuck
W Dimensions of the claw of a chuck (radius input)
L1 Dimensions of the part of a claw at which a workpiece is held
W1 Dimensions of the part of a claw at which a workpiece is held
(radius input)
TY: Specifies the profile of a chuck. When TY is set to 0, the chuck holding a
workpiece on the inner surface is specified. When TY is set to 1, the chuck
holding a workpiece on the outer surface is specified. The profile of the
chuck is assumed to be symmetrical with respect to the z–axis.
CX, and CZ: Specify the position (point A) of a chuck with the coordinates of the
workpiece coordinate system. In this case, do not use the coordinates of
the machine coordinate system.
WARNING
Specifying the coordinates with a diameter or radius
depends on whether the corresponding axis conforms to
diameter or radius specification . When the axis conforms
to diameter specification, specify the coordinates with a
diameter.
WARNING
Always specify W and W1 with radiuses. Specify L and L1
with radiuses when the Z–axis conforms to radius
specification.
205
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
X L
L1
TZ
L2
B
Workpiece
D3 D2 D1 D Z
Zero point of
the workpiece
coordinate
system
206
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
Symbol Description
TZ Z–axis coordinate of a tailstock
L Length of a tailstock
D Diameter of a tailstock (diameter input)
L1 Length of a tailstock (1)
D1 Diameter of a tailstock (1) (diameter input)
L2 Length of a tailstock (2)
D2 Diameter of a tailstock (2) (diameter input)
D3 Diameter of the hole of a tailstock (diameter input)
TZ: Specifies the position (point B) of a tailstock with the Z–axis coordinate
of the workpiece coordinate system. In this case, do not use the coordinate
of the machine coordinate system. The profile of a tailstock is assumed to
be symmetrical with respect to the Z–axis.
WARNING
Specifying the position of a tailstock with a radius or
diameter depends on whether the Z–axis conforms to
radius or diameter specification.
WARNING
Always specify D, D1, D2, and D3 with diameters. Specify
L, L1, and L2 with radiuses if the Z–axis conforms to radius
specification.
207
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Warning
WARNING
1 The area may not be forbidden if the setting for forbidding
the area is invalid, as follows:
1) In the setting of the chuck shape, the jaw length
(parameter No. 1331) is less than the grasp length
(parameter No. 1333) or the jaw width (parameter No.
1332) is less than the grasp width (parameter No. 1334).
2) In the setting of the tailstock shape, the tailstock diameter
(parameter No. 1346) is less than the hole diameter
(parameter No. 1347).
3) The chuck and tailstock overlap.
2 When the options for stored stroke check 2 and
chuck/tailstock barrier are used at the same time, the
chuck/tailstock barrier is valid but stored stroke check 2 is
ignored.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.6.4 CHUCK AND TAILSTOCK BARRIERS
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN)
2.3.5
Tool Post Interference
Check (T series,
Two–path Control)
General When two tool posts machine the same workpiece simultaneously, the
tool posts can approach each other very closely. If the two tool posts
interfere with each other due to a program error or any other setting error,
a serious damage such as a tool or machine destruction can occur.
The function “tool post interference check” is available which can
decelerate and stop the two tool posts before the tool posts interfere with
each other due to an incorrect command.
Tool post 2
Tool post 1
208
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
The contours of the two tool posts are checked to determine whether or
not an interference occurs.
Signal
NOTE
For details of the requisites for the tool post interference
check function, refer to the operator’s manual for Lathe
(B–62754EN).
209
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 During the execution of the interference check function, if
the control unit judges that the two tool posts will interfere
with each other, it stops both tool posts by slowing them
down, and then enters the alarm state. The CNC then sets
the TIALM signal “1” to indicate that an interference alarm
has occurred.
2 If the interference alarm is activated, switch the operation
mode to the manual mode, manually withdraw the tool posts
to where they do not interfere each other, then release the
alarm status by resetting the control unit.
As the result of manually withdrawing the tool posts, the
TIALM signal goes “0” when the control unit judges that the
tool posts are separated enough not to interfere with each
other any more. When manually withdrawing the interfering
tool posts, the TIALM signal is effective in identifying how far
the tool posts must be separated from each other. This is
because it is easy for the operator to check at which point
the signal goes “0”.
3 If an interference alarm occurs, the axis being moved and
its moving direction are stored, and the axis cannot be
moved in the stored direction until the alarm is released by
resetting the control unit. This prevents the axis from
interfering any further by prohibiting movement in the
direction that caused the interference.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F064 TIALM TICHK
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8140 ZCL IFE IFM ITO TY1 TY0
210
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
(1) When TY1=0 and TY0=0 (2) When TY1=0 and TY0=1
Tool post 2
X X X
Tool post 2 Tool post 1
Tool post 1
Z Z Z
(3) When TY1=1 and TY0=0 (4) When TY1=1 and TY0=1
X X
Tool post 1 Tool post 1
Z
Z Z
Z
Tool post 2
Tool post 2
X
8151 Distance along the X axis between the reference positions of tool posts 1 and 2
8152 Distance along the Z axis between the reference positions of tool posts 1 and 2
211
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
[Unit of data]
Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit
Metric input 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Tool post 2
+X
Specify the X and Z values (e, z) of the
reference position of tool post 2 in
parameters 8151 and 8152,
ζ ε respectively, in the Z–X plane
coordinate system. However, note that
the reference position of tool post 1 is
plotted at the zero point.
+Z
Tool post 1
WARNING
After the parameter values are changed, perform manual
reference position return for individual tool posts.
Otherwise, data on the positional relationship between the
tool posts stored in memory will not be updated to the new
parameter values.
212
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
Warning
WARNING
1 When an alarm is raised, the CNC system and machine
system stop with some delay in time. So an actual stop
position can be closer to the other tool post beyond an
interference forbidden position specified using tool shape
data. So, for safety, tool shape data a little larger than the
actual shape should be set. The extra distance, L, required
for this purpose is calculated from a rapid traverse feedrate
as follows
1
L = (Rapid traverse rate)
7500
For example, when a rapid traverse feedrate of 15 m/min is
used, L=2mm.
2 When parameters or tool shape data (contact forbidden
area) are set for the interference check function, check that
the interference forbidden area is correctly set by moving
the tool posts to foul each other in several directions in
manual mode (interference check enabled with a
parameter).
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.21.3 Tool post interference check
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN)
213
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
2.3.6
Stroke Limit Check
Prior to Performing
Movement
WARNING
Whether the coordinates of the end point, reached as a
result of traversing the distance specified in each block, are
in a inhibited area is checked. In this case, the path followed
by a move command is not checked. However, if the tool
enters the inhibited area defined by stored stroke check 1,
2, or 3, an alarm is issued. (See the examples below.)
Example 1)
Inhibited area defined by
stored stroke check 1 or 2
End point
Start point
The tool is stopped at point a according
to stored stroke check 1 or 2.
214
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
Example 2)
End point
Inhibited area defined by
stored stroke check 1 or 2
Limitations
Machine lock If machine lock is applied at the start of movement, no stroke limit check
made before movement is performed.
G23 When stored stroke check 2 is disabled (G23 mode), no check is made to
determine whether the tool enters the inhibited area defined by stored
stroke check 2.
Program restart When a program is restarted, an alarm is issued if the restart position is
within a inhibited area.
Manual intervention When the execution of a block is restarted after manual intervention
following a feed hold following a feed hold stop, no alarm is issued even if the end point
stop following a manual intervention is within a inhibited area.
A block consisting of If a block consisting of multiple operations (such as a canned cycle and
multiple operations exponential interpolation (M series only) is executed, an alarm is issued
at the start point of any operation whose end point falls within a inhibited
area.
215
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Angular axis control When the angulalr axis control option is selected, no check is made.
Simple synchronous In simple synchronous control, only the master axis is checked; no slave
control axes are checked.
PMC axis control No check is made for a movement based on PMC axis control.
Synchronous control Axes subject to synchronous control and composite control are not
and composite control checked. (T series)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1301 PLC NPC
216
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.6.4 STROKE LIMIT CHECK PRIOR TO PER-
(For Machining Center) FORMING MOVEMENT
(B–62764EN)
217
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
2.4
ALARM SIGNAL
General When an alarm is triggered in the CNC, the alarm is indicated on the CRT
screen, and the alarm signal is set to 1.
If the voltage level of the memory backup battery falls to below a specified
level while the CNC is turned off, the battery alarm signal is set to 1.
Signal
Alarm signal
AL<F001#0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] The alarm signal reports that the CNC is in an alarm state.
There are the following alarms. The following alarms are issued:
(a) TH alarm
(b) TV alarm
(c) P/S alarm
(d) Overtravel alarm
(e) Overheat alarm
(f) Servo alarm
[Output condition] The alarm signal is set to 1 when:
– The CNC is placed in the alarm state.
The alarm signal is set to 0 when:
– The alarm has been released by resetting the CNC.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F001 BAL AL
218
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 NPA
219
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
2.5
START LOCK/
INTERLOCK
General This signal disables machine movement along axes. When this signal is
input during movement along axes, the tool movement is decelerated,
then stopped.
Signal
Command read
Axis move
STL
K
Command read
MF/SF/TF
FIN
STLK
220
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
Command read
Axis move
*IT
Command read
MF/SF/TF
FIN
*IT
NOTE
The overtravel amount of the motor after turning *IT to “0”
is represented by the following formula.
1 Tc Ts A
Qmax =Fm × ( + + )
60 1000 1000 1000
Where
Qmax : Overtravel quantity (mm or inch)
Fm : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
Tc : Cutting time constant (ms)
Ts : Servo time constant (Ts = 33ms normally)
A : Processing time of CNC
A = 50ms
221
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
222
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G007 STLK
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G008 *IT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G134 –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DIT ITX ITL
Note
NOTE
The interlock signal for each axis and direction (T system)
is supported regardless of whether the tool compensation
measurement value direct input B function is provided.
223
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
2.6
MODE SELECTION
General The mode select signal is a code signal consisting of the three bits MD1,
MD2, and MD4. The seven modes -- memory edit (EDIT), memory
operation (MEM), manual data input (MDI), manual handle/incremental
feed (HANDLE/INC), manual continuous feed (JOG), TEACH IN JOG,
and in addition, DNC operation mode can be selected by combining the
(MEM) mode setting and the DNCI signal. Manual reference position
return mode can be selected by combining the manual continuous feed
(JOG) mode setting and the ZRN signal.
The currently selected operation mode can be posted by outputting the
operation mode check signal.
Signal
224
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
Signal status
Mode
MD4 MD2 MD1 DNCI ZRN
225
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Input signal
Mode O tp t signal
Output
MD4 MD2 MD1 DNCI ZRN
Manual data input 0 0 0 0 0 MMDI<F003#3>
(MDI) (MDI operation)
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G043 ZRN DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1
F004 MREF
226
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
Note
NOTE
Precautions on modes and mode switching
1 In the MDI mode, the STL signal turns to “0” and the CNC
stops at the end of execution of the commands input from
the CRT/MDI panel, but the SPL signal does not turn to “1”.
Therefore, another command can be input from the manual
data input unit under this state.
2 When the manual handle function is not provided,
incremental feed is enabled in the HANDLE/INC mode.
When the manual handle function is provided, only manual
handle feed is enabled in that mode.
3 Manual operation in TEACH IN JOG and TEACH IN
HANDLE mode.
a) When parameter JHD no.7100#0 is set to ”0” so that jog
operation and handle feed operation are performed with
separate modes:
In TEACH IN JOG mode, jog operation can be done.
In TEACH IN HANDLE mode, handle feed can be done
when optional manual handle feed function is provided,
and incremental feed can be done when handle feed
function is not provided.
b) When parameter JHD no.7100#0 is set to “1” so that jog
operation and handle feed operation are performed with
the same mode:
In TEACH IN JOG mode, handle feed and jog feed can be done
when optional manual handle feed function is provided, but jog
feed only when it is not included.
In TEACH IN HANDLE mode, handle feed and jog feed
can be done when optional manual handle feed function
is provided, but incremental feed only when it is not
included.
The program can be edited in both TEACH IN JOG and
TEACH IN HANDLE modes.
4 When the CNC is operating in the MEM mode and is
switched to MDI, the unit automatically switches to single
block operation, then enters the MDI mode at the end of the
executing block. The STL signal turns to “0” at this time, but
the SPL signal does not turn to “1” (see Fig. 2.6 (a)).
MEM mode
Mode select signal state
MDI mode
Operation
227
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
When the CNC is operating in the MDI mode and is switched
to MEM mode, the executing command is finished before
the CNC switches to the MEM mode (Fig. 2.6 (b)).
MDI mode
Mode select signal state
MEM mode
Operation
Memory opera-
Executing command tion possible in
this range
STL
NOTE
When the HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE mode is
selected while the CNC is operating in the MEM or MDI
mode, the automatic or MDI operation stops, the STL signal
turns to “0”, the SPL signal simultaneously turns to “1”, and
the CNC enters the HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE
mode. Manual handle feed or incremental feed by axis
direction select signal is possible under this state. Since the
MEM mode or MDI mode commands are held, operation
can be restarted by the cycle start signal by selecting the
MDI or MEM mode. However, if operation was stopped by
switching to the HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE mode
during manual data input or automatic operation, it can be
restarted only by the mode in use before the operation was
stopped (Fig. 2.6 (c)).
MEM/MDI mode
Mode select signal state
HANDLE/INC or
TEACH IN HAN-
DLE mode
Manual handle
/incremental
feed enabled
STL
SPL
ST
Cycle start signal
228
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
NOTE
When the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected during
MEM or MDI mode operation, operation stops, the STL
signal turns to “0”, the SPL signal simultaneously turns to
“1”, and the CNC enters the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode.
Manual feed by feed axis direction select signal is possible
under this state. Operation can be restarted by returning to
the original state, as described for HANDLE/STEP or
TEACH IN HANDLE mode . When the mode is switched to
the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode during manual handle
feed or step feed operation, the CNC ignores the manual
handle feed or step feed command and manual jog feed
becomes effective. If a feed axis direction select signal turns
to “1” before the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected,
that signal is ignored. The feed axis select signal is selected
by turning the necessary feed axis direction signal to “1”
after turning all the feed axis direction select signals to “0”.
It is possible to perform handle feed in TEACH IN JOG mode
by parameter THD no.7100#1. For details, refer to item (3)
(Fig. 2.6 (d), (e)).
MEM/MDI mode
Operation in the
MEM mode or MDI
mode
Jog feed
enabled
STL
SPL
100ms or more
MEM/MDI/HADLE/
Mode select signal state INC mode/TEACH
IN HANDLE mode
Jog or TEACH
IN JOG
Feed axis
direction select
signal
229
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
The mode switching operation is summarized in the time
chart below (Fig. 2.6 (f)).
M M M M
D D D
H / S or
J End of opera-
End of operation tion
Memory read Memory Memory Memory read
operation MDI command MDI command
operation operation operation
ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL 4.1 Manual Reference Position Return
(This manual)
230
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
2.7
PATH SELECTION/
DISPLAY OF
OPTIONAL PATH
NAMES (TWO–PATH
CONTROL)
General Path selection specifies whether operations performed using the
CRT/MDI panel are for path 1 or path 2.
The operations, as used here, include displaying and setting data items
(such as tool compensation values), inputting command programs in the
MDI mode, and editing machining programs in program memory.
Additionally, names of each path can be changed by parameter.
Signal
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G063 HEAD
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8100 IAL RST
231
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 This parameter is dedicated to the two–path control.
2 Specify these parameters for each series.
3 For characters and codes, see the correspondence table in
2.1.15 software operator’s panel.
4 When codes are 0, HEAD1 and HEAD2 for T series and
PATH1 or PATH2 for M series are displayed.
232
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
2.8
STATUS OUTPUT
SIGNAL
General The table below lists the status output signals for notifying the state of the
CNC. See the sections listed in the table for details of each signal.
Signal name Symbol Reference section
Alarm signal AL 2.4
Signal
233
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 The rapid traverse in automatic operation includes all rapid
traverses in canned cycle positioning, automatic reference
point return, etc., as well as the move command G00. The
rapid traverse in manual operation also includes the rapid
traverse in reference position return.
2 Once rapid traverse has been selected, this signal remains
“1”, including during a stop, until another feedrate has been
selected and movement is started.
CAUTION
This signal is not output in the feed hold state.
NOTE
This signal is output even when the feedrate override is 0%,
or during interlock.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F002 CUT RPDO
234
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
2.9
VRDY OFF ALARM
IGNORE SIGNAL
General The German VDE safety standard requires that the motor be deactivated
when the safety guard is opened. By using the VRDY OFF alarm ignore
signal, however, the CNC can be restarted without resetting, even if the
safety guard has been opened.
Signal
235
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G066 IGNVRY
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1804 SAK
401 SERVO ALARM: n–TH The n–th axis (axis 1–8) servo amplifi-
AXIS VRDY OFF er READY signal (DRDY) went off.
Caution
CAUTION
1 When the control enters NOT READY status due to
emergency stop or a servo alarm and then the control is
reset, reset processing is not terminated until the VRDY
OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 0.
2 When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 1 and the
servo amplifier ready signal is set to off, the motor is freed
from the drive, but follow up is not performed. To perform
follow up, set the servo off signal to 1.
Note
NOTE
While the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 1, and a
servo alarm other than alarm No. 401 occurs, the control
unit detects the alarm.
236
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
2.10
ABNORMAL LOAD
DETECTION
General Machine collision, defective, and damaged cutters cause a large load
torque on the servo and spindle motors, compared with normal rapid
traverse or cutting feed. This function detects a load torque on the motors
and sends it as an estimated load torque to the PMC via the CNC. If the
detected load is abnormally great compared with the value specified in the
parameter, the function stops the servo motor as early as possible or
reverses the motor by an appropriate value specified in a parameter, in
order to minimize a possible damage to the machine. (The function to
reverse motors is effective only for servo motors.)
237
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter setting The following flowcharts explain how to specify parameters for the
abnormal load detection function.
(1) Servo axis
Abnormal load detection
function is available.
Yes
<Adjustment>
(2) Spindle
Abnormal load detection
function is available.
Specify parameter Nos. 4247, 4248, 4249, and 4250, and reset parameter No.
4341 to 0.
238
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
Signal
First–spindle abnormal
load detected signal
ABTSP1 <F090#1>
Second–spindle
abnormal load detected
signal ABTSP2 <F090#2>
Servo axis f — f —
Cs contour control f — f —
Rigid tapping f — — f
239
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0090 ABTSP2 ABTSP1 ABTQSV
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2015 TDOUT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2016 ABNTDT
240
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
When this parameter is set to 0, the motor stops immediately upon the
detection of abnormal load.
241
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4015 SPLDMT
4247 Magnetic flux compensation time constant for spindle load torque monitor
242
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
409 Servo alarm: Abnormal load An abnormal load was detected on a servo
detected on axis n motor, or on a spindle motor during Cs
mode. To release the alarm, use RESET.
(2) Spindle
754 Abnormal load detected on An abnormal load was detected on the first
the first spindle spindle motor. To release the alarm, use
RESET.
764 Abnormal load detected on An abnormal load was detected on the se-
the second spindle cond spindle motor. To release the alarm,
use RESET.
Reading the load torque The load torque data can be read at the PMC using its window function.
data
(1) Servo axis
2
(Completion code)
(Not to be set)
4
(Data length)
(Not to be set)
6 (Data number)
0
8 (M = 1 to n: Specifies separately
(Data attribute) for each axis whether
data for it is to be
M read; n is an axis
(M = 1 to n or –1) number.
(Not to be set)
42
243
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
[Completion code]
Top address + 0
(Function code)
211
2
(Completion code)
?
(Refer to the above description
about the completion code.)
4 (Data length)
L
(L = 2*n, where n is the num-
ber of specified axes)
6 (Data number)
0
8 (Data attribute)
M
(M: Data at input) Description of value
10 Load torque for the specified Signed binary format (negative val-
axis (2 bytes) ue in two’s complement)
Description of value
10 Load torque for the first axis Signed binary format (negative val-
(2 bytes) ue in two’s complement)
244
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
(2) Spindle
[Input data structure]
2
(Completion code)
(Not to be set)
4
(Data length)
(Not to be set)
6 (Data number)
1
8 (M = 1 to n: Specifies separately
(Data attribute) for each axis whether
data for it is to be
M read; n is an axis
(M = 1 to n or –1) number.
(Not to be set)
42
[Completion code]
245
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Top address + 0
(Function code)
211
2
(Completion code)
?
(Refer to the above description
about the completion code.)
4 (Data length)
L
(L = 2*n, where n is the num-
ber of specified axes)
6 (Data number)
1
8 (Data attribute)
M
(M: Data at input) Description of value
10 Load torque for the specified Signed binary format (negative val-
axis (2 bytes) ue in two’s complement)
Description of value
10 Load torque for the first axis Signed binary format (negative val-
(2 bytes) ue in two’s complement)
246
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
2.11
SERVO/SPINDLE
MOTOR SPEED
DETECTION
General The servo axis and spindle motor speeds are monitored. If the speed of
an axis exceeds a preset maximum (specified by parameter setting), the
corresponding signal is output to a Y address (specified by parameter
setting) of the PMC.
(1) Setting a Y address for signal output
In parameter No. 1891, set a Y byte address to which signals are to be
output.
(2) Setting a maximum speed
Set the maximum speed for each servo–motor–controlled axis in
parameter No. 1890.
Set the maximum speed for the axis controlled by the first serial
spindle motor in S1 of parameter No. 4345.
Set the maximum speed for the axis controlled by the second serial
spindle motor in S2 of parameter No. 4345.
When 0 is specified as the maximum speed for an axis, the speed of
that axis is not monitored.
(3) Signal input
Set the motor speed detection function enable signal MSDFON to 1.
When the power is turned on, the CNC checks the status of this signal.
If the signal is 1, the CNC enables the motor speed detection function.
When MSDFON is 1, and a motor speed exceeds the preset maximum,
the corresponding bit of the set Y address is set to 1.
The following diagram illustrates the signal output timing.
Speed
Command for axis
? rpm
(Preset maximum)
Time
NOTE
The status of each signal is updated every 8 msec.
(Fluctuations in real speed of less than 8 msec duration
cannot be detected.)
247
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
CAUTION
1 Immediately after the PMC ladder starts operating, set the
signal to 1.
2 When this signal is set to 0 after the CNC starts, the
servo/spindle motor speed detection function is not
disabled.
248
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
· The servo motor speed does not exceed the maximum speed set in
parameter No. 1890.
CAUTION
1 When two–path control is applied, the detection results for
the axes in path 2 are output to the addresses set with
parameter No. 1891 for path 2, in the same way as
described above. Set the parameter for each path so that
the difference between the setting made for path 1 and that
made for path 2 is at least +2. This prevents the outputs
from the paths from overlapping.
2 Some of the servo motor speed detection signals DSV1 to
DSV8 and spindle motor speed detection signals DSP1,
DSP2, and DSP3 may not function depending on the axis
configuration. Even when some signals do not function, the
addresses Y(n + 0) #7 to #0 and Y(n + 1) #1 and #0 must
not be used by the PMC ladder.
3 When this function is used, Y(n + 1) #7 to #3 are reserved.
These bits must not be used by the PMC ladder.
4 A spindle motor may be used for controlling apositioning
axis, or a servo motor may be used for a spindle. This
function performs motor–related detection.
Example: When Cs contour axis control is performed (the
spindle and C–axis are controlled by the first
serial spindle motor), the fourth axis is used as
the C–axis.
In this case, if the preset maximum speed is
exceeded, the following occurs regardless of
whether spindle control or C–axis control is being
performed:
DSP1 <Y(n + 1) #0, where n = setting in
parameter No. 1891> is turned on.
DSV4 <Y(n + 0) #3, where n = setting in
parameter No. 1891> is not affected.
249
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G016 MSDFON
Reserved
Parameter
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
NOTE
No motor speed detection signals are output when the
servo/spindle motor speed detection function is not used or
0 is set in this parameter.
1891 Initial value of the Y address where motor speed detection signals are output
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
250
B–62753EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
WARNING
1 Be sure to specify a Y address that is not used with a
PMC sequence program (ladder).
2 When controlling two path lathe, ensure that the same
value is not set for path 1 and path 2. (Set a separate
address for path 1 and path 2.)
NOTE
No motor speed detection signals are output when the
servo/spindle motor speed detection function is not used,
the value 0 or a value beyond the allowable data range is
specified in this parameter, or an input/output address
specified within the allowable data range represents an
address where no I/O device is mounted.
WARNING
For this parameter, set a motor speed rather than a
spindle speed.
NOTE
The motor speed detection signals are not output when
the servo/spindle motor speed detection function is not
used, or 0 is set for this parameter.
251
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
1 Spindle motor speed detection is enabled only for serial
spindles.
2 The relationship between servo motor speed detection
signals DSV1 to DSV8 and the servo motors depends on
the servo axis number (servo connector number) set in
parameter No. 1023.
3 When two–path control is applied, commands can be
switched between the paths by using composite control (T
series) or S command selection.
Even when such command switching is performed, the
relationship between detection signals DSV1 to DSV8,
DSP1, DSP2, and DSP3 and the motors remains as is. (The
relationship is determined as described in Note 2 above.)
252
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
3 MANUAL OPERATION
253
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
3.1
JOG FEED/
INCREMENTEL FEED
General
Jog feed In the jog mode, turning a feed axis and direction selection signal to “1”
on the machine operator’s panel continuously moves the tool along the
selected axis in the selected direction.
Manual operation is allowed for one axis at a time. 3 axes can be
selected at a time by parameter JAX (No.1002#0).
Incremental feed In the incremental feed mode, turning a feed axis and direction selection
signal to “1” on the machine operator’s panel moves the tool one step
along the selected axis in the selected direction. The minimum distance
the tool is moved is the least input increment. Each step can be 10, 100,
or 1000 times the least input increment.
Signal The following signals determine the way in which jog feed or incremental
feed is executed.
Selection Jog feed Incremental feed
254
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
The only difference between jog feed and incremental feed is the method
of selecting the feed distance. In jog feed, the tool continues to be fed
while the following signals selecting the feed axis and direction are “1”:
+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, +J3, –J3, etc. In incremental feed, the tool is fed by
one step.
The distance of the step is selected by the manual handle feed move
distance select signal MP1 an d MP2.
For the signals selecting the mode, see Section 2.6, “Mode Selection
Signals.” For the manual handle feed selection signals, MP1 and MP2 of
selection of the move amount, see 3.2 “Manual handle feed.” For rapid
traverse override signals ROV1 and ROV2, see Section 7.1.7.1, “Feedrate
Override Signals.”
Other signals are described below.
[Operation] When the signal is high, the control unit operates as described below.
When jog feed or incremental feed is allowed, the control unit moves
the specified axis in the specified direction.
In jog feed, the control unit continues to feed the axis while the signal
is “1”.
Jog mode
(or Teach in jog mode)
+J1
In incremental feed, the control unit feeds the specified axis by the step
distance which is specified by the manual handle feed move distance
selection signal MP1, MP2. Then the control unit stops it. Even if the
signal is set to “0” while the axis is being fed, the control unit does not
stop feeding it.
To feed the axis again, set the signal to “0”, then set it to “1” again.
255
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
+J1
NOTE
1 If both the positive direction and negative direction signals
of the same axis are simultaneously set to “1”, neither the
positive direction nor the negative direction is selected. The
control unit assumes that both these signals are set to “0”.
2 If the feed axis and direction selection signals are set to “1”
before the jog feed mode or incremental feed mode is
selected, these signals are invalidated. After the jog feed
mode or incremental feed mode is selected, set these signal
to “0”, then set them to “1” again.
Jog mode
or incremental feed mode
+J1
3 If the control unit is reset while the feed axis and direction
selection signals are set to “1” or if a feed axis and direction
signal turns to “1” while the control unit is in the reset state,
the signal cannot be validated by releasing the reset state.
After the reset state is released, set these signals to “0”,
then set them to “1” again.
Reset
+J1
Manual Feedrate
Override Signal
*JV0 – *JV15<G011>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Selects a feedrate in jog feed or incremental feed. These signals are
sixteen binary code signals, which correspond to the override values as
follows:
256
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
ȍ|2
15
1
Override value (%) = 0.01% Vi |
i+0
where
Vi = 0 when the *JVi signal is “1”
Vi = 1 when the *JVi signal is “0”
The override value is assumed to be zero when all of the signals, (*JV0
to *JV15) are set to “1” or “0”. When this occurs, the feed is stopped.
The override value can be specified in the range of 0% to 655.34% in units
of 0.01%. Some examples are listed below.
*JV0 – *JV15 Override value
12 8 4 0 (%)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0.01
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0.10
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1.00
10.00
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
100.00
1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
400.00
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 655.34
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[Operation] If rapid traverse selection signal RT is “0” during jog feed or incremental
feed, the manual feedrate specified by the parameter (no. 1423) is
overridden by the value specified by the JVi signal.
NOTE
The JVi signals also serve as the override signals during dry
run in automatic operation mode.
[Function] Selects a rapid traverse rate for jog feed or incremental feed.
[Operation] When the signal turns to “1”, the control unit operates as described below:
The control unit executes the jog feed or incremental feed at a rapid
traverse rate. The rapid traverse override is validated.
When the signal is switched from “1” to “0” or vice versa during jog
feed or incremental feed, the feedrate is decelerated until it reaches
zero, then increased to the specified value. During acceleration and
deceleration, the feed axis and direction selection signal can be kept
“1”.
257
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
RT
Rapid traverse
rate
WARNING
After the power is turned on, the stroke limit function does
not work until the reference position return is completed.
During this period, the control unit ignores the RT signal, if
it is set to “1”, and keeps moving the tool at a feedrate
selected by the manual feedrate override signal. A
parameter RPD (No. 1401#0) can be specified so that the
rapid traverse is validated before the reference position
return is completed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G019 RT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G102 –J8 –J7 –J6 –J5 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1002 JAX
258
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 RPD
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JRV
NOTE
Specify a feedrate in parameter No. 1423.
1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis
259
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Set the rate of manual rapid traverse when the rapid traverse override is
100% for each axis.
NOTE
If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter 1420 is assumed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1610 JGLx
260
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
NOTE
Manual feedrate override is input using the manual feedrate
override signal (*JV0 to *JV15) of the interface between the
PMC and the CNC.
Warning
WARNING
For incremental feeding along an axis under diameter
programming, the tool moves in units of the diameter.
Note
NOTE
1 Time constant and method of automatic acceleration/
deceleration for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00
in programmed command.
2 If a manual pulse generator is provided, the manual handle
feed mode is enabled instead of incremental feed mode.
However, using parameter JHD (bit 0 of parameter No.
7100) enables both manual handle and incremental feed in
the manual handle feed mode.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.2 JOG FEED
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN) III.3.3 INCREMENTAL FEED
261
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
3.2
MANUAL HANDLE
FEED
General In the manual handle feed mode, the tool can be minutely moved by
rotating the manual pulse generator. Select the axis along which the tool
is to be moved with the handle feed axis selection signal.
The minimum distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse
generator is rotated by one graduation is equal to the least input increment.
Or the distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse generator is
rotated by one graduation can be magnified by 10 times or by one of the
two magnifications specified by parameters (No. 7113 and 7114).
The handle magnifications can be selected by the manual handle feed
move distance selection signal.
The number of manual pulse generators available depends on the type of
an option used as listed below.
(M series)
– Control with one manual handle: Up to one generator
– Control with two or three manual handles: Up to three generators
(T series)
– Control with one manual handle: Up to one generator
– Control with two manual handles: Up to two generators
Two–path control Which manual pulse generator moves which axis of which path depends
on the setting of manual handle feed axis select signals for each path. For
each path, eight bits are reserved as manual handle feed axis select signals.
First Second
manual pulse manual pulse
generator generator
Path 1 Path 2
Availability of manual Parameter JHD (bit 0 of No. 7100) enables or disables the manual handle
handle feed in Jog mode feed in the JOG mode.
When the parameter JHD( bit 0 of No. 7100) is set 1,both manual handle
feed and incremental feed are enabled.
Availability of manual Parameter THD (bit 1 of No. 7100) enables or disables the manual handle
handle feed in TEACH IN feed generator in the TEACH IN JOG mode.
JOG mode
262
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
Signal
(Two–path control)
HS1A#1 – HS1D#1
<G018#0 – #3>
HS2A#1 – HS2D#1
<G018#4 – #7>
HS3A#1–HA3D#1 (M
series)
<G019#0–#3>
HS1A#2 – HS1D#2
<G1018#0 – #3>
HS2A#2 – HS2D#2
<G1018#4 – #7>
HS3A#3–HS3D#2 (M
series)
<G1019#0–#3>
263
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
<Two–path control>
Manual handle feed axis selection
Feed axis
HSnD#1 HSnC#1 HSnB#1 HSnA#1
264
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
*1 Scale factors m and n are specified using parameter Nos. 7113 and
7114.
WARNING
1 Because the least input increment is used as the units for
manual handle and incremental feed, the same value
represents a different distance depending on whether the
metric or inch input system is used.
2 For an axis under diameter programming, the tool moves by
the diameter value.
NOTE
See Section 3.3, “Manual Handle Interrupt” for manual
handle interrupts, and Section 3.1, “Jog Feed/Incremental
Feed” for incremental feed.
265
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G019 MP2 MP1 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G019 MP2#1 MP1#1 HS3D#1 HS3C#1 HS3B#1 HS3A#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1018 HS2D #2 HS2C #2 HS2B #2 HS2A #2 HS1D #2 HS1C #2 HS1B #2 HS1A #2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1019 MP2#2 MP1#2 HS3D#2 HS3C#2 HS3B#2 HS3A#2
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7100 HPF THD JHD
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7101 IOL
266
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7102 HNGx
Warning
WARNING
Rotating the handle quickly with a large magnification such
as x100 moves the tool too fast or the tool may not stop
immediately after the handle is no longer rotated or the
distance the tool moves may not match the graduations on
the manual pulse generator. The feedrate is clamped at the
rapid traverse rate.
267
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Caution
CAUTION
Rotate the manual pulse generator at a rate of five rotations
per second or lower.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
268
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
3.3
MANUAL HANDLE
INTERRUPTION
General Rotating the manual pulse generator during automatic operation can
increase the distance traveled by the amount corresponding to the handle
feed. The axis to which the handle interrupt is applied is selected using
the manual handle interrupt axis select signal.
The minimum travel distance per graduation is the least command
increment. The minimum travel distance can be increased by tenfold or
by two scale factors (parameter Nos. 7113 and 7114). Each scale factor
can be selected using the manual handle travel distance select signal
(Section 3.2, ”Manual Handle Feed”).
Signal
269
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
<For 1–path control >
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G041 HS2ID HS2IC HS2IB HS2IA HS1ID HS1IC HS1IB HS1IA
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G042 HS3ID HS3IC HS3IB HS3IA
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G042 HS3ID HS3IC HS3IB HS3IA
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1041 HS2ID #2 HS2IC #2 HS2IB #2 HS2IA #2 HS1ID #2 HS1IC #2 HS1IB #2 HS1IA #2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1042 HS3ID HS3IC HS3IB HS3IA
Warning
WARNING
The travel distance by handle interruption is determined
according to the amount by which the manual pulse
generator is turned and the handle feed magnification (x1,
x10, xM, xN).
Since this movement is not accelerated or decelerated, it is
very dangerous to use a large magnification value for
handle interruption.
Note
NOTE
1 No handle interrupt can be used in manual operation mode
(for example, job feed mode, manual handle feed mode
and TEACH IN HANDLE mode).
2 Handle interruption is disabled when the machine is locked
or interlocked.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.4.6 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
270
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
3.4 The tool axis direction handle feed function allows the tool to be moved
through a specified distance by handle feed in the axis direction of the
TOOL AXIS tool, tilted by rotating the rotation axes.
DIRECTION HANDLE Tool axis direction handle feed function B provides two functions: tool
FEED FUNCTION/ axis direction handle feed and tool axis perpendicular direction handle
feed, which performs handle feed in the direction perpendicular to the tool
TOOL AXIS
axis.
DIRECTION HANDLE
FEED FUNCTION B
3.4.1
TOOL AXIS
DIRECTION HANDLE
FEED FUNCTION
General By using the tool axis direction handle feed function, the tool can be
moved in the axis direction of the tool by an amount equal to the manual
pulse generator rotation.
Tool axis direction handle feed is enabled when the following four
conditions are satisfied:
NOTE
When both the tool axis direction handle feed mode signal
and tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode
signal are 1, neither mode is enabled. In this case, normal
handle mode is set.
(3) In parameter No. 7121, the axis number for the first manual pulse
generator is set as the tool axis direction handle feed mode axis.
(4) A manual handle feed axis is selected for the axis set in parameter No.
7121.
Assume that the rotation axes for basic axes X, Y, and Z are A, B, and C,
respectively. Assume also that the Z–axis represents the tool axis in the
machine coordinate system. Then, depending on the axis configuration
of the machine, four tool axis directions are available. Specify the desired
type with parameter No. 7120.
271
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
A
X Y X Y
(3) A–B axis (A–axis master) type (4) A–B axis (B–axis master) type
Z Z
(Tool axis) (Tool axis)
C
B B
A
X Y X A Y
272
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
Signal
NOTE
When tool axis direction handle feed mode signal ALNGH
and tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode
signal RGHTH are both set to 1, neither mode is set.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G023 ALNGH
Parameter
Settings for tool axis
direction handle feed #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7104 3D2X 3D1X CXC TLX
273
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
1 : X–axis direction
CXC Tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular direction handle
feed is performed with:
0 : 5–axis machine.
1 : 4–axis machine.
3D1X When the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular
direction handle feed function is used, the coordinates of the first rotation
axis are:
0: The machine coordinates when the tool axis direction handle feed
mode or tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode is
entered, or upon a reset.
1: The value set in parameter No. 7144.
3D2X When the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular
direction handle feed function is used, the coordinates of the second
rotation axis are:
0: The machine coordinates when the tool axis direction handle feed
mode or tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode is
entered, or upon a reset.
1: The value set in parameter No. 7145.
Axis configuration for
using the tool axis
direction handle feed
function
7120 Axis configuration for using the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis per-
pendicular direction handle feed function
274
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
7145 Coordinates of the second rotation axis for using the tool axis direction handle
feed or tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed function
When the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular
direction handle feed function is used, and 3D1X and 3D2X (bits 3 and
4 of parameter No. 7104) are set to 1, parameter Nos. 7144 and 7145 set
the coordinates (angular displacements) of the first and second rotation
axes, respectively. If CXC (bit 2 of parameter No. 7104) is set to 1,
however, the coordinates of the second rotation axis is assumed to be 0
regardless of the settings of 3D2X and parameter No. 7145.
Axis selection in the tool
axis direction handle
feed mode 7121 Axis selection in tool axis direction handle feed mode
Note
NOTE
1 The basic axes X, Y, and Z are determined by parameter No.
1022 (plane selection). The rotation axes A, B, and C are
determined by parameter No. 1020 (axis name).
2 If one of the two axes specified by a type set depending on
the axis configuration does not exist, alarm P/S 5015 is
issued.
275
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.6 Tool axis direction handle feed /
(For Machining Center) Tool axis direction handle feed B
(B–62764EN)
3.4.2
TOOL AXIS
PERPENDICULAD
DIRECTION HANDLE
FEED FUNCTION
General This function moves the tool by an amount corresponding to the rotation
of the manual pulse generator handle, in the direction specified relative
to the tool axis, tilted due to movement of the rotation axis.
NOTE
When both the tool axis direction handle feed mode signal
and tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode
signal are 1, neither mode is enabled. In this case, normal
handle mode is set.
(3) In parameter Nos. 7141 and 7142, the axis number for the first manual
pulse generator is set as the tool axis perpendicular direction handle
feed mode axis.
(4) A manual handle feed axis is selected for the axis set in parameter Nos.
7141 and 7142.
Assume that the rotation axes for basic axes X, Y, and Z are A, B, and C,
respectively. When the direction of the tool axis corresponds to the
direction of the Z–axis in the machine coordinate system, either rotation
axis A or B is used with the tool axis, depending on the machine axis
configuration type. For each type, feed in the X–axis direction and that
in the T–axis direction are defined as described below. Specify the desired
type with parameter No. 7120.
276
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
A
X Y X Y
277
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
NOTE
When tool axis direction handle feed mode signal ALNGH
and tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode
signal RGHTH are both set to 1, neither mode is set.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G023 RGHTH
Parameter
Settings for tool axis
perpendicular direction
handle feed #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7104 3D2X 3D1X CXC TLX
278
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
0 : 5–axis machine.
1 : 4–axis machine.
3D1X When the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular
direction handle feed function is used, the coordinates of the first rotation
axis are:
0: The machine coordinates when the tool axis direction handle feed
mode or tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode is
entered, or upon a reset.
1: The value set in parameter No. 7144.
3D2X When the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular
direction handle feed function is used, the coordinates of the second
rotation axis are:
0: The machine coordinates when the tool axis direction handle feed
mode or tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode is
entered, or upon a reset.
1: The value set in parameter No. 7145.
Axis configuration for
using the tool axis
perpendicular direction
handle feed function
7120 Axis configuration for using the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis per-
pendicular direction handle feed function
279
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
7142 Direction of the Y–axis in handle feed mode, in a direction perpendicular to the tool axis
7145 Coordinates of the second rotation axis for handle feed in the tool axis direction
or handle feed in a direction perpendicular to the tool axis
280
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
Note
NOTE
1 The basic axes X, Y, and Z are determined by parameter No.
1022 (plane selection). The rotation axes A, B, and C are
determined by parameter No. 1020 (axis name).
2 If one of the two axes specified by a type set depending on
the axis configuration does not exist, alarm P/S 5015 is
issued. In handle feed mode in a direction perpendicular to
the tool axis, either the A–C axis type or B–C axis type must
be selected as the axis configuration type.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.6 Tool axis direction handle feed /
(For Machining Center) Tool axis direction handle feed B
(B–62764EN)
281
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
3.5
MANUAL
LINEAR/CIRCULAR
INTERPOLATION
General In manual handle feed or jog feed, the following types of feed operations
are enabled in addition to the conventional feed operation along a
specified single axis (X–axis, Y–axis, Z–axis, and so forth) based on
simultaneous 1–axis control:
Feed along a tilted straight line in the XY plane (M series) or ZX plane
(T series) based on simultaneous 2–axis control (linear feed)
Feed along a circle in the XY plane (M series) or ZX plane (T series)
based on simultaneous 2–axis control (circular feed)
Y Y
Workpiece
Workpiece
Tool Tool
X X
<<Linear feed>> <<Circular feed>>
NOTE
The X–axis and Y–axis (M series) or Z–axis and X–axis (T
series) must be the first controlled axis and second
controlled axis, respectively. The following description
applies to the X–Y plane for the M Series. For the T Series,
read the X–Y plane as the Z–X plane.
Explanations
Line/circle definition A line or circle definition is not required for axial feed. For linear or
circular feed, however, a line and circle must be defined, using the
interface described later. (For circular feed, for example, the center and
radius of the circle must also be specified.)
Interface area The R area of the PMC–RB/RC is used partly for line and circle
definitions. Set the necessary data in this area, using the PMC or macro
executor. See the following descriptions for what data is to be set at each
address.
Data setting
(a) Input data (PMC–RB/RC –> CNC)
Lines and circles are defined by setting the data listed below.
282
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
Num- Setting
Data name ber of
bytes Linear feed Circular feed
R962 to R965 4 Approach direction (X–axis direction) Center of the circle (Xo)
R966 to R969 4 Approach direction (Y–axis direction) Center of the circle (Yo)
R970 to R973 4 Distance (P) between the origin and a Radius (R) of the circle
given line
Num- Description
Data name ber of
bytes Linear feed Circular feed
(8) R980 to R983 4 A distance from the current position A distance from the current
to a given line is output. position to a given circle is out-
put.
R984 to R989 6 (Reserve) Do not use.
283
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
The origin mentioned above is that of the absolute
coordinate system. X and Y used in this description refer to
coordinates in the absolute coordinate system. These
coordinates represent the center of the tool.
q
X
o
Iy
X
o Ix
Data
1) R961 : Linear feed
2) R962 : Approach directionIx · 230
3) R966 to R 969 : Approach direction Iy · 230
4) R970 to R973 : Distance P between the origin and a given line
5) R974 : Direction in which the guidance handle moves
6) R975 : Whether the limit function is enabled
7) R979 : Notice of changes in the setting
284
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
Y Y
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
tion
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
Prohibited
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
area
Approach direction
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ X
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ X
Specified line
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Specified line
285
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
CAUTION
1 Line and circle definitions (data items 1 to 6) can be set or
changed during manual operation mode (manual handle or
jog feed mode). This data notifies the CNC when the
definitions are changed.
After setting data items 1 to 6, reset R979 (notice of changes
in the setting) to 0. When the R979 value becomes 0, the
CNC assumes that data items 1 to 6 (R961 to R975) are
changed, and reads them, then sets R979 back to 1. Until
R979 becomes 0 again, the CNC continues to carry out
linear or circular feed according to the read data.
2 Do not set R979 (notice of changes in the setting) when any
axis is running.
CW
Data
1) R961 : Circular feed and direction of rotation (CW/CCW)
2) R962 : Center of the circle Xo
3) R966 to R 969 : Center of the circle Yo
4) R970 to R973 : Radius R
5) R974 : Which is to be machined, inside or outside?
6) R975 : Whether the limit function is enabled
7) R979 : Notice of changes in the setting
286
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
Set R961 to 2 or 3.
If R961 is 2, the tool moves along the circle clockwise, when the
guidance handle is rotated in the forward direction. If R961 is 3,
the tool moves along the circle counterclockwise, when the
guidance handle is rotated in the forward direction.
2), 3) Specify the coordinates (Xo, Yo) of the center of the circle. (R962
to R965, R966 to R969)
NOTE
X and Y used in this description refer to coordinates in the
absolute coordinate system.
R962 to R965 = Xo
R966 to R969 = Yo
Each coordinate is four bytes. The unit of the data is the least input
increment.
287
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
<Inside to be machined> <Outside to be machined>
Y Y
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Approach direction
Prohibited area
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Approach Prohib-
ited area
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
direction
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ X
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ X
288
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
Linear feed
289
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Specified circle
Circular feed
Feedrate for manual Feedrate
handle feed
The feedrate depends on the speed at which a manual handle is turned.
A distance to be traveled by the tool (along a tangent in the case of linear
or circular feed) when a manual handle is turned by one pulse can be
selected using the manual handle feed travel distance magnification
switch.
Manual handle selection The Series 16/18 has three manual pulse generator interfaces to allow up
to three manual handles to be connected. For information about how to
use the manual handles connected to the interfaces (whether to use each
manual handle as a handle for feed along an axis, as a guidance handle,
or as an approach handle), refer to the relevant manual provided by the
machine tool builder.
Direction of movement The user can specify the direction of the tool moved along a straight line
using manual handles or circle (for example, whether to make a clockwise or counterclockwise
movement along a circle) when the guidance handle or approach handle
is turned clockwise or counterclockwise. For details, refer to the relevant
manual provided by the machine tool builder.
Jog feed (JOG) In jog feed, the tool can be moved along a specified axis (X–axis, Y–axis,
Z–axis, ..., or the 8th axis), or can be moved along a tilted straight line
(linear feed) or a circle (circular feed).
(1) Feed along a specified axis (simultaneous 1–axis control)
While a feed axis and its direction are specified with the feed axis
direction select switch, the tool moves in the specified axis direction
at the feedrate specified in parameter No. 1423. The feedrate can be
overridden using the manual feedrate override dial.
290
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
Limitations
Mirror image Never use the mirror image function when performing manual operation.
(Perform manual operation when the mirror image switch is off, and
mirror image setting is off.)
Two–path control Manual linear/circular interpolation can not used with two–path control.
Signal The following signals determine the way in which jog feed or manual
handle feed is executed.
Selection Jog feed Manual handle feed
291
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
For the signals selecting the mode, see Section 2.6, “Mode Selection
Signals.” For the manual handle feed selection signals, MP1 and MP2 of
selection of the move amount, see 3.2 “Manual handle feed.” For manual
feedrate override signals *JV0 – *JV15, see Section 3.1, “Jog
feed/incremental feed.”
Other signals are described below.
292
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
293
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G019 MP2 MP1 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A
Parameter
1410 Dry run rate/Jog feedrate (linear feed, circular feed)
Set the dry run with auto operation rate or jog feedrate with linear feed,
circular feed when the manual feedrate is overridden by 100%.
1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7100 HPF THD JHD
294
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
HPF When a manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is issued,
0: The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the handle pulses
corresponding to the excess are ignored. (The graduations of the
manual pulse generator may not agree with the distance the machine
has traveled.)
1: The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the handle pulses
corresponding to the excess are not ignored, but stored in the CNC. (If
the rotation of the manual pulse generator is stopped, the machine
moves by the distance corresponding to the pulses preserved in the
CNC, then stops.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7101 IOL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7102 HNGx
295
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.7 Manual linear/circular interpolation
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
296
B–62753EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
3.6
MANUAL RIGID
TAPPING
General For execution of rigid tapping, set rigid mode, then switch to handle mode
and move the tapping axis with a manual handle.
Manual rigid tapping is enabled by setting bit 0 (HRG) of parameter No.
5203 to 1.
Basic Procedure 1 Stop the spindle and servo axes, then set MDI mode by pressing the
MDI switch among the mode selection switches.
2 Enter and execute the following program:
M29 S1000 ;
G91 G84 Z0 F1000 ;
The program above is required to determine a screw lead and set rigid
tapping mode. In this program, a tapping axis must always be
specified. Specify a value that does not operate the tapping axis.
WARNING
In this MDI programming, never specify commands to
position the tool at a drilling position and at point R.
Otherwise, the tool moves along an axis.
CAUTION
At this time, never press the reset key. Otherwise, rigid
mode is canceled.
5 To perform rigid tapping, select a tapping axis with the handle feed
axis select switch, and move the tapping axis with the manual handle.
Cancellation of rigid To cancel rigid mode, specify G80 as same the normal rigid tapping.
mode When the reset key is pressed, rigid mode is canceled, but the canned cycle
is not canceled.
When the rigid mode switch is to be set to off for rigid mode cancellation
(when bit 2 (CRG) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 0), the G80 command
ends after the rigid mode switch is set to off.
Spindle rotation The rotation direction of the spindle is determined by a specified tapping
direction cycle G code and the setting of bit 1 (HRM) of parameter No. 5203. For
example, when the HRM parameter is set to 0 in G84 mode, the spindle
makes forward rotations as the tapping axis moves in the minus direction.
(When the tapping axis moves in the plus direction, the spindle makes
reverse rotations.)
297
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–62753EN–1/01
Arbitrary tapping axis By setting bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101 to 1, an arbitrary tapping
axis can be selected. In this case, specify a G code for plane selection and
tapping axis address when rigid mode is set in MDI mode.
Specification of M29 and In an MDI program for setting rigid mode, G84 can be used as a rigid
G84 in the same block tapping G code, or M29 and G84 can be specified in the same block.
Specification of manual Set bit 0 (HPF) of parameter No. 7100 to 0 so that when manual handle
handle feed faster than feed is specified which is faster than the rapid traverse rate, the handle
the rapid traverse rate pulses beyond the rapid traverse rate are ignored.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5203 HRM HRG
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.8 MANUAL RIGID TAPPING
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
298
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
299
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
4.1
MANUAL
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
General The tool is moved in the direction specified in parameter ZMI (bit 5 of No.
1006) for each axis by turning the feed axis and direction select signal to
“1” in the manual reference position return mode, and is returned to the
reference position.
Automatic setting of Bit 0 of parameter 1201 (ZPR) can be set to automatically determine the
coordinate system coordinate system at manual reference position return. Parameter 1250
can be set to determine the workpiece coordinate system by assigning,
upon the completion of reference position return, the value set in a
parameter to a reference point on the tool holder or the tip position of the
reference tool.
The following signals relate with the manual reference position return:
Basic Procedure for (1) Select the JOG mode or TEACH IN JOG mode, and set the manual
Reference Position reference position return selection signal ZRN to “1”.
Return (2) Feed a target axis toward the reference position by making an
appropriate feed axis and direction selection signal (+J1, –J1, +J2,
–J2,…) “1”.
(3) While the feed axis and direction selection signal is “1”, rapid traverse
takes place along that axis. Although the rapid traverse override
signals (ROV1, ROV2) are valid, the override is generally set to
100%.
300
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
If the feed axis direction selection signal (+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2,…) turns to
“0” between step (2) and (5) , the tool is stopped at once, and reference
position return is assumed to be canceled. If the signal turn to “1” again,
operation resumes from step (3) (rapid traverse).
The timing charts for the basic procedures are given below.
JOG or TEACH IN
JOG mode
ZRN
+J1
*DEC1
Grid ................ . . . . .
ZP1
ZRF1
Feedrate
301
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
Installation conditions When installing the deceleration limit switch for manual reference
for deceleration limit position return, ensure that following conditions are satisfied:
switch
Deceleration limit Deceleration limit
operation position release position Reference position
LDW LDA
*DEC1
Grid
. . . . . . . . . . .
Feedrate
Servo position error and To perform manual reference position return when the reference position
one–rotation signal has not yet been established, the tool must be fed, in manual reference
position return mode, in the reference position return direction at a speed
so that the servo position error exceeds the value set in parameter No.
1836. At this time, the tool must cross the grid line corresponding to a
one–rotation signal from the position detector.
The servo position error is calculated from the following formula:
302
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
By reversing the formula above, the following formula gives the feedrate
F needed to set the servo position error to 128 when the servo loop gain
G is 30 s–1 and the detection unit U is 1 mm:
F = 128 60 30
1000
= 230 [mm/min]
Therefore, when the servo loop gain is 30 s–1, the detection unit is 1 mm,
and parameter No. 1836 is set to 128, the tool must be fed in the reference
position return direction at a speed of at least 230 mm/min before manual
reference position return.
Grid shift The grid can be shifted by the distance set in parameter 1850, thus shifting
the reference position. The grid shift to be set in the parameter must not
exceed the reference counter capacity (parameter No. 1821) (grid
interval).
Signal
Manual reference
position return selection
signal (ZRN) <G043#7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal selects manual reference position return. Manual reference
position return is a kind of jog feed. Therefor, to select manual reference
position return, it is required that the jog mode be selected and that the
manual reference position return selection signal be set to “1”.
[Operation] When the manual reference position return selection signal is set to “1”,
the control unit becomes as described below.
If jog feed mode is not selected, the control unit ignores the manual
reference position return selection signal.
If jog mode is selected, manual reference position return is enabled.
In this case, manual reference position return selection check signal
MREF turns to “1”.
NOTE
If the ZRN status changes from “0” to “1” or “1” to “0” during
jog feed, the feedrate is decelerated to 0. Then, to make
reference position return or jog feed, turn feed axis and
direction selection signal to “0” then set it to “1”.
Manual reference
position return selection
check signal MREF
<F004#5>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal reports that manual reference position return has been selected
once.
303
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
Feed Axis and Direction For details about this signal, see 3.1.2, “Feed Axis and Direction
Selection Signal Selection Signal”. Here, only notes on use of reference position return are
given.
NOTE
The direction of reference position return is predetermined
for each axis by parameter ZMI (No. 1006#5). If the tool is
fed in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction
in manual reference position return, the deceleration signal
for reference position return turns to “0”, and the tool is
returned to the point at which the deceleration signal turns
to “1” again (that is, the point where the deceleration limit
switch would be encountered if the tool were fed in the
predetermined direction). Then reference position return is
performed automatically in the predetermined direction.
ZRN
–J1
*DEC1
Grid ................ . . . . .
ZP1
ZRF1
Feedrate
FL rate
Rapid
traverse
Rapid traverse rate rate
304
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
NOTE
When reference position return is selected, an axis whose
reference position return end signal is already “1” or an axis
whose reference position return end signal was set “1” upon
completion of reference position return is locked, and
movement along that axis is disabled while the reference
position return selection signal (ZRN) is “1”. To perform
movement along such an axis, ZRN must be set “0”, and the
feed axis and direction selection signal must be set “0” then
set “1” again.
Reference position
return deceleration
signals *DEC1 to *DEC8
<X009>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals decelerate the feedrate for manual reference position return
so that the reference position is approached at a low feedrate.
The deceleration signals are provided for axes in a one–to–one correspon-
dence. A number appended to a deceleration signal represents a con-
trolled axis number.
*DEC 1
1 : Reference position return deceleration signal for the first axis
2 : Reference position return deceleration signal for the second axis
3 : Reference position return deceleration signal for the third axis
:
:
[Operation] For the operation of the control unit in response to the deceleration signal,
see the description of the basic procedure for manual reference position
return.
Reference position
return end signals ZP1 to
ZP8 <F094>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] These signals report that the tool is at the refernce position on a controlled
axis.
These siganls are provided for axes in a one–to–one corespondence.
A number appended to a signal represents a controlled axis number.
ZP 1
1 : Reference position return end signal for the first axis
2 : Reference position return end signal for the second axis
3 : Reference position return end signal for the third axis
:
:
305
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
Reference position
establishment signal
ZRF1 to ZRF8<F120>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notify the system that the reference position has been established.
A reference position establishment signal is provided for each axis. The
number appended to each signal name indicates the number of the
controlled axis.
ZRF 1
1 : 1st-axis reference position establishment signal
2 : 2nd-axis reference position establishment signal
3 : 3rd-axis reference position establishment signal
:
:
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X009 *DEC8 *DEC7 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G043 ZRN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F004 MREF
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F094 ZP8 ZP7 ZP6 ZP5 ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F120 ZRF8 ZRF7 ZRF6 ZRF5 ZRF4 ZRF3 ZRF2 ZRF1
306
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1002 JAX
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 ZRNx
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx
NOTE
When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before
continuing operation.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1201 ZCL ZPI ZPR
307
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
1240 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis in the machine
coordinate system
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
1250 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for setting a
coordinate system automatically
1251 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for setting a
coordinate system automatically when input is performed in inches
[Unit of data]
Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Linear axis
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
(input in inches)
308
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
NOTE
This parameter is valid when ZPI in parameter 1201#1 is set
to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1300
LZR
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 JZR
Set feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration when the reference position return
is performed for each axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1800 OZR
309
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
WARNING
When bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a value ten
times greater than the value set in this parameter is used to
make the check.
Example:When the value 10 is set in this parameter, and bit
0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, reference
position return operation is enabled when a servo
error of 100 or more occurs.
310
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the amount set in
this parameter. Up to the maximum value counted by the reference
counter can be specified as the grid shift.
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DEC
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION
(For Machining Center) RETURN
(B–62764EN)
311
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
4.2
SETTING THE
REFERENCE
POSITION WITHOUT
DOGS
General This function moves the tool near around the reference position set for
each axis in the manual continuous feed mode. Then it sets the reference
position in the reference position return mode without the deceleration
signal for reference position return by turning the feed axis and direction
select signal to “1”. With this function, the machine reference position can
be set at a given position without installing the limit switch for
deceleration for reference position return.
Basic Procedure for Setting (1) Feed the tool, along the axis for which the reference position is to be
the Reference Position set, by manual continuous feed in the reference position return
Without Dogs direction. Stop the tool near the reference position, but do not exceed
the reference position.
(2) Enter manual reference position return mode, then set 1 for the feed
axis direction selection signal (for the positive or negative direction)
for the axis.
(3) The CNC positions the tool to the nearest grid line (based on
one–rotation signals from the position detector) in the reference
position return direction specified with bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No.
1006. The point to which the tool is thus positioned becomes the
reference position.
(4) The CNC checks that the tool is positioned to within the in–position
area, then sets the completion signal for reference position return and
the reference position establishment signal to 1.
The timing chart for the basic elements constituting steps (2) to (4) is
shown below.
312
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
Manual reference
position return
mode
+J1 or –J1
Grid . . . . . .
ZP1
ZRF1
Feedrate
FL rate
The following figure shows the positional relation between the reference
position and the point to which the tool is positioned by manual
continuous feed.
– direction + direction
Grid A Position B
after jog feed
A Reference position for reference position return in the negative direction
B Reference position for reference position return in the positive direction
Servo position error and To set the reference position without dogs, when the reference position
one–rotation signal has not yet been established, the tool must be fed, in manual continuous
feed mode, in the reference position return direction at such a speed that
the servo position error exceeds the value set in parameter No. 1836. The
tool must cross the grid line corresponding to a one–rotation signal from
the position detector.
Grid shift To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the distance set
in parameter No. 1850. The grid shift to be set in the parameter must not
exceed the reference counter capacity (parameter No. 1821).
Reference position When the feed axis and direction selection signal is set to 1 in manual
return reference position return mode after the reference position has been
established, the tool is positioned to the reference position regardless of
the direction specified with the feed axis and direction selection signal.
The completion signal for reference position return is then set to 1.
313
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1002 DLZ JAX
NOTE
This function can be specified for each axis by DLZx, bit 1
of parameter No. 1005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 DLZx ZRNx
NOTE
When DLZ of parameter No. 1002#1 is 0, DLZx is enabled.
When DLZ of parameter No. 1002#1 is 1, DLZx is disabled,
and the function for setting the reference position without
dogs is enabled for all axes.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx
NOTE
When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before
continuing operation.
314
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
0 : Positive direction
1 : Negative direction
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1201 ZCL ZPI ZPR
1240 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis in the machine
coordinate system
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordi-
nate system setting is performed
315
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
[Unit of data]
Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Linear axis
0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
(input in mm)
Linear axis
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
(input in inches)
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
1251 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for setting a
coordinate system automatically when input is performed in inches
NOTE
This parameter is valid when ZPI in parameter 1201#1 is set
to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1300 LZR
316
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
Set feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration when the reference position return
is performed for each axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1800 OZR
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
317
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
WARNING
When bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a value ten
times greater than the value set in this parameter is used to
make the check.
Example:When the value 10 is set in this parameter, and bit
0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, reference
position return operation is enabled when a servo
error of 100 or more occurs.
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
Note
NOTE
Alarm No. 090 is issued when G28 is specified if the
reference position has not yet be established.
318
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
4.3
REFERENCE
POSITION SHIFT
General When reference position return is performed using a grid method, the
reference position can be shifted by a parameter–set distance without
having to move the deceleration dog.
Distance LDEC’, shown below, for the axis along which reference position
return was last made is indicated on the diagnostic screen (No. 0302).
Direction of reference
position return
LDEC LSFT
Deceleration dog
| | | ↑ |
↑ Reference
Grid point position
How to adjust the (1) Set the SFD bit (bit 2 of parameter No. 1002) to 1, and set the reference
reference position position shift amount to 0. Then, perform reference position return.
LDEC LSFT
Deceleration dog
| | | ↑ |
↑ ↑ Reference position
Grid point Stop position
After the deceleration dog is turned off, the tool stops when the first
grid point is reached. Distance LDEC is indicated on the diagnostic
screen (No. 0302).
(2) Determine the distance LSFT (reference position shift amount) from
the stop position to the reference position, and set it in parameter No.
1850.
This completes the adjustment of the reference position.
319
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
(3) Perform reference position return again. Then, the tool stops when it
reaches the reference position.
| | | | |
↑ ↑
Grid point Reference position
(stop position)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1002 SFD
CAUTION
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
NOTE
When bit 2 of parameter No. 1002, SFD, is set to 0, this
parameter is used for reference position shift.
320
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
Note
NOTE
1 The reference position can be shifted only in the direction
of reference position return.
2 When the SFD bit (bit 2 of parameter No. 1002) is 0, only the
distance from the position where the deceleration dog is
turned off to the first grid point (the grid point after grid shift)
is indicated.
321
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
4.4
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
General The G28 command positions the tool to the reference position, via the
specified intermediate point, along the specified axis, then sets the
completion signal for reference position return (see Section 4.1) to 1.
The reference position must be set in parameter No. 1240 with the
coordinates specified in the machine coordinate system, before issuing
the G28 command.
The tool moves to the intermediate point or reference position at the rapid
traverse rate.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
1240 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis in the machine
coordinate system
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
322
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
Caution
CAUTION
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.6 REFERENCE POSITION
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
323
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
4.5
2ND REFERENCE
POSITION
RETURN/3RD, 4TH
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
General The G30 command positions the tool to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference
position, via the specified intermediate point, along the specified axis.
Then, it sets the completion signal for 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position
return to 1.
The 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position must be set in parameter No. 1241,
1242, or 1243 with coordinates in the machine coordinate system, before
issuing the G30 command.
The tool moves to the intermediate point or 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference
position at the rapid traverse rate.
Return to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position can be performed only
after the reference position has been established.
Signal
Second reference
position return end
signals ZP21 to ZP 28
<F096>
Third reference position
return end signals ZP31
to ZP38 <F098>
Fourth reference
position return end
signals ZP41 to ZP48
<F100>
324
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
ZP 2 1
1 : Return end signal for the first axis
2 : Return end signal for the second axis
3 : Return end signal for the third axis
:
:
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F096 ZP28 ZP27 ZP26 ZP25 ZP24 ZP23 ZP22 ZP21
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F098 ZP38 ZP37 ZP36 ZP35 ZP34 ZP33 ZP32 ZP31
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F100 ZP48 ZP47 ZP46 ZP45 ZP44 ZP43 ZP42 ZP41
Parameter
1241 Coordinate value of the second reference position on each axis in the
machine coordinate system
1242 Coordinate value of the third reference position on each axis in the ma-
chine coordinate system
1243 Coordinate value of the fourth reference position on each axis in the ma-
chine coordinate system
325
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RE- Other than P2, P3 and P4 are commanded
TURN COMMAND for 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position re-
turn command.
Correct program.
Caution
CAUTION
1 If the G30 command is issued in machine lock status, the
completion signal for 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position
return is not set to 1.
2 If millimeter input is selected for an inch–system machine,
the completion signal for 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position
return may be set to 1, even when the programmed tool
position deviates from the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position
by the least input increment. This is because the least input
increment is smaller than the least command increment for
the machine.
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.6 REFERENCE POSITION
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
326
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
4.6
FLOATING
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
General It is possible to return the tool to the floating reference position by
commanding the G30.1.
The floating reference position is located on the machine and can be a
reference position of some sort of machine operation. It is not always a
fixed position but may vary in some cases. The floating reference position
can be set using the soft keys of MDI and can be memorized even if the
power is turned off.
Generally, the position where the tools can be replace on machining center
or milling machine is a set position on the machinery. The tools cannot
be replaced at any position. Normally the tool change position is at any
of the No. 1 to No. 4 reference position. The tool can be restored to these
positions easily by G28 or G30 command. However, depending on the
machine, the tools can be replaced at any position as long as it does not
contact the workpiece.
In lathes, the tool can generally be changed at any position unless it
touches the workpiece or tailstock.
For machinery such as these, in order to reduce the cycle time, it is
advantageous to replace tools at a position as close as possible to the
workpiece. For this purpose, change position should be changed for each
workpiece and this feature can be easily realized by this function.
Namely, the tool change position which is suitable for workpieces can be
memorized as the floating reference position and it is possible to return
the tool to the tool change position easily by commanding the G30.1.
When the G30.1 is commanded, the axis commanded goes to the specified
intermediate position with rapid traverse at first and then goes to the
floating reference position from the intermediate point with rapid
traverse. The positioning to the intermediate position or to the floating
reference position is performed at rapid traverse for each axis (non–linear
positioning). The floating reference position return completion signal
turns to “1” after completing the floating reference position return.
Signal
Floating reference
position return end
signal FRP1 to FRP8
<F116>
327
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
FRP 1
1 : Floating reference position return end signal of 1st axis
2 : Floating reference position return end signal of 2nd axis
3 : Floating reference position return end signal of 3rd axis
:
:
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F116 FRP8 FRP7 FRP6 FRP5 FRP4 FRP3 FRP2 FRP1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1201 FPC
328
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.7 FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RE-
(For Machining Center) TURN (G30.1)
(B–62764EN)
III.11.1.7 Setting the Floating Reference Position
329
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
4.7
BUTT–TYPE
REFERENCE
POSITION SETTING
General This function automates the procedure of butting the tool against a
mechanical stopper on an axis to set a reference position. The purpose of
this function is to eliminate the variations in reference position setting that
arise depending on the operator, and to minimize work required to make
fine adjustments after reference position setting.
Select the axis for which the reference position is to be set, then perform
cycle start. Then, the following operations are performed automatically:
1. The torque (force) of the selected axis is reduced to make the butting
feedrate constant, and the tool is butted against the mechanical stopper.
Then, the tool is withdrawn a parameter–set distance from the
mechanical stopper.
2. Again, the torque (force) of the selected axis is reduced, and the tool
is butted against the mechanical stopper. Then, the tool is withdrawn
a parameter–set distance from the mechanical stopper.
3. The withdrawal point on the axis is set as the reference position.
330
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
Cycle operation When no reference position has been set (APZx, bit 4 of parameter No.
1815, is 0), operations (A) to (E), below, are performed automatically to
set a reference position.
Mechanical
stopper
Current position
(A)The tool is moved along a specified axis with a limited torque until
it butts against the mechanical stopper.
The tool is moved in the direction specified with ZMIx (bit 5 of
parameter No. 1006), at the feedrate specified with parameter No.
7183, at the torque specified with parameter No. 7186 (until the
tool strikes the mechanical stopper).
Mechanical
stopper
(B)After the tool strikes the mechanical stopper, the tool is withdrawn
in the direction opposite to the butting direction, along the axis for
a parameter–set distance.
The tool is moved in the direction opposite to that specified with
ZMIx (bit 5 of parameter No. 1006), at the feedrate specified with
parameter No. 7185, for the distance specified with parameter No.
7181.
Mechanical
stopper
(C)Operations (D) and (E) are performed from the withdrawal point,
such that the tool is butted against the mechanical stopper at a
constant feedrate in reference position setting.
(D)The tool moves along the specified axis at a specified torque until
it butts against the mechanical stopper.
The tool moves in the direction specified with ZMIx (bit 5 of
parameter No. 1006), at the feedrate specified with parameter No.
7184, at the torque specified with parameter No. 7186 (until the
tool strikes the mechanical stopper).
331
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
Mechanical
stopper
(E)After the tool strikes the mechanical stopper end on the axis, the
tool is withdrawn in the direction opposite to the butting direction,
along the axis for a parameter–set distance.
The tool is moved in the direction opposite to that specified with
ZMIx (bit 5 of parameter No. 1006), at the feedrate specified with
parameter No. 7185, for the distance specified with parameter No.
7182.
Reference position
Mechanical
stopper
For parameter Nos. 7183 and 7184, set the feedrates at which the
tool is moved toward the mechanical stopper with a limited torque,
considering the machine accuracy.
After the tool strikes the mechanical stopper, and the tool is
withdrawn the distance specified with parameter No. 7182, the
withdrawal point is set as the reference position on the specified
axis. Then, the reference position return end signal and reference
position establishment signal are set to 1.
After reference position return has been completed, alarm PS000
is issued. Turn the power off then back on before continuing
operation.
After the reference When the reference position has already been set (when APZx, bit 4 of
position is set parameter No. 1815, is 1), performing butt–type reference position setting
causes the tool to be positioned to the reference position at the rapid
traverse rate without the cycle operation. Upon the completion of
positioning, the reference position return end signal is set to 1.
332
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
Cycle operation
Butting direction
Axis feedrate
Withdrawal
direction
Signal
333
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
· The torque limit is not reached for the corresponding axis during cycle
operation for butt–type reference position setting.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F180 CLRCH8 CLRCH7 CLRCH6 CLRCH5 CLRCH4 CLRCH3 CLRCH2 CLRCH1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx
NOTE
When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before
continuing operation.
NOTE
Set the same direction as the direction set for ZMIx, bit 5 of
parameter No. 1006. If the opposite direction is set, the
cycle operation will not start.
334
B–62753EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
NOTE
Set the same direction as the direction set for ZMIx, bit 5 of
parameter No. 1006. If the opposite direction is set, the
cycle operation will not start.
335
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
When 0 is set in this parameter, 100% is assumed.
Note
NOTE
This function is supported only when an absolute–position
detector is installed.
336
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION
337
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
5.1
CYCLE START/FEED
HOLD
General
Start of automatic When automatic operation start signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in which
operation (cycle start) memory (MEM) mode, DNC operation mode (RMT), or manual data
input (MDI) mode, the CNC enters the automatic operation start state then
starts operating.
Signal ST, however, is ignored in the following cases:
1. When the mode is other than MEM, RMT, or MDI
2. When the feed hold signal (*SP) is set to 0
3. When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0
4. When the external reset signal (ERS) is set to 1
5. When the reset and rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1
6. When MDI RESET key is pressed
7. When the CNC is in the alarm state
8. When the CNC is in the NOT READY state
9. When automatic operation is starting
10.When the program restart signal (SRN) is 1
11.When the CNC is searching for a sequence number.
The CNC enters the feed hold state and stops operation in the following
cases during automatic operation:
1. When the feed hold signal (*SP) is set to 0
2. When the mode is changed to manual operation mode (JOG, INC,
HND, REF, TJOG, or THND).
The CNC enters the automatic operation stop state and stops operating in
the following cases during automatic operation:
1. When a single command block is completed during a single block
operation
2. When operation in manual data input (MDI) mode has been completed
3. When an alarm occurs in the CNC
4. When a single command block is completed after the mode is changed
to other automatic operation mode or memory edit (EDIT)
The CNC enters the reset state and stops operating in the following cases
during automatic operation:
1. When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0
2. When the external reset signal (ERS) is set to 1
3. When the reset and rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1
4. When MDI RESET key is pressed
The state of the CNC (automatic operation start, feed hold , automatic
operation stop, or reset) is posted to the PMC with status output signals
OP, SPL, and STL. See the table in the ”Signals” section for details.
338
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
Halt of automatic When the feed hold signal *SP is set to 0 during automatic operation, the
operation (feed hold) CNC enters the feed hold state and stops operation. At the same time,
cycle start lamp signal STL is set to 0 and feed hold lamp signal SPL is
set to 1. Re–setting signal *SP to 1 in itself will not restart automatic
operation. To restart automatic operation, first set signal *SP to 1, then
set signal ST to 1 and then to 0.
STL STL
SPL
*SP *SP
339
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
Start
⋅⋅⋅
Automatic operation
Automatic operation
signal [Classification] Output signal
OP <F000#7>
[Function] Notifies the PMC that automatic operation is in progress.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 or 0, according to the state of the CNC, as listed in
Table 5.1.
340
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
Reset state 0 0 0
NOTE
If the sequence number search is performed through MDI
panel during Memory mode (MEM), the signal op turns to
“1”.
341
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G007 ST
G008 *SP
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.4.1 MEMORY OPERATION
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN) III.4.2 MDI OPERATION
342
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
5.2
RESET AND REWIND
General The CNC is reset and enters the reset state in the following cases:
1. When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0
2. When the external reset signal (ERS) is set to 1
3. When the reset and rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1
4. When MDI RESET key is pressed
When the CNC is reset, the resetting signal (RST) is output to the PMC.
The resetting signal (RST) is set to 0 when the resetting signal output
time, set with parameter No. 3017, has elapsed after the above conditions
have been released.
RST signal output time = Treset (Reset processing time) + (parameter
setting value) 16 msec.
Reset ON
Reset Pro-
cessing
RST signal
Treset (Parameter
setting value)
16 msec
CAUTION
Treset requires at least 16 msec. This time will be longer on
optional configurations.
CAUTION
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0, the tool
is stopped by an emergency stop.
Bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is used to select whether the CNC
internal data (such as modal G codes) is cleared or reset when the
CNC is reset. Refer to the Appendix E, ”Status when turning on
power, when cleared, and when reset” in the Operator’s manual for
the state of the internal data when cleared or reset.
343
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
D Reset & Rewind When the reset & rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1, reset is performed and
the following rewinding operation is also performed.
1. When the DNC operation mode, and a portable tape reader is
connected as the current input/output device, the tape reader is
rewound.
While the tape reader is being rewound, the rewinding–in–progress
signal (RWD) is output. This signal goes 0 when the tape reader has
been rewound.
2. In cases other than case 1, the head of the selected main program is
searched for. Setting RWM, bit 2 of parameter no. 3001, determines
whether the rewinding–in–progress signal is output.
When RWM is set to 1:
The rewinding–in–progress signal is output. It is set to 1, then set to
0 after about 100 ms. Since searching for the main program in memory
takes little time, when the rewinding–in–progress signal (RWD) is set
to 0, the main program has already been searched for.
Signal
344
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G008 ERS RRW
F000 RWD
F001 RST
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3001 RWM
345
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
To extend the output time of reset signal RST, the time to be added is
specified in this parameter.
RST signal output time = time required for reset + parameter value
16 ms
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3203 MCL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3402 CLR
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6001 CLV CCV
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL APPENDIX E STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON,
(For Machining Center) WHEN CLEAR AND WHEN RESET
(B–62764EN)
346
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
5.3.1
Machine Lock
General The change of the position display can be monitored without moving the
machine.
When all–axis machine lock signal MLK, or each–axis machine lock
signals MLK1 to MLK8 are set to 1, output pulses (move commands) to
the servo motors are stopped in manual or automatic operation. The
commands are distributed, however, updating the absolute and relative
coordinates. The operator can therefore check if the commands are
correct by monitoring the position display.
Signal
MLK 1
1. Machine lock for the 1st axis
2. Machine lock for the 2nd axis
3. Machine lock for the 3rd axis
[Operation] When these signals are set to 1, pulses (move commands) are not output
to the servo motors for the corresponding axes (1st to 8th) in manual or
automatic operation.
347
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G044 MLK
F004 MMLK
348
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
Note
NOTE
1 Automatic operation in the machine lock state (M, S, T,
and B commands)
Machine lock applies only to move commands along
controlled axes. Updating modal G codes or setting a
coordinate system is performed normally. M, S, T, and B
(2nd auxilialy function) commands are also performed
normally.
2 Reference position return in the machine lock state
(G27, G28, and G30)
When the reference position return command (G28), or 2nd
to 4th reference position return command (G30), is
executed for an axis in the machine lock state, distribution
and position updating are performed. The tool, however, is
not returned to the reference position. The reference
position return completion signals (ZP1 to ZP4) are not
output.
The reference position return check command (G27) is
ignored in the machine lock state.
3 Turning on/off the machine lock signal during
movement along an axis
When the machine lock signal for an axis is set to 1 during
movement along the axis that is not in the machine lock
state, the axis is immediately placed in the machine lock
state and output pulses (move commands) to the servo
motor are stopped. The tool is decelerated and stopped
with the automatic acceleration/deceleration function.
On the other hand, when the machine lock signal for an axis
is set to 0 during distribution of the move command along
the axis in the machine lock state, pulse (move command)
output for the axis is immediately restarted. The tool is
accelerated with the automatic acceleration/deceleration
function.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY
(For Machining Center) FUNCTION LOCK
(B–62764EN)
349
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
5.3.2
Dry Run
General Dry run is valid only for automatic operation.
The tool is moved at a constant feedrate(*1) regardless of the feedrate
specified in the program. This function is used, for example, to check the
movement of the tool without a workpiece.
CAUTION
This feedrate depends on the specified parameters, the
manual rapid traverse switching signal (RT), manual
feedrate override signals (*JV0 to *JV15), and whether the
command block specifies rapid traverse or cutting feed, as
listed in the table below.
Signal
CAUTION
When the dry run signal is changed from 0 to 1 or 1 to 0
during the movement of the tool, the feedrate of the tool is
first decelerated to 0 before being accelerated to the
specified feedrate.
350
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G046 DRN
F002 MDRN
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 RDR TDR
Set the dry run rate when the manual feedrate is overridden by 100%.
351
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100% for
each axis.
NOTE
To specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, use
parameter No. 1430 instead.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.4 Dry run
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
352
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
5.3.3
Single Block
SBM = 0: Operation does not stop in the custom macro statements but
stops once the next NC command has been executed.
When the CNC is in the automatic operation stop state during single block
operation, the mode can be changed to manual data input (MDI), manual
handle feed (HND), incremental feed (INC), or jog feed (JOG), by using
the mode select signals (MD1, MD2, and MD4).
Signal
353
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G046 SBK
F004 MSBK
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6000 SBM
NOTE
SBM is valid when NOP (bit 0 of parameter No. 3404) is set
to 0.
Caution
CAUTION
1 Operation in thread cutting
When the SBK signal turns to “1” during thread cutting,
operation stops after execution of the first non-thread
cutting block after the thread cutting command.
2 Operation in canned cycle
When the SBK signal turns to “1” during canned cycle
operation, the operation stops at each positioning,
approach, drilling and retreat instead of the end of the block.
The SPL signal turns to “1” while the STL signal turns to “0”,
showing that the end of the block has not been reached.
When the execution of one block is completed, the STL and
SPL signals turn to “0” and the operation is stopped.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.5 Single block
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
354
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
5.4
MANUAL ABSOLUTE
ON/OFF
General This function selects whether the movement of the tool with manual
operation (such as jog feed and manual handle feed) is counted for
calculating the current position in the workpiece coordinate system. A
check signal is also output to indicate whether the manual absolute
function in the CNC is turned on or off.
When manual absolute When manual operation interrupts during automatic operation:
turns on (manual i) At the end of the block where manual operation interrupts, the tool
absolute signal *ABSM position moves in parallel by the manual move amount, regardless of
=0) the absolute or incremental command.
ii) In subsequent blocks, the parallel-moved tool position remains
unchanged until an absolute command block appears. Therefore, if all
blocks are programmed by incremental commands, the tool keeps the
parallel-moved position until machining ends.
In case of incremental commands
Manual
intervention
End
point
CAUTION
If the machining end position has shifted by the manual
move amount because all blocks are programmed by
incremental commands only, the present position is
displayed shifted by the manual move amount.
When manual absolute The manual move amount is not counted to the present position on the
turns off (manual workpiece coordinate system. The present position display on the CRT
absolute signal includes the manual move amount. The display is reset to the initial value
*ABSM=1) (before manual operation) when the control is reset, or when operation in
the automatic operation mode MEM, RMT, or MDI is started after the
manual operation.
355
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
Manual in-
tervention
End
Programmed tool path point
Signal
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G006 *ABSM
F004 MABSM
356
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.5 Manual absolute ON/OFF
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
357
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
5.5
OPTIONAL BLOCK
SKIP/ADDITION OF
OPTIONAL BLOCK
SKIP
NOTE
Number 1 for /1 can be omitted. However, when two or more
optional block skip switches are used in one block, number
1 for /1 cannot be omitted.
(Example)
//3 N123 X100. Y200. ; — Invalid
/1 /3 N123 X100. Y200. ; — Valid
The following figures show the relationship between the timing, when
optional block skip signals (BDT1 to BDT9) are set to 1, and the ignored
information:
1. When BDTn is set to 1 before the CNC starts reading a block
containing /n, the block is ignored.
BDTn ”1”
”0”
ÄÄÄÄ
Reading by CNC ³ ...; /n N123 X100. Y200. ; N234
....
Ignored
358
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
Not ignored
ÄÄÄÄ
Reading by CNC ³ ...; /n N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 ....
Ignored
4. When two or more optional block skip switches are specified in a block
and BDTn, corresponding to one of them, is set to 1, the block is
ignored.
BDT3 ”1”
”0”
Reading by CNC ³
ÄÄÄÄ
...;/1 /3 /5 N123 X100. Y200. ; N234
ÄÄÄÄ
....
Ignored
Signal
359
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G044 BDT1
F004 MBDT1
Note
NOTE
1 This function is ignored when programs are loaded into
memory. Blocks containing /n are also stored in memory,
regardless of how the optional block skip signal is set.
Programs stored in memory can be output, regardless of
how the optional block skip signals are set.
Optional block skip is effective even during sequence
number search operation.
2 Position of a slash
A slash (/) must be specified at the head of a block. If a slash
is placed elsewhere, the information from the slash to
immediately before the EOB code is ignored.
3 TV and TH check
When an optional block skip signal is “1”. TH and TV checks
are made for the skipped portions in the same way as when
the optional block skip switch is “0”.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.2 Program section configuration
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
360
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
5.6
SEQUENCE NUMBER
COMPARISON AND
STOP
General During program execution, this function causes a single block stop right
after a block with a specified sequence number is executed.
Note
NOTE
After the specified sequence number is found during the
execution of the program, the sequence number set for
sequence number compensation and stop is decremented
by one. When the power is turned on, the setting of the
sequence number is 0.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.4.4 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
361
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
5.7
PROGRAM RESTART
Signal
362
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G006 SRN
F002 SRNMV
Parameter
7310 Movement sequence to program restart position
094 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the pro-
(COORD CHG) gram is restarted. (After the automatic op-
eration was interrupted, the coordinate
system setting operation was per-
formed.) Perform the correct operation
according to the operator’s manual.
095 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the
(EXT OFS CHG) program is restarted. (After the auto-
matic operation was interrupted, the
external workpiece offset amount
changed.)
096 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the
(WRK OFS CHG) program is restarted. (After the auto-
matic operation was interrupted, the
workpiece offset amount changed.)
097 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the
(AUTO EXEC) program is restarted. (After power ON,
after emergency stop or P / S alarm 94
to 97 were reset, no automatic opera-
tion was performed.) Perform automat-
ic operation.
098 G28 FOUND IN SE- A command of the program restart was
QUENCE RETURN specified without the reference position
return operation after power ON or
emergency stop, and G28 was found
during search.
Perform the reference position return.
099 MDI EXEC NOT AL- After completion of search in program
LOWED AFT. SEARCH restart, a move command is given with
MDI.
363
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
Warning
WARNING
As a rule, the tool cannot be returned to a correct position
under the following conditions.
Special care must be taken in the following cases since
none of them cause an alarm:
⋅ Manual operation is performed when the manual
absolute mode is OFF.
⋅ Manual operation is performed when the machine is
locked.
⋅ When the mirror image is used.
⋅ When manual operation is performed in the course of
axis movement for returning operation.
⋅ When the program restart is commanded for a block
between the block for skip cutting and subsequent
absolute command block.
⋅ When program restart specified for an intermediate block
for a multiple repetitive canned cycle
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.4.3 PROGRAM RESTART
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
364
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
5.8
TOOL RETRACTION
AND RETURN
(M series)
General The tool can be retracted from a workpiece to replace the tool, if damaged
during machining, or to check the status of machining. Then, the tool can
be returned to restart machining efficiently.
:Retraction
:Manual operation
:Return operation
:Re-positioning
Z
Basic procedure for tool When tool retraction signal TRESC input from the PMC turned to “1”
retraction and return while automatic operation is started, stopped, or held , the tool is
retracted by the distance specified in the program. The position to
which the tool retracts is called the retraction position. When TRESC
turned to “1” while automatic operation is started, if a block is being
executed, the tool is retracted after the block is suspended. When
retraction ends, the machine enters the automatic operation hold state.
The clearance and direction can be specified by the program. If these
values are not specified by the program, the tool is not retracted.
When TRESC turned to “1”, the machine enters the tool retraction
mode, and tool retraction mode signal TRACT turned to “1” to notify
the PMC that the machine has entered the tool retraction mode.
365
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
366
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
Signal
367
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G059 TRRTN TRESC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F092 TRSPS TRACT
Warning
WARNING
The retraction axes and retraction distances specified with
G10.6 need to be changed in appropriate blocks depending
on the figure to be machined. An incorrectly specified
retraction distance may damage a workpiece, the machine,
or the tool. So, be very careful when specifying a retraction
distance.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III. 4.8 Tool Retraction and Return
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
368
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
5.9
EXACT STOP/EXACT
STOP MODE/
TAPPING MODE/
CUTTING MODE
(M SERIES)
Exact stop (G09) The tool is decelerated in a block specifying G09, and an in–position
check (*1) is performed. When the feed motor falls in position, the tool
is moved by the next block. This function may be used to produce a sharp
edge at the corner of a workpiece.
Exact Stop Mode (G61) When G61 is commanded, deceleration of cutting feed command at the
end point and inposition check is performed per block thereafter. This
G61 is valid till G62 (automatic corner override), G63 (tapping mode),
or G64 (cutting mode), is commanded.
Tapping Mode (G63) When G63 is commanded, feed rate override is ignored (always regarded
as 100%), and feed hold also becomes invalid. Cutting feed does not
decelerate at the end of block to transfer to the next block. This G63 is
valid till G61 (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner override), or G64
(cutting mode) is commanded.
Cutting Mode (G64) When G64 is commanded, deceleration at the end point of each block
thereafter is not performed and cutting goes on to the next block. This
command is valid till G61 (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner
override), or G63 (tapping mode) is commanded.
However, in G64 mode, feed rate is decelerated to zero and in–position
check is performed in the following case;
1) Positioning mode (G00, G60)
2) Block with exact stop check (G09)
3) Next block is a block without movement command
*1 The term in–position indicates that the servo motor reaches in a range
of positions specified by a parameter. See Section 7.2.6.1 and 7.2.6.2
for details.
Y
In–position check
369
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.4.1 Exact Stop (G09, G61)
(For Machining Center) Cutting Mode (G64)
(B–62764EN) Tapping Mode (G63)
370
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
5.10
BALANCE CUT
(2–PATH CONTROL
FOR T SYSTEM)
371
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
Caution
CAUTION
1 If feed hold operation is performed during balance cutting
using both tool posts, balance cut processing is not
performed at restart time, it is performed when the next
move command is specified for both tool posts.
2 Balance cutting is not performed in dry run or machine lock
state.
3 When rapid traverse operation is specified, balance cut
processing is not performed.
4 A workpiece for which thread cutting has been performed in
the balance cut mode cannot be subjected to thread cutting
in the cancel mode. Thread cutting starts at a different
position.
5 Balance cut only starts cutting feed on both tool posts at the
same time; it does not maintain synchronization thereafter.
To synchronize all the movements of both tool posts, the
data for both tool posts, such as the travel distance and
feedrate, must be the same.
Note
NOTE
1 Time delay before the pulse distribution of both tool posts
is started is 2 ms or shorter.
2 In the balance cut mode, synchronization is established at
the start of a move block, so movement may momentarily
stop.
3 The cancel mode (G69) is set by a reset.
4 When the option ”mirror image for double turrets” is
selected, the balance cut function cannot be used.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II. 21.4 Balance Cut (G68, G69)
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN)
372
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
5.11
DNC OPERATION
Signal
373
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G043 DNCI
F003 MRMT
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 ND3
NOTE
In general, reading is performed more efficiently when
ND3=1. This specification reduces the number of buffering
interruptions caused by reading of a series of blocks
specifying short movements. This reduces the cycle time.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.4.4 SCHEDULING FUNCTION
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
374
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
5.12
MANUAL
INTERVENTION AND
RETURN
General If the tool movement along the axes is stopped by a feed hold during
automatic operation, then restarted after manual intervention such as tool
exchange, the tool moves back to the point of intervention before
automatic operation is resumed.
This function is easy to operate because unlike the program restart
function or the tool retract and restore function, it is unnecessary to
operate switches on the operator’s panel or MDI keys.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7001 MIN
Warning
WARNING
If you do not make manual intervention correctly according
to the direction of machining and the shape of the
workpiece, the machine and tool may be broken down. Use
sufficient care.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.4.10 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
375
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
5.13
RETREAT AND
RETRY FUNCTIONS
(M SERIES)
General The retreat and retry functions incorporate those functions that are needed
to enable retreat and retry operations with a PMC and custom macros.
Even if machining is interrupted by a reset or emergency stop, the tool can
be returned from the interruption point (machining retreat function) to
restart machining from the start block of the interrupted machining
(machining retry function) easily.
The retreat and retry functions consist of the functions below.
(1) Management of machining cycles by means of sequence numbers
Machining cycle management is performed using the following
sequence numbers:
N7000 to N7998: Machining start point
N7999: Clearing of data to perform machining return or
retry operation
(Until N7999 is specified, data is not cleared to
perform machining return or restart operation.)
N8000 to N8999: Machining cycle start point
N9000 to N9999: Machining cycle end point
(2) Saving of position information and modal information to custom
macro variables at a machining start point and machining cycle start
point
(3) Rigid tapping return function
(4) Restarting of machining at a machining start point or machining cycle
start point
O0001 ;
(For an ordinary machining cycle)
N7000········ (1) Machining start point
···········
N8000········ (2) Machining cycle
N9000········ (3)
N8010········ Machining cycle
N9010········
···········
N7999········ (4) Clears machining data
N7100
(For a drilling canned cycle)
N7010······· · Machining start point
376
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
377
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
Explanations
Retreat function Each machine tool builder is to create a retreat function program, which
is started from the PMC by using a workpiece number search capability
or program number search capability. For detailed information, refer to
the relevant manual provided by each machine tool builder. A machining
start point or machining cycle start point is stored in a macro variable, and
therefore can be used as required. When retreat operation varies from one
machining cycle to another, specify an M function for each machining
cycle. An M function is stored as a machining type M code in a macro
variable. So, retreat operation can be specified for each machining cycle
by referencing each macro variable in the retreat program.
Retry function When the restart of machining is specified from the PMC, the retry
function moves the execution pointer of the machining program to one of
the following:
A. Last machining start point executed
B. Last cycle start point executed
(If machining operation such as cutting and drilling is interrupted, the
pointer is moved to this point when the machining is not completed.)
C. Cycle start point following the last cycle start point executed
(If machining operation such as cutting and drilling is interrupted, the
pointer is moved to this point when the machining is completed.)
Then, when the cycle start button is set to on, machining is restarted where
the cursor is placed. This function is implemented using the program
restart function. For information about restrictions, see the description of
the restart of programs in the part for operations.
Rigid tapping return If rigid tapping operation is interrupted by a reset or emergency stop, a
movement can be made on the tapping axis to the initial point or point R
in synchronism with the spindle according to the rigid tapping command
information in the machining program. For this purpose, execute the
command below in the retreat program.
378
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
(Example)
Machining program
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
N7000 M29 S1000 ;
N8000 G84 X20. Y20. R–10. Z–30. F500 ;
N8010 X50. Y50. ;
N8020 X100. Y100 . ;
G80 ;
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
Retreat program
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
IF [#mmm NE 29 ] GOTO 1000 ;
G30 P99 M29 S1000 ;
G00 Z–10. ;
G00 X#xxx Y#yyy Z#zzz ;
GOTO 2000 ;
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
NOTE
1 Rigid tapping cannot be restarted from an intermediate
hole. Be sure to restart rigid tapping at the rigid tapping start
block (M29).
2 If a value other than 0 is specified in parameter No. 5210,
specify the value in place of M29 in the program above.
379
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
Macro variables Information required for the machining return and restart functions is
stored in macro variables. The start number of those variables is to be set
in parameter No. 7351. Twenty–five successive variables starting with
the variable specified in the parameter are used.
· · · · · · · · · · · ·
· · · · · · · · · · · ·
09
· · · · · · · · · · · ·
· · · · · · · · · · · ·
19
23 G codes of group 05
24 (Reserved)
Retreat and retry The retreat and retry sequences are explained using the sample machining
sequence program below.
O1000 ;
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
G00 X100. Y100. Z100. ; (A)
N7010 M101 T10 S100 ; (B)
G00 X0. Y0. Z0. ; (C)
N8010 G01 Z– 20. F100 ; (D)
Z– 40. ; (E)
Y20. ; (F)
N9010 G00 Z0. ; (G)
X20. ; (H)
N8020 G01 Z– 40. F200 ; (I)
Z– 60. ; (J)
380
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
Y40. ; (K)
N9020 G00 Z0. ; (L)
X40. ; (M)
N8030 G01 Z– 80. F300 ; (N)
Z– 100. ; (O)
Y60. ; (P)
N9030 G00 Z0. ; (Q)
X100. Y100. Z100. ; (R)
N7020 M102 T11 S200 ; (S)
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ (T)
⇑
(Y)
(D)
Cutting feed
(O) (P)
Rapid traverse (positioning)
381
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
1. Return the tool to machining start point (B) with the retreat program.
2. Press the RESET key.
3. Select the restart of machining at the machining start point with the
machining restart point select switch.
4. Set the program restart switch to on.
5. Set the machining restart switch to on.
Thus, search operation is performed by virtually executing the programs
from the start of program number 1000 to machining start sequence
number 7010 stored in macro variables. Upon completion of search
operation, the machining retry completion lamp is turned on.
Then, by pressing the cycle start button, machining is restarted from block
(B).
382
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
Retry of machining from If a machining cycle being executed is interrupted by a reset or emergency
a machining cycle start stop at (X), machining can be restarted at machining cycle start point (H)
point A after starting the machining retreat program. In this case, use the
following sequence:
1. Return the tool to machining cycle start point (H) with the retreat
program.
2. Press the RESET key.
3. Select the restart of machining at the machining cycle start point with
the machining restart point select switch.
4. Set the program restart switch to on.
5. Set the machining restart switch to on.
Then, by pressing the cycle start button, machining is restarted from block
(I).
383
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
384
B–62753EN–1/01 5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G064 SLCSEQ RTNCY
G063 RCYO
F066 RTNMSV
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5202 ORI
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
NOTE
This parameter can be used only for a serial spindle.
385
5. CYCLE START/FEED HOLD B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 If 0 is specified, the machining return or restart data will not
be set in a macro variable.
2 If a value from 507 to 531 is specified, 500 is assumed. If
532 or greater is specified, the custom macro variable
expansion option becomes necessary.
5066 RESTART ILLEGAL SE- During program restart using the re-
QUENCE NUMBER turn/restart function, a sequence num-
ber between 7000 and 7999 was read
while performing search for the next
sequence number.
Note
NOTE
The following requirements must be satisfied to restart
machining:
1. MEM mode is set.
2. The reset state is set.
3. Background editing is not performed.
4. Data required for machining cycles is stored in macro
variables.
5. The notes for program restart operation must be
observed.
(See III–5.7)
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.21.8 Retreat and retry function
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN) III.4.13 Retreat and retry function
386
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
387
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
6.1
POSITIONING
General The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece system
specified with an absolute or an incremental command at a rapid traverse
rate.
In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is
programmed.
In the incremental command the distance the tool moves is programmed.
The tool path is determined by selecting one of the following with
parameter LRP (No. 1401#1):
Linear interpolation type positioning
The tool path for positioning is determined in the same manner as
linear interpolation (G01). The tool moves at an appropriate speed so
that positioning can be performed in the shortest time without the
speed exceeding the rapid traverse rate for each axis.
Non–linear interpolation type positioning
Positioning is performed with each axis independently at the rapid
traverse rate. Generally, the tool path is not a straight line.
The rapid traverse rate in the G00 command is set to the parameter
No.1420 for each axis independently by the machine tool builder. In the
positioning mode actuated by G00, the tool is accelerated to a
predetermined speed at the start of a block and is decelerated at the end
of a block. Execution proceeds to the next block after confirming the
in–position.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 LRP
Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100% for
each axis.
388
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
Note
NOTE
The rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the address
F.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.1 POSITIONING (G00)
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
389
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
6.2
LINEAR
INTERPOLATION
G01ααββγγζζ Ff ;
g
Feed rate of γ axis direction : Fg + f
L
z
Feed rate of ζ axis direction : Fz + f
L
L + Ǹa 2 ) b 2 ) g 2 ) z2
The feedrate of the rotary axis is commanded in the unit of deg/min (if the
feedrate is 12 deg/min, F12.0 is commanded).
When the straight line axis α(such as X, Y, or Z) and the rotating axisβ
(such as A, B, or C) are linearly interpolated, the feed rate is that in which
the tangential feed rate in the αandβ cartesian coordinate system is
commanded by F(mm/min).
β–axis feedrate is obtained ; at first, the time required for distribution is
calculated by using the above fromula, then the β –axis feedrate unit is
changed to deg/min.
A calculation example is as follows.
(Example)
G91 G01 X20.0B40.0 F300.0 ;
This changes the unit of the C axis from 40.0 deg to 40mm with metric
input. The time required for distribution is calculated as follows:
Ǹ20 2 ) 40 2
8 0.14907 (min)
300
The feed rate for the C axis is
40 8 268.3 degńmin
0.14907
In simultaneous 3 axes control, the feed rate is calculated the same way
as in 2 axes control.
390
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
Parameter
1411
Cutting feedrate when the power is turned on
NOTE
To specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, use
parameter No. 1430 instead.
1430
Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis
391
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular
interpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involute
interpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified in
parameter No. 1422 is effective.
2 If the setting for each axis is 0, the maximum feedrate
specified in parameter No. 1422 is applied to all axes and
the feedrate is clamped at the maximum feedrate.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3402 G01
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01)
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
392
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
6.3
CIRCULAR
INTERPOLATION
General The command below can move a tool along a circular arc in the defined
plane.
“Clockwise”(G02) and “counterclockwise”(G03) on the XpYp plane
(ZpXp plane or YpZp plane) are defined when the XpYp plane is viewed
in the positive–to–negative direction of the Zp axis (Yp axis or Xp axis,
respectively) in the Cartesian coordinate system. See the figure below.
Yp Xp Zp
I0,J0, and K0 can be omitted. When Xp, Yp , and Zp are omitted (the end
point is the same as the start point) and the center is specified with I, J,
and K, a 360_ arc (circle) is specified.
G02I; Command for a circle
If the difference between the radius at the start point and that at the
end point exceeds the value in a parameter (No.3410), an alarm (No.020)
occurs.
393
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arc
can be specified using the radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K.
In this case, one arc is less than 180_, and the other is more than 180_ are
considered.
For T series, an arc with a sector angle of 180_ or wider cannot be
specified (Alarm 023).
For M series, specify an arc more than 180_ with a negative radius value
commanded.
If Xp, Yp, and Zp are all omitted, if the end point is located at the same
position as the start point and when R is used, an arc of 0°is programmed.
G02Rr ; (The tool does not move.)
(Example) (T series)
For arc (1) (less than 180_)
G02 W60.0 U10.0 R50.0 F300.0 ;
For arc (2) (greater than 180_)
An arc with a sector angle of 180°
or wider cannot be specified
within a single block.
(2)
r=50mm
End point
(1)
Start point
r=50mm
Y
394
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
(Example) (M series)
For arc (1)(less than 180_)
G91 G02 X60.0 Y20.0 R50.0 F300.0 ;
For arc (2)(greater than 180_)
G91 G02 XP60.0 YP20.0 R–50.0 F300.0 ;
(2)
r=50mm
End point
(1)
Parameter
1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system
NOTE
When this parameter is set, power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
395
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3402
G19 G18
NOTE
When the set value is 0, the difference of radii is not
checked.
396
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
Note
NOTE
1 The U, V and Waxes (parallel with the basic axis) can be
used with G–code system B and C.
2 If I, J, K, and R addresses are specified simultaneously, the
arc specified by address R takes precedence and the other
are ignored.
3 If an axis not comprising the specified plane is commanded,
an alarm is displayed.
For example, when G code system B or C is used, if U axis
with X axis is specified as a parallel axis to X axis when
plane XY is specified, an alarm (No.028)is displayed.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02,G03)
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
397
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
6.4
THREAD CUTTING
6.4.1
Thread Cutting
General Tool movement can be synchronized with spindle rotation when cutting
threads.
L : Lead L
L L
In general, thread cutting is repeated along the same tool path in rough
cutting through finish cutting for a screw. Since thread cutting starts when
the position coder mounted on the spindle outputs a 1–turn signal,
threading is started at a fixed point and the tool path on the workpiece is
unchanged for repeated thread cutting. Note that the spindle speed must
remain constant from rough cutting through finish cutting. If not,
incorrect thread lead will occur.
Signal
398
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F002 THRD
Parameter
Enabling/disabling dry
run operation during
threading #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 TDR
TDR
CAUTION
When thread cutting blocks are consecutive, the spindle
speed arrival signal is not checked for the second and
subsequent thread cutting blocks.
399
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
1627 FL rate of exponential acceleration /deceleration in the thread cutting cycle for
each axis
400
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
401
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Warning
402
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.10 CONSTANT LEAD THREAD CUTTING
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
403
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
6.4.2
Thread Cutting Cycle
Retract (T series)
General When the automatic operation stop signal *SP <G008#5> is set to 0
during threading in a threading cycle, the tool immediately retracts while
performing chamfering, then returns to the start point of the current cycle,
first along the X–axis, then along the Z–axis.
Stop point
Ordinary cycle
Rapid traverse Motion when the signal *SP is
set to 0.
Parameter
Setting to enable the
override function during
thread cutting cycle
retraction
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1403 RTV
404
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
Warning
WARNING
While the tool is retracting, automatic operation stop signal
*SP <G008#5> is ignored.
Note
NOTE
The chamfering distance for retraction is determined by the
setting of parameter No. 5130.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.1.2 Thread Cutting Cycle
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN)
II.14.2.7 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle
405
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
6.5
SINGLE DIRECTION
POSITIONING
(M SERIES)
General For accurate positioning without play of the machine (backlash), final
positioning from one direction is available.
Overrun
distance
Start position
Start position
Temporary stop
End position
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5431 MDL
406
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
Overrun distance
– +
Positioning direction (plus)
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.2 Single direction positioning
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
407
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
6.6
HELICAL
INTERPOLATION
The command method is to simply add one or two move command axes
which is not circular interpolation axes. An F command specifies a
feedrate along a circular arc. Therefore, the feedrate of the linear axis is
as follows:
Length of linear axis
F×
Length of circular arc
Determine the feedrate so that the linear axis feedrate does not exceed any
of the various limit values.
Tool path
X Y
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1404 HFC
NOTE
Parameters used for clamping
408
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
When HFC is 0
No. 1430: Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis
Since the cutting feedrate for the arc is clamped to the above
parameter value, the feedrate along the linear axis is clamped
to the smaller parameter value.
Example: No. 1430 X 1000
Y 1200
Z 1400
G17 G03 X0. Y100. R100. Z1000. F5000;
The feedrate along the linear axis is clamped to 1000.
No. 1422: Maximum cutting feedrate (common to all axes)
If parameter No. 1430 is set to 0, the feedrate is clamped to
the value set in this parameter.
When HFC is 1
No. 1422: Maximum cutting feedrate (common to all axes)
The cutting feedrate is clamped to the value set in this
parameter. The value set with parameter No. 1430 is
ignored.
Alarm and Message If more than two axes are specified together with the two axes for circular
interpolation in a block specifying a helical interpolation operation, alarm
No. 232 is issued.
No. Message Description
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.5 Helical Interpolation
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
409
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
6.7
INVOLUTE
INTERPOLATION
(M SERIES)
General With the involute interpolation function, an involute curve can be
machined. Cutter compensation C is also possible. The use of involute
interpolation eliminates the need to use short lines or arcs to approximate
an involute curve. Pulse distribution is no longer interrupted by the
high–speed operation of small blocks. As a result, smooth, high–speed
operation is possible. In addition, part programs can be created more
easily, and the required paper tape can be shortened.
Parameter
5610 Limit of initial permissible error during involute interpolation
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.8 Involute Interpolation
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
410
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
6.8
POLAR COORDINATE
INTERPOLATION
General Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour control
in converting a command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system
to the movement of a linear axis (movement of a tool) and the movement
of a rotary axis (rotation of a workpiece). This function is useful for
grinding a cam shaft.
G12.1 starts the polar coordinate interpolation mode and selects a polar
coordinate interpolation plane (Fig. 6.8 (a)). Polar coordinate
interpolation is performed on this plane.
Linear axis
(unit:mm or inch)
Parameter
1422 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes
411
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
To specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, use
parameter No. 1430 instead.
145 ILLEGAL CONDITIONS The conditions are incorrect when the polar
IN POLAR COORDINATE coordinate interpolation starts or it is can-
INTERPOLATION celed.
1) In modes other than G40, G12.1/G13.1
was specified.
2) An error is found in the plane selection.
Parameters No. 5460 and No. 5461 are
incorrectly specified.
Modify the value of program or parameter.
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.6 Polar Coordinate Interpolation
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
412
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
6.9
CYLINDRICAL
INTERPOLATION
General The amount of travel of a rotary axis specified by an angle is once
internally converted to a distance of a linear axis along the outer surface
so that linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be performed with
another axis. After interpolation, such a distance is converted back to the
amount of travel of the rotary axis.
The cylindrical interpolation function allows the side of a cylinder to be
developed for programming. So programs such as a program for
cylindrical cam grooving can be created very easily.
Use parameter No. 1022 to specify whether the rotation axis is the X–, Y–,
or Z–axis, or an axis parallel to one of these axes.
Only one rotation axis can be set for cylindrical interpolation.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx
NOTE
When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before
continuing operation.
413
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
414
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.7 Cylindrical Interpolation
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
415
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Workpiece
Workpiece Tool
(For the principle of polygonal turning, refer to Section 20.1, Part II of the
“Operator’s Manual (For Lathe).”)
The term polygonal turning with two spindle refers to a turning operation
in which the second spindle is used as the tool rotation axis (See Section
6.10.2.).
416
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
6.10.1
Polygonal Turning
General One of the axes (servo axes) controlled by the CNC is assigned as a tool
rotation axis. Either serial spindle or analog spindle can be used as a
workpiece axis (spindle).
Polygonal turning using a servo axis is detailed in the operator’s manual
(for lathe).
This section focuses on supplementary information and examples for the
connection.
Spindle connection A position coder must be mounted on the spindle. However, polygonal
turning requires no additional changes to the spindle connection (See
Section 9.3.).
Polygonal turning uses the position coder feedback signal to control the
positional relationship (cutting position) between the spindle and tool
rotation axis, and the ratio of speed.
Tool rotation axis Parameter No. 7610 specifies the controlled axis (servo axis) to be used
(servo axis) connection as the tool rotation axis.
The same parameter setting as for ordinary servo axes applies to the servo
axis connection for polygonal turning except for some parameters.
When the machine is not in the polygonal turning mode, the servo axis
specified as the rotation tool axis functions as a feed axis. So, the servo
axis can be:
· Used as a subspindle under PMC axis control
· Positioned by a move command from a machining program.
However, be careful about the angle to rotate through and feedrate. Read
the operator’s manual (for lathe) and the following examples.
Examples of parameter · The following descriptions exemplify typical parameter setting for
setting polygonal turning using a serial pulse coder (with a million pulse
capability).
→ The parameter setting described here is not a must for polygonal
turning.
→ Specify typical values for parameters unless otherwise stated.
Tool rotation axis setting
This example uses the CNC’s fourth axis (connected as the Y–axis) as
a rotation tool axis for polygonal turning.
Parameter No. 7610 = 4
(controlled axis number for the tool rotation axis)
The following description assumes that the axis type parameter is set
to the fourth axis.
Servo parameter setting
Set the servo parameters as listed below:
CMR = 1
DMR = 36/1000
417
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
418
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
360
No. 1420 = 72000 (= 2000 )
10
Also specify other feedrates in 10 degrees/min units.
Commands from the NC program
When the machine is not performing polygonal turning, the machining
program can issue move commands to the polygon axis.
Such commands can be issued in the same way as for ordinary axes.
However, be careful about the angle to rotate through and feedrate.
Assuming the polygon axis is the Y–axis, the polygon axis rotates
through 0.03 degrees by the following command:
V3;
Likewise, the polygon axis rotates through 10.00 degrees by the
following command:
V1.0;
The feedrate unit is also increased by tenfold.
The current position of the polygon in the machine coordinate system
is normalized according to the value specified by parameter No. 7620.
Typical values range from 0.000 to 35.999.
Signal
Polygon synchronization
under way signal
PSYN [Classification] Output signal
<F063#7>
[Function] Informs the PMC that the machine is in the polygon turning mode.
[Output condition] The polygon synchronization signal is set to logical “1” by the polygon
turning mode command (G51.2) and stays at “1” during the polygonal
turning mode.
The signal is reset to logical “0” by the polygon turning mode reset
command (G50.2) or a reset. It stays at logical “0” when the machine is
not in the polygonal turning mode.
CAUTION
This signal uses the same address for both polygonal
turning (using the servo axis) and polygonal turning with two
spindles.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F063 PSYN
419
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7600 PLZ
7610 Control axis number of tool rotation axis for polygon turning
7621 Maximum allowable speed for the tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis)
This parameter sets the upper–limit rotation speed of a tool rotation axis.
The rotation speed of the tool rotation axis is clamped by the set
upper–limit rotation speed during polygon turning. The spindle and tool
rotation axis go out of synchronization when the rotation speed is clamped
(P/S alarm No. 5018).
420
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
Caution
CAUTION
1 Before issuing a G51.2, rotate the spindle. If it is not rotating
when the G51.2 is issued, the program stops to wait for a
one–rotation signal from the position coder on the spindle.
This does not apply to a dry run.
2 A reset releases the polygonal turning mode.
3 Machine a workpiece at the same spindle speed until finish
machining for the workpiece.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.20.1 POLYGONAL TURNING
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN)
421
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
6.10.2
Polygonal Turning with
Two Spindles
General In the polygonal turning with two spindles, the first spindle is used as a
workpiece rotation axis (master axis). The second spindle is used as a tool
rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis). Spindle rotation control is
applied to both spindles with a constant ratio.
The polygonal turning with two spindles can use different spindle speeds
for the same workpiece, because it performs automatic phase compensa-
tion when a polygon synchronization mode command is issued or the S
command is changed during polygon synchronization mode. With this
function, it is also possible to specify the phase difference between the
master and polygon synchronization axes.
Moreover, polygonal turning works with the first and second spindles on
each tool post in a two–path lathe application. However, polygonal
turning does not work with spindles on different tool posts.
D Command format The CNC command format for polygonal turning with two spindles is
described below. For the CNC command format for polygonal turning
(see Section 6.10.1), refer to the operator’s manual (for lathe). The two
formats are almost identical. The differences are in that the polygonal
turning with two spindles can specify a phase command (R) and re–issue
commands.
D Mode command and z G51.2 P_Q_R_;
command value change
This command starts the polygon synchronization mode or changes the
values specified for the polygon synchronization mode.
P: Master axis (first spindle) rotation ratio
Range of command value: Integer 1 to 999
(The direction in which the master axis rotates depends on the
commands (such as M03 and M04) issued under ordinary spindle
control.)
Q: Polygon synchronization axis (second spindle) rotation ratio
Range of command value: Integers 1 to 999 and –1 to –999
(The direction in which the polygon synchronization axis rotates
depends on the algebraic sign of the Q value, except when bit 1
(GDRC) of parameter No. 7603 = 1, in which case the polygon
synchronization axis rotates in the same direction as the first spindle.
In this case, Q cannot take a negative value.)
R: Relative phase difference between the master and polygon
synchronization axes
The range of command value and the increment system are the same
as for the rotation axis. However, the angle to rotate through is in
360/4096 degrees units.
(R is omissible. If it is not specified at all, the phase difference is
assumed to be 0. If bit 5 (PCOF) of parameter No. 7602 = 1 to disable
phase control, the R command is ignored, but no alarm condition is
assumed.)
422
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
The G51.2 command is modal. Once specified, the P, Q, and R values stay
unchanged until another G51.2 is issued to change them or polygon
synchronized mode is released.
The S command issued to the first spindle during polygon synchroniza-
tion mode specifies that the second spindle be used as a polygon synchro-
nization axis and rotates at a speed of S Q/P with a phase difference
of R.
D Release command z G50.2
This command releases the polygon synchronization mode. This mode
is released also when:
(1) Reset
(That mode is not released by bit 0 (RPLM) of parameter No. 7603.)
(2) Power is turning off.
(3) An alarm condition occurs in the spindle control unit, and the serial
spindle control unit stops in an emergency on the PMC signals
*ESPA<G0071#1> and *ESPB<G0075#1>.
(4) P/S alarm 218, 219, or 221 occurs
D Cautions for using G51.2 and G50.2 must be issued separately from other commands.
commands
In a G51.2 issued to enter the polygon synchronization mode, R is
omissible, but P and Q are required.
After a G51.2 is issued to enter the polygon synchronization mode,
changing modal values of P, Q, and R requires another G51.2. In this case,
R can be specified separately from P and Q. However, P and Q must be
specified together even if only one of them is changed.
D Spindle operation during When a G51.2 is issued to start the spindle–spindle polygon synchroniza-
the spindle–spindle tion mode, the speed of the spindle (polygon synchronization axis) is
polygon synchronization changed to Q/P times the speed of the first spindle (master axis) to achieve
mode a speed ratio of P:Q, and phase adjustment is performed.
(If no S command is issued to the first spindle after a G51.2, the previous
S command remains effective.)
If the spindle is in an acceleration, deceleration, or phase adjustment state,
synchronization at a rotation ratio of P:Q is not guaranteed. So, it is
necessary to control SAR<G0029#4> by checking the speed arrival
signal PSAR<F0063#2> for polygonal turning with two spindles or to
allow sufficient time in the program.
The method to specify the spindle speed during the polygon synchroniza-
tion mode is the same as for ordinary modes. However, each time an S
command is issued to the first spindle during polygon synchronization
mode, or a rotation ratio P:Q or phase value R command is re–specified
during the polygon synchronization mode, phase adjustment is performed
after speed control. In addition, speed commands (such as under multi-
spindle control or spindle output control for the second spindle by the
PMC) for the second spindle become ineffective.
If the specified polygon synchronization axis speed (S Q/P for the
first spindle at S rpm) exceeds the clamp speed specified in parameter No.
7621, the polygon synchronization axis speed is clamped, and P/S alarm
No. 5018 is issued.
423
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Each time the spindle speed command for the first spindle changes or P
and Q are re–specified in a G51.2, the clamp speed is checked to
determine whether to issue P/S alarm No. 5018.
Note that a reset can clear the alarm with the speed clamped.
(A rotation speed ratio of P:Q cannot be maintained with the speed
clamped. Bit 2 (QCL) of DGN No. 471 indicates whether the speed is
clamped.)
D PMC sequence Although this function is based on the G–code system, it is necessary to
add or change PMC ladder sequences because control on the part of the
spindle is also required (See signals in Section 6.10.2).
D Example of polygonal This example of polygonal turning with two spindles produces a square
turning with two spindles using single–edged cutting tools (for roughing and finishing).
.
Mfj; Step 1. Mount a roughing tool on the polygon syn-
Tff∆∆ ; chronization axis (second spindle as tool
rotation axis).
G00 X100. Z20. M03 S1000 Step 2. Rotate the workpiece (with the first spindle
; as the master axis at 1000 rpm)
.
.
G51. 2 P1 Q2 ; Step 3. Start rotating the tool.
. Energize the second spindle in response to
the polygon synchronization under way sig-
.
nal using the PMC ladder.
. After accelerating the second spindle as the
. polygon synchronization axis to 2000 rpm,
. perform phase adjustment (Execute R0 to
. omit an R value.).
. By checking PSYC<F0063#7>, the PMC
ladder can detect when the polygon syn-
. chronization mode is entered. During the
. polygon synchronization mode, the PMC
. ladder controls SAR<G0029#4> based on
. the speed arrival signal PSAR<F0063#2>
. during the polygon synchronization mode.
G01 X80. F10. ; Step 4. Starts cutting along the X–axis after
. SAR<G0029#4> becomes logical 1 in sig-
nal control at step 3.
.
G04 P4000 ; Step 5. Polygonal turning (roughing 1)
.
G00 X100. ; Step 6. Retract the tool along the X–axis.
.
G51. 2 R180 ; Step 7. Change the phase by 180 degrees.
.
[Repeat steps 4, 5, and 6.] Step 8. Polygonal turning (roughing 2)
.
G50. 2 ; Step 9. Release the polygon synchronization mode.
M∆j ; Change to a finishing tool.
T∆∆ jj ;
.
424
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
Diagnosis display (DGN) For polygonal turning with two spindles, the following information is
displayed on the diagnosis display screen.
425
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
CAUTION
1 DGN indicates the loop gain because this function requires
that both spindles be controlled with the same loop gain.
However, no alarm is issued even if the loop gain is different
between the spindles.
(For the serial spindle control unit, the parameters used are
changed according to the state of the CTH1 and CTH2
signals.)
2 SC0 is not a value specified by the program. It is set to 1
under any of the following conditions:
1. When the S command value is adjusted according to the
signals related to spindle control, SSTP<G0029#6> and
SOV0– SOV7<G0030> and the signal related to
multi–spindle control <G0027>, the result is 0.
2. The S command value is smaller than the spindle control
resolution (the result of multiplying the S command value
by a value of 4095/(maximum spindle speed) is less than
1).
The S command value is specified by SIND control
<G0032, G0033>, and it is 0.
If SC0 = 1, the spindle speed becomes 0 and bit 0 of DGN
No. 471 becomes 1. In this case, the polygon
synchronization rotation ratio is impractical, but P/S alarm
No. 5018 does not occurs, because it is regarded as the
result of the command.
NOTE
1 The normal state during spindle–spindle polygonal turning
is: SPL = 1, SCF = 1, #1 = 0, #2 = 0, and #3 = 0
2 If only PST becomes 1, but no change occurs, and the
program stops in a block containing a G51.2 command, the
speed of an spindle does not reach the targeted polygon
synchronization speed, for example, because bit 7 (PST) of
parameter No. 7603 = 0 keeps the spindle from being
energized.
3 When the speed is changed during polygon
synchronization mode, LGE is set to 1 if the spindle
synchronization control loop gain used by the serial spindle
control unit is different between the first and second
spindles.
Polygonal turning with two spindles Indication of causes for P/S alarms
5018 and 218
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
471 NPQ PQE NSP SUO QCL PCL
426
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
CAUTION
#0 becomes 1 also when the specified spindle speed is 0
(DGN 470#7 = 1). In this case, however, P/S alarm No. 5018
is not issued (because the command is 0). When DGN
470#7 = 0 and DGN 471#0 = 1, P/S alarm No. 5018 occurs.
Normally this does not occur with speed at which the spindle
can rotate.
NOTE
1 PCL indicates that the master axis has received a command
with a speed that is higher than the value specified by the
maximum first spindle speed parameters (No. 3741 to 3744)
and is clamped to that speed. PCL will not become 1 as long
as the first spindle is connected correctly.
2 QCL becomes 1, when the second spindle (polygon
synchronization axis) receives a command with a polygon
synchronization speed that is higher than the value
specified in parameter No. 7621 and is clamped at that
speed.
3 SUO occurs, if a result of (speed specified for the first
spindle)/(value specified at P) is higher than 59998. In other
words, the first spindle must rotate at a speed lower than
59998 rpm assuming P = 1.
427
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
This indication is the current rotation ratio (P command value) of the mas-
ter axis (first spindle) during the spindle–spindle polygon synchroniza-
tion mode.
475 Rotation ratio for the polygon synchronization axis during the spindle–spindle
polygon synchronization mode (Q command value)
476 Phase difference between the two spindles under spindle–spindle polygon
synchronization control (R command value)
This indication is the actual speed of the master axis (first spindle) during
the spindle–spindle polygon synchronization mode.
478 Actual polygon synchronization axis speed (rpm) during the spindle–spindle
polygon synchronization mode
NOTE
The indications of DGN Nos. 477 and 478 vary because of
no sampling being performed. Consider these DGN values
only guidelines.
428
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
Signal
Polygon synchronization
under way signal
PSYN<F063#7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Informs the PMC that the system is in the polygon synchronization mode.
[Output condition] The polygon synchronization mode command (G51.2) sets this signal to
logical “1”. It stays at “1” as long as the system is in the polygon synchro-
nization mode. It is turned to “0” when the polygon synchronization
mode is cleared (G50.2 command or a reset). It stays at “0” when the sys-
tem is not in the polygon synchronization mode.
NOTE
The same address is used for this signal in both polygonal
turning (using the servo axis) and the polygonal turning with
two spindles.
429
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
[Output condition] During polygonal turning mode with two spindles, whether the constant–
speed is reached for polygon synchronization is output as shown below:
“0” = not reached (during phase change or acceleration/deceleration
under way)
“1” = reached
Details → During the polygon control mode, this signal becomes logical “1” when
the speed of each spindle reaches the acceptable level specified in
parameter No. 7631 and remains there for a period specified in parameter
No. 7632.
If the speed of either spindle goes off the acceptable level, or a change is
made to the S command, the signal returns to logical “0” and begins
monitoring the above condition.
When this signal is “0”, the specified speed ratio and phase are not
guaranteed for polygonal turning. If the signal is confirmed before actual
turning is started, however, the operation is more efficient than when a
dwell command (like G04) is used to allow wait time.
PMC sequence ⋅When a G51.2 is issued to put the system in the polygon synchronization
mode, the polygon synchronization under way signal PSYN<F063#7>
becomes on.
There are two control methods, (A) and (B), to control energizing of the
spindle. First select (A) or (B) and creates a PMC sequence according to
the selected method.
430
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
Method A
(A)Energize the first and second spindles automatically during the G51.2
mode.
Basically, do not discontinue energizing during this mode.
→ In this case, keep bit 7 (PST) of parameter No. 7603 = 0.
In the PMC sequence, detect when the polygon synchronization
under way signal PSYN<F063#7> changes from 0 to 1, then
energize the first and second spindles.
The NC stops at the G51.2 command block which puts the system
in the polygon synchronization mode, and remains there until the
spindle reaches the polygon synchronization speed.
Also, keep the spindle energized, for example, by preventing it
from receiving a spindle stop command (like M05) for ordinary
spindle control while PSYN<F063#7> = 1. Basically, deenergize
the spindle when the polygon synchronization under way signal
PSYN<F063#7> changes from 1 to 0.
Method B
(B)Control the energizing of the spindle using M codes even during the
G51.2 mode. Alternatively, deenergize the spindle even during the
G51.2
→ In this case, keep bit 7 (PST) of parameter No. 7603 = 1.
This parameter setting enables use of the spindle stop signal
*PLSST<G038#0> during the polygon synchronization mode. It
also makes the G51.2 command block stop waiting for the spindle
to reach the polygon synchronization speed.
In the PMC sequence, while the polygon synchronization under
way signal PSYN<F063#7> = 1, set *PLSST<G038#0> to 1 after
confirming both first spindle and second spindles are energized.
If either spindle has been deenergized, reset *PLSST<G038#0> to
0.
When the polygon synchronization under way signal PSYN
<F063#7> changes from 1 to 0, basically keep *PLSST <G038#0>
at 0. (This is intended to keep *PLSST <G038#0> from becoming
1 in a deenergized state when the polygon synchronization mode
is entered again.)
When *PLSST <G038#0> changes from 0 to 1 during the polygon
synchronization mode, the spindle is accelerated from a stop state
to the specified speed and placed under phase control, even if the
S command has not been changed.
Sequence common to methods (A) and (B)
Regardless of whether the method you use is (A) or (B), set up the PMC
sequence as follows:
Do not use the SFR/SRV signal to switch the rotation direction of the
first spindle. Instead, fix the energizing method of the spindle at SFR
and change the polarity of the command. (To change the polarity of
the command, issue M03/M04 with bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No.
3706 = 1, or control SGN<G033#5> with SSIN<G033#6> = 1.)
431
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G038 *PLSST
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F063 PSYN PSAR PSE2 PSE1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7602 COF HST HSL HDR SNG MNG
432
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
NOTE
Use MNG, SNG, and HDR when the specified rotational
direction of the master axis or polygon synchronization axis,
or the specified phase shift direction is to be reversed in
spindle–spindle polygon turning mode.
NOTE
This parameter can be used, for example, when
single–rotation signal detection cannot be guaranteed at an
arbitrary feedrate because a separate detector is installed
to detect the spindle single–rotation signal, as when a
built–in spindle is used. (When bit 7 of parameter No. 4016
for the serial spindle is set to 1, together with this parameter,
a single–rotation signal detection position in
spindle–spindle polygon turning mode is guaranteed.)
CAUTION
When the use of phase control is not selected, the steady
state is reached in a shorter time because phase
synchronization control is not applied. Once steady rotation
is achieved, however, polygonal turning must be completed
without changing the steady state. (If the rotation is
stopped, or the rotational speed altered, polygonal turning
is disabled because of the inevitable phase shift.)
Setting this parameter to 1 does not issue an alarm on the
R command (phase command) in the same block as the
G51.2. It is only ignored.
433
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7603 PST RDG QDR RPL
NOTE
A phase command is specified in address R, in units of
degrees. For control, the actual shift amount is converted
to a number of pulses according to the conversion formula:
360 degrees = 4096 pulses. This parameter switches the
display of a specified value to that of a converted value.
PST The polygon spindle stop signal *PLSST (bit 0 of G038) is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
7621 Maximum allowable speed for the tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis)
This parameter sets the maximum allowable speed of the tool rotation axis
(polygon synchronization axis).
If the speed of the tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis)
exceeds the specified maximum allowable speed during polygon turning,
the speed is clamped at the maximum allowable speed. When the speed
is clamped at a maximum allowable speed, however, synchronization
between the spindle and tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis)
is lost. And, when the speed is clamped, P/S alarm No. 5018 is issued.
434
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
435
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
218 NOT FOUND P/Q COM- The G51.2 block does not contain P or Q,
MAND IN G251 or a specified value is invalid.
The causes of this alarm are detailed in
DGN No. 471. (See below.)
DGN No. 471#7 NPQ →
When P and Q are not specified at all, R
is specified. Alternatively, none of P, Q,
and R has been specified.
DGN No. 471#6 PQE →
P or Q is out of the valid data range. Alter-
natively, P and Q are not specified as a
pair.
DGN No. 471#5 →
A negative value is specified at Q when
bit 1 (QDRC) of parameter No. 7603 = 1.
DGN No. 471#4 NSP →
There is no spindle necessary for control.
(The spindle is not a serial spindle, or there
is not the second spindle, etc.)
5018 POLYGON SPINDLE SPEED The specified rotation ratio cannot be main-
ERROR tained during the G51.2 mode, because the
speed of the spindle or polygon synchro-
nization axis exceeds the clamping value or
is too low.
The causes of this alarm are detailed in
DGN No. 471. (See below.)
DGN No. 471#3 SUO →
The specified speed is too high.
DGN No. 471#2 QCL →
The polygon synchronization axis (se-
cond spindle) is clamped.
DGN No. 471#1 PCL →
The master axis (first spindle) is
clamped.
DGN No. 471#0 →
The specified speed is too low.
(Remark)
⋅ In a properly connected machine, P/S alarm No. 5018 does not basically
occur for other than a reason that the polygon synchronization axis is
clamped. (See descriptions of DGN for details.)
436
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
⋅ To the contrary to P/S alarm No. 221, P/S alarm No. 194 occurs if
another NC control spindle function is specified during the two–spindle
polygon synchronization mode.
Caution
CAUTION
1 The maximum spindle speed for each gear stage (No. 3741
to 3744) must be specified correctly according to the model
of the machine. In addition, ordinary spindle connections
must have been terminated.
2 This function uses the one–rotation signal for the spindle as
a reference point for phase adjustment.
When a built–in sensor is used, and there are gears
between the spindle and spindle motor, it is necessary to
install a detector on the spindle separately to take a
one–rotation signal from the spindle. If the detector does
not guarantee detection of a correct position from arbitrary
speed, set bit 4 (PHST) of parameter No. 7602 and bit 7 of
serial spindle parameter No. 4016 to 1. This setting reduces
the spindle speed automatically down to 0 for spindle
position detection each time the spindle–spindle polygonal
turning mode is entered, thus guaranteeing a correct phase
relationship during spindle–spindle polygon
synchronization mode.
3 This function uses the spindle synchronization function for
serial spindles. (However, it does not require the spindle
synchronization option for the CNC.) You may need to
specify the relevant serial spindle parameters (such as Nos.
4032 to 4035).
Specify the same serial spindle loop gain for both spindles.
If the same serial spindle loop gain is not used for both
spindles, polygonal turning may not be accurate.
If an attempt is made to perform spindle–spindle polygonal
turning, DGN 470#6 LGE becomes 1. (No alarm is issued.)
4 Before using the polygon synchronization mode, place both
first and second spindles in the spindle control mode. The
polygon synchronization mode cannot be used if they are
already in other modes (Cs contouring control mode or
spindle orientation mode, etc.).
5 During the polygon synchronization mode, the speed of the
second spindle cannot be controlled independently of the
speed of the first spindle.
During the polygon synchronization mode, the spindle
orientation function (ORCMA<G070#6>,
ORCMB<G074#6) cannot be used for either the first spindle
or second spindle. Therefore, gear, tool or workpiece
change is basically unusable during the polygon
synchronization mode.
437
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
CAUTION
6 During polygon synchronization mode, speed change and
phase adjustment are performed each time the spindle
speed is changed. Therefore, this mode cannot be used
together with a function that causes continuous spindle
speed change (such as G96 constant surface speed
control)
7 During the polygon synchronization mode, the rotation ratio
between the master axis and polygon synchronization axis
is controlled with priority. Therefore, the difference between
the master axis speed and S command value may become
larger than during ordinary spindle control. (The master axis
speed may be up to 2 rpm lower than specified.)
Note
NOTE
1 During the polygon synchronization mode, phase control is
performed in the least command increment of 36/4096 =
0.08789...(degrees) in reference to the one–rotation signal
for each spindle. Actually, a command value out of a range
from 0 to 359.999... is meaningless because the relative
phase is controlled within one rotation of each spindle.
However, this function does not limit the R command value
and the CNC converts the R command value to a value
below 360 degrees.
2 The G51.2 command during conversational function is
equivalent to the G50.2 command. (The system does not
enter the polygon synchronization mode. If it is already in
the polygon synchronization mode, release it using a G51.2
command.)
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.20.1 POLYGONAL TURNING
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN)
438
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
6.11
NORMAL DIRECTION
CONTROL
(M SERIES)
General When a tool with a rotation axis (C–axis) is moved in the XY plane during
cutting, the normal direction control function can control the tool so that
the C–axis is always perpendicular to the tool path (Fig. 6.11).
C–axi
C–axi
Tool
Tool
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx
NOTE
When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before
continuing operation.
439
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
The rotation axis must be set to the normal direction control
axis.
440
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
5482 Limit value that ignores the rotation insertion of normal direction control axis
NOTE
1 No rotation block is inserted when 360 or more degrees are
set.
2 If 180 or more degrees are set, a rotation block is inserted
only when the circular interpolation is 180 or more degrees.
5483 Limit value of movement that is executed at the normal direction angle of
a preceding block
Movement
Programmed path
N2 For arc
Tool center path
Arc N2 is machined with the tool being normal
Programmed path to block N1 when the arc diameter of N2 in the
figure on the left does not exceed the setting
N3
value. A normal direction axis is not controlled
to move in the normal direction according to
the arc movement.
N1
Diameter
441
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
To specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, use
parameter No. 1430 instead.
Note
NOTE
The helical interpolation option is required to use this
function. Helical interpolation cannot be specified in the
normal direction control mode.
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15.12 Normal Direction Control
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
442
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
6.12
EXPONENTIAL
INTERPOLATION
(M SERIES)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5630
SPN
5641
Linear axis number subject to exponential interpolation
5642
Rotation axis number subject exponential interpolation
443
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
5643
Amount of linear axis division (span value) in exponential interpolation
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.9 Exponential interpolation
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
444
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
6.13
SMOOTH
INTERPOLATION
(M SERIES)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8485 CDSP
445
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.10 Exponential interpolation
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
446
B–62753EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
6.14
HYPONENTIAL AXIS
INTERPOLATION
General In helical interpolation, when pulses are distributed with one of the
circular interpolation axes set to a hypothetical axis, sine interpolation is
enable.
When one of the circular interpolation axes is set to a hypothetical axis,
pulse distribution causes the speed of movement along the remaining axis
to change sinusoidally. If the major axis for threading (the axis along
which the machine travels the longest distance) is set to a hypothetical
axis, threading with a fractional lead is enabled. The axis to be set as the
hypothetical axis is specified with G07.
p 2p
0 Z
p
2
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.11 Hyponential axis interpolation
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
447
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
448
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.1 The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feed
functions are available:
FEEDRATE
CONTROL 1. Rapid traverse
When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves at
a rapid traverse rate set in the CNC (parameter No. 1420).
2. Cutting feed
The tool moves at a programmed cutting feedrate.
Override can be applied to a rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate using
the override signal.
7.1.1
Rapid Traverse Rate
General The positioning command (G00) positions the tool by rapid traverse.
G00 IP_ ;
In rapid traverse, the next block is executed after the specified rate
becomes 0 and the servo motor reaches a certain range set by the
parameter (No.1826) (in–position check).
A rapid traverse rate is set for each axis by parameter No. 1420, so no rapid
traverse rate need be programmed.
The following overrides can be applied to a rapid traverse rate with the
rapid traverse override signal:F0, 25, 50, 100%
F0: Allows a fixed feedrate to be set for each axis by parameter No. 1421.
In addition, the use of the 1% rapid traverse override selection signal
enables a rapid traverse override of between 0% and 100% to be applied
in 1% steps.
Signal
449
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 The rapid traverse in automatic operation includes all rapid
traverses in canned cycle positioning, automatic reference
point return, etc., as well as the move command G00. The
manual rapid traverse also includes the rapid traverse in
reference position return.
2 Once rapid traverse has been selected, this signal remains
“1”, including during a stop, until another feedrate has been
selected and movement is started.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F002 RPDO
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 RDR RFO LRP
Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100% for
each axis.
450
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Set the rate of manual rapid traverse for each axis when the rapid traverse
override is 100% for each axis.
NOTE
If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter 1420 is assumed.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.2 Rapid traverse
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
451
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
7.1.2
Cutting Feedrate
Clamp
General A common upper limit can be set on the cutting feedrate along each axis
with parameter No. 1422. If an actual cutting feedrate (with an override
applied) exceeds a specified upper limit, it is clamped to the upper limit.
Parameter
1422 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes
NOTE
To specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, use
parameter No. 1430 instead.
NOTE
1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular
interpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involute
interpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified in
parameter No. 1422 is effective.
2 If the setting for each axis is 0, the maximum feedrate
specified in parameter No. 1422 is applied to all axes and
the feedrate is clamped at the maximum feedrate.
452
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
NOTE
For HPCC mode, refer to 7.1.14 HIGH PRECISION
CONTOUR CONTROL.
Warning
WARNING
CNC calculation may involve a feedrate error of +2% with
respect to a specified value. However, this is not true for
acceleration/deceleration. To be more specific, this error is
calculated with respect to a measurement on the time the
tool takes to move 500 mm or more during the steady state:
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting Feed
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
453
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
7.1.3
Feed Per Minute
General Override can be applied to a rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate using
the switch on the machine operator’s panel.
Feed per minute (G94) After specifying G94 (G98 for T series) (in the feed per minute mode), the
amount of feed of the tool per minute is to be directly specified by setting
a number after F. G94 (G98 for T series) is a modal code. Once a G94
(G98 for T series) is specified, it is valid until G95 (G99 for T series) (feed
per revolution) is specified. At power–on, the feed per minute mode (feed
per revolution mode for T series) is set.
An override from 0% to 254% (in 1% steps) can be applied to feed per
minute with the feedrate override signal.
Tool
Workpiece
Table
WARNING
No override can be used for any commands such as for
threading.
Format
For M series
G94; G code for feed per minute (Group 05)
F_; Feed rate (mm/min or inch/min)
For T series
G98; G code for feed per minute (Group 05)
F_; Feed rate (mm/min or inch/min)
454
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1403 MIF
NOTE
M series are not equipped with this parameter. Cutting
feedrates are specified by F commands in units of 0.001
mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001 inches/min for
inch machines.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3401 FCD
NOTE
When FCD = 1:
If the block containing a G command (G98, G99) does not
include an F command, the last F command specified is
assumed to be specified in the G command mode of the
block.
Example 1: N1 G99 ;
N2 Faaaa G98 ; - Faaaa is assumed to be specified in the G98 mode.
N3 Fbbbb ; - Fbbbb is assumed to be specified in the G98 mode.
N4 G99 ; - Fbbbb is assumed to be specified in the G99 mode.
NOTE
In G code system B or C, G98 and G99 function are
specified in G94 and G95.
455
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting feed
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
456
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.1.4
Feed Per Revolution/
Manual Feed Per
Revolution
General
Feed per revolution After specifying G95 (G99 for T series) (in the feed per revolution
mode), the amount of feed of the tool per spindle revolution is to be
directly specified by setting a number after F. G95 (G99 for T series)
is a modal code. Once a G95 is specified, it is valid until G94 (G98
for T series) (feed per minute) is specified.
An override from 0% to 254% (in 1% steps) can be applied to feed per
revolution with the switch on the machine operator’s panel. For
detailed information, see the appropriate manual of the machine tool
builder.
[T series]
F Feed amount per spindle revolution
(mm/rev or inch/rev)
Manual feed per Jog feedrate can be specified by feed per revolution.
revolution
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JRV NPC
NPC
NOTE
Specify a feedrate in parameter No. 1423.
457
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Caution
CAUTION
When the speed of the spindle is low, feedrate fluctuation
may occur. The slower the spindle rotates, the more
frequently feedrate fluctuation occurs.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting feed
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
458
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.1.5
F1-digit Feed
(M series)
General When a one–digit number from 1 to 9 is specified after F, the feedrate set
for that number in a parameter (Nos. 1451 to 1459) is used. When F0 is
specified, the rapid traverse rate is applied.
The feedrate corresponding to the number currently selected can be
increased or decreased by turning on the switch for changing F1–digit
feedrate on the machine operator’s panel, then by rotating the manual
pulse generator.
The increment/decrement, ∆F, in feedrate per scale of the manual pulse
generator is as follows:
∆ F Fmax
100X
Fmax : feedrate upper limit for F1–F4 set by parameter 1460, or
feedrate upper limit for F5–F9 set by parameter 1461
X : any value of 1–127 set by parameter 1450
The feedrate set or altered is kept even while the power is off. The current
feedrate is displayed on the CRT screen.
Signal
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G016 F1D
459
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
1450
Change of feedrate for one graduation on the manual pulse generator
during F1 digit feed
1460 Upper limit of feedrate for the F1–digit feed command (F1 to F4)
460
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
1461 Upper limit of feedrate for the F1-digit feed command (F5 to F9)
Set the upper limit of feedrate for the F1-digit feed command.
As the feedrate increases by turning the manual pulse generator, the
feedrate is clamped when it reaches the upper limit set. If an F1-digit feed
command F1 to F4 is executed, the upper limit is that set in parameter
1460. If an F1-digit command F5 to F9 is executed, the upper limit is that
set in parameter 1461.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting feed
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
461
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
7.1.6
Feedrate Inverse Time
Specification (M series)
General Feedrate of the tool can be specified by the move distance of the block and
inverse time (FRN).
CAUTION
In circular interpolation, the distance is not an actual
distance of the block but the speed is calculated from the
circle radius.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting feed
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
462
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.1.7
Override
7.1.7.1
Rapid Traverse
Override
General An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to the
rapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter (No. 1421).
Also, 1% rapid traverse override select signal allows rapid traverse
override every 1% in the range of 0 to 100%.
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
Rapid traverse
rate10m/min
Override
50%
ÇÇ
5m/min
Feedrate Actual feedrate is obtained by multiplying the rapid traverse rate preset
by parameter no.1420 by the override value determined by this signal,
whether in automatic or manual operation (including manual reference
position return).
Fo rate For F0 value, an absolute value is set by parameter no.1421 within a range
of 0 to rapid traverse rate (for each axis).
1% step rapid traverse 1% step rapid traverse override selection signal HROV determines
override selection signal whether rapid traverse override specified with rapid traverse override
signals ROV1 and ROV2 is used or 1% step rapid traverse override is
used.
When signal HROV is 0, override is applied to the rapid traverse rate
using signals ROV1 and ROV2.
When signal HROV is 1, ROV1 and ROV2 are ignored, 1% step rapid
traverse override signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 being used to override the
rapid traverse rate.
PMC axis control These 1% step rapid traverse override signals are also effective to the rapid
traverse rate for the PMC axis. When rapid traverse override is applied
to the PMC axis (using signals ROV1E and ROV2E) with the setting of
the OVE bit (bit 2 of parameter No. 8001) independently of the CNC, the
1% step rapid traverse override signals are ineffective.
463
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
464
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G014 ROV2 ROV1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0
Parameter
1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis
Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8001 OVE
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.3 Rapid traverse override
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
465
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
7.1.7.2
Feedrate Override
Workpiece
Signal
466
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 RFO
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting feed
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
7.1.7.3
Second feedrate override
General These signals override the cutting feedrate after the cutting feedrate has
been overridden by first override *FV0 to *FV7.
Signal
Second feedrate override These eight binary code signals correspond to the override values as
signal *AFV0 to *AFV7 follows.
<G013>
467
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
7
Override value = Σ ( 2i×Vi )
i=0
If all signals are “0” or “1”, the override is regarded as 0%. The override is
selectable in steps over a range of 0 to 254%.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G013 *AFV7 *AFV6 *AFV5 *AFV4 *AFV3 *AFV2 *AFV1 *AFV0
7.1.7.4
Override Cancel
General The override cancel signal fixes the feedrate override to 100%.
Signal
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G006 OVC
468
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.1.8
Automatic Corner
Override (M series)
General
Inner corner automatic When G62 is specified, and the tool path with cutter compensation
override applied forms an inner corner, the feedrate is automatically overridden
at both ends of the corner.
There are four types of inner corners (Fig. 7.1.8).
2,θθp178, in Fig. 7.1.8
θp is a value set with parameter No. 1711. When θ is approximately
equal to θp, the inner corner is determined with an error of 0.001,or
less.
θ θ
WARNING
When the block before a corner is a start–up block, or the
block after a corner includes G41 or G42, the feedrate is not
overridden. The feedrate override function is disabled when
the offset value is 0.
469
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Override value An override value is set with parameter No. 1712. An override value
is valid even for dry run and F1–digit feed specification.
In the feed per minute mode, the actual feedrate is as follows:
F × (inner corner automatic override) × (feedrate override)
Internal Circular Cutting For internally offset circular cutting, the feedrate on a programmed path
Feedrate Change is set to a specified feedrate (F) by specifying the circular cutting feedrate
with respect to F, as indicated below. This function is valid in the cutter
compensation mode, regardless of the G62 code.
F Rc
Rp
Rc : Cutter center path radius
Rp : Programmed radius
It is also valid for the dry run and the F1–digit feed command.
Programmed path
Cutter center
RP path
CAUTION
When internal circular cutting must be performed together
with automatic override for inner corners, the feedrate of the
tool is as follows:
F Rc (inner corner override)
Rp
× (feedrate override)
Parameter
1710 Minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) of the inner circular cutting rate in
automatic corner override
470
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
In circular cutting with an inward offset, the actual feedrate for a specified
feedrate (F) becomes as follows:
Rc Rc: Radius of the path of the cutter’s center
F Rp: Programmed radius
Rp
As the actual feedrate becomes the value obtained from the above
equation, the specified rate F can be achieved on the program path.
Programmed
path
Rc
Rp Cutter center
path
1713 Distance Le from the starting point in inner corner automatic override
471
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Ls
Le
θ b Programmed
a path
Cutter center
path
An override is applied from point a to b.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.4.2 Automatic Override for Inner Corners
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN) II.5.4.3 Internal Circular Cutting Feedrate Change
472
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.1.9
External Deceleration
General These signals decelerate the feedrate of the control axes down to the speed
which has been set by parameter No. 1426 and 1427.
Signal
External deceleration
signal
*+ED1 to *+ED8<G118>
*–ED1 to *–ED8<G120>
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G118 *+ED8 *+ED7 *+ED6 *+ED5 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G120 *–ED8 *–ED7 *–ED6 *–ED5 *–ED4 *–ED3 *–ED2 *–ED1
473
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 EDMx EDPx
Set the external deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each axis.
474
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.1.10
Feed Stop Function
General During axis motion, the feed stop function checks a position deviation
amount at all times. When the amount exceeds the “feed stop position
deviation amount” set by the parameter (No. 1832), the function suspends
pulse distribution and acceleration/deceleration control during such a
period of time, and terminates the move command for the positioning
control circuit. Thus the function can minimize an overshoot that may
occur with a large servo motor in rapid traverse acceleration operation.
Speed
Specified speed
Actual speed
Time
Feed stop
Parameter
1832 Feed stop positioning deviation for each axis
475
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
7.1.11
Feedrate Clamping by
Arc Radius
General When an arc is cut at a high speed in circular interpolation, a radial error
exists between the actual tool path and the programmed arc. An
approximation of this error can be obtained from the following
expression:
D Error
Programmed path
Actual path
1
D
2
The function for clamping the feedrate by the arc radius automatically
clamps the feedrate of arc cutting to the value set in a parameter. This
function is effective when the specified feedrate may cause the radial error
for an arc with a programmed radius to exceed the permissible degree of
error.
Parameter
1730 Maximum feedrate for arc radius R
Set a maximum feedrate for the arc radius set in parameter No. 1731.
476
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
1732 Minimum value (RV min) for arc radius–based feedrate clamp
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.20.1 Feedrate clamp by circle radius
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
477
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
7.1.12
Automatic Corner
Deceleration (M series)
Feedrate control
according to corner
angle
Overview If the angle made by blocks A and B is smaller than that specified in parameter
No. 1740 (for the selected plane), and if the feedrates along the first and second
axes on that plane are lower than that specified in parameter No. 1741, the
system executes block B, assuming that no pulses are accumulated.
The figure shows the relationship between feedrate and time when a
corner angle is smaller than the angle specified in the parameter.
Feedrate
Block A Block B
Feedrate specified in
parameter No. 1741
t
Time
478
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Speed
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 ACD
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1602 CSD
1740 Critical angle subtended by two blocks for automatic corner deceleration
479
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Block A (G01)
Block B (G01)
θ θ
Block A (G02)
Block B(G01)
Angle made by two lines
If a circular path is included, the angle
between the tangent of the arc and
another line is considered.
1778 Minimum speed for the automatic corner deceleration function (for linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
480
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Caution
CAUTION
1 The angle of the machining tool path is compared with that
specified in parameter No. 1740 only for the selected plane.
The actual feedrate and that specified in parameter No.
1741 are compared only for the first and second axes of the
selected plane. Even if simultaneous movement is
performed along three or more axes, the feedrates of only
the first and second axes are compared for the selected
plane.
2 The roundness of a corner is determined by the angle and
feedrate specified in parameter Nos. 1740 and 1741,
respectively. If a sharp corner is always required, set a
feedrate of zero and an angle of 180000 (180 degrees).
3 If a G09 (exact stop) command is executed, an exact stop
is performed, irrespective of the angle and feedrate
specified in parameter Nos.1740 and 1741.
4 This function is disabled in single block and dry run mode.
Feedrate control
according to the feedrate
difference for each axis
Overview If the difference between the programmed feedrates at the end of block A
and at the beginning of block B for each axis exceeds the value specified
in parameter No. 1781, and if the feedrates for all axes are lower than that
specified in parameter No. 1741, the system executes block B, assuming
that no pulses are accumulated.
The figure shows the relationship between the feedrate and time when the
feedrate difference for each axis exceeds the value specified in parameter
No. 1781.
481
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
If the difference between the feedrates of blocks A and B for each axis
exceeds the value specified in parameter No. 1780, the feedrate at the
corner is calculated from the difference for each axis, as shown below.
The feedrate is reduced to the calculated value in block A.
The feedrate change for each axis (Vc[X], Vc[Y], ...), caused by the
movement at programmed feedrate F, is compared with Vmax specified
in parameter No. 1780. If an feedrate change exceeding Vmax is
detected, the target feedrate after deceleration Fc is calculated, using
maximum comparison value Rmax.
R= Vc
Vmax
Fc = F
Rmax
If, for example, the direction of movement is changed from the X–axis to
the Y–axis, that is through 90 degrees, and if the programmed feedrate is
1000 mm/min and the permissible feedrate difference specified in
parameter No. 1780 is 500 mm/min, the deceleration shown below is
performed:
482
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
N1
Tool path if corner
deceleration is not
applied
Speed
F1000
Feedrate Without corner deceleration
along With corner deceleration
X axis
F50
0
Speed N1 Time
F1000
Feedrate
along
Y axis
F50
0
N2 Time
Speed
F1000
Feedrate
along
tangential
direction
F50
0
N1 N2 Time
483
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 ACD
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1602 CSD
1780 Allowable speed difference for the speed difference–based automatic corner
deceleration function (for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
Set the speed difference for the speed difference–based automatic corner
deceleration function when linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is used.
484
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
1781 Allowable speed difference for the speed difference–based automatic corner
deceleration function (linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation)
Caution
CAUTION
1 Even during dry run or external deceleration, the feedrate
difference is checked according to the F command in the
program.
2 If the G09 (exact stop) command is executed, an exact stop
is performed, irrespective of the values specified for the
parameters.
3 This function is invalid for the feed per rotation command,
F1–digit feed command, and rigid tapping command, as
well as in single block mode.
4 If the override is changed during operation, the feedrate
difference cannot be checked correctly.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.4.4 Automatic corner deceleration
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
485
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
7.1.13
Look–Ahead Control
General This function is designed for high–speed precise machining. With this
function, the delay due to acceleration/deceleration and the delay in the
servo system which increase as the feedrate becomes higher can be
suppressed.
The tool can then follow specified values accurately and errors in the
machining profile can be reduced.
This function becomes effective when look–ahead control mode is
entered by G08P1 command.
Available functions In look–ahead control mode, the following functions are available:
(1) Linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for cutting feed
(2) Automatic corner deceleration function
For details on the above functions, see the descriptions of the functions.
Signal
Look–ahead control
mode signal
G08MD <F066#0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Informs that is in the look–ahead control mode.
[Output condition] The signal is “1” in the following case:
⋅In the look–ahead control mode
The signal is “0” in the following case:
⋅It is not the look–ahead control mode
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F066 G08MD
Parameter
1431 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the look–ahead control mode
486
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the look–ahead
control mode.
A feedrate in the tangential direction is clamped in cutting feed so that it
does not exceed the feedrate specified in this parameter.
WARNING
In a mode other than the look–ahead mode, the maximum
cutting feedrate specified in parameter No. 1422 or No.
1430 is applied and the feedrate is clamped at the maximum
feedrate.
NOTE
To specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, use
parameter No. 1432 instead.
1432 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the look–ahead control mode
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the look–ahead
control mode.
A feedrate for each axis is clamped during cutting feed so that it does not
exceed the maximum cutting feedrate specified for each axis.
WARNING
In a mode other than the look–ahead mode, the maximum
cutting feedrate specified in parameter No. 1422 or No.
1430 is applied and the feedrate is clamped at the maximum
feedrate.
NOTE
1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular
interpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involute
interpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified in
parameter No. 1431 is effective.
2 If a setting for each axis is 0, the maximum feedrate
specified in parameter No. 1431 is applied to all axes and
the feedrate is clamped at the maximum feedrate.
487
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1602 LS2 CSD FWB
Type B
F2 F2
F1 F1
Time Time
N1 N2 N1 N2
1762 Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant for cutting feed in the look–
ahead control mode
488
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
1768 Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration during cutting feed in the
look–ahead control mode.
NOTE
The function for linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation for cutting feed is required.
489
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Speed
Parameter1
(No. 1770)
Time
Parameter 2 (No. 1771)
CAUTION
When 0 is set in parameter No. 1770 or parameter No. 1771,
linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
disabled.
CAUTION
1 When 0 is set in parameter No. 1770 or parameter No. 1771,
linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
disabled.
2 In parameter Nos. 1770 and 1771, set values that satisfy the
following: Parameter No. 1770/Parameter No. 1771
5
1777 Minimum speed for the automatic corner deceleration function (for the look–ahead
control)
490
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
1779 Critical angle subtended by two blocks for automatic corner deceleration
(for the look–ahead control)
Block A (G01)
Block B (G01)
θ
θ
Block A (G02)
Block B (G01)
1780 Allowable speed difference for the speed difference based corner deceleration
function (for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
Set the speed difference for the speed difference based automatic corner
deceleration function when linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is used.
1783 Allowable speed difference for the speed difference based corner deceleration
function (for linear acceleration /deceleration before interpolation)
491
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
A separate allowable feedrate difference can be set for each axis. Among
the axes that exceed the specified allowable feedrate difference, the axis
with the greatest ratio of the actual feedrate difference to the allowable
feedrate difference is used as the reference to calculate the reduced
feedrate at the corner.
WARNING
The control described above is applicable only to stored
stroke check1.
NOTE
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the control described above
is not exercised.
2 Use type–B linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation (by setting bit 0 (FWB) of parameter No. 1602
to 1).
Parameters for Parameters for the cutting feed acceleration/deceleration before in-
look–ahead control terpolation
mode and normal mode Parameter No.
Parameter description Look–ahead
Normal mode
control mode
Acceleration/deceleration type
(A type/B type)
FWB (1602#0) ←
492
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Minimum speed
(according to the corner angle)
1778 1777
Critical angle
(according to the corner angle)
1740 1779
493
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
In the look–ahead control mode, the functions listed below
cannot be specified. To specify these functions, cancel the
look–ahead control mode, specify the desired function, then
set look–ahead control mode again.
⋅Rigid tapping function
⋅Cs contour axis control function
⋅Feed per rotation
⋅F1–digit feed
⋅C–axis normal direction control function
⋅Polar coordinate interpolation function
⋅Cylindrical interpolation function
⋅Involute interpolation function
⋅Exponential interpolation
⋅Three–dimensional coordinate conversion
⋅Retrace function
⋅Normal direction control
⋅Polar coordinate command
⋅Index table indexing
⋅Tool withdrawal and return
⋅Threading and synchronous feed
⋅High–speed cycle machining
⋅Handle interrupt
⋅Program restart
⋅Simplified synchronization control
⋅Feed stop
⋅High–speed skip function
⋅Constant surface speed control
⋅Interrupt type custom macro
⋅Small–diameter peck drilling cycle
⋅High–speed remote buffer A/B
⋅Automatic tool length measurement
⋅Skip cutting
⋅G28 (low–speed reference position return)
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.20.2 LOOK–AHEAD CONTROL (G08)
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
494
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.1.14
High–precision
Contour Control by
RISC (M series)
General Some machining errors are due to the CNC. Such errors include
machining errors caused by acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.
To eliminate these errors, the following functions are performed at high
speed by an RISC processor. These functions are called high–precision
contour control functions.
D Function for multiple–block look–ahead acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation. This function eliminates machining errors due
to acceleration/deceleration.
D Automatic feedrate control function which enables smooth
acceleration/ deceleration by considering changes in the figure and
speed and allowable acceleration for the machine. This is performed
by reading multiple blocks in advance.
Furthermore, smoother acceleration/deceleration is achieved, enabling
the feed–forward factor to be increased. This feature also reduces
follow–up error in the servo system.
Name Function
495
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Name Function
496
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
NOTE
Before G00, miscellaneous function, spindle speed
function, tool function and second miscellaneous function
can be specified in high–precision contour control mode
(HPCC mode), bit 1 (MSU) of parameter No. 8403 must be
set to 1. Otherwise, an alarm will be issued.
7.1.14.1 When feed per minute is specified, this function reads several tens of
Look–ahead blocks ahead to perform acceleration/deceleration before interpolation,
acceleration/deceleration that is, to apply acceleration/deceleration to the specified feedrate.
before interpolation When acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is used, acceleration/
deceleration is applied to the interpolated data. Consequently, the inter-
polated data is changed by acceleration/deceleration. When acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation is used, however, acceleration/
deceleration is applied to the feedrate data before interpolation. Conse-
quently, the interpolated data is not changed by acceleration/deceleration.
Feedrate Pulse
command distribution
Feedrate Interpola- Acceleration/ Servo
calculation tion cal- deceleration af- control
culation ter interpolation
Acceleration/
deceleration
before inter-
polation
Linear,
bell–shaped
If a feedrate change along any axis is greater than the value set in a
parameter for the joint (corner) between two successive blocks, a feedrate
is calculated so that the difference in the feedrates does not exceed the
specified value. The feedrate is automatically reduced to this calculated
value at the corner.
497
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Before this function can be used, specify parameter Nos. 8400 and 8401
for determining an acceleration for acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation.
Example of deceleration To ensure that the feedrate specified for a block is reached when the block
is executed, deceleration is started in the previous block.
Feedrate
Specified feedrate
Feedrate after accel-
F3
P1 eration/deceleration
before interpolation is
applied
F2
P2
F1 Time
N1 N2
The tool can be decelerated over several blocks, because several tens of
blocks are read in advance.
Example of acceleration Acceleration is started to reach the specified feedrate for a block when the
block is executed.
Feedrate
Specified feedrate
Feedrate after accel-
F3
eration/deceleration
before interpolation is
applied
F2
F1 Time
N1 N2
498
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Look–ahead bell–shaped To use this function, set bit 7 (BADO) and bit 1 (NWBL) of parameter No.
acceleration/deceleration 8402 to 1, and also set the following parameters:
before interpolation
Parameter No. 8400: Parameter 1 for setting the acceleration used for ac-
celeration/deceleration before interpolation
Parameter No. 8401: Parameter 2 for setting the acceleration used for ac-
celeration/deceleration before interpolation
Parameter No. 8402, bit 5 (DST) = 1, bit 4 (BLK) = 0
Parameter No. 8416: Time needed to reach maximum allowable accel-
eration
For details, see the description of the parameters.
Acceleration
ACC_MAX
+
Time
ACC_TIME ACC_TIME
– –ACC_MAX
Time
499
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Acceleration
+
Time
Feedrate
Time
Feedrate
Feedrate control by
look–ahead bell–
shaped acceleration/
deceleration before
interpolation
Specified feedrate
Time
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5
500
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Feedrate clamping based When the distance required to decelerate the tool from a specified feedrate
on the total travel of the is less than the total travel of the tool in the blocks read in advance, the
tool in look–ahead feedrate is automatically clamped to a feedrate from which the tool can
blocks be decelerated to a feedrate of zero.
Feedrate
Feedrate control
by look–ahead
bell–shaped ac-
celeration/decel-
eration before
interpolation
Clamp
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Specified
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
feedrate feedrate
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Total travel of the
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
tool in the blocks
read in advance
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Time
Feedrate control by
look–ahead bell–
Feedrate shaped acceleration/
deceleration before
interpolation
Specified feedrate
Clamp
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
feedrate
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Total travel of the
tool in the blocks
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
read in advance
Time
501
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Feedrate control by
look–ahead bell–
shaped acceleration/
Feedrate deceleration before
interpolation
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Specified feedrate
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Clamp
feedrate
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Total travel of the
tool in the blocks
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
read in advance at
the end of accel-
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
eration
Time
Feedrate command and If an F command is changed by, for example, another F command, the
feedrate corner deceleration function, or the automatic feedrate determination
function, look–ahead bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation treats the changed feedrate as a new target feedrate, and
restarts acceleration/deceleration.
Feedrate control by
look–ahead bell–
Feedrate shaped acceleration/
deceleration before
interpolation
Specified feedrate
Time
502
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
When the feed hold When the feed hold function is used during acceleration, control is
function is used during performed as described below.
acceleration While applying constant or increasing acceleration
Starting at the point where the feed hold function is specified, the
acceleration is gradually reduced to 0. Then, the feedrate for the tool
is gradually reduced to 0. Thus, the feed hold function does not always
immediately reduce the feedrate of the tool; it instead may sometimes
increase the feedrate for a brief instant before reducing the feedrate.
While applying decreasing acceleration
First, the acceleration is gradually reduced to 0. Then, the feedrate is
gradually reduced to 0.
Deceleration The tool is decelerated to the feedrate specified for a block, starting at the
previous block.
The tool can be decelerated over multiple blocks.
Feedrate control by
Feedrate Deceleration start point look–ahead bell–
shaped acceleration/
deceleration before
interpolation
Specified feedrate
Time
503
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Feedrate command and If an F command is changed by, for example, another F command, the
deceleration corner deceleration function, or the automatic feedrate determination
function, look–ahead bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation treats the changed feedrate as a new target feedrate, and
restarts acceleration/deceleration.
Whenever an F command is changed, bell–shaped acceleration/decelera-
tion is performed.
When the distance required to decelerate the tool from a specified feedrate
is longer than the total travel of the tool in the blocks read in advance, the
feedrate is automatically clamped, as in the case of acceleration.
Feedrate control by
Feedrate look–ahead bell–
shaped acceleration/
deceleration before
interpolation
Specified feedrate
Clamp feedrate
Clamp feedrate
Time
Deceleration based on The deceleration of the tool is started when the total travel of the tool in
tool travel the blocks read in advance is less than the distance required to decelerate
the tool from the current feedrate.
When the total travel of the tool in the blocks read in advance increases
at the end of deceleration, the tool is accelerated.
When blocks specifying a short travel are specified in succession, the tool
may be decelerated, then accelerated, then decelerated, and so on,
resulting in an unstable feedrate. In such a situation, specify a smaller
feedrate.
Feed hold during When the feed hold function is used during deceleration, control is
deceleration performed as described below.
While applying constant or increasing deceleration
The point where the deceleration starts being reduced to 0 is shifted
from the usually used point (i.e., that used when feed hold is not
applied) to ensure that the feedrate for the tool is gradually reduced to
0.
While applying decreasing deceleration
The deceleration is gradually reduced to 0, after which the feedrate is
reduced to 0.
504
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Single block function When the single block function is specified while look–ahead
while look–ahead bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used,
bell–shaped control is performed as described below.
acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation is
used
While the tool is being (1) A + B x Remaining travel for the tool in the block being executed
accelerated or when the single block function is specified
decelerated when the The tool is gradually decelerated so that the feedrate is 0 upon
single block function is completion of the execution of the block that was being executed when
specified the single block function was specified.
Feedrate
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
A B
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Time
A: Distance traveled before the tool reaches the specified feedrate from
the current acceleration/deceleration
B: Distance traveled before the feedrate falls to 0 from a feedrate to which
no acceleration/deceleration is applied
(2) A + B > Remaining travel for the tool in the block being executed when
the single block function is specified
The tool may be decelerated over multiple blocks until it stops.
How the tool is stopped is described later.
Feedrate
ÊÊ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÊÊ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÊÊ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÊÊ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
A B
ÊÊ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Time
A: Distance traveled before the tool reaches the specified feedrate with
the current acceleration/deceleration
B: Distance traveled until the feedrate falls to 0 from a feedrate to which
no acceleration/deceleration is applied
505
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
While the tool is not (1) A x Remaining travel for the tool in the block being executed when
being accelerated or the single block function is specified
decelerated when the The tool is gradually decelerated so that the feedrate is 0 upon
single block function is completion of the execution of the block that was being executed when
specified the single block function was specified.
Feedrate
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ A
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Time
A: Distance traveled until the feedrate falls from the current feedrate
value to 0
(2) A > Remaining travel of the tool in the block being executed when the
single block function is specified
The tool may be decelerated over multiple blocks until it stops.
How the tool is stopped is described later.
Feedrate
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ A
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ Time
A: Distance traveled until the feedrate falls from the current feedrate
value to 0
506
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
How the tool is stopped The tool is decelerated (or accelerated) over multiple blocks until the
when decelerated over feedrate becomes 0.
multiple blocks
Feedrate
Single block function specified
Time
CAUTION
1 Depending on the stop point and remaining blocks, two or
more acceleration/deceleration operations may be
performed.
2 When the single block function is specified, an
acceleration/deceleration curve recalculation is required
while the tool is moving along an axis. So, the tool is not
always decelerated over the minimum number of blocks
before stopping.
Dryrun/feedrateoverride When a change in the specification of the dry run function or feedrate
override function results in a change in the specified feedrate (feedrate
change due to an external cause) while look–ahead bell–shaped accelera-
tion/deceleration before interpolation is being used, control is performed
as described below.
While the tool is being After the current acceleration/deceleration operation brings the tool to a
accelerated or specified feedrate and is terminated, the tool is accelerated or decelerated
decelerated when the to the new target feedrate.
specification of the dry
run function or feedrate
override function is
changed
While the tool is not The tool is accelerated or decelerated from the current feedrate to the
being accelerated or specified feedrate.
decelerated when the
specification of the dry
run function or feedrate
override function is
changed
507
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Caution
CAUTION
1 When the specification of the dry run function or feedrate
override function is changed, the acceleration/deceleration
curve must be recalculated while the tool is actually moving
along an axis. For this reason, there will be a slight delay
before a feedrate change is actually started after the
specification of the dry run function or feedrate override
function is changed.
2 When the specification of the dry run function or feedrate
override function is changed, the tool may be decelerated
to below a specified feedrate and then accelerated,
depending on the remaining amount of travel, current
feedrate, and target feedrate.
508
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.1.14.2 This function reads several tens of blocks ahead to exercise automatic
Automatic feedrate feedrate control.
control function
A feedrate is determined on the basis of the conditions listed below. If a
specified feedrate exceeds a calculated feedrate, acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation is used so that the calculated feedrate can be
established.
(1) Feedrate change and specified allowable feedrate difference along
each axis at a corner
(2) Anticipated acceleration and specified allowable acceleration along
each axis
(3) Cutting load change anticipated from the direction of motion along the
Z–axis
In automatic feedrate control mode, the feedrate is automatically reduced
with acceleration/deceleration before interpolation to minimize the stress
and strain applied to the machine.
To use this function, set bit 0 (USE) of parameter No. 8451 to 1, and set
the following parameters:
Parameter No. 8410: Allowable feedrate difference used for feedrate de-
termination, based on a corner feedrate difference
Parameter No. 8475, bit 2 (BIP) = 1: Enables deceleration at a corner.
Parameter No. 8470: Parameter specifying an allowable acceleration for
feedrate determination, based on acceleration
Parameter No. 8459, bit 1 (CTY) = 1, bit 0 (CDC) = 0
Parameter No. 8464: Initial feedrate for automatic feedrate control
Parameter No. 8465: Maximum allowable feedrate for automatic fee-
drate control
For details, see the description of each parameter.
509
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Feedrate control In automatic feedrate control mode, the feedrate for the tool is controlled
conditions as described below.
- The feedrate required at a corner is calculated from the specified
feedrate difference at the corner along each axis, the tool being
decelerated to the calculated feedrate at the corner.
Example:
N1
Specified
Y
feedrate
N2
X
N1 N2 N3 t
N3
Example: N2 N3
N1 N4
Y Specified
feedrate
N8 N5
X N6 N1 N2 N3 N6 N7 N8 t
N7
Example:
N1 Specified
Z N2
feedrate
X
N3 N1 N2 N3 t
Example of feedrate The feedrate required at a corner is calculated from the feedrate difference
determination based on along each axis, as described below.
a feedrate difference When the tool is to move at the specified feedrate F, a comparison is made
along each axis between the feedrate change along each axis (Vc[X], Vc[Y], ...) and the
value (Vmax) set in parameter No. 8410. If Vmax is exceeded by a
feedrate change along any axis, the tool is decelerated at the corner to the
required feedrate Fc:
1
Fc=F
Rmax
Vc
where Rmax is the largest value of R =
Vmax
510
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Suppose that the specified feedrate for the tool is 1,000 mm/min, and that
the direction of tool movement changes by 90 degrees (from along the
X–axis to along the Y–axis). Suppose also that an allowable feedrate
difference of 500 mm/min is set. Then, the tool will decelerate as shown
below.
N1 Time
Feedrate
F1000
Feedrate
along the
Y–axis
F500
N2 Time
Feedrate
F1000
Feedrate
along the
tangent to
the path
F500
N1 N2 Time
511
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Example of feedrate As shown below, when a curve is formed by very short successive line
determination based on segments, there is no significant feedrate difference along each axis at
acceleration along each each corner. Consequently, the tool need not be decelerated to compen-
axis sate for feedrate differences. When taken as a whole, however, successive
feedrate differences generate a large acceleration along each axis.
In this case, the tool must be decelerated to minimize the stress and strain
imposed on the machine, as well as the machining error that may result
from such excessive acceleration. The tool is decelerated to the feedrate
at which the acceleration along each axis, found from the formula below,
is equal to or less than a specified allowable acceleration.
The reduced feedrate required for each corner is calculated. The tool is
decelerated to the decreased feedrate found at either the start point or the
end point of each block, whichever is smaller.
Example: In the example shown below, the tool is accelerated too
quickly from N2 to N4 and from N6 to N8 (as indicated by the
dashed–line inclinations in the feedrate graphs) when automatic
feedrate control is not used. So, the tool is decelerated.
512
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
N8
N7
N9
N6
N5
Y
N1
X N4
N3
N2
Feedrate along
the X–axis
Feedrate along
the Y–axis
Feedrate along
the tangent to
the path
N1 N5 N9 N1 N5 N9
513
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Feedrate determination When a block specifies circular feed per minute and bit 3 (CIR) of
based on an allowable parameter No. 8475 is set to 1, the feedrate of the tool is automatically
acceleration during determined so that the acceleration along each axis does not exceed an
circular interpolation allowable acceleration.
F2 F: Feedrate
Acceleration=
R R: Arc radius
F2
= min(αx, αy) αx, αy : Allowable accelerations
R along X–axis and
F= R×min(α , α ) Y–axis
x y
514
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Example of feedrate This function can be used when bit 4 (ZAG) of parameter No. 8451 is set
determination based on to 1.
cutting load
Cutting the workpiece with the end of the cutter (Fig. NO TAG (b)) incurs
a greater resistance than when cutting the workpiece with the side of the
cutter (Fig. NO TAG (a)). Therefore, for (Fig. NO TAG (b)), the tool must
be decelerated. To calculate the required degree of feedrate deceleration,
the automatic feedrate control function uses the angle of downward
movement of the tool along the Z–axis.
When the tool is moving down along the Z–axis, the angle (q) of
downward movement formed by the XY plane and cutter path is as shown
in the Fig. NO TAG (b). The angle of downward movement is divided
into four areas, with an override value for each area specified in a
parameter, as follows:
Area 2: Parameter No. 8456
Area 3: Parameter No. 8457
Area 4: Parameter No. 8458
Fig. NO TAG (a) When the tool is moving up along the Z–axis
Fig. NO TAG (b) When the tool is moving down along the Z–axis
No override parameter is provided for area 1; the override value for area
1 is always 100%. A feedrate determined with a separate feedrate control
function is multiplied by the override value specified for the area to which
the angle q of downward movement belongs.
Area 1: 0 _ q <30_
Area 2: 30 _ q <45_
Area 3: 45 _ q <60_
Area 4: 60 _ q 90_
515
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
XY plane
30, Area 1
90,
60,
Area 4 45,
Area 3 Area 2
CAUTION
The feedrate determination function that is based on cutting
load uses an NC command to determine the direction of
movement along the Z–axis. This means that the direction
of movement along the Z–axis cannot be found if the
movement along the Z–axis is subject to manual
intervention with manual absolute on/off function set to on,
or if the mirror image function is used with the Z–axis. So,
never use these functions when using feedrate
determination based on cutting load.
Ignoring F code In a block for which the automatic feedrate control function is enabled,
commands the ignoring of all feed commands (F commands) can be specified by
setting bit 7 (NOF) of parameter No. 8451. The feed commands are:
(1) Modal F command specified before a block for which the automatic
feedrate control function is enabled
(2) Modal F command and F command specified in a block for which the
automatic feedrate control function is enabled
Note, however, that specified F commands and modal F commands are
stored in the CNC.
This means that in a block for which the automatic feedrate control
function is disabled, a modal F command of (1) or (2) is used instead of
a modal F command calculated by the automatic feedrate control
function.
Other examples of If a calculated feedrate exceeds the maximum allowable feedrate for
feedrate determination automatic feedrate control, specified in parameter No. 8465 or with an F
conditions command, the feedrate is clamped to the maximum allowable feedrate or
F command, whichever is smaller.
516
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.1.14.3
Signal
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F066 EXHPCC MHPCC
517
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
7.1.14.4
Parameter
Parameters of linear accelĆ
eration and deceleration
before interpolation
8400 Parameter 1 for determining a linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
NOTE
The function for linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is canceled when either parameter no. 8400 or
8401 is set to 0.
Velocity
Parameter 1 Acceleration
Time
Parameter 2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8402 BADO DST BLK NWBL
518
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Time
Parameter 2
519
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Acceleration
+ Max. acceleration
Time
–
Max. acceleration
V
t1: Time constant assumed in linear accelera-
tion/deceleration (Parameter No. 8401)
t2: Time for corner rounding
(parameter No. 8416)
V: Speed to set acceleration time t1
(Parameter No. 8400)
Usually set the max. cutting speed.
520
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Parameters of automatic
velocity setting
If zero is specified for all axes, the machine does not decelerate at corners.
When the function for determining the velocity considering the velocity
difference at corners is used, the system calculates the feedrate whereby a
change in the velocity element of each axis does not exceed this parameter
value at the interface between blocks. Then the machine decelerates using
acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8451 NOF ZAG USE
521
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 100 (Standard setting: 80)
This parameter specifies an override in area 2 of velocity calculation
considering the cutting load.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8459 CTY CDC
This parameter sets the initial feedrate for automatic feedrate control.
In automatic feedrate control, the initial feedrate set with this parameter is
used at the beginning if no F command is specified in the program.
Usually, set the maximum cutting feedrate (specified in parameter No.
1422).
522
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Time
Parameter No. 8470
523
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8475 CIR BIP
NOTE
When 0 is set, constant surface speed control is always
applied to the X–axis. In this case, specifying P in a G96
block has no effect on the constant surface speed control.
0 1 0
Parameters of accelera-
tion/deceleration after
interpolation #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1602 LS2
524
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration
1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration (The function for linear acceleration/
deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is required.)
1768 Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration during cutting feed in look–
ahead control mode
NOTE
The function for linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation is required.
Parameters of cutter
compensation C #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5000 SBK
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5003 BCK ICK
525
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
PLC2 In HPCC mode, a stroke check before movement for the second stored
stroke limit is:
0 : Not performed.
1 : Performed.
SG0 When G00 is specified in HPCC mode:
0 : The setting of bit 1 (MSU) of parameter No. 8403 is followed.
1 : The tool is moved along the axis at the feedrate set with parameter No.
8481, replacing the G00 command with the G01 command,
regardless of the setting made for bit 1 (MSU) of parameter No. 8403.
Refer to note 1 in description of parameter No. 8481.
When bit 7 (SG0) of parameter No. 8403 is set to 1, this parameter sets
the rapid traverse rate in the HPCC mode.
CAUTION
The G00 command is replaced with the G01 command
before execution. So, even if a feedrate is specified for two
axes, the rapid traverse rate set with this parameter is
always used.
Example: If the following command is specified when a rapid traverse rate of 1000
mm/min is set F1000, rather than F1414, is used:
G00 X100.Y100.;
For details, refer to Notes on positioning (G00).
7.1.14.5
Alarm and Message
Number Message Description
5012 G05 P10000 ILLEGAL START G05P10000 was specified in a mode from
UP which HPCC mode cannot be entered.
5004 RISC NOT READY RISC processor board is not ready state.
5006 TOO MANY WORD IN ONE The number of words in a block exceeds
BLOCK allowable range (HPCC mode).
5013 HPCC : CRC OFS REMAIN G05P0 was specified in G41/G42 mode or
AT CANCEL a state in which an offset value remains.
526
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.1.14.6
Note
Acceleration/deceleratio
n before interpolation in
look–ahead blocks
NOTE
If there is a series of very short blocks, for each of which the
rate of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is low,
the actual feedrate may not reach the programmed
feedrate.
Automatic feedrate
control
NOTE
1 If the upper limit for automatic feedrate control is set to 0 in
parameter No. 8465, no feedrate exceeding 0 is permitted,
such that the issue of an F command causes PS alarm 011
(FEED ZERO). To prevent this, specify a value other than
zero in the parameter.
2 If the override is changed while the automatic feedrate
control function is enabled, the calculated clamp feedrate is
overridden.
Notes on operation
WARNING
1 In HPCC mode, axial interlocking (each axis, each direction)
is inhibited (signals G130, G132, G134).
2 In HPCC mode, the external mirror image (DI) signal, a
mirror image determined by setting data, or axial machine
lock must not be changed. Pocket calculator type decimal
point input is disabled in HPCC mode (when bit 0 of
parameter No. 3401 is set to 1).
NOTE
1 A single–block stop cannot be made at the end of the
G05P10000 block.
2 External deceleration, the F1–digit command, and
automatic corner override are disabled.
3 In HPCC mode, the operation mode cannot be switched to
MDI mode. Also, MDI operation is not permitted.
4 A program including G50 P10000; cannot be resumed.
527
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Notes on positioning When executing a G00 command when bit 7 of parameter No. 8403 (SG0)
(G00) is set to 1, note the following:
WARNING
Linear interpolation positioning is performed.
CAUTION
1 The G00 command is replaced with the G01 command
upon being executed. Even if two axes are specified,
movement is performed at the feedrate specified in
parameter No. 8481.
Example)
If the following command is specified when parameter No.
8481 is set to 1000 mm/min, F1000 is executed instead of
F1414:
G00 X100. Y100.;
2 Because the G00 command is replaced with the G01
command upon being executed, rapid traverse override is
disabled, the cutting feedrate override being enabled
instead.
NOTE
1 Because the G00 command is replaced with the G01
command upon being executed, acceleration/deceleration
after interpolation is done using the time constant of
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting
feed.
2 Because the G00 command is replaced with the G01
command upon being executed, acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation in RISC HPCC mode is enabled. (Both
linear acceleration/deceleration and bell–shaped
acceleration/deceleration are supported.)
3 In–position check is not executed.
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.20.4 High–precision contour control
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
528
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.2
ACCELERATION/
DECELERATION
CONTROL
7.2.1
Automatic
Acceleration/
Deceleration
General
T R : Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant for rapid
traverse rate
Time
TR TR
Feed rate
FC FC : Feedrate
T C : Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant for a cutting
feedrate
Time
TC TC
529
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Acceleration/
deceleraton Servo control
Pulse control
CNC distribution
command (interpolation) Acceleraton/
deceleration Servo control
control
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1610 JGLx CTBx CTLx
NOTE
If the optional function of linear acceleration/deceleration
after interpolation in cutting feed is not provided,
exponential acceleration/deceleration is used irrespective
of this setting.
1 0 Bell–shaped acceleration/decelera-
tion after interpolation
530
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
NOTE
This parameter is effective only when the function of
bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in
cutting feed is provided. If the function is not provided, the
setting in CTLx, bit 0 of parameter No. 1610, determines the
type of acceleration/deceleration irrespective of the setting
in this parameter.
NOTE
When parameter No. 1621 (time constant T2 used for
bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse) is
set to 0, linear acceleration/deceleration is applied in rapid
traverse even if the function is provided. In this case, this
parameter stands for a time constant used in linear
acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse.
531
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
532
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
[Unit of data] ms
1722 Rapid traverse feedrate reduction ratio for overlapping rapid traverse blocks
[Unit of data] %
NOTE
The parameter No. 1722 is effective when parameter No.
1601 #4 (RTO) is set to 1.
533
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Example
N1 G00 X- - ; N2 G00 X- - ;
7.2.2
Bell–shaped
Acceleration/
Deceleration for
Rapid Traverse
General Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse smoothly
increases or decreases the rapid traverse rate, reducing the stress and strain
imposed on the machine due to the variation in the acceleration with
changes in the feedrate. As the time constant for bell–shaped
acceleration/deceleration can be smaller than that for linear
acceleration/deceleration, the time needed for acceleration/deceleration
can be reduced.
<Linear acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse> <Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse>
Feedrate Feedrate
0
Time Time
Acceleration Acceleration
0
Time Time
534
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Speed
Speed
Rapid
traverse rate T1: Set a time constant used for lin-
ear acceleration/deceleration
T2: Set a time for rounding.
Total time=T1 + T2
Time for linear=T1 – T2
Time for rounding part=T2
TIme
T2/2 T1 T2/2
T2
Set a time when rapid traverse override is 100% . When it is less than
100%, the total time is reduced (constant acceleration method).
Parameter
1620 Time constant used in linear acceleration/deceleration or bell–shaped
acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis
535
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
When parameter No. 1621 (time constant T2 used for
bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse) is
set to 0, linear acceleration/deceleration is applied in rapid
traverse even if the function is provided. In this case, this
parameter stands for a time constant used for linear
acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse.
NOTE
1 This parameter is effective when the function of
bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse is
provided. Set parameter No. 1620 to time constant T1 used
for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse,
and set this parameter to time constant T2.
For details of time constants T1 and T2, see the description
of General of this section.
2 When this parameter is set to 0, linear
acceleration/deceleration is applied in rapid traverse. The
setting in parameter No. 1620 is used as a time constant in
linear acceleration/deceleration.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL 7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration
(This manual)
536
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.2.3
Linear Acceleration/
Deceleration after
Interpolation for
Cutting Feed
Feedrate Feedrate
Acceleration/
⇒ deceleration ⇒
circuit
Time Time
Feedrate Feedrate
Acceleration/
⇒ deceleration ⇒
circuit
Time Time
t : Time
constant
537
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1610 JGLx CTLx
0 0 Exponential acceleration/deceleration
538
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
539
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 If linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for
cutting feed is enabled, linear acceleration/deceleration is
executed during cutting feed and during a dry run. Linear
acceleration/deceleration can also be executed during jog
feed if the JGL bit (bit 4 of parameter No. 1610) is specified
accordingly.
2 In circular interpolation especially when circular cutting is
executed at high speed, the actual path of the accelerated
or decelerated tool deviates from the specified arc in the
direction of the radius.
Y
Dr Specified path
Dr :Maximum radius error (mm)
Actual path
v :Feedrate (mm/s)
r :Radius of arc (mm)
T1 :Acceleration/deceleration time constant (s)
r T2 :Time constant of servo loop (s)
(Reciprocal of position loop gain)
X
1 T 2+ v2
1 T 2 ) …Exponential acceleration/deceleration
Dr=( 1 2
2 2 r
1 1 v2
Dr=( T12+ T22 ) …Linear acceleration/deceleration or bell
24 2 r
shaped acceleration /deceleration
after interpolation
540
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.2.4
Bell Shaped
Acceleration/
Deceleration after
Cutting Feed
Acceleration/
deceleration
function
Time Time
T T
T:Time Constant
541
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1610 JGLx CTLBx CTLx
NOTE
If the optional function of linear acceleration/deceleration
after interpolation in cutting feed is not provided,
exponential acceleration/deceleration is used irrespective
of this setting.
To use bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation, set this parameter to 0 and select the
acceleration/deceleration using CTBx, bit 1 of parameter
No. 1610.
Parameter
Acceleration/deceleration
CTBx CTLx
0 0 Exponential acceleration/deceleration
NOTE
This parameter is effective only when the function of
bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in
cutting feed is provided. If the function is not provided, the
setting in CTLx, bit 0 of parameter No. 1610, determines the
type of acceleration/deceleration irrespective of the setting
in this parameter.
542
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Speed
Rapid
traverse T : Total time. It is constant irrespective of
rate feedrate. (Time constant is constant).
The curve corresponds to that T1 = T/2 and T2
= T/2 set in parameter No. 1620 and 1621.
No linear part exists.
Time
T
543
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
1 If bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
during cutting feed is enabled, bell–shaped acceleration/
deceleration is executed during cutting feed and during a
dry run. Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration can also be
executed during jog feed if the JGL bit (bit 4 of parameter
No. 1610) is specified accordingly.
2 In circular interpolation, the actual tool path after
acceleration/deceleration deviates from the programmed
arc in the radial direction. To overcome this radial deviation,
see the note on linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation for cutting feed in Subsection 7.2.3.
3 Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration can be executed
both for cutting feed and for jog feed along a PMC axis. The
time constant for acceleration/deceleration for jog feed is
the same as that for cutting feed. In jog feed along the PMC
axis, the time constant for cutting feed is used instead of that
for jog feed.
7.2.5
Linear Acceleration/
Deceleration of Cutting
Feed before
Interpolation
F Linear accel-
eration/decel-
Feedrate eration before
command interpolation
F: Value of feedrate command
Speed
Time
544
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
B type
F2 F2
F1 Time F1 Time
N1 N2 N1 N2
With B type, to decelerate from F3 to F2,
deceleration must start with point P.
545
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
FOT: Feedrate at the time an overtravel alarm occurs during linear accel-
eration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter No. 1784)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1602 FWB
546
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Feedrate
NOTE
1 When 0 is set in parameter No. 1630 or parameter No. 1631,
linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
disabled.
2 In the look–ahead control mode, parameter No. 1770 and
parameter No. 1771 are valid.
NOTE
1 When 0 is set in parameter No. 1630 or parameter No. 1631,
linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
disabled.
2 In parameter Nos. 1630 and 1631, set values that satisfy the
following:
Parameter No. 1630
y5
Parameter No. 1631
3 In the look–ahead control mode, parameter No. 1770 and
parameter No. 1771 are valid.
547
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
WARNING
The control described above is applicable only to stored
stroke limit 1.
NOTE
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the control described above
is not exercised.
2 Use type–B linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation (by setting bit 0 (FWB) of parameter No. 1602
to 1).
548
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Note
NOTE
1 If a block without a move command is found during
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, the
movement is decelerated and temporarily stopped in the
previous block.
2 If a one–shot G code is specified during acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation, the movement is
decelerated and temporarily stopped in the previous block.
3 If an M, S, or T code is specified in a block containing a move
command during acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation, the movement is decelerated and temporarily
stopped in that block.
4 Even during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation,
the block of G31 (skip function) is not subjected to
acceleration/deceleration.
5 If the machine lock signal (MLK1 to MLK8) for an axis is set
on or off during acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation, the axis for which machine lock is performed
is not subjected to acceleration/deceleration.
6 During acceleration/deceleration before interpolation,
automatic corner override is enabled only when the internal
circular cutting feedrate is changed.
7 Even during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation,
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation can be
executed. So that acceleration/deceleration is executed
only before interpolation, set the time constant for
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation to zero.
8 In acceleration/deceleration before interpolation of type B,
deceleration is started if preprocessing for the next block
has not been completed before the remaining distance of
the current block becomes less than that needed to
decelerate and stop the movement.
9 If an F1–digit command is executed in the inch input system,
avoid specifying a command for simultaneous movement
on two axes, including a rotation axis during
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (M series).
10 The error detect signal (SMZ) is invalid during
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (T series).
549
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
7.2.6
Corner Control
7.2.6.1
In–position check
General Whether the position of the servo motor is within a specified range is
checked.
If the in–position check function is enabled, the CNC checks the position
during deceleration. If the position is found to exceed the specified range,
the CNC does not execute the next block.
NOTE
The purpose of in–position check is to check that the servo
motor has reached within a specified range (specified with
parameter No. 1826).
Signal
In–position signals
INP1 to INP8 <F104>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] These signals indicate that the control axes are set to the in-position
condition.
They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the signal name
corresponds to the control axis number.
I N P 1
1 . . . . The 1st axis is set to the in-position condition.
: :
: :
[Output condition] These signals turn to “1” in the following case :
⋅ The acceleration/deceleration delay of the corresponding control axis
is zero and the servo error is within the specified allowance.
These signals turn to “0” in the following cases :
⋅ The acceleration/deceleration delay of the corresponding control axis
is not zero.
⋅ The servo error of the corresponding control axis exceeds the specified
allowance
550
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Signal address
.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F104 INP8 INP7 INP6 INP5 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 NCI
Note
NOTE
1 The in–position signals may turn to “1” even during the
movement if the axis is fed at very low speed.
2 The in–position check function is enabled, at the interface
between two cutting blocks, in the following cases:
M series When the exact stop command (G09) or exact stop mode com-
mand (G61) is specified
7.2.6.2
In–position check
Independently of
Feed/Rapid traverse
General If separate in–position check for cutting feed and rapid traverse is
executed, a small in–position check range can be specified between those
cutting feed blocks that require a high degree of precision. A large
in–position check range can be specified between those rapid traverse
blocks that require quick positioning.
551
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 NCI
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1801 CIN CCI
0 1
552
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
Note
NOTE
If the NCI bit (bit 5 of parameter No. 1601) is set to 1, so that
position check is not performed during deceleration, this
function is invalid. The system starts execution of the next
block as soon as deceleration has been completed, without
checking whether the servo position error is within the
specified range.
7.2.6.3
Error Detect (T series)
General Generally, the CNC does not zero the feedrate at the interface of two
blocks during cutting feed.
Because of this, a corner of a tool path may be rounded.
Time
If the error detect signal is used, it is possible to specify that a block not
be started until the acceleration/deceleration of the previous block has
been completed.
Feedrate
Time
553
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
Siganl address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G053 SMZ
Note
NOTE
If the error detect signal is on, a cutting block is not executed
until the acceleration/deceleration of the previous cutting
block has been completed.
This function alone cannot prevent corner rounding due to
delay caused by the servo motor, however.
To prevent corner rounding due to delay caused by the
servo motor, use the in–position check function together
with this function.
Time
Range of in–position check
554
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
B–62753EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.2.7
Feed Forward in Rapid
Traverse
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1800 FFR
Reference item For details of this function, refer to the ”FANUC AC SERVO
AMPLIFIER Maintenance Manual (B–65005E)” or the ”FANUC
CONTROL MOTOR a series Maintenance Manual (B–65165E).”
555
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
8 AUXILIARY FUNCTION
556
B–62753EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
8.1
MISCELLANEOUS
FUNCTION/2ND
AUXILIARY FUNCTION
General
Miscellaneous Function When a numeral of up to 8 digits is specified following address M, code
(M code) signal and a strobe signal are sent to the machine. The machine uses these
signals to turn on or off its functions.
Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block. In some cases,
however, up to three M codes can be specified for some types of machine
tools (see 8.3 “Multiple M code per Block”)
Also, parameter No. 3030 can specify the maximum digits and if a
specified value exceeds the maximum digits, an alarm may be issued.
2nd Auxiliary Function When eight digits are specified after address B, a code signal and strobe
(B code) signal are sent. These signals are used to index the rotation axis of the
machine. The code signal is retained until another B code is specified.
In each block, a single B code can be specified. The maximum number
of digits that can be specified after address B is specified in parameter No.
3033. If more digits than the specified value are specified, an alarm
occurs.
For the M series, the address for specifying the 2nd auxiliary function can
be changed from B to another address (A, C, U, V, or W) by parameter
setting (parameter No. 3460).
557
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Basic procedure The following signals are used with these functions. (For details of the
spindle–speed function and tool function, see Chapters 9 and 10.)
Each function uses different program addresses and different signals, but
they all input and output signals in the same way, as described below. (A
sample procedure for the miscellaneous function is described below. The
procedures for the spindle–speed function, tool function, and secondary
auxiliary function, are obtained simply by substituting S, T, or B in place
of M.)
(1) Suppose that Mxxx is specified in a program.
For xxx, the number of specifiable digits is specified in parameter Nos.
3030 to 3033 for each function. If more digits than the specified value
are specified, an alarm occurs.
(2) Code signal M00 to M31 is sent. After period TMF, specified in
parameter No. 3010 (standard value: 16 msec), strobe signal MF is set
to 1. The code signal is the binary representation of the programmed
value xxx.(*1) If the move, dwell, spindle–speed, or another function
is specified at the same time as the miscellaneous function, the
execution of the other function is started when the code signal of the
miscellaneous function is sent.
(3) When the strobe signal is set to 1, the PMC reads the code signal and
performs the corresponding operation.
(4) To execute an operation after the completion of the move, dwell or
other function specified in the block, wait until distribution end signal
DEN is set to 1.
(5) Upon completion of the operation, the PMC sets completion signal
FIN to 1. The completion signal is used by the miscellaneous function,
spindle–speed function, tool function, secondary auxiliary function,
external operation function described later, and other functions. If any
of these functions are executed simultaneously, the completion signal
must be set to 1 upon completion of all the functions.
(6) If the completion signal remains set to 1 for longer than period TFIN,
specified in parameter No. 3011 (standard value: 16 msec), the CNC
sets the strobe signal to 0 and reports that the completion signal has
been received.
(7) When the strobe signal is set to 0, set the completion signal to 0 in the
PMC.
558
B–62753EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
(8) When the completion signal is set to 0, the CNC sets all code signals
to 0 and completes all sequences of the miscellaneous function.(*2)
(9) Once all other commands in the same block have been completed, the
CNC executes the next block.
*1 When the tool function is executed, the programmed tool number is
sent as the code signal (T series).
*2 When the spindle–speed function, tool function, or secondary
miscellaneous function is executed, the code signal is maintained until
a new code for the corresponding function is specified.
The timing diagram is shown below:
TMF TFIN
TMF TFIN
559
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
TMF TFIN
Signal
Miscellaneous function
code signals
M00 to M31 <F010 to
F013>
Miscellaneous function
strobe signal
MF <F007#0> [Classification] Output signal
[Function] These signals report the specification of miscellaneous functions.
[Output condition] For the output conditions and procedure, see the description of “Basic
procedure” above.
NOTE
1 The following miscellaneous functions are only processed
internally by the control unit; they are not subject to output
even when specified:
· M98, M99, M198
· M code that calls a sub program (parameter No. 6071 to
6079)
· M code that calls a custom macro (parameter No. 6080
to 6089)
2 Decode signals as well as the code signals and strobe
signal are output for the miscellaneous functions listed
below.
M00, M01, M02, M30
560
B–62753EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
Decode M signals
DM00<F009#7>,
DM01 <F009#6>,
DM02 <F009#5>,
DM30 <F009#4>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] These signals report particular miscellaneous functions are specified. The
miscellaneous functions in a command program correspond to output
signals as indicated below.
Command program Output signal
M00 DM00
M01 DM01
M02 DM02
M30 DM30
Spindle–speed code
signals S00 to S31
<F022–F025>
Spindle–speed strobe
signal SF <F007#2>
561
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Second auxiliary
function code signals
B00 to B31
<F030–F033>
Second auxiliary
function strobe signal
BF <F007#4>
(For lathes) <F007#7>
(For machining center)
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] These signals report that second auxiliary functions have been specified.
[Output condition] For the output conditions and procedure, see the description of “Basic
procedure” above.
WARNING
Only one end signal is used for all functions above. The end
signal must go “1” after all functions are completed.
562
B–62753EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
NOTE
A parameter NC1 (No.1601#5) can specify, whether to only
check if an acceleration/deceleration delay is eliminated, or
to also check if a servo delay (error) has been reduced to
within a certain range.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G004 FIN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F001 DEN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F007 BF BF TF SF MF
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F030 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F031 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08
563
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F032 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F033 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24
Parameter
3010 Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF
M, S, T, B code
Delay time
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not
a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
Example : When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 32 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 100 is set, 104 ms is assumed.
564
B–62753EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
M, S, T, B code
FIN sigal
Fig. 8.1 (b) Valid Width of the FIN (M,S, T, and B Function
Completion) Signal
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not
a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
Example: When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
NOTE
Up to 5 digits can be specified in the S code
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3401 DPI
565
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 M02 M30
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3405 AUX
566
B–62753EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
CAUTION
1 The specification of a minimum value that exceeds the
specified maximum value is invalid.
2 When there is only one data item, set the following:
minimum value =maximum value.
567
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
1 When a move command and miscellaneous function are
specified in the same block, the commands are executed in
one of the following two ways:
i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and
miscellaneous function commands.
ii) Executing miscellaneous function commands upon
completion of move command execution.
The selection of either sequence depends on the
sequence of PMC.
2 When the 2nd auxiliary function is provided, the address
used for specifying the 2nd auxiliary function (B or the
address specified with parameter No. 3460) cannot be used
as an axis address.
3 The block following M00, M01, M02 and M30, is not read
into the input buffer register, if present. Similarly, ten M
codes which do not buffer can be set by parameters (Nos.
3411 to 3420).
4 For M00 and M01 only, miscellaneous function code signal,
auxiliary function strobe signal, and M decode signals are
sent; the control of program stop and optional stop shall be
designed on the PMC side.
5 When the automatic operation is stopped by M02 or M30,
it is necessary to send the external reset signal from the
machine side to the CNC, instead of the FIN signal, When
the external reset signal is returned against the M02 or M30,
the control returns to the top of the program recently
executed and enters the reset state. When the FIN signal
is returned, the control returns to the beginning of the
program recently executed and executes it from the top..
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.12.1 Miscellaneous function (M code)
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN) II.12.4 2nd Auxiliary function (B code)
568
B–62753EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
8.2
AUXILIARY
FUNCTION LOCK
General Inhibits execution of a specified M, S, T and B function.
That is, code signals and strobe signals are not issued.
This function is used to check a program.
Signal
WARNING
Even when this signal is “1”, spindle analog output or
spindle serial output is executed.
569
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G005 AFL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F004 MAFL
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.1 Machine lock and auxiliary function lock
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
570
B–62753EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
8.3
MULTIPLE M
COMMANDS IN A
SINGLE BLOCK
General So far, one block has been able to contain only one M code. However, this
function allows up to three M codes to be contained in one block.
Up to three M codes specified in a block are simultaneously output to the
machine. This means that compared with the conventional method of a
single M command in a single block, a shorter cycle time can be realized
in machining.
(Example)
One M command Multiple M commands
in a single block in a single block
M40 ; M40M50M60 ;
M50 ; G28G91X0Y0Z0 ;
M60 ; :
G28G91X0Y0Z0 ; :
: :
: :
: :
Basic procedure (1) Assume that “MaaMbbMcc;” was commanded by the program.
(2) The 1st M command (Maa) sends the code signals M00 to M31 in a
manner similar to the conventional one-block single command. The
strobe signal MF is set to “1” after a time TMF set by parameter No.
3010 (Standard setting: 16 msec).
The second M command (Mbb) sends the code signal M200-M215,
the third M command (Mcc) sends the code signal M300-M315, and
their respective strobe signals MF2 and MF3 are set to “1”.
Furthermore, the three code signals are sent simultaneously.
The strobe signals MF, MF2, and MF3 become “1” at the same time.
The code signal is a binary notation of the program command aa, bb
and cc.
(3) On the PMC side, the code signals corresponding to the respective
strobe signals are read when the strobe signals become “1”, and the
appropriate operations are performed.
(4) When the operation of all M commands ends on the PMC side, the end
signal (FIN) is set to “1”.
(5) When the completion signal stays “1” for a time (TFIN) set by
parameter No. 3011 (Standard: 16 msec), all strobe signals (MF, MF2
and MF3) are set to “0” at the same time and the reception of
completion signal is reported.
(6) On the PMC side, when MF, MF2 and MF3 are set to “0”, the
completion signal is set to “0”.
571
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
M command (MaaMbbMcc;)
Code signal M00-M31
Strobe signal MF
TMF TFIN
Signal
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F008 MF3 MF2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F014 M207 M206 M205 M204 M203 M202 M201 M200
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F015 M215 M214 M213 M212 M211 M210 M209 M208
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F016 M307 M306 M305 M304 M303 M302 M301 M300
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F017 M315 M314 M313 M312 M311 M310 M309 M308
572
B–62753EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 M3B
Caution
CAUTION
1 M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, or M198 must not be
specified together with another M code.
2 Some M codes other than M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99,
and M198 cannot be specified together with other M codes;
each of those M codes must be specified in a single block.
Such M codes include these which direct the CNC to
perform internal operations in addition to sending the M
codes themselves to the PMC. To be specified, such M
codes are M codes for calling program numbers 9001 to
9009 and M codes for disabling advance reading (buffering)
of subsequent blocks.
The M codes which can be specified in a single block must
be those which the CNC send only the M code signals to the
PMC side.
Note
NOTE
1 CNC allows up to three M codes to be specified in one block.
However, some M codes cannot be specified at the same
time due to mechanical operation restrictions. For example,
M42 can be specified only after the mechanical operation of
M41 is completed.
2 The 1st M code can be up to 8 digits and 2nd, 3rd M codes
can be the values up to 65535.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.12.2 Multiple M commands in a single block
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
573
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
8.4
HIGH–SPEED M/S/T/B
INTERFACE
Whether to use the usual system or high–speed system for strobe signal
and completion signal handling can be specified by parameter MHI (No.
3001#7).
574
B–62753EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
Next block
Code signal
Mxx Myy
Strobe signal MF
Auxiliary function
completion signal MFIN
Next block
Code signal
Mxx Myy
Strobe signal MF
The high–speed interface can also be used for the external operation
function. In this case, special external operation signal EFD and
completion signal EFIN are used. The procedure for sending and
receiving these signals is identical to that for sending and receiving the
strobe and completion signals of the miscellaneous function (M series).
575
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
Miscellaneous function
completion signal
MFIN <G005#0>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Reports that the execution of a miscellaneous function using the high–
speed M/S/T/B interface is completed.
[Operation] For the operation and aprocedure of the contol unit when this signal turns
to “1” and “0”, see the description of “Basic procedure” above.
Spindle function
completion signal
SFIN <G005#2>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Reports that the execution of a spindle speed function using the
high–speed M/S/T/B interface is completed.
[Operation] For the operation and procedure of the control unit when this signal turns
to “1” and “0”, see the description of “Basic procedure” above.
576
B–62753EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
External operation
function completion
signal (M series) EFIN
<G005#1>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Indicates that the external operation function has been completed for the
high–speed M, S, T, or B interface.
[Operation] The “basic procedure” describes the procedure and operation of the
control unit when the signal is set to 1 or 0.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G004 MFIN3 MFIN2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G005 BFIN BFIN TFIN SFIN EFIN MFIN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F007 EFD
577
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3001 MHI
MHI Exchange of strobe and completion signals for the M, S, T, and B codes
0 : Normal
1 : High–speed
Note
NOTE
1 The strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF are “0” when the
power is turned on.
2 When the control unit is reset, MF, SF, TF, and BF are set
to “0”.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL 8.1 Miscellaneous function/2nd auxiliary func-
(This manual) tion
578
B–62753EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
8.5
WAITING M CODE
(Two–path control)
General Control based on M codes is used to cause one path to wait for the other
during machining. By specifying an M code in a machining program for
each path, the two paths can wait for each other at a specified block. When
an M code for waiting is specified in a block for one path during automatic
operation, the other path waits for the same M code to be specified before
staring the execution of the next block.
A range of M codes used as M codes for waiting is to be set in the
parameters (Nos. 8110 and 8111) beforehand.
Signal
579
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G063 NOWT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F063 WATO #1
Parameter
8110 Waiting M code range (minimum value)
NOTE
A value of 0 indicates that the waiting M code is not used.
Caution
CAUTION
The waiting M code, unlike other M codes, does not issue
code signal nor strobe signal.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.22.2 Waiting for path
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
580
B–62753EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
8.6
M CODE LOOP
CHECK FUNCTION
General This function checks whether combinations of M codes (up to three)
specified in one block are correct.
The function has two purposes. One of the purposes is to alarm if an M
code which must not be combined with any other M codes is combined
with another. The other purpose is to alarm if an M code in a group is
combined with another M code in the same group. These errors are
reflected in P/S alarm No. 5016.
Setting the group data
Pressing the SYSTEM
key, then the [next menu] key several times causes the
[M CODE] soft key to appear. Pressing this soft key displays the screen
shown in Fig. 8.6 (a).
M CODE (OPRT)
581
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
For M codes which must be used separately from other M codes, always
set their group number to “1”. Such M codes include M00, M01, M02,
M30, M98, and M99. For M codes for which the CNC performs internal
processing in addition to sending them to the machine, also set their group
number to “1”. See Section 8.3 for details.
For M codes you do not need to check, leave them at an initial value of
“0”.
The M codes can be set with a number from 0 to 127. Neither negative
values nor fractions can be specified.
Parameter setting Basically, item numbers 0 to 99 correspond to M00 to M99. For item
numbers 100 and higher, parameter Nos. 3441 to 3444 can specify the
corresponding M codes.
582
B–62753EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
(iii) No. 3441 = 234. No. 3442 = 345. No. 3443 = 456, No. 3444 = 567
In this case, item numbers 100 to 199 correspond to M234 to M333,
200 to 299 correspond to M345 to M444, 300 to 399 correspond to
M456 to M555, and 400 to 499 correspond to M567 to M666. The
group numbers for M100 to M233, M334 to M344, M446 to M455,
M556 to M566, M667, and all M codes with higher numbers are
automatically set to “0”.
The examples above meet the setting conditions. With these settings,
up to 500 M codes can be set.
Examples that do not meet the setting conditions follow.
(iv) No. 3441 = 200. No. 3442 = 50. No. 3443 = 100, No. 3444 = 600
In this case, item numbers 0 to 99 correspond to M00 to M99, 100 to
199 correspond to M200 to M299, and 400 to 499 correspond to M600
to M699. Item numbers 200 to 399 are meaningless. With these
settings, only up to 300 M codes can be set.
(v) No. 3441 = 50. No. 3442 = 100. No. 3443 = 150, No. 3444 = 200
In this case, the correspondence between the item numbers and M
codes is set up as listed below. With these settings, up to 300 M codes
can be set. The group number for M300 and all M codes with higher
numbers are automatically set to “0”.
Item number M code
0 – 49 0 – 49
50 – 99 Meaningless
100 –199
50 – 149
200 –249
Meaningless
250 –299
150 – 199
300 –349
350 –399 Meaningless
400 –449 200 – 249
450 –499 Meaningless
250 – 299
On the soft key screen shown in Fig. 8.6 (b), pressing the next menu key
several times displays the soft keys shown in Fig. 8.6 (c).
>
MDI
**** *** *** 00 : 00 : 00
READ PUNCH
583
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Now pressing the [READ] key displays the soft keys shown in Fig. 8.6
(d).
>
MDI
**** *** *** 00 : 00 : 00
CANCEL EXEC
Output Pressing the [PUNCH] key on the screen shown in Fig. 8.6 (c) displays
the soft keys shown in Fig. 8.6 (d). To execute the punch operation, just
press the [EXEC] key.
After this operation, you can confirm that the file M CODE GROUP is
output, by searching through floppy cassette files. The output data has
a format with 60000 added to the item number:
Parameter
3441 First of the M codes assigned to item numbers 100 to 199
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.12.3 M CODE GROUP CHECK FUNCTION
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
584
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
585
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.1
SPINDLE SPEED
FUNCTION
(S CODE OUTPUT)
General When up to five digits are specified after address S, code and strobe
signals are sent out and used to control the spindle speed. The code
signals are retained until another S code is issued.
One S code is used for each block. Parameter No. 3031 can be used to
specify the maximum number of digits. If a number greater than the
maximum number is specified, an alarm can be raised.
Parameter
3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code
Note
NOTE
1 When a move command and miscellaneous function are
specified in the same block, the commands are executed in
one of the following two ways:
i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and
miscellaneous function commands.
ii) Executing miscellaneous function commands upon
completion of move command execution.
The selection of either sequence depends on the PMC
processing sequence.
2 For S code output when the spindle serial output/analog
spindle output is used, refer to 9.3.
586
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
9.2
SPINDLE SERIAL
OUTPUT/SPINDLE
ANALOG OUTPUT
9.2.1 There are two types of spindle motor control interfaces, spindle serial
General output and spindle analog output.
The spindle serial output interface can control two serial spindles. The
spindle analog output interface can control one analog spindle.
The table below lists the relationships between the spindle control
interfaces and the configuration of the spindle.
Spindle serial Spindle analog First spindle Second spindle Third spindle
output output
× f Analog spindle
= =
The PC can be used.
· PC = position coder
· (*) The multispindle function is necessary to use the position coder of
the second spindle (T series only).
· See section 15.4 or 9.10 for how to control the speed of the second and
third spindles.
587
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
The table below lists the relationship between the spindles and functions.
fAvailable ×Unavailable
Cs contour control f × × ×
f f f
Multispindle (*2) ×
(First spindle) (Second spindle) (Third spindle)
588
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
NOTE
1 The multispindle function (T series only) is necessary. The
function cannot be used for the first and second spindles
simultaneously.
2. The multispindle function can control the speed of three
spindles and switch the feedback signal between two
position coders. It also can work without the second or third
spindle.
3. For a two–path lathe application, the first spindle on tool
post 1 is the master, and the first spindle on tool post 2 is the
slave. The second spindle of either tool post cannot be
used in spindle synchronization.
4. These functions belong to the spindle control unit. They
cannot be used unless the spindle control unit supports
those functions.
5. No spindle polygon turning is available for a combination of
the spindle of tool post 1 and the spindle of tool post 2 for
the two–path lathe application.
The signals and parameters for spindle speed control are common to both
spindle serial output and spindle analog output. (See Section 9.3.)
The table below lists the differences related to direct control of the spindle
control unit.
Spindle control unit for Spindle control unit for
spindle serial output inter- spindle analog output in-
face terface
Parameters for Specified as CNC parame- Directly specified for the
the spindle con- ters spindle control unit
trol unit (4000 to 4351/S1, S2)
Used after being transferred
to the spindle control unit
Control signal for Connected to the PMC via Connected to the PMC via
the spindle con- the CNC an external contact
trol unit G0070 to G0073 and F0045
to F0048:
Addresses for the first
spindle
G0074 to G0077 and F0049
to F0052:
Addresses for the second
spindle
Spindle speed Digital data in a range from Analog voltage from 0 to
command inter- 0 to maximum spindle 10 V (excluding portion
face motor speed for offset voltage adjust-
ment)
589
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
These addresses are on the CNC. Actually, however, they are input/output
signals for the spindle control unit for the serial spindle.
Signal address
For 1st SERIAL SPINDLE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G070 MRDYA ORCMA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA
G072
G073
F047
F048
590
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
G076
G077
F051
F052
Parameter
Connection of serial
spindle control unit
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3701 SS2 ISI
NOTE
This parameter is enabled only when the serial spindle
interface option is provided. The parameter is used when
the CNC is started after serial spindle interface control is
temporarily disabled during startup adjustment of the CNC.
This bit should normally set to be 0.
NOTE
To connect two serial spindles, set jumper S1 on the 1st
serial spindle control unit to B.
591
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
749 S–SPINDLE LSI ERROR A communication error occurred for the se-
rial spindle. The cause may be noises, dis-
connection of an optical cable or the inter-
ruption of the power to the spindle amplifier.
(Note) Unlike alarm No. 750, this alarm oc-
curs when a serial communication alarm is
detected after the spindle amplifier is nor-
mally activated.
750 SPINDLE SERIAL LINK This alarm is generated when the spindle
START FAULT control unit is not ready for starting correct-
ly when the power is turned on in the sys-
tem with the serial spindle.
The four reasons can be considered as fol-
lows:
1) An improperly connected optic cable,
or the spindle control unit’s power is
OFF.
2) When the NC power was turned on un-
der alarm conditions other than SU–01
or AL–24 which are shown on the LED
display of the spindle control unit.
In this case, turn the spindle amplifier
power off once and perform startup
again.
3) Other reasons (improper combination
of hardware)
4) The second spindle (when SP2, bit 4 of
parameter No. 3701, is 1) is in one of
the above conditions 1) to 3).
Note) This alarm does not occur after the
system including the spindle control
unit is activated.
See diagnostic display No. 409 for details.
751 FIRST SPINDLE ALARM This alarm indicates the NC that an alarm is
DETECTION (AL–XX) generated in the spindle control unit of the
serial spindle. The alarm is displayed in
form AL–XX (XX is a number). Refer to the
manuals for serial spindle. The alarm num-
ber XX is the number indicated on the
spindle amplifier. The CNC holds this num-
ber and displays on the screen.
592
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
752 FIRST SPINDLE MODE This alarm is generated if the system does
CHANGE FAULT not properly terminate a mode change. The
modes include the Cs contouring, spindle
positioning, rigid tapping, and spindle con-
trol modes. The alarm is activated if the
spindle control unit does not respond cor-
rectly to the mode change command issued
by the CNC.
761 SECOND SPINDLE ALARM Refer to alarm No. 751. (For 2nd axis)
DETECTION (AL–XX)
762 SECOND SPINDLE MODE Refer to alarm No. 752.(For 2nd axis)
CHANGE FAULT
DIAGNOSIS SCREEN
Information on spindle
control #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
400 SAI SS2 SSR POS SIC
401 Alarm condition for the serial spindle unit for the first spindle (AL–??)
402 Alarm condition for the serial spindle unit for the second spindle (AL–??)
Communication error on
spindle serial output
interface
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
408 SSA SCA CME CER SNE FRE CRE
593
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
To display the load and speed meter readings, the following parameters
must be specified correctly.
Maximum motor speed: Parameter Nos. 4020 (main) and 4196 (sub)
Load meter reading at maximum output:
Parameter Nos. 4127 (main) and 4276 (sub)
NOTE
The spindle switch function is used for main/sub switching.
Select main if the spindle switch function is not used.
The display for parameter Nos. 414 to 416 are in pulse units (one pulse =
360/4096 degrees)
Position error display
during spindle
synchronization
417 First serial spindle: Position coder feedback information
The above display data is the information obtained directly from the serial
spindle control unit.
594
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
9.3
SPINDLE SPEED
CONTROL
General This section describes spindle speed control. It also explains the position
coder and the spindle speed arrival signal (SAR).
595
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
596
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
S command The S command specifies the spindle speed entered from machining
programs, etc. for the CNC.
For constant surface speed control (during G96 mode), the CNC converts
the specified surface speed to the spindle speed.
In the M series with bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706 = 0 without the
constant surface speed control option, the CNC specifies the gear stage
for the desired spindle speed to the PMC according to parameter Nos.
3741, 3742, and 3743, and the S command.
(GR3O, GR2O, GR1O <F034#2, #1, #0>)
S code/SF signal output With the spindle serial output or spindle analog output option, the spindle
control function in the CNC converts the S command value to the output
value for the spindle motor. Unlike a system without such options, the
system with the options responds to the S command with the S code/SF
signals as follows to enable gear change and constant surface speed
control:
M series → Outputs the S code.
The SF signal is output only when the CNC directs the PMC
to change the gear.
T series → Outputs neither S code nor SF signal.
(This is because the S code is not always the spindle speed
when the constant surface speed control option is used.)
If you use the S code for processing in the PMC ladder, you must specify
parameters related to parameter No. 3705.
Spindle stop signal This signal sets the S command value in the CNC to 0. If the CNC has
(*SSTP) the spindle output specified (see descriptions on the SIND signal), this
signal sets the speed command for the spindle to 0.
Even if the function of the spindle stop signal is not used, the signal must
be set to logical 1 for the CNC to perform spindle speed control.
Spindle orientation If the spindle orientation signal is logical 1 and the spindle stop signal is
signal (SOR) logical 0, the spindle rotates in the direction specified by bit 5 (ORM) of
parameter No. 3706 at a constant speed specified by parameter No. 3732.
Because the spindle rotates at a constant speed regardless of the gear
stage, this signal can be used to rotate the spindle to drive the stopper or
pin during mechanical spindle positioning.
In the M series, specifying bit 1 (GST) of parameter No. 3705 causes the
spindle motor to rotate at constant speed. This function can be used for
gear shifting because it maintains a constant speed of the gear change
mechanism.
Spindle speed override This signal specifies an override of 0% to 254% for the specified S value
signal (SOV00 to SOV07) for spindle control.
However, the spindle speed override function is disabled when the CNC
is in the following state:
Tapping cycle (G84, G74) for the M series
Thread cutting (G32, G92, G76) for the T series
When the spindle speed control is performed but the spindle speed
override is not used, set the override value to 100%.
597
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Processing for gear Although the S command contains the spindle speed, the object that is
changing actually controlled is the spindle motor. Therefore, the CNC must have
some provision to detect the gear stage between the speed and spindle
motor.
M type
The CNC selects a gear stage according to the range of speed for each gear
stage previously specified in a parameter, as directed by the S command,
and informs the PMC of the selected gear stage (one of the three gear
stages ) using the gear select signal output (GR3O, GR2O, GR1O).
Also, the CNC outputs the spindle speed based on the selected gear stage
(output as the gear select signal).
T type
The gear stage (one of the four gear stages ) being currently used by the
machine is input in response to the gear select signal inputs (GR1, GR2).
The CNC outputs the spindle speed that corresponds to the gear stage
input.
Selection of gear change The M series system can use either M or T type.
system M type ← Without constant surface speed control option, and bit 4
(GTT) of parameter No. 3706 = 0
T type ← With constant surface speed control, or bit 4 (GTT) of
parameter No. 3706 = 1
The T series system can use only T type.
Details of M type By specifying from S0 to S99999 in memory or MDI operation, the CNC
(Output of GR10, GR20, outputs a command corresponding to the spindle speed. There is a
GR30) two-speed (GR10 and GR20) or three-speed range (GR10, GR20, GR30),
set by parameter nos. 3741-3743, and the gear selection signal is output
simultaneously. When the gear selection signal is changed, the SF signal
is output at the same time (parameter SFA no. 3705#6).
The meaning of the gear signals is shown below:
Gear 2–stage Gear 3–state Remarks
GR10 Low Low
Low :Low Gear
GR20 High Middle Middle :Middle Gear
High
Hi h :High Gear
Hi h G
GR30 High
598
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
10V
Upper limit of
spindle speed
(Vc)
GR20 (GR30)
GR10 (GR20)
(GR10)
C
Spindle speed
A B command
(S code input)
· Constant Vmin; for lower limit of spindle speed (parameter No. 3735)
Lower limit of spindle speed
Vmin=4095×
Spindle speed at command voltage 10V
599
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
If a specified voltage of 10 V is already higher than the
acceptable input voltage for the spindle drive system,
calculate the spindle speed that corresponds to 10 V using
a proportional calculation method and use it instead. Now,
in response to the specified S code, the speed command
and gear select commands (G30, G20, G10) are output to
the spindle motor as shown in Fig. 9.3.1
Spindle motor speed command Vc: Voltage for upper limit of spindle motor speed
(analog voltage output)
10V
Upper limit
voltage of
spindle GR1
motor speed 0
(Vc)
GR20
Spindle speed
command
(S code input)
D A E B C
D : Gear shift point (parameter No. 3761) for low/high speed change (or low/medium speed change) (set by
parameter as rpm value) during tapping.
E : Gear shift point (parameter No. 3762) (3-stage gear) for medium/high speed change (set by parameter as
rpm value) during tapping.
Fig. 9.3 (b) S code input and output voltage (in tapping)
M type gear change method B (M series) (Fig. 9.3 (c))
The speed (rpm) at which the low-speed and the high-speed gears are
changed over can be set as a parameter (nos.3751, 3752) by setting
parameter SGB no. 3705# 2. When a 3-step gear is used, it is possible to
set the speeds (rpm) for switching low-speed and medium-speed gears,
and medium-speed and high-speed gears, using parameters nos. 3751,
3752.
600
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
10V
VC
VH
GR30
VL
GR10 GR20
Spindle speed
command
A B C (S code input)
Vmin Vmaxl Vmaxh Vmax
A× A× B× C×
4095 4095 4095 4095
VC: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor.
VH: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor with high-speed gears (medium
speed gear for 3-step gear)
VL: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor at low-speed gear
601
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
CAUTION
1 In a tapping cycle when parameter SGT (No. 3705 #3 ) is
set, the gears are changed over at the gear changing point
for tapping.
2 For this function (parameter SGB=1 (No. 3705#2)), when
only one-step gear is used, the voltage corresponding to the
upper limit value to the spindle motor is calculated using
Vmaxl, and when 2-step gear is used, it is calculated
according to Vmaxh. Therefore, when SGB is 1, set Vmaxl
when only one-step gear is used, Vmaxl and Vmaxh when
2-step gear is used.
Time chart When S code is commanded, the I/O signal time chart is :
When Gear select signal does not change
S code read
To next block
Spindle speed
command output
V
V H
L
0
V
Fig. 9.3 (d) Time chart when gear select signal does not change
In this case, the SF signal is not output and the CNC advances to the next
block automatically after the next spindle speed command is output.
602
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
S code read
To next block
FIN
TM
F
TFIN
Fig. 9.3 (e) Time chart when gear select signal changes
In this case, the gear select signal is output; after elapse of the time
constant set by parameter (TMF), the SF signal is output. After another
TMF elapse, the spindle speed command is output. On the PMC side,
change the gears by this signal, and return the FIN signal after the end of
gear change. The time chart for SF and FIN signals is the same as in S
code output.TMF, set by parameter no. 3010, is common to M, S and T
functions.
Moreover, specifying bit 6 (SFA) of parameter No. 3705 can specify that
the SF signal be output even if no gear change is used.
Details of T type To perform the T type gear changing, the maximum spindle speed for each
(Input of GR1, GR2) gear select signal issued from the PMC side must be set by parameter nos.
3741-3744.
The gear select signal is a 2 bit code signal (GR1, GR2). The relationship
between the signal and gear number is :
Parameter No. for max.
GR1 GR2 Gear No.
spindle speed
0 0 1 No. 3741
1 0 2 No. 3742
0 1 3 No. 3743
1 1 4 No. 3744
603
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
In addition, for the speed command output to the spindle motor, analog
voltages 0 to 10 V for analog spindle control correspond to digital data
0 to 16383 for serial spindle control. However, it might be easier if you
consider them code signals from 0 to 4095 for convenience sake without
distinguishing between serial and analog spindles.
Assume that gear switching is two stage switching. If the spindle speed
with the output voltage 10 V is 1000 rpm for the low speed gear (G1) and
2000 rpm for the high speed gear (G2), set these speeds by the parameter
nos. 3741, 3742. In this case, the analog voltage has the linear relationship
shown below.
N
2000rpm When gear
2 selected
When gear
1000rpm 1 selected
600rpm
Volt
0 V V 1
2 1 0
10N
V=
R
R: Spindle speed at 10V output voltage
N: Spindle speed given by S5-digits
This is equivalent to the G97 mode for constant surface speed control.
See Section 9.5 for operations during the constant surface speed control
mode (G96).
In addition, parameter No. 3772 (upper limit to the spindle speed) can
specify speed clamping for all gear positions.
604
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
D-A SVC
Speed
converter control
Determination of output Using the above processing for gear change, the CNC calculates the speed
R12O–R01O (Output) command output to the spindle motor that is necessary to obtain the
R12I–R01I (Input) specified spindle speed with the gear.
SIND (Input)
For either serial spindle or analog spindle control, the calculation results
are output as the S12 bit code signal from 0 to 4095 to the PMC.
After the calculation results are received, the SIND signal <G033#7>
determines which is to be used, the speed command output calculated by
the CNC or the data specified in the PMC. Thus speed command output
control for the spindle motor is determined. (See also Section 10.4.)
Determination of output The speed command output to the spindle motor is determined as
polarity SSIN/SGN (Input) described above, but the actually used output polarity is determined by the
CNC as follows:
⋅ If bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No. 3706 = 0
→ Determined according to bit 6 (CWM) of parameter No. 3706
⋅ If bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No. 3706 = 1
→ Determined according to bit 6 (CWM) of parameter No. 3706 and
M03/M04 given to the CNC
After that, the SSIN signal <G033#6> determines which is to be used, the
output polarity calculated by the CNC or the polarity specified in the
PMC. In this way, the output polarity of the speed command output to
the spindle motor is determined. (See also Section 10.4.)
605
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Keep in mind the following: Even with bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No.
3706 = 1, the CNC cannot determine the output polarity if it has not issued
M03/M04, and therefore, actual output does not work even if the speed
command output has been specified.
Command output to According to the speed command output and the polarity determined so
spindle far, the command is sent to the spindle control unit as follows:
Requirement of output After power is switched on, a nonzero command is output to the spindle
only when the following conditions are met: A nonzero spindle speed
command is specified, and the output polarity is determined.
With bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No. 3706 = 1, no command output is sent
to the spindle, because the output polarity is not determined until an
M03/M04 is issued.
Requirement to stop The command output to the spindle is reset to 0 when a command to
output specify so (such as SSTP = 0 or S0 command) is issued.
M05, emergency stop, or reset does not cause the CNC to reset the
command output to the spindle to 0.
Spindle enable signal Another output related to spindle control is the spindle enable signal
ENB <F001#4> ENB.
The ENB signal is logical 1 when a nonzero command output is sent to
the spindle. If the command is logical 0, the ENB signal becomes logical
0.
When the analog spindle is being used, an offset voltage in the spindle
motor speed amplifier may cause the spindle motor to rotate at low speed
even if the command output (in this case, analog voltage) to the spindle
is zero. The ENB signal can be used to stop the motor in such a case.
Gain and offset The analog spindle may require gain and offset voltage adjustment
depending on the spindle motor speed amplifier being used.
Electrical specification The signals related to analog spindle interface are described below.
of analog spindle
interface The ENB1 and ENB2 signals are turned on and off under the same
condition as for the ENB signal <F001#4>. They can be used also for the
serial spindle.
606
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Control unit
max+10V SVC
SVC Spindle speed
2mA Name Connector/Pin
ES analog voltage
Output ES output SVC JA8A/7
impedance
ES JA8A/5
100Ω EN B
ENB Enable signal ENB1 JA8A/8
1
ENB2
ENB2 JA8A/9
WARNING
Since the output voltage is a weak signal, do not relay it
through contacts.
Position coder feedback The position coder is necessary for thread cutting or feed per rotation.
signal (For the M series, a software option must also be purchased.)
The position coder detects the actual spindle speed and the one–rotation
signal (used to detect a fixed point on the spindle for thread cutting).
Ideally, the position coder should be connected directly to the spindle
(with a gear ratio of 1:1). If it is necessary to use a gear, select a gear ratio
from 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, and 1:8 that reduces the position coder speed.
When using a gear between the spindle and position coder, specify the
gear ratio in bits 1 and 0 (PG2, PG1) of parameter No. 3706.
See Section 9.11 for position coder connection for rigid tapping.
Speed arrival signal The spindle speed arrival signal SAR is an input signal used as a condition
(SAR) to cause the CNC to start cutting feed. This signal is used generally when
cutting feed should be started after the spindle reaches the specified speed.
In this case, a sensor is used to check the spindle speed. The detected
speed is sent to the CNC via the PMC.
When the above operation is performed using the PC ladder regularly,
however, cutting feed may be started based on the SAR signal indicating
the previous spindle state (spindle speed before change), if the spindle
speed change command and the cutting feed command are issued at the
same time.
To avoid the above problem, monitoring the SAR signal can be deferred
for a time specified by parameter No. 3740 after the S command or cutting
feed command was issued.
When using the SAR signal, set bit 0 (SAR) of parameter No. 3708 to 1.
Item No. 06 (SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK) on the diagnosis
screen is kept at 1 while this function is keeping the cutting feed block at
a halt.
607
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
S××××
Input command M03 M05 M04 S0
Miscellaneous function
processing
Spindle stop signal
*SSTP
Analog voltage 0V
The above time chart is an example. Actually, the time chart should meet
the specification of the spindle control unit.
· When this signal is not used, always set the signal to “1”.
· M03, M04, M05 are not processed inside the CNC.
Spindle orientation
signal SOR <G029#5>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] The spindle or the spindle motor is rotated at a constant speed.
[Operation] When the spindle orientation signal turns to “1” and the spindle stop
signal *SSTP turns to “0”, a spindle speed command which lets the
spindle rotate at the constant speed set by parameter No. 3732 is output.
The enable signal ENB also turns to “1”. This signal is disabled when the
spindle stop signal is “1”.
When the spindle speed for orientation is set by parameter GST No.
3705#1 and the SOR signal is input, the CNC outputs the spindle speed
command corresponding to the speed set to parameter 3732 with an
output polarity set by parameter ORM (No. 3706#5), but the gear select
signal does not change. For example, if the SOR signal is turned to “1”
with high gear selected, and the speed set to parameter No. 3732 is in the
608
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
low gear range, the gear select signal does not change and the command
output is calculated and output to obtain the set speed at high gear.
When the spindle motor speed is set by parameter GST (No. 3705#1)=1,
the command output is output regardless of gear select signal. When the
spindle motor speed is set, it is used for gear shift.
Example of usage is shown below:
Input command
M1 M0
9 3
Miscellaneous function
processing
Stop command Orientation
detection
Spindle stop signal
*SSTP
Command output to
the spindle 0
Enable signal
ENB
Spindle speed
0 rpm
RL: Constant speed set by parameter No. 3732
609
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
CAUTION
According to the conditions of item (d) above, note that if the
circuit is so designed that SAR is turned to “0”
simultaneously with the output of an S code and the change
of spindle speed is gated with DEN signal, the operation will
stop. That is, the spindle speed does not reach the
commanded speed because the CNC is waiting for the DEN
signal and distribution is not started because the CNC is
waiting for the SAR signal.
610
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
611
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
4095
0
16383 (Digital data) ← Serial spindle
0 10V (Analog voltage) ← Analog spindle
This signal converts the spindle speed command value calculated by the
spindle control function of the CNC to data from 0 to 4095 (for both serial
and analog spindle control) and outputs the result. Note that the
conversion result is not the actual output value. (See Section 10.4.)
Other signals
Spindle speed function See Sections 9.1 and 10.4 for these signals.
code signal S00 to S31
<F025 to F022> (Output)
Spindle speed function
strobe signal
SF<F007#2> (Output)
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G027 CON *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS3 SWS2 SWS1
612
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
F001 ENB
F007 SF
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3705 EVS ESF
SFA NSF SGT SGB GST ESF
NOTE
For the T series, this parametar is enabled when bit 4 (EVS)
of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1.
For the M series, SF is not output:
(1)For an S command used to specify maximum spindle
speed clamping (G92S–––;) in constant surface speed
control mode
(2)When bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1
613
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
0 : Spindle orientation
1 : Gear shift
SGT: Gear switching method during tapping cycle (G84 and G74)
0 : Method A (Same as the normal gear switching method)
1 : Method B (Gears are switched during tapping cycle according to the
spindle speed set in parameters 3761 and 3762).
EVS When the spindle control function (S analog output or S serial output) is
used, S codes and SF are:
0 : Not output for an S command.
1 : Output for an S command.
NOTE
The output of S codes and SF for an S command in constant
surface speed control mode (G96), or for an S command
used to specify maximum spindle speed clamping
(G50S–––;) depends on the setting of bit 0 (ESF) of
parameter No. 3705.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706 TCW CWM ORM PG2 PG1
TCW CWM ORM GTT PG2 PG1
614
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
NOTE
1 Type M:
The gear selection signal is not entered. In response to an
S command, the CNC selects a gear according to the speed
range of each gear specified beforehand in parameters.
Then the CNC reports the selection of a gear by outputting
the gear selection signal. The spindle speed corresponding
to the gear selected by the gear selection signal is output.
Type T:
The gear selection signal is entered. The spindle speed
corresponding to the gear selected by this signal is output.
2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected,
type T is selected, regardless of whether this parameter is
specified.
3 When type T spindle gear switching is selected, the
following parameters have no effect:
No. 3705#2 SGB, No. 3751, No. 3752, No. 3705#3 SGT,
No. 3761, No. 3762, No. 3705#6 SFA, No. 3735, No. 3736
However, parameter No. 3744 is valid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3709 SAM
3730 Data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed
615
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
[Adjustment method]
(1) Assign standard value 1000 to the parameter.
(2) Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed
is the maximum voltage (10 V).
(3) Measure the output voltage.
(4) Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter No.
3730.
10 (V)
Set value= × 1000
Measured data (V)
(5) After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that the analog
output of the spindle speed is the maximum voltage. Confirm that the
output voltage is 10V.
NOTE
This parameter needs not to be set for serial spindles.
3731 Compensation value for the offset voltage of the analog output of the
spindle speed
NOTE
This parameter need not to be set for serial spindles.
3732 The spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor speed
during spindle gear shift
616
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
3735
Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor
3736
Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor
617
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
3740 Time elapsed prior to checking the spindle speed arrival signal
618
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
3751
Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2
3752
Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 3
Spindle speed
command
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
(S command)
max. max. max
speed speed speed
parameter parameter parameter
No. 3741 No. 3742 No. 3743
619
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
3761
Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping
3762
Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 during tapping
620
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
WARNING
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle is
not clamped.
2 When spindle speed command control is applied using the
PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the spindle speed
is not clamped.
NOTE
1 In the M series, this parameter is valid when the constant
surface speed control option is selected.
2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected,
the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed,
regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode is
specified.
3 When the multi–spindle control option is selected (T series),
set the maximum speed for each spindle in the following
parameters:
Parameter No. 3772: Sets the maximum speed for the first
spindle.
Parameter No. 3802: Sets the maximum speed for the
second spindle.
Parameter No. 3822: Sets the maximum speed for the third
spindle.
3821 Offset–voltage compensation value of the analog output of the third–spindle speed
621
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Caution
CAUTION
This section mentioned a spindle speed control that should
be prepared on the CNC side. But it is also necessary to
design the signals to the spindle control unit.
Consult the manual of the spindle control unit used and take
necessary actions on the spindle control unit.
622
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
9.4
SPINDLE SPEED
CONTROL FOR
TWO–PATH LATHE
General In a two–path lathe application, the additional path section (path No. 2)
can have the same spindle interface as a one–path lathe (see Section 9.2.).
Each spindle is controlled by a command issued by tool post 1 or 2.
Which spindle is controlled by which tool post can be switched by signals.
This section describes the configuration of a two–path lathe application
and how it is controlled.
In the following description, the term tool post 1 refers to path No. 1, and
the term tool post 2 refers to path No. 2.
One–spindle control and In a two–path lathe application, there are two selectable configurations,
two–spindle control a configuration in which the entire system uses one spindle (one–spindle
control) and a configuration in which each spindle is controlled separately
(two–spindle control). Parameter No. 3703 (2SP) is used to select a
configuration.
One–spindle control The spindle interface for tool post 2 is not used.
Selection of the spindle The spindle command select signal SLSPA<G063#2> (input) specifies
command the tool post whose spindle command is to be followed by the spindle.
Position coder feedback When a serial spindle is used, the position coder feedback signal is
signal (serial spindle) supplied to both paths in the NC. Either tool post can be used for thread
cutting and feed per rotation.
PC#1
Feedback Feedback
SIC
0
1
SLSPA
623
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Position coder feedback When an analog spindle is used, supplying the position coder feedback
signal (Analog) signal to the position coder interface of tool post 2 via an external
distribution circuit makes it possible to use either tool post for thread
cutting and feed per rotation.
External
circuit
(distribution)
Feedback Feedback
POS–LSI POS–LSI
SLSPA
624
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Two–spindle control The spindle interface for either tool post is used.
Selection of spindle The spindle command select signals SLSPA <G063#2> and SLSPB
command <G063#2> (input) specify the tool post whose spindle command is to be
followed by each spindle.
Position coder feedback When the serial spindles are used on both tool posts, the position coder
signal (When both are feedback signals SLPCA<G064#2> and SLPCB<G064#3> (input) direct
serial spindle) each tool post to select which spindle’s position coder feedback signal is
used. Therefore, it is possible to use the spindle of the other system; for
example, tool post 1 can perform thread cutting or feed per rotation using
the spindle connected to tool post 2.
0 1 0 1
SLPCB SLPCA
PC#2 PC#1
SIC Feedback Feedback SIC
0 1 1 0
SLSPB SLSPA
625
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Position coder feedback If either tool post uses an analog spindle as the first spindle, the spindle
signal (when an analog feedback signals SLPCA<G064#2> and SLPCB<G064#3> (input)
spindle is used) cannot cause the NC to select a position coder feedback signal.
If both tool posts use an analog spindle, switching the position coder
feedback signal inputs to the NC using an external circuit makes it
possible to use the spindle of the other system.
S#2 S#1
Command Command
Spindle#2 A–OUT2 A–OUT1 Spindle#1
JD8B JD8A
Analog spindle Analog spindle
0 1 1 0
SLSPB SLSPA
626
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
2nd and 3rd spindles If the first spindle is a serial spindle, the second and third spindles can also
be used in a two–path lathe application. (See Section 9.2.)
In the following chart, all spindles are connected under two–spindle
control.
Under one–spindle control, any spindle (SP1#2, SP2#2, SP3#2) of tool
post 2 cannot be used.
SWS1#2 SWS1#1
SIND1#2 SIND1#1
SWS2#2 SWS2#1
SIND2#2 SIND2#1
Fig. 9.4 (e) Spindle Configuration and Flow of Commands and Feedback Signals in an two–path
lathe application (with All Spindles under Two–Spindle Control)
The second and third spindles should be controlled using the PMC or be
under multi–spindle control. (See Section 15.4 or 9.19.)
If multispindle control is applied to both tool posts, the position coder
feedback signal for the second spindle of each tool post also becomes
usable.
See descriptions of bit 3 (PCS) of parameter No. 3706.
627
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Options related to Optional functions for spindles are valid for both tool posts. However,
spindles you may want to use the optional functions for only one of the tool posts
because of relationships with the interface and PMC ladder.
Signal
Signal input
Command to spindle
SLSPA
0 Spindle command of tool post 1
1 Spindle command of tool post 2
NOTE
SLSPB is ineffective.
628
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
NOTE
This function is effective only in the 2-spindle control system
in which both tool posts use serial spindle.
629
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
The SLPCA and SLPCB signals are effective only in the
2-spindle control mode using two serial spindles. In the
2-spindle control mode using analog spindles, the feedback
signal of spindle 1 is input to tool post 1, and the feedback
signal of spindle 2 is input to tool post 2, regardless of the
setting of the SLPCA and SLPCB signals.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G063 SLSPB SLSPA
F064 COSP
630
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3702 ECS ESS EAS ESI EMS
NOTE
If the multi–spindle control function is not required for one
tool post in two–path control, specify this parameter for the
tool post to which the multi–spindle control function need
not be applied.
NOTE
This parameter is used when the spindle positioning option
specified with two–path control, and the spindle positioning
function is not required for either path. Set ESI to 1 for a
system that does not require the spindle positioning
function.
EAS For tool post 1 (or tool post 2), the S analog output function is:
0 : Used.
1 : Not used.
ESS For tool post 1 (or tool post 2), the S serial output function is:
0 : Used.
1 : Not used.
ECS For tool post 1 (or tool post 2), the Cs contour control function is:
0 : Used.
1 : Not used.
NOTE
Parameter EAS, ESS, and ECS are used for 16–TB 2–path
control.
These parameters are used to determine whether the
optional function, S analog output function, S serial output
function, and Cs contour control function, are used for each
tool post.
631
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3703 2SP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706 PCS
NOTE
Multi–spindle control based on the same serial spindle must
be applied to both tool posts.
⋅ Selecting position coder feedback signals for both tool
posts in a two–path lathe application under multi–spindle
control.
PC1#2 PC1#1
PC2#2 PC2#1
632
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Table 9.4 lists the position coder feedback signals used for each tool post
in the above configuration. These position coder feedback signals are
selected according to the following:
⋅ Bit 3 (PCS) of parameter No. 3706
⋅ Spindle feedback select signals SLPCA <G064#2> and SLPCB
<G064#3>
⋅ Multi–spindle control
Second position coder select signals PC2SLC#1 <G028#7> and
PC2SLC#2 <G1028#7>
When parameter No. 3706#3=1
Table 9.4 Selection of Position Coder Feedback Signal in Two–path Lathe
(— means position coder selection is indifferent on the tool post side)
Position coder SLPCA SLPCB PC2SLC#1 PC2SLC#2
selected
PC1#1 ”0” — ”0” —
633
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
1 The spindle commands include S code commands,
maximum speed command (G50S__), M03, M04, M05, and
constant surface speed control commands (G96 and G97)
2 Signals to operate the spindle control unit are not affected
by the spindle command select signals SLSPA<G063#2> or
SLSPB<G063#3>. They may be processed in the PMC
ladder, as required.
(Example: G070#5SFRA is always a forward rotation
command for the first spindle control amplifier of
tool post 1.)
3 The machine tool builder should prepare an external circuit
to distribute and select position coder feedback signals for
the analog spindle.
634
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
9.5
CONSTANT
SURFACE SPEED
CONTROL
General With the spindle serial output or analog output function, specifying the
surface speed (m/min or feet/min) directly in an S command makes it
possible to change the spindle output continuously so as to maintain a
constant surface speed at a programmed point. (For the rapid traverse
command, however, the surface speed for the end point is output at the
beginning of rapid traverse.)
Spindle speed N
r
1 0 2
0 1 3
1 1 4
Example of Spindle Assume that gear switching is two stage switching. If the spindle speed
Analog Output with the output 10 V is 1000 rpm for the low speed gear (G1) and 2000
rpm for the high speed gear (G2), set these speeds to the parameter nos.
3741, 3742, respectively. In this case, the spindle output has the linear
relationship shown below:
635
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
N
2000rpm G2
When gear
2 selected
G1
1000rpm When gear
1 selected
600rpm
Spindle output
(Volt)
0 V2 V1 10
(i) G96
10S
V=
2πrR
R: Spindle speed (rpm) at 10V output voltage (that is , spindle speed set
by parameter No. 3741 to No. 3744)
S: Surface speed (m/min) specified by S command
r: Radius value in the X-axis direction (m)
(ii)G97
10N
V=
R
R: Spindle speed at 10V output voltage (rpm)
N: Spindle speed given by S command (rpm)
Spindle Serial Output The output to the spindle in spindle serial output is a digital data.
Therefore assume the following relation for calculation:
Spindle analog output (voltage) 10V = Spindle serial output
(digital data) 4095.
The above calculation becomes as follows:
The value of Spindle output D:
(i) G96
4095S
D=
2πrR
636
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
(ii)G97
4095N
D=
R
R: Spindle speed at maximum spindle motor speed (rpm)
N: Spindle speed given by S command (rpm)
Signal
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F002 CSS
Parameter
3741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1
637
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
When 0 is set, constant surface speed control is always
applied to the X–axis. In this case, specifying P in a G96
block has no effect on the constant surface speed control.
3771 Minimum spindle speed in constant surface speed control mode (G96)
NOTE
1 In the M series, this parameter is valid when the constant
surface speed control option is selected.
2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected,
the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed,
regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode is
specified.
638
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Caution
CAUTION
1 If the spindle speed corresponding to the calculated surface
speed exceeds the speed specified in the spindle speed
clamp command (G50S_ for T series and G92S_ for M
series) during the G96 mode, the actual spindle speed is
clamped at the value specified in the spindle speed clamp
command.
If the specified spindle speed is lower than the value
specified in parameter No. 3771, the actual spindle speed
is clamped at the specified speed.
2 If the constant surface speed control function is provided for
a machining center system, it affects gear change under
normal spindle control. (See Section 9.3.)
Note
NOTE
Simultaneous use of multi–spindle control (T series)
enables constant surface speed control for spindles other
than the first spindle. (See Section 9.10.)
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.10.3 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED
(For Machining Center) CONTROL (G96, G97)
(B–62764EN)
639
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.6
SPINDLE SPEED
FLUCTUATION
DETECTION
General With this function, an overheat alarm (No. 704) is raised and the spindle
speed fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL is issued when the spindle
speed deviates from the specified speed due to machine conditions.
This function is useful, for example, for preventing the seizure of the
guide bushing.
G26 enables spindle speed fluctuation detection.
G25 disables spindle speed fluctuation detection.
Detection of Spindle The function for detecting spindle speed fluctuation checks whether the
Speed Fluctuation actual speed varies for the specified speed or not. Sd or Sr, whichever is
greater, is taken as the allowable fluctuation speed (Sm). An alarm is
activated when the actual spindle speed varies for the commanded speed
(Sc) under the condition that the variation width exceeds the allowable
variation width (Sm).
Sd: The allowable constant variation width which is independent of the
specified spindle speed (Sd is set with parameter 4913.)
Sr: The allowable variation width which is obtained by multiplying Sc
(commanded spindle speed) by r (constant ratio). (r is set with
parameter 4912.)
Sm: Sd or Sr, whichever is greater
Conditions to start If the specified spindle speed Sc changes, spindle speed fluctuation
spindle speed detection starts when one of the conditions below is met:
fluctuation detection
⋅ The actual spindle speed falls in a range of (Sc – Sq) to (Sc + Sq)
where Sq = Sc q/100
q: Percent tolerance of the target spindle speed, specified in parameter
No. 4911. If the actual spindle speed is in a range of the specified speed
q, it is assumed that the actual speed has reached the specified speed.
⋅ When time p specified in parameter No. 4914 elapses after the specified
speed Sc changes.
Parameter Nos. 4914, 4911, and 4912 can be rewritten also by program
(G26 PpQqRr).
640
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Sr
Sd
Sq Specified
Sq Sd speed
Sr
Actual speed
Time
Specification of Start of check Alarm
another speed
Sr
Sq Sd Specified
Sq Sd speed
Sr
p Actual speed
Time
Specification of Start of check Alarm
another speed
Specified speed :
(Speed specified by address S and five–digit value)×(spindle override)
Actual speed : Speed detected with a position coder
Signal
Spindle fluctuation
detection alarm signal
SPAL <F035#0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that the actual spindle speed is not within a tolerance
to the specified speed.
641
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F035 SPAL
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3708 SVD
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4900 FLR
4911 Ratio (q) of the fluctuation of spindle speed which is assumed to be the
specified spindle speed
NOTE
Unit of data depends on parameter No. 4900#0 FLR (T
series only)
Set the ratio (q) of the spindle speed which is assumed to be the specified
spindle speed in the spindle speed fluctuation detection function.
642
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
4912 Spindle speed fluctuation ratio (r) for which no alarm is activated in the
spindle speed fluctuation detection function
NOTE
Unit of data depends on parameter No. 4900#0 FLR (T
series only).
Set the spindle speed fluctuation ratio (r) for which no alarm is activated in
the spindle speed fluctuation detection function.
4913 Spindle speed fluctuation value (d) for which no alarm is activated in the
spindle speed fluctuation detection function
4914 Time (p) elapsed from when the commanded spindle speed is changed to
the start of spindle speed fluctuation detection
643
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
1 When an alarm is issued in automatic operation, a single
block stop occurs.
2 No check is made during spindle stop state (*SSTP = 0).
3 An alarm is issued one second later if the actual spindle
speed is found to be 0 rpm.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.10.4 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION
(For Machining Center) DETECTION FUNCTION (G25, G26)
(B–62764EN)
644
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
9.7
ACTUAL SPINDLE
SPEED OUTPUT
General The PMC can read actual spindle speed.
Signal
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F040 AR7 AR6 AR5 AR4 AR3 AR2 AR1 AR0
Note
NOTE
1 The AR0 - AR15 signals are always output. Their values
change every 64 msec.
2 An absolute error of about 0.5 rpm exists as a measuring
error.
645
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.8
SPINDLE
POSITIONING
(T SERIES)
General This function positions the spindle using the spindle motor and position
coder.
The function has a coarser least command increment compared with the
Cs contour control function and has no interpolation capability with other
axes. However, it can be installed with ease because the position detector
is a position coder.
Generally, the spindle positioning axes are clamped mechanically except
when positioning is under way.
In the turning process, the workpiece is rotated by the spindle to which
it is attached (spindle rotation mode), at the speed specified for the spindle
motor. The value for the spindle speed is input from the spindle controller
to the spindle amplifier.
When the optional spindle positioning function is activated, the spindle
is moved to a defined angle, and the workpiece is repositioned at that
angle. The specified move distance is input to the error counter, and the
velocity command is issued for the spindle motor through the spindle
amplifier. The position of the spindle is detected by the installed position
coder (Spindle positioning mode).
The spindle positioning function can perform the following operations:
Release the spindle rotation mode and enter the spindle positioning
mode
Specifying a particular M code sets a reference position in the
spindle positioning mode. (This is called spindle orientation.)
Position the spindle in the spindle positioning mode
Position an optional angle using address C (H), and position a
semi-fixed angle using a specific M code parameter.
Release the spindle positioning mode and enter the spindle rotation
mode
Specifying a particular M code parameter changes the spindle to
the spindle rotation mode.
Also, relationship between M codes and these operations are set by
parameters (refer to No. 4950#2 (ISZ), #7 (IMB)).
· Least command increment
360
0.088 deg
4096
· Least input increment
0.001 deg
· Maximum command value
±9999.999 deg
646
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Selecting a spindle Any axis in the control axis group can be used as the C axis (parameter
positioning axis no. 1020). Specify *1 as its servo axis number (parameter no. 1023).
Only one set of this setting can be used for each control path. The spindle
subjected to spindle positioning is the first spindle.
Command system The command system comes in two types: The first positions a semi-fixed
angle; the second positions an optional angle.
D Semi-fixed angle A 2-digit numerical value following the M address is used for the
positioning by M code command. There are six positioning angle values (Mα to M(a + 5)),
where a is set by parameter no. 4962. Indexing angle β also requires prior
parameter setting data no. 4963. Rotation can be done in any direction,
using parameter IDM data no. 4950#1.
Also, when extended specification is used (parameter No. 4950#6
ESI=1), max. 256 kinds of values (Ma to M(a+255)) can be specified.
647
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
D Optional angle Numerical value following either the C or H address is used to command
positioning by C or H the position. C and H addresses are commanded in G00 mode.
address
(Example) C-1000
H4500
0.001deg
9999.999 deg
(iii) Decimal point input: A numerical value with decimal point can be
entered. The decimal point location is in “degrees”, for instance:
C35.0=C35 degrees
D Absolute and The semi–fixed angle is always incremental. The optional angle
incremental commands positioning using address C or H differs as follows:
Program origin
90°
180°
648
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Spindle positioning Spindle positioning is done at the rapid traverse rate specified by
feedrate parameter No. 1420, to which linear acceleration deceleration are applied.
Overrides of 100%, 50%, 25% and F0 (parameter No. 1421) are also
applied.
Spindle positioning reset A specific M code (parameter no. 4961) must be set when the mode is
changed from spindle positioning to normal spindle rotation.
Signal
Spindle unclamp
completion signal
*SUCPF <G028#4>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal indicates that unclamping the spindle is complete in response
to the spindle unclamp signal SUCLP.
649
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Spindle clamp
completion signal *SCPF
<G028#5>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal indicates that clamping the spindle is complete in response to
the spindle clamp signal SCLP.
Other signals
Spindle orientation
completion signal ZPx
<F094>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that the spindle orientation for the spindle
positioning has been completed.
650
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
[Output condition] When spindle orientation is complete, this signal turns to 1. When spindle
positioning is performed or cleared, it turns to 0.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G028 SPSTP *SCPF *SUCPF GR2 GR1
651
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
M code
MF
SUCLP
*SUCPF
Spindle
movement
ZPx
SCLP
Spindle enable off
*SCPF
FIN
652
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
M code
MF
SPSTP
Spindle enable on
SUCLP
*SUCPF
Spindle
movement
SCLP
Spindle enable off
*SCPF
FIN
653
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
SPSTP
Spindle enable ON
SUCLP
*SUPCF
Spindle
movement
SCLP
Spindle enable
OFF
*SCPF
M code
MF
SPSTP
POSITION CODER INITIALIZE
SUCLP
*SUPCF
FIN
654
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx
NOTE
When the serial spindle is being used, this parameter is
invalid for the spindle positioning axis.
1020 Name of the axis used for programming for each axis
NOTE
1 In the T series, when G code system A is used, neither U,
V, nor W can be used as an axis name. Only when G code
system B or C is used, U, V, and W can be used as axis
names.
2 The same axis name cannot be assigned to more than one
axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1201 ZPR
655
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordi-
nate system setting is performed
NOTE
When serial spindle is used, this parameter becomes
invalid.
1620 Time constant of rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration for each axis
656
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1816 DM3x DM2x DM1x
657
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
Set this parameter when the analog spindle is used. When
the serial spindle is used, set the value to No. 4073.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3405 CCR
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4000 RETRN
NOTE
The direction for spindle orientation (or reference position
return) in spindle positioning using a serial spindle is
determined by this parameter.
658
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
NOTE
Set this parameter when serial spindle is used.
NOTE
Set this parameter when serial spindle is used.
NOTE
Set the gear ration between spindle and AC spindle motor
when the spindle positioning is performed with serial
spindle. For which gear is used, it depends on the
clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A, CTH1B.
659
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
When the spindle positioning by a serial spindle is
performed, set the position control loop gain in place of
parameter No. 4970. For which gear is used, it depends on
the clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A, CTH1B.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4950 IMB ESI TRNSP ISZ IDM IOR
660
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
NOTE
The extended specification includes the following two
extensions:
With the conventional specification, the number of M
codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle is always
6. With the extended specification, an arbitrary number
of such M codes from 1 to 256 can be selected by
parameter setting (See parameter No. 4964.)
The maximum feedrate for spindle positioning (setting of
parameter No. 1420) can be extended from 240000 to
269000 (in increments of 10 deg/min).
NOTE
In the case of half–fixed angle positioning based on M
codes, three types of spindle positioning operations can
occur:
(1)The spindle rotation mode is cleared, then the mode is
switched to the spindle positioning mode.
(2)Spindle positioning is performed in the spindle
positioning mode.
(3)The spindle positioning mode is cleared, then the mode
is switched to the spindle rotation mode.
In the case of specifiection A:
Operations (1) to (3) are specified using separate M
codes.
(1)–Specified using M codes for performing spindle
orientation.
(See parameter No. 4960)
(2)–Specified using M codes for specifying a spindle
positioning angle. (See parameter No. 4962)
(3)–Specified using M codes for clearing spindle positioning
operation. (See parameter No. 4961.)
In the case of specification B:
When M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle are
specified, operations (1) to (3) are performed successively.
(See parameter No. 4962.)
661
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
M (α+1) 2θ 60°
M (α+2) 3θ 90°
M (α+3) 4θ 120°
M (α+4) 5θ 150°
M (α+5) 6θ 180°
M (α+n) (n+1)θ
662
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
NOTE
θ represents the basic angular diplacement set in
pamrameter No. 4963.
WARNING
Make sure that M codes from Ma to M (a+b–1) do not
duplicate other M codes.
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when bit 6 (ESI) of parameter NO.
4950=1.
2 Setting this parameter to 0 has the same effect as setting 6.
That is, M code from Ma to M (a+5) are used for half–fixed
angle positioning.
663
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 When the voltage specified for the spindle motor is 10 V at
a spindle speed of 4500 rpm, E is regarded as 2.2 V.
2 The above parameters No. 4970 to No. 4974 are for analog
spindles
664
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
665
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Warning
WARNING
1 Feed hold is invalid during spindle positioning.
2 Dry run, machine lock, and auxiliary function lock are not
available during spindle positioning.
3 Specify parameter no. 4962 even if semi-fixed angle
positioning is not used; otherwise M codes (M00 to M05) do
not work.
Caution
CAUTION
1 Spindle positioning stops when emergency stop is applied;
restart with orientation operation.
2 The spindle positioning function and the serial spindle Cs
contour control function cannot be used together. If both
functions are specified, positioning has priority.
Note
NOTE
1 Direct spindle positioning with an independent block. X- and
Y-axis positioning cannot be commanded to the sample
block.
2 Spindle positioning cannot be done by manual operation.
3 Automatic drift compensation is not effective for spindle
positioning. To adjust the amount of drift compensation for
each axis, set values manually and adjust the spindle
amplifier to minimize the spindle motor rotation at a voltage
of 0 V. (parameter no. 3731). Insufficient adjustment
causes poor positioning accuracy. Drift compensation is not
needed with a serial spindle.
4 The machine coordinates for the spindle positioning axis
are displayed in pulses units.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.10.5 SPINDLE POSITIONING FUNCTION
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN)
666
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
9.9
Cs CONTOUR
CONTROL
General The Cs contour control function positions the serial spindle using the
spindle motor in conjunction with a dedicated detector mounted on the
spindle.
This function can perform more accurate positioning than the spindle
positioning function, and has an interpolation capability with other servo
axes.
NOTE
The units in which the following parameters are specified,
in inch output, can be multiplied by ten for the rotation axis
alone, provided the ROT10 bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 1402)
is specified accordingly: jog feedrate, cutting feed clamp
value, F0 feedrate for rapid traverse override, and the FL
feedrate at reference position return.
Explanations The speed of the serial spindle is controlled by the spindle speed control
function, while the spindle positioning is controlled by the Cs contouring
control function (“spindle contour control”). Spindle speed control
rotates the spindle using the velocity command, while the spindle contour
control rotates the spindle using the move command.
Switching between spindle speed control and spindle contour control is
performed by the DI signal from the PMC.
In the Cs contour control mode, the Cs contour control axis can be
operated either manually or automatically, in the same way as normal
servo axes.
(For a reference position return, see the relevant description in this
section.)
Setting the Cs contour The axis used for Cs contour control must be set as an axis of the axes
control axis controlled by the CNC. Using parameter no. 1023, assign “1” in the
field corresponding to the chosen servo axis. Also set the spindle contour
control axis as a rotation axis by setting ROTx (bit 0) of parameter nos.
1006 and 1022.
667
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Only one set of this setting can be used for each control path. The spindle
that operates under Cs contour control is a serial spindle as the first
spindle.
Command Address The address for the move command in Cs contour control is the axis name
specified in parameter no.1020. This address is arbitrary.
Setting Axes that Up to five servo axes can be specified for linear interpolation against the
interpolate with Cs Cs contour control axis, by setting defined parameters :
contour axis D When no servo axis is used for interpolation, specify “0” in parameter
nos. 3900, 3910, 3920, 3930, 3940.
D When one or more servo axes are used for interpolation, set the
parameter for each as follows :
(1) Assign the axis number (1 to 8) to each of the servo axes used for
interpolation in parameter nos. 39n0 (n=0, 1, 2, 3, or 4).
(2) Set the loop gain for each of the servo axes specified in (1) in parameter
nos. 39n1, 39n2, 39n3, 39n4. The loop gain must be the position loop
gain for the Cs contour control axis or a desired value. Four parameters
are provided to correspond to the four gears of the spindle. Use those
parameters according to the inputs of the serial spindle clutch /gear
signal CTH1A, CTH2A <G70#3, #2>.
(3) When the number of servo axes to be used for interpolation is smaller
than five, set “0” in remaining parameter nos. 39n0.
Reference Position After the serial spindle is switched from spindle speed control to Cs
Return of Cs Contour contour control mode, the current position is undefined. Return the
Control Axis spindle to the reference position.
668
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
- In manual mode
After the serial spindle enters the Cs contour control mode, move
the spindle in the direction of the reference position by turning on
the feed axis and direction select signal (+Jn (G100) or *Jn
(G102)). The spindle starts the movement to the reference
position; when it reaches that position, the reference position return
completion signal (ZPn (F094)) turns to “1”.
Turning any feed axis and direction select signal to “1” moves the
tool in the reference position direction.
- In the automatic mode
After the serial spindle enters the Cs contour control mode, the
spindle returns to the reference position when G28 is specified.
Under certain conditions, the G00 command returns the spindle to
the reference position, depending upon the setting of parameter
NRF no. 3700#1:
(i) G00 command
Returning to the reference position using the G00 command
differs from using the G28 command or the manual method.
The serial spindle can be positioned at any point using the
G00 command, while the latter two methods always return the
serial spindle to the reference position.
When parameter NRF no. 3700#1 is “0” and the serial spindle
is put in the Cs contour control mode, if the G00 command is
given before returning the spindle to the reference position,
the serial spindle returns to the reference position and indexes
it before moving to the commanded position. After
positioning at the reference position, the reference position
return completion signal (ZPn(F094)) turns to “1”. When the
G00 command is issued after the serial spindle has returned
to the reference position at least once, normal positioning
operation is executed.
(ii) G28 command
After the serial spindle is put in the Cs contour control mode,
issuing the G28 command stops the spindle motor, then
moves the spindle to the midpoint. The spindle then returns
to the reference position. At this point, the reference position
return completion signal (ZPn F094) turns to “1”. When the
serial spindle has returned to the reference position once while
in the Cs contour control mode, the G28 command positions
the spindle at the reference position without moving to the
midpoint and ZPn comes on.
- Interruption of reference position return
(i) Manual operation
Return to the reference position can be interrupted by reset-
ting, emergency stop, or turning off the feed axis and direction
select signal. When the interrupted return operation is re-
sumed, start from the beginning.
669
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Operation of Cs contour If a reference position return is performed on the Cs contour control axis,
control axis the axis can be operated in the same way as a normal NC axis.
(Manual/Automatic) In the spindle speed control mode, on the other hand, it does not operate
as the Cs contour control axis, and P/S alarm 197 occurs during automatic
operation.
In the spindle speed mode, inhibit manual operation of the Cs contour
control axis using the PMC ladder.
Position deviation amount of the position loop for the 1st spindle.
This diagnostic display shows information obtained from the serial
spindle control unit. This diagnosis displays position error of the spindle
contour axis during spindle contour control.
The position error can also be checked using a servo error display (DGN
of No. 300x) for an axis under Cs contour control.
Signal
670
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Time Chart
CON
FSCSL
NOTE
Any mechanical gear change needed and inputs for GR1,
GR2, CTH1A, and CTH2A must be completed before the
CON signal selects Cs contour control mode.
A servo excessive error may be generated if the spindle
motor is not ready for operation. (Signal SRVA, SFRA
<G070#5, #6> or other required signals must be
appropriately processed on the machine side).
Other signals
671
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
CTH1A and CTH2A are the gear select signals for the serial spindle, but
GR1 and GR2 must also be set. Do not change these signals while in the
Cs contour control mode.
Relationship between gears selected and spindle gear select signals
Analog spindle
Serial spindle
T/M series with CSSC M series without CSSC
GR2 GR1 Gear selection GR3O GR2O GR1O Gear selection CTH1A CTH2A Gear selection
0 0 1st stage 0 0 1 1st stage 0 0 1st stage
0 1 2nd stage 0 1 0 2nd stage 0 1 2nd stage
1 0 3rd stage 1 0 0 3rd stage 1 0 3rd stage
1 1 4th stage 1 1 4th stage
NOTE
When the M series does not include the constant surface
speed control option, and parameter No. 3706#4 GTT=0,
GR1 and GR2 do not need to be input. Input CTH1A and
CTH2A when gears are changed using GR10, GR2O and
GR3O.
Signals on manual Feed axis and direction select signal +Jn, *Jn <G100, G102> (Input)
operation Manual handle feed axis select signal HSnA, HSnB, HSnC, HSnD
<G018, G019> (Input) (Refer to respective items in this manual)
The Cs contour control axis can be manually operated in the same way as
normal servo axes, except for a manual reference position return. In the
spindle speed control mode, however, manual operations for the Cs
contour control axis must be inhibited using the PMC ladder, etc.
672
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G027 CON
F044 FSCSL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROTx
NOTE
Inch/metric conversion cannot be made to the rotation axis.
The machine coordinate values are rounded in 0_ to 360_.
Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is made in
the manual reference position return direction and the move
amount does not exceed one rotation.
1020 Name of the axis used for programming for each axis
673
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 In the T series, when G code system A is used, neither U,
V, nor W can be used as an axis name. Only when G code
system B or C is used, U, V, and W can be used as axis
names.
2 The same axis name cannot be assigned to more than one
axis.
3 When the second auxiliary function is provided, address B
cannot be used as an axis name. In the T series, when
address A or C is used, set parameter CCR (No. 3405#4)
to 0.
Any axis name can be used for Cs contour control axis except for above
limitation.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1201 ZPR
674
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordi-
nate system setting is performed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 ROT10
675
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state
1851 Backlash compensation value used for rapid traverse for each axis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3105 CNRST
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3700 NRF
676
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
NOTE
Set 0 when there is no servo axis that interpolates with Cs
contour control axis.
3901 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (High gear)
3902 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (Medium high gear)
3903 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (Medium low gear)
3904 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (Low gear)
NOTE
When there is no servo axis or only one servo axis that
interpolates with Cs contour control axis, set this parameter
to 0.
3911 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (High gear)
3912 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (Medium high gear)
3913 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (Medium low gear)
3914 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (Low gear)
677
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
When there is no servo axis or less than three servo axes
that interpolates with Cs contour control axis, set this
parameter to 0.
3921 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (High gear)
3922 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (Medium high gear)
3923 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (Medium low gear)
3924 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (Low gear)
NOTE
When there is no servo axis or less than four servo axes that
interpolates with Cs contour control axis, set this parameter
to 0.
678
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
3931 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (High gear)
3932 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (Medium high gear)
3933 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (Medium low gear)
3934 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (Low gear)
NOTE
When there is no servo axis or less than five servo axes that
interpolates with Cs contour control axis, set this parameter
to 0.
3941 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (High gear)
3942 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (Medium high gear)
3943 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (Medium low gear)
3944 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
during interpolation (Low gear)
679
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
For which gear ratio is used in actual spindle operation, it
depends on clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A,
CTH2A.
NOTE
For which position gain is used in actual spindle operation,
it depends on clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A,
CTH2A.
680
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
752 FIRST SPINDLE MODE This alarm is generated if the system does
CHANGE FAULT not properly terminate a mode change. The
modes include the Cs contouring, spindle
positioning, rigid tapping, and spindle con-
trol modes. The alarm is activated if the
spindle control unit does not respond cor-
rectly to the mode change command issued
by the NC.
Warning
WARNING
In the spindle contour control mode, do not switch the
spindle gears. When the gears need to be changed put the
system in the spindle speed control mode first.
Note
NOTE
In the T series machines, the spindle contour control
function and the spindle positioning function cannot be
used at the same time. If both functions are specified
simultaneously, the spindle positioning function takes
precedence.
681
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Reference item
FANUC CONTROL MOTOR 11.6 Cs Contour Control Function
AMPLIFIER a series
DESCRIPTIONS (B–65162E)
682
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
9.10
MULTI-SPINDLE
CONTROL
General In addition to the conventional (first) spindle, two other (second and third)
spindles can be controlled. These additional spindles allow two-stage
gear changes. An S code is used for a command to any of these spindles;
which spindle is selected is determined by a signal from the PMC. The
second and third spindle can change gears in 2 stages.
Also, the maximum spindle speed can be set to each spindle to clamp the
spindle speed of each spindle (set by parameters No. 3772, 3802 and
3822).
When the second spindle is used, one position coder interface channel is
added. Which position coder is selected is determined by a PMC signal.
(The conventional and additional position coders are referred to as the
first position coder and second position coder, respectively, throughout
the remainder of this discussion.)
Selection between 1st position coder and 2nd position coder is made by
a signal from PMC.
The spindle analog output option must be included in order to use the third
spindle. The spindle serial output option is required to use multi-spindle
control.
Difference in
multi–spindle control For the M series, multi–spindle control is possible only when spindle
between the M and T gear selection type T is selected (when the constant surface speed
series control option is provided, or when GTT (bit 4 of parameter No. 3706)
is set to 1).
For the M series, rigid tapping spindle selection signals RGTSP1,
RGTSP2, and RGTSP3 (G061#4, #5, and #6, when bit 7 of parameter
No. 5200 is set to 1) cannot be used. For details of rigid tapping, see
Section 9.11.
When two–path control is performed with the M series, spindle
commands and position coder feedback signals cannot be changed
between the paths (spindle command select signals SLSPA and
SLSPB <G063 #2 and #3>, and spindle feedback select signals
SLPCA and SLPCB <G064 #2 and #3> are not available).
Control Two multi-spindle control methods are available. Type A allows the
SIND function (controlling the spindle motor speed based on the PMC)
to be used only for the first spindle. Type B allows the SIND function to
be used for each of the three spindles independently.
Basic control (Common An S command is sent as a speed command to each spindle selected, using
to TYPE-A and TYPE-B) a spindle selection signal (SWS1 to SWS3 <G027#0-#2>). Each spindle
rotates at the specified speed. If a spindle is not sent a spindle selection
signal, it continues to rotate at its previous speed. This allows the spindles
to rotate at different speeds at the same time.
683
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
The PMC signal PC2SLC <G028#7> is used to select between the first
and second position coders.
SIND
SWS 1 * SSTP 1
Hold 1 First spindle
SWS 2 * SSTP 2
S command Hold 2 Second spindle
SWS 3 * SSTP 3
Hold 3 Third spindle
Multi-spindle control Select Type B control by setting parameter MSI no. 3709#2 to “1”.
(TYPE-B)
Each spindle has its own SIND, SSIN and SGN signals.
Each signal functions regardless of selection state of the spindle selection
signals (SWS1 to SWS3).
When either the spindle selection signal or the SIND signal for the first,
second or third spindle is set to “1”, the polarity control signals SSIN,
SGN will function. The first spindle is controlled by the SGN and SSIN
signals; the second and third spindles are controlled by SGN2, SGN3
<G035#5, G037#5>, and SSIN2, SSIN3 <G035#6, G037#6>,
respectively.
684
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
SIND
SWS 1 * SSTP 1
Hold 1 First spindle
SIND2
SWS 2
* SSTP 2
S command Hold 2 Second spindle
SIND3
SWS 3 * SSTP 3
Hold 3 Third spindle
Spindles to be controlled In multi-spindle control, the first spindle is the first serial spindle, the
second spindle is the second serial spindle, and the third spindle is an
analog spindle.
685
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Actual spindle speed The actual spindle speed output function conveys speed information
output obtained from the selected position coder specified by the 2nd position
coder selection signal (PC2SLC) to the PMC.
When the parameter HSO (No. 3709#5)=1, the difference of the feedback
pulses between the 1st and 2nd position coder can be output irrespective
of the state of 2nd position coder selection signal (PC2SLC).
Spindle positioning or When the spindle motor is used for positioning, as in the case of spindle
Cs contour control positioning or Cs contour control, the first spindle functions as the
positioning spindle. Switching to the positioning mode and positioning
command are possible irrespective of the state of the selection signal of
the first spindle (SWS1). This means that the first spindle cannot be
controlled as a spindle in positioning mode, but the second and third
spindles can be controlled as usual.
Polygon turning Polygon turning rotates a tool axis in phase with the spindle. To perform
(T series) polygon turning when multi-spindle control issued, select the spindle and
the position coder associated with the spindle.
Spindle synchronization, During spindle synchronization, polygon turning between spindles or
polygon turning between simplified synchronization control, the second spindle operates in phase
spindles, simplified with the first spindle. Multi-spindle control for the first and third spindles
synchronization control can be used during synchronization control, but multi-spindle control for
the second spindle is disabled.
Rigid tapping Using the spindle selection signal (SWS 1–3), rigid tapping can use either
the first or second spindle as the rigid tap spindle. There are certain
restrictions:
Set the SWS 1 to 3 signals before directing rigid tapping;
Do not switch the SWS 1 to 3 signals during rigid tapping; and
Use the appropriate ENB signal (either ENB or ENB2) for the selected
spindle as the ENB signal for the rigid tapping PMC sequence.
The spindles not used for rigid tapping can be rotated at a speed specified
before rigid tapping starts, or can be stopped.
Two-path control option Refer to 9.4 “Spindle Control for Two-path Lathe”.
686
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Signal
687
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
688
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G027 *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS3 SWS2 SWS1
Parameter The parameters for the 1st spindle and the 1st position coder are the same
as usual. This section describes the parameters which are added by this
function.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3701 SS2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3702 EMS
689
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706 PCS
GTT
NOTE
Multi–spindle control based on the same serial spindle must
be applied to both tool posts. Refer to 9.4 for details.
NOTE
1 Type M:
The gear selection signal is not entered. In response to an
S command, the CNC selects a gear according to the speed
range of each gear specified beforehand in parameters.
Then the CNC reports the selection of a gear by outputting
the gear selection signal. The spindle speed corresponding
to the gear selected by the gear selection signal is output.
Type T:
The gear selection signal is entered. The spindle
speed corresponding to the gear selected by this signal is
output.
2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected,
type T is selected, regardless of whether this parameter is
specified.
3 When type T spindle gear switching is selected, the
following parameters have no effect:
No. 3705#2 SGB, No. 3751, No. 3752, No. 3705#3 SGT,
No. 3761, No. 3762, No. 3705#6 SFA, No. 3735, No. 3736
However, parameter No. 3744 is valid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3707 P22 P21
690
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3709 MSI
WARNING
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle is
not clamped.
2 When spindle speed command control is applied using the
PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the speed of the
spindle is not clamped.
NOTE
1 When the constant surface speed control option is selected,
the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed,
regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode is
specified.
2 When the multi–spindle control option is selected (T series),
set the maximum speed for each spindle in the following
parameters:
Parameter No. 3772: Sets the maximum speed for the first
spindle.
Parameter No. 3802: Sets the maximum speed for the
second spindle.
Parameter No. 3822: Sets the maximum speed for the third
spindle.
691
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
WARNING
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the setting of parameter No.
3772 for the first spindle is used.
When 0 is set in parameter NO. 3772, the spindle speed is
not clamped.
2 When spindle speed command control is applied using the
PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the spindle speed
is not clamped.
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when the multi–spindle control
option is selected.
2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected,
the spindle speed is clamped at the specified maximum
speed, regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode
is specified.
NOTE
These parameters are used for the multi–spindle control.
3820 Data for adjusting the gain of the analog output of the third–spindle speed
692
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
NOTE
This parameter is used for controlling the multi–spindles.
3821 Offset voltage compensation value of the analog output of the third spindle speed
WARNING
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the setting of parameter No.
3772 for the first spindle is used. When 0 is set in parameter
No. 3772, the spindle speed is not clamped.
2 When spindle speed command control is applied using the
PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the speed of the
spindle is not clamped.
693
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when the multi–spindle control
option is selected.
2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected,
the spindle speed is clamped at the specified maximum
speed, regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode
is set.
NOTE
These parameters are used for muliti–s
Warning
WARNING
Do not switch between the first and second position coders
while a function that uses position coder feedback
information is being executed. That is, PMC signal PC2SLC
<G028#7> cannot be used while, for instance, a command
for feed per rotation or thread cutting is taking place.
694
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Caution
CAUTION
1 If the primary spindle stop signal *SSTP for stopping all
selected (SWS1 to SWS3) spindles’ rotation is cleared, the
speed command is restored. A spindle not selected by
SWS1 to SWS3 and rotating at its previous speed, which is
stopped using its respective command *SSTP1 to *SSTP3,
cannot be restored to that speed when the signal is cleared.
2 Type A multi-spindle control differs from Type B in the
relationship between the SWS1 and SIND signals for the
first spindle. In Type A, SIND functions only when SWS1 is
set to “1”. In Type B, SIND functions whether SWS1 is “1”
or “0”; each spindle is selected by either of its respective
SWS or SIND signals being set to “1”.
Note
NOTE
1 The spindle orientation signal, spindle speed override
signals, and spindle stop signal *SSTP only function for
selected signals.
2 The S 12-bit code signals R01O to R12O outputs the state
of a selected spindle. If two or more spindles are selected
at the same time, the states of the first, second, and third
spindles are output in this order.
3 The multi-spindle function allows two position coder
interfaces to be used. But the number of actual speed
indications on the CNC screen does not change. The speed
based on the feedback information of the selected position
coder is displayed.
4 An SOR command has priority over S commands and
SIND-based rotation control from the PMC, and will cause
all selected spindle to perform orientation rotation.
695
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.11
RIGID TAPPING
CAUTION
1 The description given in this section covers up to the fourth
axis.
2 Only when the M–type gear selection method is being used
with the M series, the maximum spindle speed for rigid
tapping must be set in parameter No. 3743, not parameter
Nos. 5241 to 5244, regardless of the number of gear stages.
The descriptions given in this section (such as spindle gear switching and
M–type/T–type) are based on the explanation given in Section 9.3. Refer
to Section 9.3 as necessary.
696
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Specification of The differences in the specifications for rigid tapping for the M series and
M series/T series T series are described below.
Rigid tapping of M series The tapping cycle G84 and the reverse tapping cycle G74 can be used to
specify M series rigid tapping.
A tapping axis can be arbitrarily selected from the basic axes X, Y, and
Z, as well as axes parallel to the basic axes, by setting the corresponding
parameters accordingly (bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101).
The spindle operations of G84 and G74 are reversed with respect to each
other.
For rigid tapping, only the first spindle can be used.
The first spindle allows rigid tapping, even if the spindle is an analog or
serial spindle.
Rigid tapping of T series The face tapping cycle G84 and the side tapping cycle G88 can be used
to specify T series rigid tapping.
Depending on the rigid tapping command, rigid tapping can be performed
along the Z–axis (when G84 is used) or the X–axis (when G88 is used).
A reverse tapping cycle, like that supported by M series, is not available.
In addition to rigid tapping using the first spindle (either analog or serial),
rigid tapping using the second spindle (serial) is also possible when
multi–spindle control is being used.
For a two–path lathe, rigid tapping can be performed using a combination
of the spindle and tapping axis selected in each path.
Rigid tapping using a mixture of paths is not allowed. For example, rigid
tapping in combination of a tapping axis of tool post 1 and the spindle of
tool post 2, by issuing a tapping command to tool post 1, is not supported.
697
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.11.2 As shown in the figure below a gear can be inserted between the spindle
Connection Among and spindle motor, and between the spindle and position coder.
Spindle, Spindle Motor,
and Position Coder
Spindle control
1024 p/rev
(1) Gear between spindle Up to three gear stages (M series) or four gear stages (1st spindle of T se-
and spindle motor ries), two gear stages (2nd spindle of T series) can be provided between
the spindle and the spindle motor. The gear ratio is arbitrary. The spindle
move distance per spindle motor rotation is different, based on the gear
ratio. The speed command to the spindle motor must be adjusted. See (2),
below, for additional information regarding a spindle motor incorporating
a position coder.
(2) Gear between spindle The position coder is used to detect the position of the spindle.
and position coder The gear ratio for the spindle and position coder is specified in the parame-
ter sets No. 5221 to No. 5223 and No. 5231 to No. 5233, or parameter set
PG1 and PG2 No. 3706 #0, #1, parameter P21, P22 (No. 3707 #0, #1) for
2nd spindle of T series. Which parameter set to use is specified by parame-
ter VGR No. 5200 #1.
⋅ Arbitrary gear ratio This is used if the gear ratio for the spindle motor and position coder
(VGR=1) (built-in or separate) is not 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, or 1:8, set VGR to 1 and set the
gear ratio using parameter No. 5221 to 5224.
When position coder is mounted on a spindle, the gear ratio for the spindle
motor and position coder cannot be changed by shifting the spindle motor
and spindle gears. Parameters No. 5221 to 5224 must all specify the same
value for the teeth of the individual spindle gears. Parameters No. 5231
to 5234 must all specify the same value for the teeth of individual position
coder gears.
The 1024 or 512 pulses/rev position coder is built into the spindle motor.
For the 512 pulses/rev version, specify double the number of teeth on each
gear for the position coder. (Double the number of teeth need not be
specified for the serial spindle.)
698
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
The T series supports up to four stages. (Set parameter Nos. 5221 to 5224
and 5231 to 5234.) For the T series, when the multi–spindle function is
used to perform rigid tapping with the second spindle, up to two stages
are supported. (Set parameter Nos. 5221, 5222, 5231, and 5232.)
Example)
Set value
NOTE
Double value setting is not required for serial spindle.
699
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
S Gear ratio is 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, If the gear ratio is either 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, and 1:8, it is set using parameters
1:8 (VGR=0) PG1 and PG2 (Nos. 3706 #0, #1). This applies if the position coder is
mounted in a spindle or built into a spindle motor when only one stage
gear is provided. .
For 2nd spindle of T series, set it to parameter P21, P22 (No.3707#0, #1).
Parameter Gear ratio
Detection unit
nit
PG2 PG1 Spindle Position coder
0 0 1 1 360/4096=0.08789 deg
0 1 1 2 360/40962=0.17578
deg
1 0 1 4 360/40964=0.35156
deg
1 1 1 8 360/40968=0.70313
deg
The spindle motor building in the 512 pulses/rev position coder uses the
values set forth in the following table. A serial spindle does not require
double-value setting; use the same values as for the spindle motor
building in the 1024 pulses/rev position coder.
Gear ratio Parameter Gear ratio
Detection
of spindle
Spindle unit
Built–in Spindle PG2 PG1 to position
motor (deg)
position coder
coder
d 1 1 0 1 1:2 0.17578
512p/rev
2 1 1 0 1:4 0.35156
4 1 1 0 1:8 0.70313
(3) Rigid tapping and If the M type gear selection method is selected, the CNC determines
machines with whether gears need changing using the gear change specification
multiple gears mentioned in section 9.3. If the gears need to be changed, the CNC
generates the S function code read signal SF (F007#2) and gear selection
signals GR10, GR20, and GR30 (F034#0-#2) to notify the PMC. Change
gears using the PMC, based on these signals.
If the T type gear selection method is selected, the CNC does not process
gear changes. When the CNC has the S function code, it outputs signal
SF and S function code signals S00 to S31 (F022#0-F025#7) to the PMC.
(However, parameter No. 3705 and its related parameters need to be set
for S code and SF signal output). Using the PMC, determine whether
gears need changing, and make the change if needed. Input gear selection
signals GR1 and GR2 <G028#1,#2> or GR21 <G029#0> for 2nd spindle
of T series for the selected gear, and notify the CNC of them.
To perform rigid tapping with the serial spindle, enter the clutch/gear
selection signals CTH1 and CTH2 (G070#3,#2 for the first spindle, and
G074#3, #2 for the second spindle) from the PMC. Notify the serial
spindle control unit of these signals via the CNC, irrespective of the gear
selection method.
700
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Changing gears during rigid tapping requires a different process from that
for gear changes during normal machining. As described above, changing
gears conforms to the gear change specifications mentioned in section 9.3
when the M type gear selection method has been selected. With the T type
gear selection method, changing gears conforms to the logic programmed
in the PMC.
Regardless of the option’s selection, if the range in which the spindle
speed specified by the S function code does not correspond to the
currently selected gear, the gears are changed.
The following tables list the spindle speed ranges for each gear during
normal machining (assuming no machine restrictions) and rigid tapping:
Spindle speed range (normal machining)
Gear
Lower limit Upper limit
Low– 1 revolution Maximum low–speed gear speed =
speed Maximum spindle motor speed L%
gear Low–speed gear ratio
Medium Maximum low–speed Maximum medium–speed gear speed =
speed gear speed + 1 revo- Maximum spindle motor speed L%
gear lution Medium speed gear ratio
High– Maximum medium– Maximum high–speed gear speed =
speed speed gear speed +1 Maximum spindle motor speed L%
gear revolution High–speed gear ratio
NOTE
This table shows an example of three gears. L% indicates
a spindle motor protection constant (up to 100). L can be
specified for each gear using method B for changing in M
type gear selection method (bit 2 (SGB) of parameter No.
3705 =1).
701
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
This table show an example of three gears. For the basic
spindle motor speed, refer to the spindle motor description
manual. “+ a” means that the spindle motor speed may
slightly exceed the basic spindle motor speed.
If the M type gear selection method is used, use gear change method B
(bit 3 (SGT) of parameter No. 3705 = 1) in the tapping cycle to specify
the following:
The table above shows the maximum low-speed gear speed during rigid
tapping for low-/medium-speed gear change position D (parameter No.
3761).
The table above shows the maximum medium-speed gear speed during
rigid tapping for medium-/high-speed gear change position E (parameter
No. 3762).
If the T type gear selection method is used, add the rigid tapping logic to
the logic programmed in the PMC.
See Section 9.3, “Spindle Control” for details of the spindle gear change
specifications.
The loop gain can be specified for each gear. Specify “0” for parameter
No. 5280 and specify loop gains for each gear for parameter Nos. 5281
to 5284. Unless “0” is specified for parameter No. 5280, the loop gains
for each gear are disabled, and the loop gain common to all gears, the
value of parameter No. 5280, is enabled.
Specify the time constant and the maximum spindle speed for each gear.
Use parameters Nos. 5261 to 5264 to specify the time constant.
Use parameters Nos. 5241 to 5244 to specify the maximum spindle speed.
For M type gear selection method, set the maximum spindle speed to
parameter No. 5243, irrespective of the number of gear stages used.
Setting bit 2 (TDR) of parameter No. 5201 to “1” enables setting of the
extraction time constant for each gear set. Specify the extraction time
constant for each gear in parameter Nos. 5271 to 5274.
If bit 1 (VGR) of parameter No. 5200 is set to “1”, the gear ratio for the
spindle and position coder can be set to anywhere between 1:32767 and
32767:1 in one-increment units for three gear sets with M series, four gear
sets with T series, or two gear sets with 2nd spindle of T series. However
1:8 to 8:1 is the recommended value.
702
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
9.11.3
Rigid Tapping
Specification
Feed rate In rigid tapping mode, the tapping axis is fed at a rate specified by F; the
spindle speed is S360(deg/min). Override is invalid for both of them.
An override of up to 200% can be applied to withdrawal operations by
setting bit 4 (DOV) of parameter No. 5200 to “1”, and setting an
appropriate override value in parameter RGOVR of No. 5211. The time
constant for withdrawal operations can be modified by bit 1 (TDR) of
parameter No. 5201; when it is set to “1”, the values in parameter Nos.
5271 to 5274 are used as the time constant for withdrawal.
Acceleration and Linear acceleration/deceleration is valid for rigid tapping.
deceleration
Override Override is invalid for rigid tapping. Fixed override can be applied to
withdrawal operations by setting bit 4 (DOV) of parameters No. 5200 or
RGOVR of No. 5211.
Dry run Dry run is valid for G84 (G74). When the dry run is applied to the tapping
axis speed of G84 (G74), tapping is performed. The spindle speed will
match the dry run speed.
Machine lock Machine lock is valid for G84 (G74).
When G84 (G74) is executed with the machine locked, however the
tapping axis and the spindle do not move.
Reset When the reset operation is performed during rigid tapping, the mode is
reset. The spindle motor goes to the ordinary mode, but G84 (G74) mode
is not reset.
Feed hold, interlock, and The feed hold, interlock, and single block functions are effective for G84
single block (G74).
The feed hold and single block functions in rigid tapping mode can be
nullified by setting bit 1 (FHD) of parameter No. 5200 to “1”.
As with the machine lock signal, the feed hold and single block functions
are also effective for the spindle indirectly, through tapping axis
operations.
Operation mode G84 (G74) can be executed only in the MEM and MDI modes.
Manual feed Rigid tapping cannot be performed in the manual feed mode.
Backlash compensation In rigid tapping mode, the backlash is compensated for the lost motion at
forward and reverse spindle rotations. Set it using parameter No. 5321
to No 5324. The backlash compensation is normally made for the tapping
axis.
703
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.11.4 For rigid tapping adjustment, the diagnosis screen displays information
Display Data on the related to rigid tapping.
Diagnosis Screen For part of the display data, the user can choose between two sets of data
items relating to the synchronization of the spindle and tapping axis by
setting bit 0 (DGN) of parameter No. 5204.
Common display data The following information items are displayed, regardless of the setting
of bit 0 (DGN) of parameter No. 5204:
· Spindle position deviation → Diagnosis No. 450
· Number of command pulses distributed to the spindle
(momentary value) → Diagnosis No. 451
· Cumulative number of command pulses distributed to the spindle
→ Diagnosis No. 454
Display of rigid tapping When bit 0 (DGN) of parameter No. 5204 is set to 0, the following
synchronization error information items are displayed.
(When DGN = 0)
(Diagnosis Nos. 452 and 453 are not displayed.)
· Spindle–converted move command difference → Diagnosis No. 455
· Spindle–converted position deviation difference → Diagnosis No. 456
· Synchronization error range → Diagnosis No. 457
Spindle–converted move command difference
spindle move command (tapping axis move command) 4096
=Σ Σ
gear ratio thread lead
Rigid tapping error When bit 0 (DGN) of parameter No. 5204 is set to 1, the following
display information items are displayed. (Diagnosis Nos. 455, 456, and 457 are
(error difference display) not displayed.)
(When DGN = 1)
⋅ Momentary error difference between the spindle and tapping axis
→ Diagnosis No. 452
⋅ Maximum error difference between the spindle and tapping axis
→ Diagnosis No. 453
704
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Diagnosis No. 0452 is cleared to “0” when rigid tapping mode is set or
canceled, and diagnosis No. 0453 is cleared to “0” in the positioning of
the rigid tapping cycle.
The following figure shows the tapping axis as the Z axis.
Z–axis
error
Zc
Ze
Speed 1 1
Zc = × × 102 (Theoretical value)
60 Gain Detection unit
Ze = Z–axis error counts (measured value)
Spindle
error
Sc
Se
Speed 360 1 1
Sc = × × 102 (Theoretical value)
60 Gain Detection unit
Ze
DZ= 100 [%]
Zc
705
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Diagnosis screen
Spindle position
deviation 0450 SPINDLE MOTION ERROR
Momentary error difference between the spindle and tapping axis during
rigid tapping (signed)
[Unit] %
NOTE
This data item is displayed only when bit 0 (DGN) of
parameter No. 5204 is set to 1.
Maximum error difference between the spindle and tapping axis during
rigid tapping (absolute value)
[Unit] %
NOTE
This data item is displayed only when bit 0 (DGN) of
parameter No. 5204 is set to 1.
Cumulative number of
pulses distributed to the
spindle during rigid
tapping
0454 SPINDLE PULSE(SUM)
706
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Spindle–converted move
command difference
during rigid tapping
(momentary value)
0455 SYNC. PULSE(SUM)
NOTE
This data item is displayed only when bit 0 (DGN) of
parameter No. 5204 is set to 0.
Spindle–converted position
deviation difference during
rigid tapping
(momentary value)
NOTE
This data item is displayed only when bit 0 (DGN) of
parameter No. 5204 is set to 0.
Synchronization error
range during rigid tapping
(momentary value)
NOTE
This data item is displayed only when bit 0 (DGN) of
parameter No. 5204 is set to 0.
707
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.11.5
Command Format
Command format for the The rigid tapping command format for the T series is described below.
T series For an explanation of the command format used with the M series, refer
to Section II.4.2 of the “Operator’s Manual for Machining Center
(B–62764EN) ”.
The rigid tapping mode can be specified by using any of three methods:
D Specification of M29S**** before specifying a tapping cycle
D Specification of M29S****in the same block
D Enabling rigid tapping to be performed without specifying M29S****
When using the third method, specify S**** either before or in a block
containing G84 (G88).
Thus, the spindle stops, after which the tapping cycle specified next is
placed in rigid tapping mode.
Rigid tapping mode can be canceled by G80;. Note, however, that a G
code for another canned cycle, or a group 01 G code can also cancel rigid
tapping mode.
When rigid tapping is terminated by a command issued to cancel rigid
tapping mode, the spindle stops. (Output to the spindle is equivalent to
the specification of S0.)
A reset (by means of the RESET button or an external reset) can also
cancel rigid tapping mode. Note, however, that canned cycle mode is not
canceled by a reset.
D Specifying M29 before a block containing G84 (G88)
M29 S****;
GjjX (Z) __C__Z (X) __R__P__F__K__ (Mjj) ;
X (Z) __C__;
Rigid
X (Z) __C__; tapping
· mode
·
G80;
708
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
D Specifying M29 and G84 (G88) in the same block (Note, however, that
M29 and Mjj for C–axis clamping cannot be specified in the same
block.)
GjjX (Z) __Z (X) __R__P__F__K__M29****;
X (Z) __C__;
Rigid
X (Z) __C__;
tapping
· mode
·
G80;
D Converting G84 (G88) to a G code for rigid tapping (by setting bit 0
(G84) of parameter No. 5200 to 1)
GjjX (Z) __C__Z (X) __R_P_F_K_S**** (Mjj);
X (Z) __C__;
Rigid
X (Z) __C__;
tapping
· mode
·
G80;
NOTE
1 In feed per minute mode, F_/S**** determines a thread
lead. In feed per rotation mode, F_ specifies a thread lead.
2 S**** must specify a value that does not exceed the value
set in the maximum spindle speed parameter (No. 5241 to
5244) for the gear to be used. Otherwise, P/S alarm No. 200
is issued in a block containing G84 (G88).
3 F_ must specify a value that does not exceed the maximum
cutting feedrate. When 0 is specified, P/S alarm No. 201 is
issued.
4 Between M29 and G84 (G88), S and a command for
movement along an axis must not be specified. Further,
M29 must not be specified in a tapping cycle. Otherwise,
P/S alarm Nos. 203 and 204 are issued, respectively.
709
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Spindle Spindle
stop stop
Initial point
Motion 1
Motion 2 Motion 6
Spindle Spindle
stop stop
Motion 3 Motion 5
Motion 4
Rapid traverse
Z (X) axis feed
P Dwell
CAUTION
During cutting feed along the Z–axis (X–axis), the feedrate
override is assumed to be 100%. The spindle speed
override is also assumed to be 100%. For a retract motion
(motion 5), a fixed override of up to 200% can be applied by
specifying bit 4 (DOV) of parameter No. 5200 and
parameter No. 5211 (RGOVR).
NOTE
G code system A does not include G88 (return to initial level)
and G99 (return to R point level). Return to the initial level
is always used.
710
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Rigid tapping in feed per Rigid tapping is classified into two types: rigid tapping in feed per
rotation mode rotation mode (G99) and rigid tapping in feed per minute mode (G98).
Example)
The example below specifies rigid tapping in feed per rotation mode for
cutting a thread with a lead of 1 mm at a spindle speed of 1,000 rpm.
O0001 ;
G99 ;
⋅
⋅
⋅
M29 S1000 ;
G84 Z–100. R–20. F1. ;
⋅
⋅
⋅
G80 ;
The example below specifies rigid tapping in feed per minute mode for
cutting the same thread at the same spindle speed as above. (In feed per
minute mode, F/S determines the thread lead.)
O0002 ;
G98 ;
⋅
⋅
⋅
M29 S1000 ;
G84 Z–100. R–20. F1000 ;
⋅
⋅
⋅
G80 ;
Units of F
Metric input Inch input Remarks
G98 1 mm/min 0.01 inch/min A fractional value
can be specified.
G99 0.0001 mm/ rev 0.000001 inch/rev A fractional value
can be specified.
NOTE
1 G98 and G99 are modal G codes. Upon power–up, G99
(feed per rotation mode) is set.
2 Even in feed per rotation mode, a pulse distribution
command is converted to a feed per minute command.
Thus, feed per rotation mode does not strictly implement
feed per rotation. Accordingly, even if the spindle stops for
some reason, the tapping axis (Z–axis or X–axis) does not
stop.
711
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.11.6
Signal
9.11.6.1
Signals for the rigid
tapping function
Spindle rotation
direction signals
RGSPM, RGSPP
<F065#1, #0>
(M series only)
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] During rigid tapping, these signals notify the PMC of whether the spindle
is rotating in the forward or reverse direction.
During rigid tapping, the spindle is:
RGSPP 1 : Rotating in the forward direction (CW).
0 : Not rotating in the forward direction.
RGSPM 1 : Rotating in the reverse direction (CCW).
0 : Not rotating in the reverse direction.
[Output condition] These signals are output when the spindle is rotating in rigid tapping
mode. This means that, even in rigid tapping mode, these signals are not
output, for example, when the spindle is being positioned to a hole
position, or a dwell operation is in progress at the bottom of a hole or at
an R point.
These signals are not output in the feed hold state or single block stop
state. When the spindle is placed in the interlock stop state, machine lock
state, or Z–axis ignore state, however, the spindle is not regarded as
having stopped; these signals are output.
These signals are valid only in rigid tapping mode. In normal spindle
control, these signals are not output; both RGSPP and RGSPM are set to
“0”.
712
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Rigid tapping
in–progress signal
RTAP <F076#3>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies the PMC that rigid tapping mode is set.
RTAP 1 : Rigid tapping mode is currently set.
0 : Rigid tapping mode is not currently set.
By latching M29, the PMC knows that rigid tapping mode has been
specified, and thus performs the required processing on the PMC side.
This signal can substitute for the latching of M29. Even in this case,
however, FIN for M29 cannot be omitted.
9.11.6.2
Signals related to S code
output
Spindle–speed function
code signals
(binary output)
S00 to S31
<F022 to F025>
Spindle–speed function
strobe signal
SF <F007#2>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] These signals send S codes specified for the CNC, in binary format, to the
PMC.
[Output condition] When an S code is specified, the specified value is output, in binary
format, with the signals. Upon the completion of output, the SF signal
is set to “1”.
713
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 The timing charts, given later, give examples of gear
switching by setting the parameters as follows:
M series: SFA = 0, NSF = 0
T series: EVS = 1
2 When the constant surface speed control function is being
used, an S code (specifying a surface speed) used for
constant surface control (G96) is output. Such an S code
can be distinguished from an S code used for specifying a
rotation speed. One method is to use, for example, the
constant surface speed control in–progress signal (F002#2)
for the processing performed on the PMC side. Another
method is to mask the S code and SF signal, output by
setting bit 0 (ESF) of parameter No. 3705.
9.11.6.3
Signals related to gear
switching
714
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
715
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.11.6.4
Signals related to
second spindle rigid
tapping
Gear selection signal See the description of the signals related to gear switching, given above.
(input)
GR21 <G029#0>
(T series only)
Signals related to
multi–spindle control
Spindle selection signals
SWS1, SWS2
<G027#0, #1>
716
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
WARNING
These signals must be applied before the command for rigid
tapping (M29 S....; G84 X...) is specified. The states of
these signals must not be changed before rigid tapping has
been completed.
Spindle–by–spindle stop
signals
*SSTP1, *SSTP2
<G027#3, #4>
[Classification] Input signal
[Operation] These signals are used to stop each spindle when the multi–spindle
control option is used. In a PMC sequence for rigid tapping, the ENB and
ENB2 signals are used. Accordingly, the logic of the signals used for a
spindle selected to perform rigid tapping must match the logic of the
spindle stop signal *SSTP.
*SSTP1 1 : The output to the first spindle does not specify 0 rpm.
0: The output to the first spindle specifies 0 rpm.
*SSTP2 1 : The output to the second spindle does not specify 0 rpm.
0: The output to the second spindle specifies 0 rpm.
717
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
However, the display of the actual speed is switched by this signal, even
during rigid tapping.
9.11.6.5
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G027 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS2 SWS1
G029 GR21
F001 ENB
F007 SF
F038 ENB2
F076 RTAP
9.11.6.6 The following describes some notes in designing the interface with the
Notes on interface with PMC.
the PMC
Rigid tapping mode The PMC must manage rigid tapping mode as follows: rigid tapping
management and ENB mode is set using M29, and is canceled upon the issue of a reset or at the
(or ENB2) falling edge of the spindle enable signal ENB in rigid tapping mode. ENB
is used during rigid tapping in this way, so the spindle stop signal *SSTP
must not be set to “0”.
However, *SSTP and SOR may be used for gear switching. To do so,
ensure that the PMC does not cancel rigid tapping mode on a falling edge
of ENB while *SSTP is “0”. Rigid tapping mode may be set on a rising
edge of the RTAP signal instead of by using M29, and canceled on a
falling edge of the RTAP signal instead of the ENB signal.
In rigid tapping using the second spindle with the T series, the ENB2
signal must be used for rigid tapping mode management.
Controlling spindle When the SIND signal is set to “1”, spindle output is controlled by the
output by the PMC signals (SSIN, SGN, R1I to R12I) output from the PMC.
718
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
For the same reason, the PMC’s control over second spindle output must
be disabled in rigid tapping mode by setting SIND2 to “0”.
T–type gear selection When T–type gear selection is used, the PMC must determine whether
method gear switching is to be performed, and subsequently perform gear
switching as required. For this purpose, each time a spindle–speed
function code is specified, the spindle–speed function code read signal
(SF) and spindle–speed function code signals (S00 to S31) must be output
to the PMC. The required parameter settings are described below.
Gear switching timing In general, a block containing M29 (miscellaneous function for
preparation for rigid tapping) specifies S****, S**** being output when
a block containing G84 (G74) is executed. This means that gear switching
is performed in the block specifying G84 (G74).
When rigid tapping mode M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) and S****
is specified specify rigid tapping mode. When M29 is accepted by the PMC, the
following processing must be performed:
Stop the spindle when it is rotating.
Check that the spindle has stopped completely, then set the rigid
tapping signal RGTAP <G061#0> to on.
Activate the spindle motor. Activate the motor so that a positive speed
command rotates the spindle in the forward direction (CCW when
viewed from the – side of the tapping axis).
Return FIN at least 250 ms after activation.
NOTE
The condition “at least 250 ms after activation” results from
there being no way of checking the completion of spindle
motor activation. Therefore, this wait period serves as an
alternative. The time required for activation to be completed
varies with the spindle motor and amplifier. Therefore, this
value of 250 ms is given as a guideline only.
In an M29 block, S**** is not executed, merely being read in. S**** is
executed in a G84 block. Spindle output is equivalent to the specification
of S0.
The timing chart is shown in the chart indicating the execution of G84
(G74).
Execution of G84 (G74) When M29S****; is specified, S**** is read in, spindle output being
equivalent to the specification of S0;. S**** is output when G84 (G74)
is executed. Thus, the processing described below is performed.
719
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
When M–type gear When using a machine that features multiple gear stages for use with the
selection is used spindle motor and spindle, and S**** is outside the previously selected
gear range, the spindle–speed function strobe signal SF <F007#2> and
gear selection signals (output) GR30, GR20, GR10 <F034#2, #1, #0> are
output to the PMC.
At this time, perform gear switching at the PMC.
When T–type gear The spindle–speed function strobe signal SF <F007#2> and
selection is used spindle–speed function code signals S00 to S31 <F022 to F025> are
output to the PMC. (However, parameter setting is required to enable
output of the S codes and SF signal. See the description of each bit of
parameter No. 3705.)
From GR2 and GR1, the CNC determines which gear is selected.
720
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
9.11.7 The timing chart for rigid tapping specification depends on the method
Timing Charts for Rigid used to specify rigid tapping mode, the gear selection method (M–type or
T–type), and whether to perform gear switching.
Tapping Specification
From the table, find the appropriate timing chart (Fig. 9.11.7.1 (a) to Fig.
9.11.7.3 (d)) and apply the information it contains as necessary.
Specification method
Gear
selection
Gear By parameter setting,
method M29 and G84 (G74) are
switching M29 is specified before G84 (G74) is specified as
M–type specified in the same
G84 (G74). a G code for rigid
T–type block.
tapping.
Not performed Fig. 9.11.7.1 (a) Fig. 9.11.7.2 (a) Fig. 9.11.7.3 (a)
M–type
M–ty e
Performed Fig. 9.11.7.1 (b) Fig. 9.11.7.2 (b) Fig. 9.11.7.3 (b)
Not performed Fig. 9.11.7.1 (c) Fig. 9.11.7.2 (c) Fig. 9.11.7.3 (c)
T–ty e
T–type
Performed Fig. 9.11.7.1 (d) Fig. 9.11.7.2 (d) Fig. 9.11.7.3 (d)
NOTE
For more information about the M/T type gear selection
method, see Section 9.3 SPINDLE CONTROL. Note the
following:
T series: T–type only
M series: M–type when constant surface speed control
is not being used and bit 4 (GTT) of
parameter No. 3706 is set to 0
T–type when constant surface speed control
is being used, or bit 4 (GTT) of
parameter No. 3706 is set to 1
721
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.11.7.1
When M29 is specified before G84 (G74)
M type gear selection method
M29
RTAP
First block Second block
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the second
block
Spindle
output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Excitation
SFR
Position loop
722
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
M29
RTAP
First block Second block
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle *Gear
output change
motion
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart show an example where the gear has shifted from low to middle gear. One of the gear select signals (GR1O,
GR2O, GR3O) has turned from “1” to “0”, and one of the two remaining signals has turned from “0” to “1”. This changes
the gear.
Fig. 9.11.7.1 (b) When gear change is performed (From low to middle gear)
723
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
M29
RTAP
First bllock Second block
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the second block
Spindle
output
SF
S code
output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Excitation SFR
Position loop
724
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
M29
RTAP
First block Second block
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle *Gear
output change
motion
SF
S code output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has changed from low to middle gear. The PMC selects a required gear
through an S code output and selects the gear using the GR1 and GR2 signals to inform CNC of the selected gear.
725
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.11.7.2
M29 and G84 (G74) are specified in the same block
M type gear selection
M29
RTAP
First block Second block
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the second block
Spindle
output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Excitation SFR
Position
loop
726
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
M29
RTAP
First block Second block
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has shifted from middle high gear. One of the gear select signals (GR1O,
GR2O, GR3O) has turned from “1” to “0”, and one of the two remaining signals has tuned from “0” to “1”. This changes
the gear.
727
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
M29
RTAP
First block Second block
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
output
SF
S code
output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Excitation SFR
Position loop
728
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
M29
RTAP
First block Second block
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
outpout
SF
S code out-
put
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has changed from middle to high gear. The PMC selects a required gear
through an S code output and selects the gear using the GR1 and GR2 signals to inform CNC of the selected gear.
Fig 9.11. 7.2 (d) When gear–change is performed (middle to high gear)
729
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.11.7.3
Specifying G84 (G74) for rigid tapping by parameters
M type gear selection
M29
RTAP
First block Second block
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Excitaiton SFR
Position loop
730
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
M29
RTAP
First block Second blcok
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has shifted from high to low gear. One of the gear select signals (GR1O,
GR2O, GR3O) has turned from “1” to “0”, and one of the two remaining signals has turned from “0” to “1”. This changes
the gear.
Fig. 9.11.7.3 (b) When gear change is performed (high to low gear)
731
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
M29
RTAP
First block Second block
ENB
To be masked to the second block
Spindle
outoput
SF
S code
output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Excitation SFR
Position loop
732
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
M29
RTAP
First blcok Second block
ENB
To be masked to the
second blcok
Spindle
output
SF
S code
output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has changed from high to low gear. The PMC selects a required gear
through an S code output and inputs the selected gear using the GR1 and GR2 signals to inform CNC of the selected gear.
733
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.11.7.4 When rigid tapping is completed, the mode is canceled if a G code (such
Timing to cancel rigid as G80, canned cycle G code, or Group 01 G code) is issued.
tapping mode The spindle output is produced in the same way as executing S0. Cancel
the PMC rigid tapping mode at the falling edge of the ENB signal (ENB2
signal for 2nd spindle of T series) by de-energizing the spindle; then turn
off the rigid tapping mode signal. The system goes to the next block after
confirming that the signal is off.
When gear change is performed using *SSTP and SOR, the ENB signal
can be either “1” or “0”. Do not cancel the PMC’s rigid tapping mode at
the falling edge of the ENB signal under these circumstances. The
position loop is also canceled.
When the CNC is reset, the PMC’s rigid tapping mode must be canceled.
When CRG (parameter no. 5200#2) is “1”, the system goes directly to the
next block without checking that the rigid tapping signal is “0”. Set CRG
to “1” for systems in which the rigid tapping signal is always “1”.
G80
(or G code of group 01)
RTAP
ENB (orENB2)
Spindle output
RGTAP
Rotation
Excitation
Position loop
734
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
WARNING
1 If rigid tapping mode is canceled by a Group 01 G code,
such as G00 or G01, the block containing the G code is
executed at the same time the ENB signal is turned to “0”.
Therefore, if a block contains an M code for controlling the
spindle, an error may occur during processing in the PMC.
2 When CRG (Parameter No. 5200#2) is 1, if the next block
contains an M code for controlling the spindle, an error may
occur during processing in the PMC, when:
⋅ Rigid tapping mode is canceled by issuing G80
⋅ Rigid tapping mode is canceled by issuing a Group 01 G
code , such as G00 or G01
NOTE
Rigid tapping mode is canceled as described above
regardless of the gear selection method of M–type or
T–type.
735
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.11.8
Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3705 EVS ESF
SFA NSF SGT ESF
NOTE
For the T system, this parametar is enabled when bit 4
(EVS) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1.
For the M series, SF is not output:
· For an S command used to specify maximum spindle
speed clamping (G92S–––;) in constant surface speed
control mode
· When bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1
NOTE
The output of S codes and SF for an S command in constant
surface speed control mode (G96), or for an S command
used to specify maximum spindle speed clamping
(G50S–––;) depends on the setting of bit 0 (ESF) of
parameter No. 3705.
736
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706 PG2 PG1
GTT PG2 PG1
1 0 0 Magnification =
2 0 1 Number of spindle revolutions
4 1 0 Number of position coder revolutions
8 1 1
NOTE
1 Type M:
The gear selection signal is not entered. In response to an
S command, the CNC selects a gear according to the speed
range of each gear specified beforehand in a parameter.
Then the CNC reports the selection of a gear by outputting
the gear selection signal. The spindle speed corresponding
to the gear selected by the gear selection signal is output.
Type T:
The gear selection signal is entered. The spindle speed
corresponding to the gear selected by this signal is output.
2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected,
type T is selected, regardless of whether this parameter is
specified.
3761
Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping
3762
Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 during tapping
737
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Spindle motor
max. clamp speed
(Parameter No. 3736)
Spindle motor
min. clamp speed
(Parameter No. 3735) Spindle speed
command
Max. speed Max. speed Max. speed (S command)
at gear1 at gear2 at gear3
parameter parameter parameter
No. 3741 No. 3742 No. 3743
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5101
FXY
NOTE
In the case of the M series, this parameter is valid only for
the drilling canned cycle in the Series 15 format.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5200 SRS FHD DOV SIG CRG VGR G84
FHD PCP DOV SIG CRG VGR G84
738
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
VGR Any gear ratio between spindle and position coder in rigid tapping
0 : Not used (The gear ratio is set in parameter No. 3706.)
1 : Used (The gear ratio is set by parameters Nos. 5221 through 5224 and
5231 through 5234.)
CRG Rigid mode when a rigid mode cancel command is specified (G80, G01
group G code, reset, etc.)
0 : Canceled after rigid mode signal RGTAP is set to 0.
1 : Canceled before rigid mode signal RGTAP is set to 0.
SIG When gears are changed for rigid tapping, the use of SIND <G032 and
G033> is
0 : Not permitted.
1 : Permitted.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5201 TDR
TDR NIZ
739
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5202
ORI
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
NOTE
This parameter can be used only for a serial spindle.
The spindle orientation is a zero return in the serial spindle
servo mode The stop position can be changed by serial
spindle parameter No. 4073.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5204 DGN
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
NOTE
The M code is judged to be 29 (M29) when “0” is set.
740
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
NOTE
The override value is valid when DOV in parameter No.
5200 is “1”.
NOTE
If the setting of this parameter is 0, the M code specifying the
rigid tapping mode is determined by the setting of parameter
5210. Otherwise, it is determined by the setting of
parameter 5212. The setting of parameter 5212 must
always be within the above valid range.
5213
Return or clearance in peck tapping cycle
741
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
When bit PCP in parameter No. 5200 is 0 When bit PCP in parameter No. 5200 is 1
(High–speed peck tapping cycle) (Peck tapping cycle)
q : Cutting q : Cutting
d : Return d : Clearance
ÄÄ R
ÄÄ R
ÄÄ ÄÄ
q point q point
ÄÄ ÄÄ
d d
ÄÄ
ÄÄ
q
q
d
ÄÄ
ÄÄ
q
q
d
Z Z
point point
5221 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (First gear)
5222 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (Second gear)
5223 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (Third gear)
5224 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (Fourth gear)
NOTE
This parameter is valid when VGR, #1 of parameter No.
5200, is “1”.
Set the same value to parameter Nos. 5221 to 5224 when
the spindle has a position coder.
742
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
5231 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (First gear)
5232 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (Second gear)
5233 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (Third gear)
5234 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (Fourth gear)
NOTE
This parameter is valid when VGR, #1 of parameter No.
5200, is “1”.
Set the same value to parameter Nos. 5231 to 5234 when
the spindle has a position coder.
A spindle motor incorporating the position coder uses a
position coder with 2048 pulses per revolution. In this case,
set the value that is two times as many as the actual number
of gear teeth (because of conversion to 4096 pulses per
revolution).
743
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
In a system having one–stage gear, set the same value as
parameter No. 5241 to parameter No. 5243. In a system
having two–stage gear, set the same value as parameter
No. 5242 to parameter No. 5243. If it is not set as such, P/S
alarm no. 200 will be informed.
These are applicable to M series.
744
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
NOTE
The time constant is valid when TDR, #2 of parameter No.
5201, is “1”.
5280 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
(Common in each gear)
NOTE
To change the loop gain for every gear, set this parameter
value to “0” and set the loop gain for every gear to parameter
Nos. 5281 through 5284. If this parameter value is not “0”,
the loop gain for every gear is invalidated. This parameter
then becomes a loop gain that is used in common for all
gears.
5281 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
(First gear)
5282 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
(Second gear)
5283 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
(Third gear)
5284 Position control loop gain of spindle an tapping axis in rigid tapping
(Fourth gear)
745
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
To set the loop gain for every gear, set parameter No. 5280
to “0”.
5291 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 1)
5292 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 2)
5293 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 3)
5234 Spindle loop gain multioplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear4)
NOTE
These parameters are used for analog spindles.
These parameters are used for analog spindles.
E
Loop gain multiplier = 2048 L a 1000
where;
E: Voltage in the velocity command at 1000 rpm
L: Rotation angle of the spindle per one rotation of the
spindle motor
a: Unit used for the detection
Example)
746
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
NOTE
When the position coder which is built in a spindle motor
sends 512 pulses per rotation, the unit used for the
detection, a, is La/2048.
CAUTION
The broad in–position width deteriorates the screw
precision.
5310 Limit value of tapping axis positioning deviation during movement in rigid tapping
WARNING
The setting value is represented in a 10–times unit when a
high–resolution transducer is used.
747
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
5311 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during movement in rigid tapping
NOTE
The detection unit is a=La/2048 when the position coder
built–in spindle motor uses a position coder of 512 pulses
per revolution.
5312 Limit value of tapping axis positioning deviation during stop in rigid tapping
748
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
5313 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during stop in rigid tapping
5314 Limit value of position deviation during movement along the tapping axis for rigid
tapping
NOTE
If the setting of this parameter is 0, the setting of parameter
5310 is enabled. Otherwise, the setting of parameter 5310
is disabled, and the setting of parameter 5314 is enabled.
749
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.11.9
Alarm and Message Number Message Description
750
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
751
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.11.10
Notes
NOTES ON SPINDLES
CAUTION
1 When using an analog spindle, set the spindle speed offset
value parameter (No. 3731) accurately. For the standard
system, a value within –8191 to 8191 must be specified in
this parameter. To perform rigid tapping, a value within
–1023 to 1023 must be specified.
If the spindle speed offset is set inaccurately, the spindle is
stopped and placed in in–position wait state when tapping
is started.
In rigid tapping with a serial spindle, no setting is required
for parameter No. 3731. Be sure to set 0.
2 When the threading and synchronous feed functions are
enabled, the actual spindle speed during rigid tapping is
indicated correctly. When an arbitrary gear ratio is used (by
setting bit 1 (VGR) of parameter No. 5200 to 1), however,
the actual spindle speed will not be indicated correctly in
normal spindle mode.
When the T series is used, for example, information about
the actual spindle speed is important for lathe machining.
So, be particularly careful when using an arbitrary gear
between the spindle and position coder.
NOTE
1 A spindle pitch error is not compensated for in rigid tapping
mode. Drift compensation is not made with an analog
spindle.
2 The maximum number of pulses that can be distributed to
the spindle is:
⋅ 32,767 pulses per 8 msec for a serial spindle
⋅ 4,096 pulses per 8 msec for an analog spindle
(This information is displayed by selecting No. 451 on the
diagnosis screen.)
These values vary with the position coder gear ratio setting
and rigid tapping specification. If a value greater than the
maximum allowable number is specified, P/S alarm No. 202
is issued.
752
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Notes on using
functions such as the
CAUTION
spindle positioning
1 When the spindle orientation function is to be used at the
function at the same
same time
time The spindle orientation function positions the spindle by
using sensors and the PMC, without being directly
controlled by the CNC.
The CNC has no direct control over this processing, instead
following the specifications of the spindle orientation
function being used.
2 When the spindle positioning function is to be used at the
same time
When the spindle positioning function is to be used together
with rigid tapping, rigid tapping mode must not be specified
in spindle indexing mode, and spindle indexing mode must
not be specified in rigid tapping mode. (Spindle positioning
and rigid tapping cannot be performed simultaneously for a
single spindle.)
This restriction does not apply, however, when
multi–spindle control is applied; rigid tapping can be
performed using the second spindle.
The spindle positioning function is effective for the first
spindle only. This means that when spindle indexing is
performed with the first spindle, rigid tapping can be
specified with the second spindle.
3 When the Cs contouring control function for the serial
spindle is used together with the rigid tapping function, the
same motor is used for spindle rotation control, Cs
contouring control, and rigid tapping modes. The following
points must be noted:
(1)Whether to enter Cs contouring control mode or spindle
rotation control mode is selected by the CON (Cs
contouring control switch signal) signal; however, the
system can enter rigid tapping mode regardless of the
state of the CON signal. When the rigid tapping mode is
canceled the system enters spindle rotation control
mode or Cs contouring control mode according to the
state of the CON signal.
(2)Since the system can change to rigid tapping mode
directly from the Cs contouring contorl mode, use of the
Cs contouring control function enables the tapping tool
to be positioned before rigid tapping begins. Accurate
positioning is not guaranteed. If the rigid tapping cycle
executes gear change or output range changing,
positioning is valid.
753
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
CAUTION
(3)Although the system can change to rigid tapping mode
directly from Cs contouring contorl mode, positions
designated in Cs contouring control mode are not
preserved if riged tapping mode is canceled by G80.
When the system is changed to rigid tapping mode from
Cs contouring control mode, then returns to the Cs
contouring control mode, G00 or G28 must be issued to
position the tapping tool.
(4)In systems with the serial spindle Cs contouring control
function, the spindle motor is in a state called servo mode
when it is operating in rigid tapping mode. In servo mode,
it can accept jogging and manual handling feed. To
prevent this, nullify jogging and manual handling feed of
the Cs contouring axis in the PMC during rigid tapping.
(5)When the multi–spindle control is also available and the
rigid tapping is performed on the 2nd spindle, the rigid
tapping can be specified to the 2nd spindle during the Cs
contouring control of the 1st spindle.
Position control loop In rigid tapping, the loop gain of the tapping axis is switched so that the
gain switching and serial loop gains for position control of the tapping axis and spindle match each
spindle parameters other.
Accordingly, to perform rigid tapping with a serial spindle, the loop gain
for position control of the spindle must be set in the serial spindle
parameters used for rigid tapping.
The parameters indicated below are the major serial spindle parameters
required for the setting and adjustment needed to use a serial spindle.
754
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
4044 Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode (gear 1, gear 2)
4045 Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode (gear 3, gear 4)
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set a proportional gain for the velocity loop in a servo mode (such as rigid
tapping mode).
4052 Integral gain of the velocity loop in the servo mode (gear 1, gear 2)
4053 Integral gain of the velocity loop in the servo mode(gear 3, gear 4)
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set an integral gain of the velocity loop in a servo mode (such as rigid
tapping mode).
Set a servo loop gain in a servo mode (such as rigid tapping mode).
CAUTION
1 Set a loop gain for spindle position control in rigid tapping
using a serial spindle. In these parameters, basically, set
the same values as those set in parameter Nos. 5280 and
5281 to 5284 (loop gains for position control of the tapping
axis).
Which serial spindle parameter (i.e., loop gain) is actually
used to operate the spindle depends on the serial spindle
clutch/gear selection signals CTH1 and CTH2 (G070#3, #2
for the first spindle, and G074#3, #2 for the second spindle).
Accordingly, which parameter is to be used must be
determined by considering the gear switching and PMC
software.
The table below indicates the relationship between the spindle gear
selection signals and selected gear numbers.
755
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.11.11
Reference item OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.2 RIGID TAPPING
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
756
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
9.12
SPINDLE
SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL
General This function enables the synchronous control of two spindles. It also
enables the control of the rotation phase of a spindle, allowing
non–standard workpieces as well as rods to be held by either of the two
spindles.
757
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
758
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4800 ND2 ND1
4810 Error pulse between two spindles when synchronizing phases in the seri-
al spindle synchronization control mode
When the difference in error pulse between two spindles is within the
value set in this parameter, the spindle phase synchronization completion
signal FSPPH <F044#3> becomes “1”.
4811 Allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the
serial spindle synchronization control mode
759
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
Signal SYCAL <F044#4> is used for monitoring a phase
shift in synchronous control. The processing performed
when a phase shift is detected depends on the
specifications determined by the machine tool builder.
Reference item
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR Appendix 3.3 Start–up procedure for spindle synchro-
series (Serial interface) nization control
DESCRIPTIONS (B–65042E)
760
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
9.13
SPINDLE
ORIENTATION
General This function stops the spindle at a specified position. The spindle can
be stopped in either of the following two ways.
· The spindle is mechanically stopped by using stoppers.
· The spindle is stopped by applying a function of the spindle control
unit.
Mechanical stop To mechanically stop the spindle by using, for example, a stopper, rotate
the spindle at a constant low speed and drive a stopper or pin into the
spindle. The spindle can be rotated at a constant speed by applying either
of the following methods.
· Spindle orientation signal (See 9.3, “Spindle Control.”)
· Spindle output control by the PMC (See 15.4.)
Using the spindle Some spindle control units can position the spindle motor by using
control unit sensors and position coders. The CNC itself does not control positioning
by using these units.
Serial spindle orientation In serial spindle orientation by a position coder, the stop position is
by a position coder specified either by a parameter or by the PMC (spindle orientation
function with the stop position externally set).
Signal
Spindle orientation
signals with the stop
position externally set
761
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
360 #n
= ȍ (2i Pi)
4096 i=0
where
Pi = 0 when SHAi = 0
Pi = 1 when SHAi = 1
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3702 OR2 OR1 OR3
762
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Caution
CAUTION
1 To perform spindle orientation by using the spindle control
unit, the signals of the spindle control unit must be used.
To perform serial spindle orientation by using a position
coder (to perform serial spindle orientation with the stop
position set externally), the serial spindle control unit signals
must be used.
2 When the spindle orientation function of stop position
external setting type is used, the stop position parameters
in spindle orientation with a position coder (No. 4031 and
4204) are invalid.
Note
NOTE
Spindle orientation with the spindle positioning function
differs from that described in this section. For details, see
Section 9.8, “Spindle Positioning.”
Reference item
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR VIII. Position coder method spindle orientation
series (Serial Interface)
DESCRIPTIONS (B–65042E)
763
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.14
SPINDLE OUTPUT
SWITCHING
General Spindle output switching switches between the two windings, one for low
speed and the other for high speed, incorporated into the special spindle
motors. This ensures that the spindle motor demonstrates stable output
characteristics over a wide range.
Since spindle output switching is a function of the spindle control unit,
see also the manual for the spindle control unit being used.
This section describes the relationship between spindle output switching
and the spindle control function in the CNC.
Operation of To switch the spindle output characteristics, the windings are usually
output–switchable switched using a relay. Prior to the completion of winding switching, the
spindle motor spindle rotates free from drive.
Output switching changes the relationship between a speed command,
issued from the CNC to the spindle, and the output characteristics of the
spindle motor. However, the relationship between the speed command
and spindle motor speed is not changed.
Output switching timing During actual machining, the spindle is usually controlled in the
following way.
(1) Constant spindle speed during cutting, such as milling
(2) Continuously changing spindle speed during cutting, such as in
constant surface speed control
(3) Controlling the position loop including the spindle motor during rigid
tapping, spindle positioning, Cs contour control, etc.
For applications such as those in (1), we recommend switching the output
characteristics for low speed and high speed by using the spindle motor
speed detection signal of the spindle control unit.
For applications such as those described in (2) and (3), the spindle shall
not rotate with no drive applied during cutting or positioning. It is
necessary for the output characteristics to be switched appropriately
before machining or for output switching to be masked by using a PMC
ladder sequence.
Output switching and Spindle output switching ensures that the spindle motor demonstrates
gear switching stable characteristics over a wide range, and eliminates the mechanical
spindle gear switching mechanism.
In creating a PMC ladder sequence for output switching, however, using
the gear switching of the CNC’s spindle control function (see 9.3) may
facilitate programming.
Note the following points when using gear switching for CNC spindle
control for output switching with a machine tool having no mechanical
gear switching mechanism.
764
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
When gear selection output signals, GR2O and GR1O <F034 #0, #1>,
are used (for machining centers in which constant surface speed
control is not provided and GTT, bit 4 of parameter No. 3706, is set
to 0)
Set two gears, which are almost the same.
(Example: Value of parameter No. 3741 = value of parameter No.
3742 – 1, value of No. 3742 = Maximum spindle speed)
When parameter No. 3741 is equal to parameter No. 3742, the CNC
judges that one gear is used, and does not output the GR2O signal.
The parameters related to gear switching points, SGT, bit 3 of
parameter No. 3705, and SGB, bit 2 of parameter No. 3761, parameter
Nos. 3761 and 3751 can be used.
In usual spindle control, depending on the speed at switching points,
the speed specified by the spindle speed command may differ slightly
from the actual speed in the area where the maximum spindle speed
is set to the maximum speed 1. (This is because the spindle motor
speed, specified by the speed command, is calculated based on the
settings of parameter Nos. 3741 to 3744.)
This does not apply to rigid tapping. (Because the machine tool is
controlled using the feedback signal from the detector in the position
loop.)
When gear selection input signals, GR1 and GR2 <G028 #1, #2>, are
used (for lathes or machining centers in which constant surface speed
control is provided or GTT, bit 4 of parameter No. 3706, is set to 1)
Parameter settings are read according to the input signal information.
Unlike the GR2O and GR1O signals, these signals do not require
special parameter settings.
Example) When parameter Nos. 3741 and 3742 are set to the maximum
spindle speed.
Create a PMC sequence that specifies the following.
For gear 1, set GR1 and GR2 to 0.
For gear 2, set GR2 to 0 and set GR1 to 1.
The PMC must determine the switching timing on the basis of some
information.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL 9.3 Spindle control
(This manual) 9.11 Rigid tapping
765
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.15
THREE–SPINDLE
SERIAL OUTPUT
General When single–path control is performed with the Series 16, three serial
spindles can be connected. (This is not possible, however, with the Series
18, and when two–path control is applied for the Series 16.)
The third serial spindle operates as an ordinary third analog spindle. For
the third as well as the first and second serial spindles, all the functions
supported by the serial spindle control unit (spindle orientation, spindle
output switching, and spindle switching) can be used.
When the third spindle orientation function is used, stop–position
external–setting type orientation can also be performed for the third
spindle.
This section provides information related to the third serial spindle added
by the three–spindle serial output function. The spindle configuration,
supported functions, and related signal addresses, parameters, alarms,
and diagnosis screens are explained.
For details of the spindle control method and spindle–related functions,
refer to the description of each function.
The relationships between the spindle control interfaces and spindle
configuration are shown below. (This table relates to a table that appears
in Section 9.2.)
Spindle serial Spindle ana- Three–spindle First spindle Second spindle Third spindle
output log output serial output
f Analog spindle
The PC can be used.
D PC = Position coder
D (*) : The multi–spindle function is required to enable the use of the
position coder for the second spindle (T series).
D *1 : The option 2 board (for additional axes only) for serial spindle
control is required to enable the use of the three–spindle serial
output function. The three–spindle serial output function cannot
be used in the following cases:
766
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
NOTE
1 The connection for the α series is shown above. For the S
series, the connector names of the spindle control units are
changed from JA7B to CN11A, and from JA7A to CN11B.
In addition, the S series requires the use of optical
conversion adapters and optical cables for connection.
2 Even when a background board is installed, the third serial
spindle can be connected using the option 2 board (for
additional axes only).
767
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
The table below lists the relationship between the spindles and functions.
(This table relates to a table that appears in Section 9.2.)
f = Available = Unavailable
Cs contour control f
Spindle switching f f f f f
768
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
NOTE
1 The third serial spindle can be used only when the Series
16 is used in single–path control mode. When the Series 18
is being used, or when the Series 16 is being used in
two–path control mode, the third serial spindle cannot be
used.
2 The multi–spindle function can control the speed of the
three spindles and switch the feedback signal between two
position coders. It can operate without the second or third
spindle.
When the multi–spindle function is used with the M series,
the constant surface speed control option must be set, or
the spindle gear selection method must be set to type T with
GTT (bit 4 of parameter No. 3706).
3 These functions are provided by the spindle control unit.
They cannot be used unless supported by the spindle
control unit.
4 The multi–spindle function is required. The function cannot
be applied to the first and second spindles simultaneously.
5 When a two–path lathe is used, spindle polygon turning
cannot be performed using the spindle on tool post 1 and
the spindle on tool post 2.
6 The first, second, or third spindle can be selected and used
for rigid tapping. In this case, the multi–spindle function is
required. If the multi–spindle function is not available, rigid
tapping can be performed using the first spindle only.
7 For a two–path lathe application, the first spindle on tool
post 1 is the master, while the first spindle on tool post 2 is
the slave. The second spindle of either tool post cannot be
used in spindle synchronization.
For a two–path machining center application, spindle
synchronization cannot be used.
8 For a two–path lathe application, simple spindle
synchronous control cannot be applied to the spindle on tool
post 1 and the spindle on tool post 2.
9 The function used to change the spindle orientation stop
position (stop–position external–setting type spindle
orientation function) can be used by writing G signal
addresses from the PMC.
Signal
Spindle control unit These addresses are on the CNC. Actually, however, they are input/output
signals for the third signals for the serial spindle control unit.
serial spindle <G0204 to
G0207> (input), <F0168 For details of the signals belonging to these addresses, refer to the
to F0171> (output) → for following manuals:
the third serial spindle
769
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
F0171
770
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
NOTE
”n” above is the value set in parameter No. 1891.
Parameter
Connection of serial
spindle control unit
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3701 SS3 SS2 ISI
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the spindle serial output option
is provided.
This bit is used when the CNC is started with serial interface
control for the first and second serial spindles temporarily
disabled to enable startup adjustment of the CNC.
This bit should normally be set to 0.
Similarly, when the serial interface for the third serial spindle
is disabled to enable CNC startup adjustment, set SS3, bit
5 of parameter No. 3701, to 0. (ISI cannot disable the serial
interface for the third serial spindle.)
SS2 Specifies whether to use the second serial spindle in serial spindle control.
0 : Do not use the second serial spindle.
1 : Use the second serial spindle.
NOTE
This bit is valid when the spindle serial output option is
provided, and ISI, bit 1 of parameter No. 3701 is set to 0.
771
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
SS3 Specifies whether to use the third serial spindle in serial spindle control.
0 : Do not use the third serial spindle.
1 : Use the third serial spindle.
NOTE
This bit is valid when the Series 16 is being used in
single–path control mode, and the spindle serial output and
three–spindle serial output options are provided.
Parameter setting
sed
Serial spindles to be used
SS2
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
NOTE
When the stop–position external–setting type spindle
orientation function is used, the parameters for setting the
spindle orientation stop position using a position coder
(parameter Nos. 4031 and 4204) are ignored.
772
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Diagnosis screen
Information relating to
third serial spindle
control
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
430 SS3 SSR SIC
SIC
0 : The module required for the three–spindle serial output function is not
installed.
1 : The module required for the three–spindle serial output function is
installed.
773
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
The module required for the three–spindle serial output
function is the spindle module (supporting a serial spindle)
on the option 2 board (for additional axes only).
SSR
0 : The options required for the three–spindle serial output function are
not installed.
1 : The options required for the three–spindle serial output function are
installed.
SS3
0 : The third serial spindle is not used in the three–spindle serial output
function.
1 : The third serial spindle is used in the three–spindle serial output
function.
431 Alarm condition for the serial spindle unit for the third spindle (AL–??)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
438 SSA SCA CME CER SNE FRE CRE
CRE
1 : CRC error (warning)
FRE
1 : Framing error (warning)
SNE
1 : Mismatch between sending and receiving sections
CER
1 : Abnormal reception
CME
1 : No answer during auto scanning
SCA
1 : Communication alarm in the spindle amplifier
SSA
1 : System alarm in the spindle amplifier
(The above are errors related to the third serial spindle. They are reflected
in spindle alarm 749. They are usually caused by noise, disconnection, or
instantaneous power interruption. If any of these errors are revealed by
diagnosis No. 438, check whether the option 2 board (for additional axes
only), the cables and serial spindle amplifier connected to the option 2
board, and so forth are faulty.)
774
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
SHE
1 : Abnormal operation in serial spindle communication module on the
option 2 board (additional axis board) of the CNC
S3E
1 : Abnormal operation of the third spindle during activation
SPE
1 : Serial spindle parameter does not satisfy activation conditions
(The above are errors related to the third serial spindle. They are reflected
in spindle alarm 750.)
Load and speed meter
readings for the third
serial spindle
To display the load and speed meter readings, the following parameters
must be specified:
Maximum motor speed: Set for each axis in parameter Nos. 4020 (main)
and 4196 (sub)
Load meter reading at maximum output: Set for each axis in parameter
Nos. 4127 (main) and 4276 (sub)
NOTE
The spindle switch function is used for main/sub switching.
Select main when the spindle switch function is not being
used.
775
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
9.16
SIMPLE SPINDLE
SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL
General In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the second spindle can be
controlled as a slave axis of the first spindle.
Thus, control based on the Cs contour axis control function, rigid tapping
function, and spindle positioning function (T series) can be exercised over
the second spindle, under the control of the first spindle.
When the parking function is used, one spindle can be stopped in each of
the control modes described below. For details, see the description of the
parking function.
Operation in each
control mode
1. Spindle mode (ordinary spindle control)
The second spindle rotates upon the issue of the same command as that
used for the first spindle.
The command does not specify the speed of the spindle, instead
specifying the ratio of the spindle motor speed to the maximum speed.
So, if the spindle unit configuration (maximum motor speed,
motor–spindle gear ratio, and so forth) of the first spindle is the same
as that of the second spindle, both spindles will rotate at about the same
speed. (The synchronization of rotation cannot be not guaranteed. If
the configurations of the two spindles differ, the speed of one spindle
will differ from that of the other.) For details of spindle control, see
Section 9.3.
776
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Parking function In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the parking function stops
the motion of the first or second spindle, regardless of the mode (spindle
mode, spindle positioning mode, Cs contour axis control mode, or rigid
tapping mode) of the spindle.
In the parking state, the spindle is placed in the following state, depending
on its mode:
In spindle mode: Same state as when S0 is specified
In other modes: Zero distribution state
777
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
The parking function stops only spindle motion. So, the parking function
can be used to stop only one spindle to enable machining to continue on
the other spindle when both spindles are being controlled. The parking
function can also be used to place the first spindle in the parking state so
that Cs contour axis control, spindle positioning, or rigid tapping can be
performed only on the second spindle.
WARNING
When using parking signal PK7 or PK8 for spindle
synchronous control (T series) while both simple spindle
synchronous control and spindle synchronous control (T
series) are being used, set the SPK bit (bit 7 of parameter
No. 4800) to 1. This sets parking signals PKESS1 and
PKESS2, used for simple spindle synchronous control, to
#6 and #7 of G031.
CAUTION
1 If the parking function is activated in a mode featuring a
position loop, such as Cs contour axis control mode, spindle
positioning mode, and rigid tapping mode, the actual
machine position of the spindle placed in the parking state
will differ from the coordinates recognized by the CNC.
This error is causes by parking, so that an excess error
alarm is not issued.
2 The parking signal becomes active immediately upon
simple spindle synchronous control mode being set.
However, if the parking signal is applied during reference
position return in Cs contour axis control mode or during
spindle orientation in spindle positioning mode, reference
position return or spindle orientation continues until the
completion of the operation; the parking state is set once the
reference position has been established.
3 While both spindles are placed in the parking state, never
specify reference position return in Cs contour axis control
mode, or spindle orientation in spindle positioning mode.
When both spindles are in the parking state, reference
position is not established.
778
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
NOTE
1 When the parking function is activated for a spindle in a
mode featuring a position loop, such as Cs contour axis
control mode, spindle positioning mode, and rigid tapping
mode, the spindle is stopped at the point where the parking
function is activated. If the spindle is shifted from the stop
position because of the application of an external force, for
example, an excess error alarm is issued. (In simple spindle
synchronous control mode, both spindles are checked for
any positional error, regardless of whether the parking
function is being used.)
2 If reference position return is specified in Cs contour axis
control mode, or if spindle orientation is specified in spindle
positioning mode when one spindle is placed in the parking
state, the reference position return completion signal is
turned on when the reference position is established for the
other spindle.
PMC signal control Even for simple spindle synchronous control, those functions (including
the spindle orientation function) and input/output signals that are to be
directly specified for spindle control from the PMC are controlled
independently for the first and second spindles.
When using the simple spindle synchronous control function, use the
signals for the second spindle (DGN DI–>G0074 to G0077, DO–>F0049
to F0052) as required in addition to simple spindle synchronous control
signal ESRSYC.
NOTE
In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the states of
the first and second spindles are checked. So, if simple
spindle synchronous control is specified in Cs contour axis
control mode before the second spindle is activated, for
example, the VRADY OFF alarm may be issued. Careful
attention should also be paid to PMC control over the
second spindle.
779
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Simple spindle Simple spindle synchronous control does not guarantee synchronous
synchronization and spindle operation. However, in a control mode featuring a position loop,
phase error monitor such as Cs contour axis control mode, rigid tapping mode, and spindle
signal positioning mode, the synchronization of both spindles can be guaranteed
by matching the position gain of one spindle to that of the other.
Note that even if phase error monitor signal SYCAL is output, no CNC
alarm is issued.
NOTE
During simple spindle synchronous control,
synchronization between the first and second spindles is
not guaranteed in spindle mode. However, in Cs contour
axis control mode, rigid tapping mode, and spindle
positioning mode, the synchronization of the spindles can
be guaranteed by matching the position gain of one spindle
with that of the other.
Note that spindle synchronization cannot be guaranteed if
either spindle is undergoing reference position return in Cs
contour axis control mode or orientation in spindle
positioning mode, or if it is using a function (such as spindle
orientation) that is specified directly from the PMC.
Relationship between When the spindle synchronous control option is selected, ensure that
simple spindle simple spindle synchronous control signal ESRSYC is applied when
synchronous control and synchronous control is not exercised.
spindle synchronous
control Also, ensure that spindle synchronous control signal SRSYC is not
applied during simple spindle synchronous control.
This alarm returns the value of the signal (SRSYC or ESRSYC) applied
later to 0, and remains on until reset.
780
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
The table below summarizes the changes in the first spindle and second
spindle states depending on the transition of simple spindle synchronous
control signal ESRSYC and the state of spindle synchronous control
signal SRSYC.
Transition of simple spindle ESRSYC ESRSYC
synchronous control signal 0³ 1 1³ 0
State change of first spindle SP ³ SP CT ³ CT SV ³ SV SP ³ SP CT ³ CT SV ³ SV
(Remains (Remains as (Remains as (Remains (Remains (Remains
as is) is) is) (Note 2) as is) as is) as is)
(Note 1)
State change of second SP ³ SP CT ³ CT SV ³ SV SP ³ SP CT ³ CT SV ³ SV
spindle (Note 3) (Note 1’) (Note 2’) (Note 4) (Note 4) (Note 4)
When the spindle synchro- SRSYC 1 (during spindle synchronous SRSYC 1 (during spindle synchronous
nous control option is se- control) control)
lected ³ Alarm PS194 is issued. ³ Alarm PS194 is released by a reset.
SRSYC 0 (not during spindle synchronous SRSYC 0 (not during spindle synchronous
control) control)
³ The same changes as those indicated ³ The same changes as those indicated
above occur. above occur.
Legend
SP : Spindle mode CT: Cs contour axis control mode
SV : Rigid tapping mode, or spindle positioning mode (T series only)
781
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
(Note 1, Note 1’)
The second spindle is initialized to Cs contour axis control
mode. At this time, the position of the second spindle will
be undefined, so that reference position return must be
performed for the first and second spindles. In this case, the
reference position return command that is usually used can
be applied. (See Section 9.9.)
(Note 2, Note 2’)
While the first spindle is in rigid tapping mode or spindle
positioning mode, the input of simple spindle synchronous
control signal ESRSYC is masked in the NC to prevent the
setting of simple spindle synchronous control mode. When
the first spindle is initialized to spindle mode or Cs contour
axis control mode after the cancellation of rigid tapping
mode or Cs contour axis control mode, the second spindle
enters simple spindle synchronous control mode, and is
initialized together with the first spindle. After simple spindle
synchronous control mode has been set, initialization to
rigid tapping mode or spindle positioning mode, command
specification, and cancellation are performed for both the
first and second spindles.
(Note 3)
The mode is not changed. The second spindle, however,
is initialized to spindle mode. After being initialized to
spindle mode, the second spindle operates according to
commands issued for the second spindle, such that the
feedrate may change.
(Note 4)
The second spindle is immediately initialized to spindle
mode, regardless of its previous mode. The state of the first
spindle, however, remains as is.
Spindle rotation In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the same output and move
direction commands are issued to both the first and second spindles.
When one spindle is to rotate in the opposite direction to that of the other
spindle, the direction of rotation can be reversed by using a PMC signal
(SFR or SRV signal) or serial spindle parameter according to the currently
set mode.
Error monitoring and When simple spindle synchronous control is exercised in a mode other
alarm display than spindle mode, feedback information relating to the first and second
spindles is monitored for positional deviation. That is, an in–position
check is made, and an excess error check is made upon stop and move.
782
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Positional deviation During simple spindle synchronous control, indications such as the
display positional deviation of the first spindle are output in the usual way. For
the second spindle, however, only the positional deviation of the second
spindle is indicated in diagnostic data No. 415.
The positional deviation of the first spindle is indicated in diagnostic data
No. 414.
The absolute phase deviation between the first and second spindles is
indicated as a synchronization error in diagnostic data No. 414.
Signal
Simple spindle
synchronous control
signal ESRSYC
<G064#6> <G031#6>
783
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
– Activates the parking function for the second spindle placed under
simple spindle synchronous control.
When the SPK bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 4800) is set to 1, #6 of G031
functions as this signal.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G064 ESRSYC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G122 PKESS2 PKESS1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F044 SYCAL
784
B–62753EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3701 SS2
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
SS2 Under serial spindle control, the second serial spindle is:
0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
NOTE
1. This parameter is enabled when the spindle serial output
option is selected, and bit 1 (ISI) of parameter No. 3701 is
set to 0.
2. If the spindle synchronous control option is selected, this
parameter is automatically set at power–on. Once this
parameter is set, the following is possible:
1 Confirmation of connection with, and communication
with the second serial spindle amplifier
2 Control of the second spindle when asynchronous
control is used (SIND2)
Before the simple spindle synchronous control function can
be used, two serial spindles must be connected. This
means that the user must set this parameter beforehand; it
is not set automatically.
When this parameter is set, the serial spindle parameter for
the second spindle must also be set.
Allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the serial
4811 spindle synchronization control mode
785
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
This parameter is used to output the inter–spindle phase
error detection signal SYCAL in the serial spindle
synchronization control mode. The SYCAL signal becomes
high when a phase error exceeding the value set in this
parameter is found.
When specifying this parameter to enable error pulse
detection during simple spindle synchronous control, set
this parameter as required, noting the mode of the spindle.
(In spindle mode, this parameter cannot be used. This
parameter can be specified only in Cs contour axis control
mode, rigid tapping mode, and spindle positioning mode,
but note that the detection unit per pulse differs.)
Diagnosis screen
Positional deviation
display while spindle
synchronous control is
applied
414 Master spindle motion error while spindle synchronous control or simple
spindle synchronous control is applied
415 Slave spindle motion error while spindle synchronous control or simple spindle
synchronous control is applied
The display units for diagnostic data 414 through 416 are pulses; in
spindle synchronous control mode, one pulse corresponds to an error of
360/4096 (degrees).
In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the detection unit per pulse
depends on whether Cs contour axis control mode, rigid tapping mode,
or spindle positioning mode is set, and also on the type and mounting of
the detector.
786
B–62753EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
10 TOOL FUNCTIONS
787
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–62753EN–1/01
10.1
Tool Function
General (M series)
When the last one digit is used to specify the offset number:
(Parameter LD1 (No. 5002#0)=1)
Tfffffff f
Offset number
Tool number
When the last two digits are used to specify the offset number:
(Parameter LD1 (No. 5002#0)=0)
Tffffff ff
Offset number
Tool number
When a T code is specified, the code signal and strobe signal correspond-
ing to the specified tool number are issued. The machine selects a tool
according to the issued signals. The code signal is held until another T
code is specified.
Parameter
3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code
788
B–62753EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5002 LGN LD1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5006 TGC
789
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
When a move command and a tool function are specified in
the same block, the commands are executed in one of the
following two ways:
(i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and tool
function commands.
(ii) Executing tool function commands upon completion of
move command execution.
The selection of either (i) or (ii) depends on the sequence
program of PMC.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.11.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
790
B–62753EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
10.2
TOOL COMPENSATION VALUE/
TOOL COMPENSATION NUMBER/
TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY
General (M series)
Tool compensation values include tool geometry compensation values
and tool wear compensation values (Fig. 10.2 (a)).
The geometry compensation and wear compensation can be unified to the
tool compensation.
ÇÇÇ ÇÇ
Reference position
Geometry
ÇÇÇ Tool com-
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ ÇÇ
compensation pensation Nominal
value value com-
Wear
Compensation
value
ÇÇÇ ÇÇ pensation
point
(a) Geometry and wear com- (b) Geometry and were compensa-
pensation are discriminated tion are not discriminated
Tool compensation The memory can hold 32, 64, 99, 200, 400, 499 or 999 sets of tool
number compensation values.
Tool compensation One of the tool compensation memory A/B/C can be selected according
memory to offset amount.
Tool compensation memory A
There is no difference between geometry compensation memory and
wear compensation memory in this tool compensation memory A.
Therefore, amount of geometry offset and wear offset together is set
as the offset memory. There is also no differences between cutter
compensation (D code) and tool length compensation (H code).
791
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–62753EN–1/01
(T series)
Imaginary tool
X axis
geometry Offset
offset value on
value X axis
X axis
wear Actual
offset tool
value
Z axis Z axis
wear geometry Offset
offset offset value on
value value Z axis
Fig. 10.2 (b) Difference the Fig.10.2 (c) Not difference the tool
tool geometry offset from tool geometry offset from tool wear
wear offset offset
792
B–62753EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the
CRT/MDI panel or from a program.
A tool compensation value is selected from the CNC memory when the
corresponding code is specified after address T in a program.
The value is used for tool offset or tool nose radius compensation.
Range of tool Tool offset amount range which can be set is as follows:
compensation value Tool compensation
y
Increment system (geometry compensation, wear compensation)
Metric input Inch input
NOTE
1 When parameter OIM (No. 5006#0)=1, the range in
parenthesis is available.
2 The above table does not apply to the B–axis offset in
B–axis control function.
Tool compensation The memory can hold 16, 32, 64 or 99 sets of tool compensation values.
number
Tool compensation There are two types of tool offset amount memory, which can be selected
memory according to offset amount.
Tool geometry/wear compensation option not specified
There is no difference between geometry offset memory and wear
offset memory. Therefore, amount of geometry offset and wear offset
together is set as the offset memory.
Tool geometry/wear compensation option specified
Memory for geometry compensation and wear compensation is
prepared separately. Geometry compensation and wear compensation
can thus be set separately.
The above description is summarized as follws:
Tool compensation
Compensation amount
memory
Without geometry/ Tool compensation amount (Geometry compensation
wear compensation value + Wear compensation value)
Geometry compensation
With geometry/wear
g y
compensation Wear compensation
793
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3109 DWT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3290 GOF WOF
3294 Start number of tool offset values whose input by MDI is disabled
3295 Number of tool offset values (from the start number) whose input by MDI
is disabled
794
B–62753EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5002 WNP LGN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5004 ORC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5006 OIM
795
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–62753EN–1/01
This parameter sets the maximum value of tool wear compensation. The
following alarm or warning will be informed when the tool wear
compensation (absolute value) exceeding this setting value is set.
Input from MDI Too many digits
Input by G10 P/S 32 offset value is out of range by G10
TOO MANY DIGITS The input value exceeds the permitted number of
digits.
Note
NOTE
In the tow–path control, the number of specified tool
compensation values equals the number of tool
compensations for each tool post.
796
B–62753EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II 15.8 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUM-
(For Machining Center) BER OF COMPENSATION VALUES,
(B–62764EN) AND ENTERING VALUES FROM THE
PROGRAM (G10)
797
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–62753EN–1/01
10.3
TOOL LIFE
MANAGEMENT
General When tools are classified into several groups, average tool life (No. of
uses or time) is designated for each group. Whenever a tool is used, the
usage time is subtracted from the tool life; when the tool life expires, the
next tool in the group is selected. The tool sequence within a group is
arranged in advance.
Signal The end of a tool’s life is reported by tool change signal TLCH or
individual tool change signal TLCHI. Tool change signal TLCH is set to
1 at the end of the life of the last tool of a group. Individual tool change
signal TLCHI is set to 1 at the end of the life of the current tool.
NOTE
The TLCH signal turns to “1” when the CNC is reset by M02
or M30, for instance after the tool life, based on the
frequency of times used, is reached. When tool life is
specified by usage time, TLCH turns to “1” when the tool life
limit is reached. The signal will change during machine
operation, but machining will continue until the end of the
program.
798
B–62753EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
[Output condition] When the signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
· Clears all executable data, including the life count of the group.
If the same group is specified after machining is resumed, the first tool in
the group is selected.
NOTE
Tool change reset signal TLRST is valid only when the
automatic operating signal OP is “0”.
NOTE
1 These signals are valid only when tool life management is
performed on the basis of the tool life calculated in terms of
time or cutting length.
2 Individual tool change signal TLCHI is not cleared by reset.
799
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–62753EN–1/01
(i) Designate the group number for the tool by tool group number
selection signal then turn the tool skip signal TLSKP to “1”. The next
T-code command will pass over the first tool in the group for which
the skip was designated, and select the second tool.
(ii)Turn the TLSKP signal to “1” without designating a group number,
and the machine will skip to the next tool in the group currently in use.
Either of these methods is set using parameter SIG no. 6800#3. Tool life
is counted from zero. When the TLSKP signal is “1” and the last tool in
the group is being used, the TLCH signal turns to “1”.
[Operation] When the signal is set to “1”, the control unit operates as follows:
· Selects the next tool in the group for which a skip is specified with the
next T code.
· Assumes the number of the group to which the current tool belongs.
CAUTION
The cycle start lamp signal (STL) and feed hold lamp signal
(SPL) must both be “0” before inputting the TLSKP signal.
T code output
Tool function
strobe signal TF
800
B–62753EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
801
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–62753EN–1/01
ȍ {2
9
i
Override value = Vi}
i+0
*TLV0 0.1
*TLV1 0.2
*TLV2 0.4
*TLV3 0.8
*TLV4 1.6
*TLV5 3.2
*TLV6 6.4
*TLV7 12.8
*TLV8 25.6
*TLV9 51.2
(Example) When *TLV7, *TLV6, and *TLV3 are set to “0”, the override
value is calculated as follows:
12.8 + 6.4 + 0.8 = 20.0
The life count is multiplied by 20.0.
[Operation] The actual cutting time is counted and multiplied by the override value
obtained by the signals. The calculated time is used as the basis for
tool-life management.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G047 TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL08 TL04 TL02 TL01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G048 TLRST TLRSTI TLSKP TL256
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G049 *TLV7 *TLV6 *TLV5 *TLV4 *TLV3 *TLV2 *TLV1 *TLV0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G050 *TLV9 *TLV8
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F064 TLCHI TLNW TLCH
802
B–62753EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6800 SNG GRS SIG LTM GS2 GS1
M6T IGI SNG GRS SIG LTM GS2 GS1
0 1 1– 32 1– 8 1– 32 1– 8
1–128 1– 16 1– 32 1– 16
1 0 1– 64 1– 4 1– 64 1– 4
1–256 1– 8 1– 64 1– 8
1 1 1–128 1– 2 1– 16 1– 16
1–512 1– 4 1–128 1– 4
803
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6801 TLE TSM
M6E EXT EMD LFV CUT
6810
Tool life management ignored number
804
B–62753EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
When the life is specified by the number of times, the tool exchange signal
is output when a tool life count restart M code is specified if tool life of at
least one tool group is expired. A tool in life is selected in the specified
group when a T code command (tool group command) is specified after
the tool life count restart M code is specified. A tool life counter is then
incremented by one.
When the life is specified by time, a tool in life is selected in the specified
group when a T code command (tool group command) is specified after
the tool life count restart M code is specified.
150 ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP Tool Group No. exceeds the maximum al-
NUMBER lowable value.
Modify the program.
151 TOOL GROUP NUMBER The tool group commanded in the machin-
NOT FOUND ing program is not set.
Modify the value of program or parameter.
152 NO SPACE FOR TOOL The number of tools within one group ex-
ENTRY ceeds the maximum value registerable.
Modify the number of tools.
153 T–CODE NOT FOUND In tool life data registration, a T code was
not specified where one should be. Correct
the program.
154 NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE When the group is not commanded, H99 or
GROUP D99 was commanded.
(M series) Correct the program.
155 ILLEGAL T–CODE IN M06 In the machining program, M06 and T code
in the same block do not correspond to the
(M series) group in use. Correct the program.
156 P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND P and L commands are missing at the head
of program in which the tool group is set.
Correct the program.
157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS The number of tool groups to be set ex-
ceeds the maximum allowable value. (See
parameter No. 6800 bit 0 and 1) Modify the
program.
158 ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA The tool life to be set is too excessive.
Modify the setting value.
159 TOOL DATA SETTING IN- During executing a life data setting pro-
COMPLETE gram, power was turned off.
Set again.
805
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–62753EN–1/01
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.11.2 Tool Life Management Function
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
806
B–62753EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
10.4
CUTTER
COMPENSATION
10.4.1
Cutter
Compensation B, C
(M Series)
General When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of the
tool.
To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, first create an offset
vector with a length equal to the radius of the tool (start–up). The offset
vector is perpendicular to the tool path. The tail of the vector is on the
workpiece side and the head points to the center of the tool.
If a linear interpolation, corner offset (cutter compensation B only), or
circular interpolation command is specified after start–up, the tool path
can be shifted by the length of the offset vector during machining.
To return the tool to the start point at the end of machining, cancel the
cutter compensation mode.
Corner offset
Circular interpolation
Circular
interpolation
Linear interpolation
Corner offset
Circular
interpolation R1
Linear
interpolation
R2
Offset vector
Start up Circular
ÇÇ
Linear interpolation
interpolation
ÇÇ
Cutter Programmed path
compensation
ÇÇ
cancel Y axis
Tool center path
Start position
X axis
Fig. 10.4 (a) Outline of Cutter Compensation B
807
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–62753EN–1/01
Cutter
compensation
cancel
Start–up
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
Fig. 10.4 (b) Outline of Cutter Compensation C
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5001 OFH
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5003 CCN SUV SUP
808
B–62753EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
5010 Limit value that ignores the vector when a tool moves on the outside of a
corner during cutter compensation C
809
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–62753EN–1/01
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15.4 Cutter compensation B
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN) II.15.5 Cutter compensation C
810
B–62753EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
10.4.2
Tool Nose Radius
Compensation
(T Series)
Workpiece
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Tool path without compensation
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Insufficient
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Tool nose
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
depth of
cutting
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ R
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5002 WNP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5003 CCN
811
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–62753EN–1/01
5010 Limit value that ignores the vector when a tool moves on the outside of a
corner during too nose radius compensation
812
B–62753EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15.2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN)
813
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
11 PROGRAM COMMAND
814
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
11.1
DECIMAL POINT
PROGRAMMING/
POCKET
CALCULATOR
TYPE DECIMAL
POINT
PROGRAMMING
General Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point
can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can
be specified with the following addresses:
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, Q, R, and F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M series
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, R, F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T series
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3401 DPI
815
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.9.4 Decimal point programming
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
816
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
11.2
G CODE SYSTEM
(T SERIES)
General There are three G code systems : A,B, and C (Table 11.2). Select a G code
system using bits 6 (GSB) and 7 (GSC) of parameter 3401.
817
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
818
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3401 GSC GSB
0 0 G code system A
0 1 G code system B
1 0 G code system C
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3402 CLR G91 G01
819
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
1 If the CNC enters the clear state (see bit 6 (CLR) of
parameter 3402) when the power is turned on or the CNC
is reset, the modal G codes change as follows.
(1) G codes marked with in Table 11.2 are enabled.
(2) When the system is cleared due to powerĆon or reset,
whichever specified, either G20 or G21, remains
effective.
(3) G22 is set when the system is cleared due to powerĆon.
When the system is cleared due to reset, whichever
specified, either G22 or G23, remains effective.
(4) Setting bit 0 (G01) of parameter 3402 determines which
code, either G00 or G01, is effective.
(5) Setting bit 3 (G91) of parameter 3402 determines which
code, either G90 or G91, is effective.
2 G codes of group 00 except G10 and G11 are singleĆshot
G codes.
3 Alarm 010 is displayed when a G code not listed in the G
code list is specified or a G code without a corresponding
option is specified.
4 G codes of different groups can be specified in the same
block.
If G codes of the same group are specified in the same
block, the G code specified last is valid.
5 If a G code of group 01 is specified in a canned cycle, the
canned cycle is canceled in the same way as when a G80
command is specified. G codes of group 01 are not affected
by G codes for specifying a canned cycle.
6 When G code system A is used for a canned cycle, only the
initial level is provided at the return point.
7 G codes are displayed for each group number.
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.3 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN)
APPENDIX E STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON,
WHEN CLEAR AND WHEN RESET
820
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
11.3
PROGRAM
CONFIGURATION
Components Descriptions
Leader section
M30 ;
% Tape end
821
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 CTV
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE N99
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 EOR SBP
NOTE
The M code is judged to be M198 when zero is specified as
the setting value.
822
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13 Program Configuration
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
823
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
11.4
INCH/METRIC
CONVERSION
Signal
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F002 INCH
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 INI
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1001 INM
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
824
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx
NOTE
When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before
continuing operation.
0 0 Linear axis
D Inch/metric conversion is done.
D All coordinate values are linear axis type.
(Not rounded in 0 to 360_)
D Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer toparame-
ter No. 3624)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1201 ZPI
1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate
system setting is performed
825
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
[Unit of data]
Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Linear axis
0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
(Metric input)
Linear axis
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
(Inch input)
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
1251 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for setting a
coordinate system automatically when input is performed in inches
NOTE
This parameter is valid when ZPI in parameter 1201#1 is set
to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1403 MIF
NOTE
M series are not equipped with this parameter. Cutting
feedrates are specified by F commands in units of 0.001
mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001 inches/min for
inch machines.
826
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3104 MCN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3405 AUX
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5006 OIM
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8003 PIM
827
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Warning
WARNING
When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (G21) and
vice versa, the tool compensation value must be re–set
according to the least input increment.
However, when bit 0 (OIM) of parameter 5006 is 1, tool
compensation values are automatically converted and
need not be re–set.
Note
NOTE
1 When the least input increment and the least command
increment systems are different, the maximum error is half
of the least command increment. This error is not
accumulated.
2 Reference position return is performed at a low speed for
the first G28 command after the inch input is switched to the
metric input or vice versa.
3 The inch and metric input can also be switched using
settings.
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.9.3 Inch/metric conversion(G20, G21)
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
828
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
11.5
HIGH SPEED CYCLE
CUTTING
General This function can convert the machining profile to a data group that can
be distributed as pulses at highĆspeed by the macro compiler and macro
executor. The function can also call and execute the data group as a
machining cycle using the CNC command (G05 command).
NOTE
This function cannot be used for two-path control.
D Format
G05 P10fff Lfff ;
P10fff is number of the cutting cycle to be called first:
P10001 to P10999
Lfff is repetition count of the cutting cycle
(L1 applies when this parameter is omitted.) :
L1 to L999
Call and execute the data for the high speed cutting cycle specified by the
macro compiler and macro executor using the above command.
Cycle data can be prepared for up to 999 cycles. Select the machining
cycle by address P. More than one cycle can be called and executed in
series using the cycle connection data in the header.
Specify the repetition count of the called machining cycle by address L.
The repetition count in the header can be specified for each cycle.
The connection of cycles and their repetition count are explained below
with an example.
D Number of control axes Six axes maximum can be controlled. Six axes can be controlled
simultaneously.
D Pulse distribution Set the number of pulses per cycle in parameter 7501#4 to #6 as a macro
variable (#20000 to #85535) for high speed cycle cutting using the macro
compiler and macro executor.
The unit for the number of pulses is the least input increment.
829
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Configuration of high– Data for the high speed cycle cutting is assigned to variables (#20000 to
speed cycle cutting data #85535) for the high–speed cycle cutting by the macro compiler and
macro executor.
Number of Registered Specify the number of cycles (number of headers) of highĆspeed cycle
Cycles cutting data. Values from 1 to 999 can be specified.
Header The header for highĆspeed cycle cutting data has the following
configuration:
Header configuration
#20011/20027/20043.. Total number of fixed data items for the 1st axis
#20012/20028/20044.. Total number of fixed data items for the 2nd axis
#20013/20029/20045.. Total number of fixed data items for the 3rd axis
#20014/20030/20046.. Total number of fixed data items for the 4th axis
#20015/20031/20047.. Total number of fixed data items for the 5th axis
#20016/20032/20048.. Total number of fixed data items for the 6th axis
830
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Explanations
Cycle repetition count Specify the repetition count for the cycle. Values from 0 to 32767 can be
specified. When 0 or 1 is specified, the cycle is executed once.
Cycle connection data Specify the number (1 to 999) of the cycle to be executed after the cycle.
When no connection cycle exists because of the last cycle, specify 0.
Number of data items Specify the number of data items per cycle. Valid values are from 1 to
32767.
When a fixed data item is specified, the fixed data is repeated for the
specified number of times in one cycle.
Data type
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
– – r6 r5 r4 r3 r2 r1 – – t6 t5 t4 t3 t2 t1
The bits from t1 to t6, corresponding to the 1st to 6th axes, have the fol-
lowing meanings:
0: Distribution data is always constant.
1: Distribution data is variable or fixed.
When the distribution data is variable or fixed, the bits from r1 to r6, corre-
sponding to the 1st to 6th axes, have the following meanings:
0: Distribution data is read forward.
1: Distribution data is read backwards.
Because the data consists of bits, it is necessary to use a binaryĆcoded dec-
imal value when setting it using the macro compiler and macro executor.
Example)
When constant data is assigned to the 1st and 2nd axes and variable data
is assigned to the 3rd and 4th axes, #20004 = 12; (t4 and t3: 1, t2 and t1:
0)
Variables assigned to ⋅Constant data
data for the 1st to 6th When the corresponding data type bit (t6 to t1) is 0, specify
axes “distribution data value”.
⋅Variable data
When the corresponding data type bit (t6 to t1) is 1 and the total number
of fixed data items = 0, specify “(Storing start data variable No. of the
distribution data)/10”.
⋅Fixed data
When the corresponding data type bit (t6 to t1) is 1 and the total number
of fixed data items is other than 0, specify “(Storing start data variable
No. of the distribution data)/10”.
The applicable value for the variable data and fixed data is 2001 to
8553. It is not possible to start storing data in the executable format
from a variable No. that is not a multiple of 10.
To read the distribution data backwards, set the variable No. of the data
to be distributed last. For example, to read the distribution data in
#25000 to #25999 backwards, set 25000 as the data assignment
variable.
Total number of fixed Set the length of the fixed data for the cycle.
data items for the first to The first address of the fixed data must be specified by the data
6th axes assignment variable. When the total number of fixed data items = 0 and
the corresponding data type bit (t6 to t1) is 1, the data is regarded as a
variable data.
831
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7501 IPC IT2 IT1 IT0 CSP
IPC IT2 IT1 IT0
IPC
0: The system does not monitor whether a distribution process is
stopped while highĆspeed cutting (G05) is performed with highĆspeed
remote buffer A or B or in a highĆspeed cycle.
1: The system monitors whether a distribution process is stopped while
highĆspeed machining (G05) is performed with highĆspeed remote
buffer A or B or in a highĆspeed cycle cutting.
(Alarms 179 and 000 are simultaneously issued if the distribution
process is stopped. In this case, the power must be turned off then on
again.)
NOTE
The distribution process stops, when the host cannot send
data with the highĆspeed remote buffer by the specified
time.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7505 HUNx HSCx
HSCx
NOTE
After setting this parameter, the power must be turned off
then on again.
832
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
NOTE
This parameter is used when a data item to be distributed
exceeds a word in terms of the least input increment or the
maximum travel speed.
CNC distributes ten times the value for cutting in a
high–speed cycle for the axes in which HUNx of this
parameter is set to 1. Therefore, set a value one tenth the
value to be distributed for cutting in a highĆspeed cycle
along the specified axes.
7510 Maximum number of simultaneously controlled axes when G05 is specified during
high–speed cycle cutting or No. of controlled axes in high–speed remote buffer
833
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Warning
WARNING
Single block stop, dry run, feedrate override, automatic
acceleration/deceleration and handle interruption are
disabled during highĆspeed cycle cutting.
834
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Note
NOTE
Set the total number of distribution data items for one cycle
to a multiple of the following values, according to the
distribution cycle. This does not apply when the distribution
cycle is 16 ms or 8 ms.
If the total number is not a multiple of one of the following
values, movement in the remaining cycle becomes zero.
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.20 High speed cycle cutting
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
835
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
11.6
CUSTOM MACRO
11.6.1
Custom Macro
General Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the
custom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logic
operations, and conditional branches for easy development of general
programs such as pocketing and user–defined canned cycles. A
machining program can call a custom macro with a simple command, just
like a subprogram.
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: #1=#18/2 ;
: G01 G42 X#1 Y#1 F300 ;
: G02 X#1 Y–#1 R#1 ;
G65 P9010 R50.0 L2 ; :
: :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
r β
α
Bolt hole circles as shown in the above figure can be made easily.
Once a custom macro body for the bolt hole circle is programmed and
registered, the CNC can operate as if it has the bolt hole circle cutting
function.
Programmers can use the bolt hole circle function by using the following
command only:
(Example of calling bolt hole circle)
836
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
G65 P p R r A α Bβ K k ;
P : Macro number of bolt hole circle
r : Radius
α : Start angle
β : Angle between circles
k : Number of circles
Signal
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read by
a custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used for interface
signals between custom macros and the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.
Correspondence
Signals Q’ty Variables
of values
UI000 1 #1000
UI001 1 #1001
UI002 1 #1002
UI003 1 #1003 “0” at “0” and
: : : “1” at “1”
UI014 1 #1014
UI015 1 #1015
ȍ {#[1000 ) i]
15
*1 Variable value #1032 + 2 i}
i+0
837
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read or
written by a custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used for
interface signals between custom macros and the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.
Correspondence of
Signals Q’ty Variables
values
UO000 1 #1100
UO001 1 #1101
UO002 1 #1102
UO003 1 #1103 “0” at “0” and
: : : “1” at “1”
UO014 1 #1114
UO015 1 #1115
ȍ{#[1100 ) i]
15
ȍ{2
30
*2 Variable value #1133 + i
V i}–2 31 V 31
i+0
Signal Address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 UI011 UI010 UI009 UI008
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F055 UO015 UO014 UO013 UO012 UO011 UO010 UO009 UO008
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F056 UO107 UO106 UO105 UO104 UO103 UO102 UO101 UO100
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F057 UO115 UO114 UO113 UO112 UO111 UO110 UO109 UO108
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F058 UO123 UO122 UO121 UO120 UO119 UO118 UO117 UO116
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F059 UO131 UO130 UO129 UO128 UO127 UO126 UO125 UO124
838
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Parameter
Other settings
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6001 CLV CCV TCS CRO PV5 PRT
839
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6014 ]7 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0
NOTE
The M code is judged to be M198 when zero is specified as
the setting value.
840
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
6051 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9011
6052 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9012
6053 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9013
6054 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9014
6055 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9015
6056 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9016
6057 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9017
6058 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9018
6059 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9019
NOTE
Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called
by G00.
841
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called
by M00.
6081 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9021
6082 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9022
6083 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9023
6084 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9024
6085 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9025
6086 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9026
6087 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9027
6088 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9028
6089 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9029
NOTE
Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called
by M00.
6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005
NOTE
Set 0 when no subprogram is called
842
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
843
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Caution
CAUTION
Machine tool builders: You are requested to attach your
custom macro program tape or program list to the CNC unit
without fail.
If it is necessary to replace part program storage memory
due to a failure, FANUC servicemen or end user in charge
of maintenance should know the contents of your custom
macro for the purpose of repairing the trouble immediately.
844
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.16 Custom macro
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
845
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
11.6.2
Interruption Type
Custom Macro
Use of the interruption type custom macro function allows the user to call
a program during execution of an arbitrary block of another program.
This allows programs to be operated to match situations which vary from
time to time.
M96
Pxxxx;
Interrupt
signal O xxxx;
(UINT)*
Interrupt
signal
(UINT)*
M99 (Pffff);
Nffff;
M97 Interrupt
; signal
(UINT)*
846
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Signal
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G053 UNIT
Parameter
847
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
These parameters can be used when MPR, #4 of parameter
No. 6003, is 1. M96 is used as a valid M code and M97 is
used as an invalid M code when MPR is 0, irrespective of the
state of this parameter.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.16.11 Interruption type custom macro
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
848
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
11.6.3
Custom Macro
Variables Common to
Two–path Control
(T Series (Two–path
Control))
Parameter
NOTE
1 This parameter is dedicated to the 2–path control.
2 When this parameter is set to 0, custom macro variables
100 to 149 are not used commonly between two paths.
3 Custom macro variables that can be used as custom macro
variables common between two paths are from 100 to 149.
Custom macro variable 150 and subsequent custom macro
variables cannot be used commonly between two paths,
even if this parameter is set to 51 or more.
849
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
1 This parameter is dedicated to the 2–path control.
2 When this parameter is set to 0, custom macro variables
500 to 531 are not used commonly between two paths.
3 Custom macro variables that can be used as custom macro
variables common between two paths are from 500 to 531.
Custom macro variable 532 and subsequent custom macro
variables cannot be used commonly for both tool posts,
even if this parameter is set to 33 or more.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.22.3 Custom macro variables common to tool
(For Machining Center) posts
(B–62764EN)
850
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
11.7
CANNED CYCLE
(M SERIES)/CANNED
CYCLE FOR HOLE
MACHINING
(T SERIES)
General Canned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs.
With a canned cycle, a frequently–used machining operation can be
specified in a single block with a G function; without canned cycles,
normally more than one block is required. In addition, the use of canned
cycles can shorten the program to save memory.
Operation 1
Initial level
Operation 2 Operation 6
Point R level
Operation 5
Operation 3
Rapid traverse
Operation 4
Feed
851
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
SPINDLE CONTROL In some canned cycles, a spindle command to rotate the spindle in reverse
direction may be output.
852
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
X, Y
Z
Z
Z
Dwell Dwell
(Note) (Note)
Note) It is possible to not output M05 M03 M05 M04
M05 code by using parame-
ter M5T (No. 5101#6). MF MF MF MF Next block
(G98 mode)
X, Y X or Y
X
or Y
Z
Z
Z
Dwell
(Note)
M05 M19 M03 M03
MF MF Return to ini- MF MF
Note) It is possible to not output tial level in
M05 code by using parame- G98 mode
ter M5B (No. 5101#7).
FIN FIN FIN FIN
Next block
G84 (tapping cycle) (G98 mode)
Z
Z
Dwell Dwell
(Note) (Note)
853
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
X, Y
MF MF MF
X or Y X or Y
X, Y
X or Y
Z
Z
Dwell
(Note 2)
(Note)
M05 M1
M03 M05 M19 M03
9
MF MF MF MF MF MF
G88 (Boring cycle) (Note 1) Back boring cycle is not used in G99 mode but in
G98 mode.
(Note 2) It is possible to not output M05 code using pa-
rameter M5B (no. 5101#7).
X, Y
Z
Dwell Z
M05 M03
MF MF
Return to initial level in G98 mode or
R point level in G99 mode.
FIN FIN
854
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
X, C
(Z, C)
Z
(X) Z
(X) Z Z
(X)
Dwell Dwell
MF MF MF MF Next block
(G98 mode)
M code used for C–axis When an M code specified in parameter No.5110 for C–axis
clamp/unclamp (T series) clamp/unclamp is coded in a program, the CNC issues the M code for
C–axis clamp after the tool is positioned and before the tool is fed in rapid
traverse to the point–R level. The CNC also issues the M code (M code
C–axis clamp +1) for C–axis unclamp after the tool retracts to the point–R
level. The tool dwells for the time specified in parameter No. 5111.
Tapping signal During a tapping cycle, the tapping signal is output. The tapping signal
is also output while the G code of the tapping cycle is valid.
Feed hold When the feed hold key is pressed during tapping, the movement is not
stopped immediately but the movement is stopped when the tool is
returned to level R.
Dry run The TDR bit (bit 5 of parameter No. 1401) specifies whether dry run is
valid during tapping.
855
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
Tapping signal
TAP <F001, #5>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Reports that the system is in tapping mode.
[Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when:
– The system is in tapping cycle mode.
G74, G84: M series
G84, G88: T series
– The system is in tapping mode.
G63: M series
The signal is set to 0 when:
– The system is in neither tapping cycle mode nor tapping mode.
– A reset or emergency stop is specified.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F001 TAP
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5101 M5T ILV RTR FXY
M5B M5T RD2 RD1 EXC FXY
NOTE
In the case of the T system, this parameter is valid only for
the drilling canned cycle in the Series 15 format.
EXC G81
0 : Specifies a drilling canned cycle
1 : Specifies an external operation command
RTR G83 and G87
0 : Specify a high–speed peck drilling cycle
1 : Specify a peck drilling cycle
ILV Initial point position in drilling canned cycle
0 : Not updated by reset
1 : Updated by reset
856
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
RD2, RD1 Set the axis and direction in which the tool in drilling canned cycle G76 or
G87 is got free. RD2 and RD1 are set as shown below by plane selection.
RD2 RD1 G17 G18 G19
0 0 +X +Z +Y
0 1 –X –Z –Y
1 0 +Y +X +Z
1 1 –Y –X –Z
M5T When a spindle rotates from the forward to the reverse direction and vice
versa in tapping cycles G84 and G74 for M series (G84 and G88 for T
series), befor M04 or M03 is output:
For T series
0 : Not output M05
1 : Outputs M05
For M series
0 : Outputs M05
1 : Not output M05
M5B In drilling canned cycles G76 and G87:
0 : Outputs M05 before an oriented spindle stops
1 : Not output M05 before an oriented spindle stops
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5102 RDI RAB
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5103
SIJ
857
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
5111 Dwell time when C–axis unclamping is specified in drilling canned cycle
NOTE
M03 is output when “0” is set.
NOTE
M04 is output when “0” is set.
858
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
q : Depth of cut
d : Return value
R point
q
d
q
d
Z point
Fig. 11.7 (e) High–speed peck drilling cycle (G73) for 16–MB
For 16–TB, this parameter sets the return or clearance value in drilling
canned cycle G83.
R point R point
q q
d d
q q
d d
q q
Z point Z point
859
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
5115
Clearance canned cycle G83
q : Depth of cut
d : Clearance value
R point
q
d
q
d
Z point
Fig. 11.7 (g) Peck drilling cycle (G83) for 16–MB
Note
NOTE
A parameter FXY (No. 5101#0) can be set to the Z axis
always used as the drilling axis. When FXY=0, the Z axis is
always the drilling axis.
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.1 Canned cycle
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
860
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
11.8
EXTERNAL MOTION
FUNCTION
(M SERIES)
Every time positioning for the IP_ move command is completed, the CNC
sends an external operation signal to the machine. An external operation
signal is output for each positioning operation until canceled by G80 or
a group 01 G code.
Basic procedure 1 Once positioning for a move command has been completed, the CNC
sets the external operation signal EF to 1.
2 When the EF signal is set to 1, the PMC executes drilling or another
operation. Once the operation has been completed, the PMC sets
completion signal FIN to 1.
3 The CNC resets the EF signal to 0 upon the elapse of the time (TFIN)
specified in parameter No. 3011 after the FIN signal is set to 1.
4 When the EF signal is set to 0, the PMC resets the FIN signal to 0.
5 The CNC starts executing the next block.
The timing diagram is shown below:
G81 command
Next block
Positioning
EF
Machine operation
FIN
TFIN
861
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
External Operation
Signal
EF<F008#0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Reports that the positioning of G81 has been completed in the external
motion function, and that a special external operation is required.
[Output condition] For details of the output condition and procedure, see the ”basic
procedure”, described previously.
For details of completion signal FIN, see section 8.1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F008 EF
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5101 EXC
Caution
CAUTION
1 When this function is used, canned cycles (G73, G74, G76,
and G82 to G89) cannot be used.
2 When the high–speed M, S, T, or B interface is used, the
signals used by this function are transferred in high–speed
mode. See Section 8.4.
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.8 External operation function
(For Machining Center) (B–62764EN)
862
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
11.9
CANNED CYCLE
(T SERIES)/MULTIPLE
REPETITIVE CANNED
CYCLE (T SERIES)
General This option canned cycles to make CNC programming easy. For instance,
the data of the finish work shape describes the tool path for rough
machining. And also, a canned cycles for the thread cutting is available.
The following example shows stock removals in turning type I.
If a finished shape of A to A’ to B is given by a program as in the figure
below, the specified area is removed by ∆d (depth of cut), with finishing
allowance ∆u/2 and ∆w left.
C
B (R) A
(R) ∆d
(F) e
45,
(F)
Program command
∆u/2
∆w
A’
G71 U (∆d) R (e) ;
G71 P (ns) Q (nf) U (∆u) W (∆w) F (f ) S (s ) T (t)
N (ns)⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
F____ The move command of a finished shape of
S____ A to A’ to B is specified in the blocks from
T____ sequence number ns to nf.
N (nf)⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅;
∆d : Depth of cut (radius designation)
Designate without sign. The cutting direction depends on the direction
AA’. This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value
is designated. Also this value can be specified by the parameter (No. 5132),
and the parameter is changed by the program command.
e : Escaping amount
This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value
is designated. Also this value can be specified by the parameter (No. 5133),
and the parameter is changed by the program command.
ns : Sequence number of the first block for the program of finishing shape.
nf : Sequence number of the last block for the program of finishing shape.
∆u : Distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction (diameter / radius
designation).
∆w : Distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction.
f,s,t : Any F , S, or T function contained in blocks ns to nf in the cycle is ignored,
and the F, S, or T function in this G71 block is effective.
863
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
Chamfering signal
CDZ<G053#7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Executes chamfering in a threading cycle. Specify the chamfering
distance in parameter No. 5130.
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, chamfering is not executed in the threading
cycle.
When the signal is set to 0, chamfering is executed in the threading cycle.
Approx. Approx.
45_ 45_
γ γ
Fig. 11.9 (a) Straight thread cutting cycle Fig. 11.9 (b)Taper thread cutting cycle
Set the chamfering distance g to the parameter No. 5130. When the
optional multiple repetitive canned cycle is provided, the chamfering
distance can be specified in G76. The chamfering angle is made smaller
than 45_ by the remaining pulses in the automatic acceleration/
deceleration circuit and servo system.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G053 CDZ
Parameter
NOTE
This parameter is valid for multiple repetitive turning canned
cycle type I.
864
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
QSR Before a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70 to G73) is started, a check
to see if the program contains a block that has the sequence number
specified in address Q is:
0 : Not made.
1 : Made. (If the sequence number specified in address Q cannot be
found, an alarm occurs and the canned cycle is not executed.)
Chamfering distance in
thread cutting cycles
G76 and G92
5130 Chamfering distance in thread cutting cycles G76 and G92
Escape in multiple
repetitive canned cycles
G71 and G72.
5133 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72.
865
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Escape in multiple
repetitive canned cycles
G73
5135 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in X–axis direction
866
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
867
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
This parameter sets the tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle
G76.
868
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
067 CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI G70, G71, G72, or G73 command
MODE with address P and Q was specified.
Modify the program.
069 FORMAT ERROR IN The final move command in the
G70–G73 blocks specified by P and Q of G70,
G71, G72, or G73 ended with cham-
fering or corner R.
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.1 Canned cycle
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN) II.14.2 Multiple repetitive canned cycle
869
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
11.10
MIRROR IMAGE FOR
DOUBLE TURRETS
(T SERIES)
Offset value of
X
tool post A
Tool post A
(3)
60
120 (1)
40φ
Z
80φ
180
120φ
(2) 120
Offset value of
tool post B Tool post B
870
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Parameter
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.6 Mirror image for double turrets
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN)
871
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
11.11
INDEX TABLE
INDEXING FUNCTION
(M SERIES)
General By specifying indexing positions (angles) for the indexing axis (one
rotation axis, A, B, or C), the index table of the machining center can be
indexed.
Before and after indexing, the index table is automatically unclamped or
clamped .
Basic Procedure The control axis that indexes the index table can be named A, B or C. It
will be referred to as “B” in the following discussion.
The positioning angle for the index table is commanded by the numerics
following “B” in the program command, which is an independent block.
Both absolute and incremental commands are possible, but the value after
“B” is the integer times the numeric set by the parameter:
(Example) G00G90B100000; Absolute command
(Positioning angle 10 degrees)
G00G91B20.0; Incremental command
(Move distance 20 degrees)
There are two variations of the procedure (type A and type B) to set the
index table position; the difference is in the ON/OFF timing of the
position control servo. The sequence of events and the difference between
the variations are described below, followed by time charts showing them
graphically.
(1) Assume Bbbbb is ordered by the command program.
(2) The CNC turns the B axis unclamp signal BUCLP <F061#0> to “ 1
”. (Type B -- When BUCLP is turned to “ 1 ”, the position control servo
for the B axis is turned ON.)
(3) On the PMC side, the clamp of the B axis is released; when completed,
the B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL <G038#6> turns to
“0”.
(4) The CNC then turns the B axis unclamp signal BUCLP to “0”, to
indicate it received the *BEUCL signal.
(5) When the PMC is notified that BUCLP has been turned to “0”, the
PMC should turn *BEUCL to “1”.
In type B, B–axis unclamp signal BUCLP is turned to “0”, B–axis
position control is made in servo–on state, B–axis is rotated, and the
B axis is stopped at the specified position. B axis always moves at
rapid traverse.
(6) When the B axis stops at the specified position, CNC turns B–axis
clamp signal BCLP<F061#1>to 1. In type A, signal BCLP is set to “1”
and B–axis position control is made in servo–off state.
(7) When BCLP is turned to “1” on the PMC side, the B axis is clamped
mechanically (with a clutch or shot pin, for example). When the clamp
is completed, the B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP <G038#7>
is turned to “0”.
872
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
(8) When *BECLP is turned to “0”, the CNC then turns BCLP to “0”,
informing it received the *BECLP signal. (Type B -- When BCLP
turns to “0”, the B axis position control servo is turned off.)
(9) On the PMC side, when BCLP changes to “0”, *BECLP is turned to
“1”. This completes the sequence.
The time charts for these operations are shown in the figures below.
B axis rotation
Fig. 11.11 (a) Time chart for positioning index table (type A)
B axis rotation
Fig. 11.11 (b) Time chart for positioning index table (type B)
873
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
B axis rotation
Fig. 11.11 (c) Manual reference position return of B axis time chart (type A)
Type A and Type B As described in the basic procedure, type A differs from type B in that the
servo used for B–axis position control is turned on or off at the different
timing.
Type A is suitable for a system in which the B–axis is clamped with shot
pins.
Type B is suitable for a system in which the B–axis is clamped with a
clutch.
Minimum indexing angle When the B–axis is clamped with shot pins, the mechanism can be
indexed at only a limited number of positions. The minimum indexing
angle can be specified in parameter No. 5512. If an angle which is not a
multiple of this minimum indexing angle is specified in indexing, alarm
No. 135 is issued.
Direction of rotation The direction of rotation can be set to one of the following.
– Whichever direction has the shorter distance (INC, bit 3 of parameter
No. 5500)
– Direction specified with a command
– Usually the positive direction. Only when a particular M code is
specified in the same block, the axis rotates in the negative direction
(parameter No. 5511).
874
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Signal
B axis unclamp
completion signal
*BEUCP<G038#6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Notifies the CNC of completion of the release of the B axis from the
mechanical clamp.
[Operation] The operation and procedure are the same as those described in the basic
procedure for positioning the index table.
875
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G038 *BECLP *BEUCP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F061 BCLP BUCLP
Parameter
Note 1 When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before continuing
operation.
[Data type] Bit axis
ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis
0 0 Linear axis
D Inch/metric conversion is done.
D All coordinate values are linear axis type.
(Not rounded in 0 to 360_)
D Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer topara-
meter No. 3624)
876
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Negative direction
rotation command M
code
5511 Negative0direction rotation command M code
877
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
WARNING
Set ABS, #2 of parameter No. 5500, to 1.
NOTE
If zero is specified as the setting value, any command can
be specified irrespective of the unit of angle.
Warning
WARNING
1 The secondary auxiliary function can be used if the address
is different from that of the indexing axis.
2 If the incremental command is used for indexing of the index
table, the workpiece zero point offset value on the index
table axis must always be 0. That is, the machine
coordinate system must always agree with the workpiece
coordinate system of the index table axis.
3 The dry run signal DRN is ineffective during positioning of
the B axis.
4 The machine lock signal MLK is functional during
positioning of the B axis. However, while the B axis is
moving, after the movement ends, the MLK is functional.
878
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Note
NOTE
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15.11 Index table indexing function
(For Machining Center) (B–62764EN)
879
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
11.12
SCALING (M SERIES)
Scaling up or down Least input increment of scaling magnification is: 0.001 or 0.00001.
along all axes at the It depends on parameter SCR (No. 5400#07) which value is selected. If
same rate of scaling P is not specified on the block of scaling (G51X_Y_Z_P_ ;), the
magnification scaling magnification set to parameter (No. 5411) is applicable. If X,Y,Z
are omitted, the tool position where the G51 command was specified
serves as the scaling center.
P4
P3
P4l P3l
P0
P1l P2l
P1 P2
0 X
P0:Scaling center
880
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Scaling of each axis, Each axis can be scaled by different magnifications. Also when a negative
programmable mirror magnification is specified, a mirror image is applied. First of all, set a
image (negative parameter XSC (No. 5400#6) which validates each axis scaling (mirror
magnification) image).
Then, set parameter SCLx (No. 5401#0) to enable scaling along each axis.
Least input increment of scaling magnification of each axis (I, J, K) is
0.001 or 0.00001( set parameter SCR (No. 5400#7)).
Magnification is set to parameter 5421 within the range ±0.00001 to
±9.99999 or ±0.001 to ±9.999.
If a negative value is set, mirror image is effected.
If magnification I, J or K is not commanded, a magnification value set to
parameter (No. 5421) is effective. However, a value other than 0 must be
set to the parameter.
Programmed figure
D
Scaled figure
C 0
X axis
A
B
881
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
Valid/invalid setting to
each axis scaling
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5401 SCLx
WARNING
Parameter No. 5421 becomes valid when scaling for every
axis is valid. (XSC, #6 of parameter No. 5400 is “1”.)
882
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15.9 Scaling (G50, G51)
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
883
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
11.13
COORDINATE
SYSTEM ROTATION
Angle of rotation
Center of rotation
884
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
FORMAT
G17
G18 G68 (G68.1)αβR ; Start rotation of a coordinate system.
G19
Coordinate system rotation mode
(The coordinate system is rotated.)
G69 (G69.1); Coordinate system rotation cancel command
Note:G68/G69 for M series, G68.1/G69.1 for T series.
MEANING OF COMMAND
G17 (G18 or G19) : Select the plane in which contains the figure to be
rotated.
α_β_ Absolute command for two of the x_,y_,and Z_ axes that
correspond to the current plane selected by a
command (G17, G18, or G19). The command specifies
the coordinates of the center of rotation for the values
specified subsequent to G68.
R_ Angular displacement with a positive value indicates
counter clockwise rotation. Parameter 5400#0
selects whether the specified angular displacement is
always considered an absolute value or is considered an
absolute or incremental value depending on the specified
G code (G90 or G91).
(α,β)
X
0
885
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
Angle specification
method of coordinate
system rotation #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5400 RIN
Angular displacement
used when no angular
displacement is
specified for coordinate
system rotation
5410 Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for
coordinate system rotation
144 ILLEGAL PLANE SE- The coordinate rotation plane and arc
LECTED or cutter compensation C plane must
be the same. Modify the program.
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15.10 Coordinate system rotation (G68, G69)
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
886
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
11.14
THREE–DIMENSIONAL
COORDINATE
CONVERSION
(M SERIES)
General The coordinate system can be rotated about an axis by specifying the
center of rotation, direction of the axis of rotation, and angular
displacement. This coordinate conversion function is quite useful for
three–dimensional machining using a diesinking machine. By applying
three–dimensional coordinate conversion to a program generated for
machining on XY plane, identical machining can be executed on a desired
plane.
Z
X z
Three–dimen- y
sional coordinate
conversion
Parameter
Setting relative position
and absolute position
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3104 DAC DAL DRC DRL
887
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
888
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.10 Three–dimensional coordinate conversion
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
889
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
11.15
RETRACE (M SERIES)
General A tool can retrace the tool path along which the tool has moved. This
operation is referred to as retrace. In addition, a tool can move forward
again along the path that the tool has retraced. This operation is referred
to as re–forward. The tool can then resume machining according to the
program when it returns to the position where it started retrace.
By using the retrace signal RVS, which is an input signal from the PMC
to the control unit, retrace and re–forward can be performed. Retrace is
performed when the retrace signal RVS turns to “1”. Re–forward
operation is performed when the retrace signal turns to “0”. In retrace, a
tool can retrace blocks that have been executed in the automatic operation
mode (memory command, tape command, manual data input), but a limit
is imposed on the number of blocks that can be retraced. For detailed
information, refer to the operator’s manual.
Whether to use the same federate as specified for normal operation or use
a feedrate dedicated to retrace can be determined by setting parameter No.
1414.
Signal
890
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
[Operation] When RVS turns to “1” while the tool is being moved forward (hereafter
referred to as forward), the tool retraces the tool path along which it was
moved. Note, however, that the tool does not start retrace immediately
after this signal turns to “1” ; the tool starts retrace after the block
performing the current forward operation is executed. When RVS turns
to “0” while retrace is in progress, the tool switches from retrace operation
to re–forward. In this case also, the tool does not start re–forward to
resume machining immediately after this signal turns to “0” retrace; the
tool starts re–forward after retracing all commands of the block currently
subject to retrace.
The movement of a tool can be immediately switched from forward to
retrace or from retrace to re–forward. For this purpose, first turn the feed
hold signal *SP to “0” to stop automatic operation. Then, change the state
of RVS after the automatic operation start in–progress signal STL turns
to “0” and the automatic operation stop state is set. And the feed hold
lamp SPL turns to “1”. Next, turn feed hold signal *SP the automatic
operation start signal ST from “1” to “0” to start automatic operation.
Then, the tool can switch its movement to retrace or re–forward during
execution of a block.
891
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Retrace–in–progress
signal (RVSL)
<F082#2> [Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that retrace is in progress.
[Output condition] This signal turns to “1”when:
· Tool is in retrace with the retrace signal RVS turned to “1”.
This signal turns to “0”
· The tool is in forward or re–forward with the retrace signal RVS turned
to “0”.
· The tool is at stop because of no block to retrace during retracing.
When the tool is in retrace, the M functions, S functions, T functions, and
second auxiliary functions are executed in the same way as when the tool
is moving forward. During retrace, this signal can be used on the PMC, if
required, to prevent these functions from being executed in the same way
as when the tool is moving forward.
Particularly when an M function, S function, T function, or second
auxiliary function is specified in a block containing a move command, the
positions where the code signals and strobe signal are output differ,
depending on whether the tool is in forward (or re–forward) or retrace. So,
take action on the PMC by using this signal and distribution end signal
DEN as required.
Position to which auxiliary
function is output during
retracing
Retrace start
(Retrace signal RVS is “1”)
Block in which the move command and
auxiliary function are included
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G007 RVS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F082 RVSL
Parameter
1414 Feedrate for retrace
892
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
NOTE
When 0 is set in this parameter, the rapid traverse rate that
is set in parameter No. 1420 is used for retrace.
Alarm and Message While a tool is in retrace, the retrace–in–progress signal RVSL is sent, and
the character string RVRS blinks on the CRT screen to signal that the tool
is currently in retrace. When a tool is in re–forward, the character string
RTRY blinks to signal that the tool is currently in re–forward. The
indication of RTRY continues until the tool returns to the block where
retrace was started, that is, until forward movement is resumed. When
there are no more retraceable blocks, the character string RVED blinks to
signal that no further retrace can take place.
Warning
WARNING
Positioning (G00)
If non–linear–interpolation positioning is executed (the LRP
bit (bit 1 of parameter No. 1401) is set to 0), the retrace tool
path will not agree with the forward tool path. The
re–forward tool path agrees with the forward tool path.
If the linear interpolation positioning is executed (the LRP bit
(bit 1 of parameter No. 1401) is set to 1), the retrace tool
path agrees with the forward tool path.
893
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.4.9 Retrace function
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
894
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
11.16
MACRO COMPILER/
EXECUTER
General There are two types of NC programs; those which, once created, are
scarcely changed, and those which are changed for each machining type.
The former are programs created by the custom macro, and the latter are
machining programs. If programs of these types are executed
simultaneously, a battery may run out or the custom macro may be
destroyed by error operation.
Such problems can be solved by this function. The custom macro created
by a machine tool builder is converted to an execute-form program, be
stored in the FLASH ROM module, and be executed.
Features
(1) Since the program is stored after converted to an execute-form
program, the execution speed is high. The machining time is then
reduced, and the precision is improved.
(2) Since the program is stored in FLASH ROM, there is no problem of
battery extinction or custom macro destruction by error operation.
The reliability is improved.
(3) Since the stored program is not displayed on a program screen, the
know-how of the machine tool builder is protected.
(4) Since the custom macro is stored in FLASH ROM, the program edit
memory can be used efficiently.
(5) The user can call the macro easily without knowing the stored
program. A custom macro can be created and executed in the program
edit memory as usual.
(6) An original screen can be created by using the graphic display or
selecting screens by the soft key. The machine tool builder can extend
the control function by using such functions as machining program
creation and edit control, reader/punch interface control, and PMC
data read/write functions.
Note
NOTE
When the macro executor is attached, the order-made
macro cannot be specified.
Reference Item
Macro compiler/executer programming manual (B–61803E–1)
895
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
11.17
SMALL HOLE PECK
DRILLING CYCLE
(M SERIES)
Retracting
(bottom of hole → minimum clearance ∆ , incremental)
Retracting
( → to point R, absolute)
Repeated until
Forwarding
point Z is reached
(point R → to point with hole bottom + clearance ∆, absolute)
Cutting
(second and subsequent times, cut of depth Q + ∆, incremental)
* Dwell
* Return to point R along the Z–axis (or initial point) = end of cycle
G83(G98) G83(G99)
Initial level
Point R
Point R
Q Q
∆ ∆
∆ ∆
896
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Change of cutting The cutting conditions are changed at each pecking operation (forwarding
conditions → cutting → retracting) during one G83 cycle. (Appropriate setting of
bits 1 and 2 of parameter No. 5160 can specify that the cutting conditions
are not to be changed.)
Changing of cutting The cutting feedrate programmed with the F word is changed during each
feedrate of the second and subsequent cutting operations. Parameter Nos. 5166
and 5167 specify the ratio of change for a case in which a skip signal was
received during the previous cutting operation and a case in which no skip
signal was received during the previous cutting operation, respectively.
When the ratio a at which the cutting feedrate is changed becomes less
than the ratio specified in parameter No. 5168, changing the cutting
feedrate is discontinued. The upper limit to the newly specified cutting
feedrate is the maximum cutting feedrate.
Changing of spindle The cutting feedrate programmed with the S word is changed during each
speed of the second and subsequent cutting operations. Parameter Nos. 5164
and 5165 specify the ratio of change for a case in which a skip signal was
received during the previous cutting operation and a case in which no skip
signal was received during the previous cutting operation, respectively.
Spindle speed = Să g
If the cutting feedrate is clamped at the lower limit, the spindle speed is
not changed. The upper limit to the newly specified spindle speed is the
maximum S analog data.
897
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
NOTE
This signal is used also as a skip signal. (See Section 14.3.)
Small–diameter peck
drilling in progress
signal PECK2 <F066#5>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Indicates whether small–diameter peck drilling is in progress.
[Output condition] This signal becomes “1” under the following conditions.
S When the tool returns from drill axis point R positioning to R
point/initial level, after it was positioned at the hole position along a
nondrill axis.
S The signal does not become “1” during positioning at the hole
position.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 SKIP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F066 PECK2
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5160 CHNRM CHSKP
898
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
CHSKP When the depth of cut per action is satisfied although no overload torque
signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter, the feed and
spindle speed are:
0 : Not changed.
1 : Changed.
5163 M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter
5164 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed when the tool is retracted after an
overload torque signal is received
5165 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed when the tool is retracted without
an overload torque signal received
5166 Percentage of cutting feedrate to be changed when the tool is retracted after an
overload torque signal is received
899
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 255
This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed
when the tool is retracted because the overload torque signal is received in
a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter.
F2 = F1 b1 B 100
F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed
F2: Changed cutting feedrate
b1 is set as a percentage.
5167 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed when the tool is retracted without
an overload torque signal received
5168 Lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate in a peck drilling cycle of a
small diameter
5170 Number of the macro variable to which the total number of retractions during cut-
ting is output
900
B–62753EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
NOTE
The total number cannot be output to common variables
500 to 599.
5171 Number of the macro variable to which the total umber of retractions because of
an overload signal is output
5173 Speed of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a hole when no ad-
dress I is issued
901
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–62753EN–1/01
521 Total number of retract operations due to reception of the overload torque signal
since G83 was issued
The indications of DGN Nos. 520 and 521 are cleared by G80.
522 Coordinates at which the drill axis started retracting (least input command)
523 Difference between the previous and current coordinates at which the drill axis
started retracting (least input increment: previous – current)
Warning
WARNING
Forwarding or retracting is not performed by rapid traverse
positioning. Instead, it is performed with the same
interpolation as for cutting feed. This means exponential
acceleration/deceleration is performed; however, the tool
life management function does not count the tool life during
forwarding or retracting.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II. 14.1.7 Small hole peck drilling cycle
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
902
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
903
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
12.1
DISPLAY/SET
12.1.1
Clock Function
Variable Function
number
#3011 This variable can be used to read the current date (year/
month/day). Year/month/day information is converted to an
apparent decimal number. For example, March 28, 1995 is
represented as 19950328.
#3012 This variable can be used to read the current time (hours/min-
utes/seconds). Hours/minutes/seconds information is con-
verted to an apparent decimal number. For example, 34 min-
utes and 56 seconds after 3 p.m. is represented as 153456.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.4.5 Displaying and Setting Run Time,Parts
(For Machining Center) Count, and Time
(B–62764EN)
904
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.1.2
Displaying Operation
History
General This function displays a history of the key and signal operations, performed by
the NC operator, upon the occurrence of a failure or NC alarm. The history can
also be displayed for previously generated NC alarms.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3106 OHS OHD
905
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
1 While the operation history screen is displayed, history data
is not recorded.
2 When the duration of the on/off state of an input signal is 16
msec or shorter, that state is not recorded in the history. In
addition, note that some signals are not recorded in the
history.
3 Once the memory area becomes full, the oldest data is
deleted to allow new data to be recorded. The memory area
can store information corresponding to approximately 8000
key strokes.
4 Recorded history data is held in memory even after the
power is turned off. Note, however, that the history data is
erased by performing an entire–memory clear operation.
5 For the operation history function, sampling is disabled
when bit 7 (OHS) of parameter No. 3106 is set to 1.
6 Be careful to set the date and time correctly.
When the time is recorded at regular intervals, but no data
is recorded within a defined period, the time for that period
is not recorded.
To input and output operation history data, the
reader/punch interface option is required.
906
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.1.3
Help Function
General The help function displyas on the screen detailed information about
alarms issued in the CNC and about CNC operations. The following
information is displayed.
Operation method If you are not sure about a CNC operation, refer to the help screen for
information about each operation.
Parameter table When setting or referring to a system parameter, if you are not sure of the
number of the parameter, the help screen displays a list of parameter Nos.
for each function.
Note
NOTE
The user cannot switch the screen display from the PMC
screen or CUSTOM screen to the help screen.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.13 HELP FUNCTION
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
907
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
12.1.4
Displaying Alarm
History
General Up to 25 of the most recent CNC alarms are stored and displayed on the
screen.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.7.2 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
908
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.1.5
Servo Tuning Screen
General On the servo tuning screen, parameters required for basic adjustment of
the servo motor and statuses being monitored are listed for each axis.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS
Reference item
Maintenance Manual (B–62755EN) 5.2 Servo Tuning Screen
909
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
12.1.6
Spindle Tuning Screen
General On the spindle tuning screen, parameters required for basic adjustment of
the serial spindle and statuses being monitored are listed. The screen is
only for the main spindle connected to the first amplifier.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVP SPS
Reference item
MAINTENANCE MANUAL 6.4 Spindle tuning screen
(B–62755EN)
910
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.1.7
Waveform Diagnosis
Display
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 SGD
911
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
1 Once the memory area becomes full, the oldest data is
deleted to allow new data to be recorded (stored type).
2 Waveform diagnosis data is held in memory even after the
power is turned off (stored type).
3 Be careful to set the date and time correctly.
4 To output stored type waveform data, the reader/punch
interface option is required.
5 Waveform diagnosis is enabled when bit 0 (SGD) of
parameter No. 3112 is set to 1. To perform waveform
diagnosis, a graphics board is required.
Reference item
Maintenance Manual (B–62755EN) 1.8 Waveform diagnostic display
912
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.1.8
Self–diagnosis
General When a breakdown occurs, in order to quickly determine the cause, the
following should be done.
There are times when it appears that a breakdown has occurred even when
the breakdown has not actually occurred. For example, when the
machinery ceases to operate because it is waiting for an external signal.
In this case, the condition of the interface between the CNC and PMC, or
between the CNC and the machinery, and the conditions within the CNC
need to be investigated.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.7.3 CHECKING BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC
(For Machining Center) SCREEN
(B–62764EN)
913
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
12.1.9
Display of Hardware
and Software
Configuration
General The required hardware/software configuration for CNC maintenance can
be displayed on the CRT.
Reference item
Maintenance Manual (B–62755EN) 1.3 System Configuration Screen
914
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.1.10
Position Display
Neglect
Signal
[Operation] While a signal is set to 0, the current position in the corresponding axis
is displayed. While the signal is set to 1, the current position along the
corresponding axis is not displayed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G198 NPOS8 NPOS7 NPOS6 NPOS5 NPOS4 NPOS3 NPOS2 NPOS1
915
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3115 NDAx NDPx
916
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.1.11
Run Hour and Parts
Count Display
General This function displays the integrated power–on time, the integrated cycle
operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer (started by an input
signal from PMC) on the CRT display screen. The integrated cycle
operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer can be altered and
preset, using the MDI.
In addition to the above, this function displays the count of the total
number of parts machined, the number of parts required and the number
of parts machined on the CRT screen. Each time M02, M30 or a parameter
set M code is executed, the count of the total number of parts machined
and the number of parts machined in memory is incremented by 1.
If a program is prepared so as to execute M02, M30 or a parameter set M
code each time one part machining is completed, the number of parts
machined can be counted automatically.
If the count of the number of parts machined reaches the number of parts
required, a signal is output to the PMC side.
It is possible to change and preset the number of parts required and the
number of parts machined using MDI.
Signal
917
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
General–purpose
integrating meter start
signal
TMRON <G053#0>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] The CNC has an integrating meter which is started by an input signal from
the PMC, as well as integrating meters for counting the automatic
operation time and counting cutting time. The count for this integrating
meter can be displayed on the CRT. The count can be preset by MDI
operation.
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the integrating meter starts counting.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G053 TMRON
F062 PRTSF
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6700 PCM
6710 M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of
machined parts
NOTE
Set value 0 is invalid (the number of parts is not counted for
M00). Data 98 and 99 cannot be set.
918
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
NOTE
When bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1, the
number of parts is not counted with M02 and M30.
NOTE
When bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1, the
number of parts is not counted with M02 and M30.
919
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
920
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.4.5 Displaying and Setting Run Time,Parts
(For Machining Center) Count, and Time
(B–62764EN)
921
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
12.1.12
Graphic Display/
Dynamic Graphic
Display/Background
Graphic
General
Graphic Display It is possible to draw the programmed tool path on the CRT screen, which
makes it possible to check the progress of machining, while observing the
path on the CRT screen.
In addition, it is also possible to enlarge/reduce the screen.
The drawing coordinates (parameter) and graphic parameters must be set
before a tool path can be displayed.
With T series (Two–path control) the tool paths of two tool posts are
displayed on the same screen, one on the right and the other on the left.
O0100 N0100
X 0.000
Y 0.000
Z 0.000
X Y S 0 T
MEM *** *** *** 14:23:03
PARAM GRAPH
M series
X 0001 00021
X 200.000
Z 200.000
T series
922
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Z1 Z2
62.5 62.5
Dynamic graphic display There are the following two functions in Dynamic Graphics.
(M series) Path graphic This is used to draw the path of tool center com-
manded by the part program.
This is used to draw the workpiece figure machined by
Solid graphic
tool movement commanded by the part program.
The path graphic function is used to precisely check the part program for
drawing the tool path with a line. The solid graphic function is used to
draw the workpiece figure to be machined with a program. Thus, it is easy
to recognize roughly the part program. These two functions can be used
freely by switching them.
25.8
923
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÄÄ ÄÄ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÄÄ ÄÄ
Z
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Y
Part Machined
Background graphic The background graphic function allows a programmed tool path to be
(M series) drawn on the screen while machining is being performed by another
program.
When the background graphic mode is set, the previously selected
program remains selected. The tool path of a desired program can be
drawn on the background graphic screen.
The parameters used in actual machining are also used in background
graphic mode. Setting and drawing with the background graphic function
are the same as with the dynamic graphic display function.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 MVG
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3109
BGOF
924
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6500 NZM DPA GUL SPC GRL
DPO
NOTE
This parameter is used for two–path control lathe.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6501 CSR
CSR FIM RID 3PL TLC ORG
925
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
Z X X
Z Z
X X X X
Z X X
X X Z Z
X X
Z X
X X X
926
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
This parameter sets the coordinate system for drawing a single spindle (bit
1 of parameter 6500 = 1) for 2–path control.
The following shows the relationship between the settings and the
drawing coordinate systems:
Z X
X Z
X
Set value = 4 Set value = 5 Set value = 6 Set value = 7
X
Z X Z
X Z X
NOTE
This parameter is specified for each tool post in the 2–path
control. A different drawing coordinate system can be
selected for each tool post.
927
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
6511
Right margin in solid drawing
6512
Left margin in solid drawing
6513
Upper margin in solid drawing
6514
Lower margin in solid drawing
928
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
6512 Left 0 0 0 0
6513 Upper 25 32 25 32
6514 Lower 0 10 0 10
6515
Change in cross–section position in tri–plane drawing
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8100
NWP RST
Note
NOTE
When the dynamic graphics function is used, the graphics
function cannot be used. (M series)
929
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.12.1 GRAPHICS FUNCTION
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN) III.12.2 DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY
930
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.1.13
Displaying Operating
Monitor
General The reading on the load meter can be displayed for each servo axis and
the serial spindle.
Display of the servo axes The reading on the load meter can be displayed for up to three servo axes
by setting parameters 3151 to 3153.
Display of the spindle When serial spindles are used, the reading on the load meter and
axes speedometer can be displayed only for the main serial spindle.
Speedometer Although the speedometer normally indicates the speed of the spindle
motor, it can also be used to indicate the speed of the spindle by setting
bit 6 (OPS) of parameter 3111 to 1.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 OPS OPM
3151 Number of the axis for which the first load meter for the servo motor is used
3152 Number of the axis for which the second load meter for the servo motor is used
3153 Number of the axis for which the third load meter for the servo motor is used
931
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
The reading on the load meter depends on servo parameter
2086 and spindle parameter 4127.
These parameters are set by the automatic setting.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.1.8 Operating Monitor Display
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
932
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.1.14
Stamping the
Machining Time
The time between the first start operation after a reset being performed in
memory operation mode, until another reset is performed, is counted.
When no reset is performed during operation, the time from the start of
operation until M02 (M30) is encountered is counted. While the duration
of the operation stop state is not being counted, the duration of the wait
for completion of an M, S, T, or B function is counted.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3107 NAM
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 M02
933
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
When M02 does not reset the control unit, and completion
signal FIN is sent to continuously reexecute the program
from the beginning (when bit 5 (M02) of parameter No. 3404
is set to 0), counting of machining time is terminated by
completion signal FIN.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.2.6 Stamping the machining time
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
934
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.1.15
Software Operator’s
Panel
General The software operator‘s panel function replaces part of the control
switches on the machine operator‘s panel with soft switches which can be
turned on or off using the CRT/MDI of the control unit.
The control switches for the functions listed in the following table can be
replaced with soft switches. Also available are eight general–purpose soft
switches which can be used additionally by the machine tool builder.
These eight general–purpose soft switches can be optionally named by the
machine tool builder. For control switches in groups 1 to 7, parameter
(no.7200) can be used to select whether the control switches on the
machine operator‘s panel or soft switches on the CRT/MDI of the control
unit are used for each group.
Group1 :Mode selection
Group2 :Selection of jog feed axis, manual rapid traverse
Group3 :Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of
manual pulse magnification
Group4 :Jog federate override, federate override, rapid traverse
override
Group5 :Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run
Group6 :Protect key
Group7 :Feed hold
Group8 :General purpose
The states of all soft switches are informed to the PMC by output signals.
Based on these output signals, the PMC should turn ”1” or ”0” input
signals related to soft switch functions. In other words, turning ”1” the
soft switch assigned to single block operation, for example, does not
cause the control unit to select single block operation internally. Single
block operation is selected when the PMC turns to ”1” the input signal for
single block operation, instead.
935
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
Group Function Output signal Related input signal
1 Mode selection MD1O <F073#0> MD1
MD2O <F073#1> MD2
MD4O <F073#2> MD4
ZRNO <F073#4> ZRN
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0
F074
936
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F076 ROV2O ROV1O MP2O MP1O
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7200 OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1
937
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
7210 Job–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel V↑W
7211 Job–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel V↓W
7212 Job–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel V→W
7213 Job–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel V←W
Example Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axes
in the direction specified as follows, set the parameters to the values given
below. [8 °] to the positive direction of the Z axis, [2 ±] to the negative
direction of the Z axis, [6 ³] to the positive direction of the X axis [4²]
to the negative direction of the X axis, [1¼] to the positive direction of
the Y axis, [9½] to the negative direction of the Y axis
Parameter No. 7210 = 5 (Z axis, positive direction)
Parameter No. 7211 = 6 (Z axis, negative direction)
Parameter No. 7212 = 1 (X axis, positive direction)
Parameter No. 7213 = 2 (X axis, negative direction)
Parameter No. 7214 = 3 (Y axis, positive direction)
Parameter No. 7215 = 4 (Y axis, negative direction)
Parameter No. 7216 = 0 (Not used)
Parameter No. 7217 = 0 (Not used)
938
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Example
These names are set using character codes that are displayed in parameter
Nos. 7220 to 7283.
939
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
940
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
NOTE
The “dakuten” and “han dakuten” in Katakana also
correspond to one character.
941
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
1 Only the modes shown below can be selected by soft
switches. When the mode for DNC operation is to be
equipped, for example, all control switches for mode
selection should be on the machine operator’s panel or a
general–purpose soft switch should be used to select the
mode for DNC operation.
Soft switches available for mode selection
⋅ Manual data input
⋅ Automatic operation
⋅ Memory edit
⋅ Manual handle feed / incremental feed
⋅ Jog feed
⋅ Manual reference position return
2 Only one soft switch is available for protection key.
However, four input signals are available for protection key
(KEY1, KEY2, KEY3 and KEY4). Generally, four input
signals are simultaneously turned to “1” or “0” according to
the state of the soft switch for protection keys.
3 When the soft switch for feed hold is turned on, output signal
SPO is turned to “1”. At this time, the PMC turns feed hold
signal *SP to “0”.
In contrast to the above, when the soft switch for feed hold
is turned off, output signal SPO is turned ”0” and the PMC
turns signal *SP to “1”. For soft switches other than feed
hold and general soft switches, when an output signal
informing the state of a soft switch is turned to “1”, the
corresponding input signal is turned to “1”.
942
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
NOTE
4 The following table lists the override values which can be
selected by soft switches for jog feedrate.
15 12 8 4 0 Override
± ± ± ± ± values (%)
bit
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0.1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0.14
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0.2
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0.27
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0.37
6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0.52
7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0.72
8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1.0
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1.4
10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 2.0
11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 2.7
12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 3.7
13 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 5.2
14 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 7.2
15 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 10.0
16 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 14.0
17 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 20.0
18 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 27.0
19 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 37.0
20 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 52.0
21 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 72.0
22 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 100.0
23 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 140.0
24 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 200.0
943
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
5 The following table lists the override values which can be
selected by soft switches for feedrate override.
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 10
2 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 20
3 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 30
4 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 40
5 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 50
6 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 60
7 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 70
8 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 80
9 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 90
10 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 100
11 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 110
12 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 120
13 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 130
14 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 140
15 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 150
16 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 160
17 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 170
18 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 180
19 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 190
20 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 200
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.4.9 Displaying and Setting the Software Op-
(For Machining Center) erator’s Panel
(B–62764EN)
944
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.1.16
Multi–language Display
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3102 SPN HNG ITA CHI FRN GRM JPN
NOTE
When this parameter is set, turn off the power once.
945
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
12.1.17
Remote Diagnosis
General The remote diagnosis function allows CNC status monitoring and
modification to CNC data to be performed remotely by menu–based
operation. The remote diagnosis function, operating under MS–DOS, is
installed on a standard personal computer, connected as a service terminal
to the CNC via the RS–232–C interface, over a telephone line, and so on.
Modem Modem
946
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
c. CNC ³ computer
(1) Alarm information
(2) Machine position
(3) Absolute position
(4) Skip position
(5) Servo delay
(6) Acceleration/deceleration delay
(7) Diagnosis
(8) Parameter
(9) Tool life management data
(10) Display screen status
(11) Modal information
(12) Pitch error data
(13) Tool offset value
(14) Custom macro variable
(15) Memory contents
(16) Ladder program
(17) Actual feedrate
(18) Status
(19) A/D conversion data
(20) PMC data
(21) Screen character data
(22) Printed circuit board information
(23) Ladder title
(24) Series and edition of PMC/ladder
(25) All parameters
d. File function selection
(1) Listing files
(2) Referencing a file
(3) Deleting a file
(4) Copying a file
(5) Renaming a file
(6) Linking a file
(7) Changing the current directory
(8) Creating a directory
(9) Deleting a directory
NOTE
An arrow ”³” indicates the direction of data flow.
947
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0002 RDG
CAUTION
Set this bit to 0 when the remote diagnosis functions is not
used. When this bit is set to 1, never modify the parameters
related to remote diagnosis (parameter Nos. 0201 to 0223).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0201 NCR ASC SB2
[Data type]
SB2 Number of stop bits
0 : 1 bit
1 : 2 bit
ASC Data output code
0 : ISO Code
1 : ASCII Code
NCR EOB (End of Block) is output as
0 : “LF” “CR” “CR”
1 : “LF”
948
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Wireless Wireless
adapter adapter
ÇÇÇ
CNC (slave) (master) Modem
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
RS–232–C RS–232–C
Device ID xx
Telephone line
Wireless
ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
adapter Personal
CNC (slave) Modem computer
ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
RS–232–C
RS–232–C
ÇÇÇ
Device ID yy
949
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
Personal
CNC computer
Modem Modem
ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
RS–232–C RS–232–C
ÇÇÇ
Telephone line
Device ID xx
CAUTION
Once a value other than 0 is set as a password, the
password cannot be modified until the same value is set in
the corresponding keyword parameter (parameter Nos. 221
to 223.) When a value other than 0 is set as a password,
the parameter screen does not display the value of the
password; only blanks are displayed. Care must be taken
in setting a password.
950
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
CAUTION
Upon power–up, the keyword parameters are set to 0.
The parameter screen does not display any set keyword
values; only blanks are displayed.
951
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
12.1.18
External Operator
Message Logging and
Display
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 OMH
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 MS1 MS0 MHC
0 1 200 10
1 0 100 18
1 1 50 32
CAUTION
When the values of MS0 and MS1 are changed, all
preserved external operator message history data is
cleared.
952
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) III.11.7.1 External operator message logging and
(B–62754EN) display
12.1.19
Erase CRT Screen
Display/Automatic
Erase CRT Screen
Display
General Displaying the same characters in the same positions on the screen causes
a CRT or LCD to degrade relatively quickly. To help prevent this, the
screen can be cleared by pressing specific keys. It is also possible to
specify the automatic clearing of the screen if no keys are pressed during
a period specified with a parameter.
Erase CRT screen Holding down the CAN key and pressing an arbitrary function key clears
display
the screen.
Hold down the CAN key and press an arbitrary function key (such as
Automatic erase CRT The CNC screen is automatically cleared if no keys are pressed during the
screen display period (in minutes) specified with a parameter (No. 3123). The screen is
restored by pressing any key.
Clearing the screen with The CNC screen is cleared once the period (minutes) specified with
automatic erase CRT parameter No. 3123 has elapsed, provided the following conditions are
screen display satisfied:
Automatic screen erase Automatic screen erase disable signal *CRTOF (G062#1) is valid only for
disable signal the signals for path 1. This signal is invalid for the signals of path 2
(G1062#1) and those of the loader (G062#1).
Specified period The period specified with parameter No. 3123 is valid only for path 1.
Alarm for another path The screen is not cleared if an alarm is issued for path 1 or 2 or the loader
before the specified period elapses.
WARNING
Pressing any key while the screen is being cleared restores
the screen. In such a case, however, the function assigned
to the pressed key is initiated. Do not press the DELET , INSERT ,
or ALTER key to restore the screen, therefore.
Signal
954
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G062 *CRTOF
Parameter
3123 Time until erase CRT screen display is applied
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.8 Cleaning the screen
(For Machining Center) (B–62764EN)
955
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
12.2
EDIT
12.2.1
Part Program Storage
Length
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.3.1 Displaying Memory Used and a List of
(For Machining Center) Programs
(B–62764EN)
956
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.2.2
No. of Registered
Programs
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.3.1 Displaying Memory Used and a List of
(For Machining Center) Programs
(B–62764EN)
957
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
12.2.3
Memory Protection Key
General A key called the data protection key is used to prevent part programs,
offset values, parameters, and setting data from being registered,
modified, or deleted erroneously.
Signal
Memory protection
signal
KEY1 to KEY4
<G046#3A#6>
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G046 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1
958
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3290 KEY
NOTE
The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY = 0 or
KEY = 1.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
959
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
12.2.4
Password Function
General The password function locks NE9 (bit 4 of parameter No. 3202), used to
protect program Nos. 9000 to 9999, by using the PASSWD (No. 3210)
and KEYWD (No. 3211) parameters. When NE9 is locked, NE9 cannot
be set to 0. Therefore, the protection for programs numbered 9000 to 9999
cannot be released unless the correct keyword is entered.
NE9 is locked when different values are set in the PASSWD and KEYWD
parameters. The values set in the two parameters are not displayed. NE9
is unlocked when the value preset in the PASSWD parameter is set in the
KEYWD parameter. When 0 is indicated for the PASSWD parameter, a
value has not yet been set for PASSWD.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9
3210 Password(PASSWD)
960
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
CAUTION
This parameter show 0, when no value is set to this
parameter. Once a key is lock, parameter NE9 cannot
become 0 and PASSWD cannot be changed unless you
perform an unlock operation or perform the memory all clear
operation. When an attempt is made to modify the
password by MDI input operation in this state, the warning
message ”WRITE PROTECTED” is displayed to indicate
that the password cannot be modified. When an attempt is
made to modify the password with G10 (programmable
parameter input), P/S alarm No. 231 is issued.
3211 Keyword(KEYWD)
When the value set as the password (set in parameter No. 3210) is set to
this parameter, the locked state is released and the user can now modify
the password and the value set in bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202
becomes 0.
NOTE
The value set in this parameter is not displayed. When the
power is turned off, this parameter is set to 0.
961
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.9.9 PASSWORD FUNCTION
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
962
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.2.5
Background Editing
NOTE
Alarm in background edit is displayed in the key input line
of the background edit screen instead of the ordinary alarm
screen and is resettable by any of the MDI key operation.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.9.8 BACKGROUND EDITING
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
963
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–62753EN–1/01
12.2.6
Playback
General When the playback option is selected, the TEACH IN JOG mode
(TJOG) and TEACH IN HANDLE mode (THND) are added. In these
modes, a machine position along the X, Y, and Z axes obtained by manual
operation is stored in memory as a program position to create a program.
The words other than X, Y, and Z, which include O, N, G, R, F, M, S, T,
P, Q, and EOB, can be stored in memory in the same way as in EDIT
mode.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7100 THD
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.10.3 CREATING PROGRAMS IN TEACH IN
(For Machining Center) MODE
(B–62764EN)
964
B–62753EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.2.7
Conversational
Programming with
Graphic Function
General Programs can be created block after block on the conversational screen
while displaying the G code menu.
Blocks in a program can be modified, inserted, or deleted using the G code
menu and converstional screen.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.10.4 CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING
(For Machining Center) WITH GRAPHIC FUNCTION
(B–62764EN)
965
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
966
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
13.1
READER/PUNCHER
INTERFACE
967
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter This CNC has three channels of input/output device interfaces. The
input/output device to be used is specified by setting the channel
connected to that device in setting parameter I/O CHANNEL.
The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of stop bits, of an
input/output device connected to a specific channel must be set in
parameters for that channel in advance.
For channel 1, two combinations of parameters to specify the input/output
device data are provided.
The following shows the interrelation between the input/output device
interface parameters for the channels.
Input/output channel number (parameter No. 0020)
↓
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 ISO TVC
968
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
NOTE
1 The input/output device used can be selected also on the
setting screen. Using the setting screen is a more common
method for selecting the device.
2 The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of
stop bits, of an input/output device connected to a specific
channel must be set in parameters for that channel in
advance.
I/O CHANNEL=0 and I/O CHANNEL=1 both refer to
channel 1. For each, parameters to set the baud rate, the
number of stop bits, and other data are provided separately.
3 JD5A, JD5B, JD5C and JD6A are the connectors on the
PCB.
969
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
This CNC
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Reader/puncher Reader/puncher Host computer Host computer
970
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
NOTE
When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are
used, set NFD to 1.
0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is
set to 0)
6 FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
Set value Baud rate (bps) Set value Baud rate (bps)
1 50 7 600
2 100 8 1200
3 110 9 2400
4 150 10 4800
5 200 11 9600
6 300 12 19200
971
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. The meanings
of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.
0112 Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)
0122 Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2)
972
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
973
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
974
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
13.3
DNC1 INTERFACE
General Refer to FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS(B–61782E) for detailed
information of DNC1 interface.
Parameter
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
0141 System for connection between the CNC and host (DNC1 interface)
Set value
1 : Point–to–point connection
2 : Multipoint connection
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
975
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
MAP SCREEN
1. Communication screen
[C–OPER][C–SERV][ ][ ][ ( OPT ) ]
976
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
>
MDI *** STOP *** *** *** 12 : 34 : 53
[C–OPER][C–SERV][ ][ ][ ( OPT ) ]
977
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
>
MDI *** STOP *** *** *** 12 : 34 : 53
[C–OPER][C–SERV][ ][ ][ ( OPT ) ]
>
MDI *** STOP *** *** *** 12 : 34 : 53
[C–OPER][C–SERV][ ][ ][ ( OPT ) ]
978
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
>
MDI *** STOP *** *** *** 12 : 34 : 53
[C–OPER][C–SERV][ ][ ][ ( OPT ) ]
1) Setting screen
DNC file selection String input
2) Service screen page 1
NC application String input
Host application String input
3) Service screen page 2
Status post enable Bit input
Status post mask Bit input
Alarm post Bit input
4) Service screen page 3
Pascal stack address Hexadecimal input
Service mode Bit input
File request time-out Integer input
Remote request time-out Integer input
String input: Details are described in Section 1.4, ”String Input
Mode.”
Integer input: Entered as positive integers from
0 to 99999999
Bit input: Entered as 0/1;
00000000 to 11111111
Hexadecimal input: Entered as a hexadecimal number from
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
979
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
[Setting procedure]
2) Press the [(OPT)] key, and the following soft keys will appear on the
screen.
3) Press the [STRING] key, then it enters the string input mode.
980
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
>
MDI *** STOP *** *** *** 12 : 34 : 53
[ STRING ] [ INPUT ] [ CLEAR ] [ INS. CH ] [ DEL. CH ]
Cursor
To delete letter E, move the cursor to that letter:
ABCD E FG
Press [DEL.CH], and the result will be:
ABCD F G
7) Overwriting
(Example) When you want to overwrite letters starting at C with letters XYZ, move
the cursor to letter C.
AB C DEFG
Enter ”XYZ,” then press the [INPUT] soft key.
ABXYZ F G
8) Inserting letters
(Example) To insert string ABC after string ABC, move the cursor to letter D.
ABCD EFG
Enter letters ABC.
ABCD EFG
Press the [INS.CH] soft key.
ABCABC EFG
9) Canceling the string input mode
If you press the [STRING] soft key, the cursor goes back to the
position shown below, and the string input mode is canceled.
J DNC file selection
O1000. PRG
NOTE
1 The page keys do not work during the string input mode.
2 Switching the CNC mode during a string input mode cancels
the string input mode.
981
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
3. PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
(1) Setting screen
D DNC file selection
To start DNC operation, specify a file name in the host computer.
Format: Oxxxx. PRG (where xxxx is a four–digit decimal
number.)
(2) Service screen
D NC and host application names
Specify these parameters with NC and host application names in
the string input mode.
D Status post enable
Rising change Upper word: 11111111 11111111
Lower word: 01110000 10111110
Falling change Upper word: 00000000 00000000
Lower word: 11111111 11111111
Each bit in this parameter specifies whether to send the CNC status
information to the DNC1 board according to a local request.
The CNC status information consists of a bit pattern listed in Table A.
Each bit in the bit pattern corresponds to the bits in the rising and falling
change words.
Setting value 0: Mask
1: Post
The rising change word specifies that a status information bit change from
0 to 1 be posted, and the falling change word, 1 to 0.
NOTE
Use the lower word only.
982
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
NOTE
1 If value 0 is specified in the parameter, a conventional fixed
time of about 25.6 seconds is specified as a time-out value.
2 The time for the time-out is counted in 32 ms units internally.
The actual time for a time-out to occur is calculated as:
983
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
984
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
13.5
EXTERNAL I/O
DEVICE CONTROL
General It is possible to request from the outside that a program be registered,
collated, or output.
Registeration/Collation
As triggered by the external read start signal EXRD, the background
edit function saves programs from an external input unit onto tape and
verifies them.
Output
As triggered by the external punch start signal EXWT, the background
edit function outputs all programs stored in the part program memory
to an external output device.
Signal
985
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
External Read/Punch
Stop Signal
EXSTP <G058#2>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] When the external read/punch stop signal becomes logical 1, it stops
program registeration, collation, or output via the reader/punch interface
and program registeration and collation via the remote buffer.
[Operation] When this signal becomes logical 1, the CNC operates as follows:
The program registeration, collation or output triggered by the
external read or punch start signal is stopped immediately.
986
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
Background editing
signal
BGEACT <F053#4>
987
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
Signal Address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F053 BGEACT RPALM RPBSY
988
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
Parameter
Input/output channel number (parameter No. 0020)
↓
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE N99 REP RAL RDL
989
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No. 3201 = 0, program
registration is assumed to be:
0 : Completed
1 : Not completed
NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:
0 : Completed
1 : Not completed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8
990
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.8.4 PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
991
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
13.6
SIMULTANEOUS
INPUT AND OUTPUT
OPERATIONS
(M SERIES)
Signal
992
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G058 STWD STRD
123 CAN NOT USE MACRO Macro control command is used dur-
COMMAND IN DNC ing DNC operation.
Modify the program.
210 CAN NOT COMAND M198 and M199 are executed in the
M198/M199 schedule operation. M198 is executed
in the DNC operation. Modify the pro-
gram.
222 DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED Input and output are executed at a
IN BG.–EDIT time in the background edition.
Execute a correct operation.
Note
NOTE
1 M198 (file access) cannot be executed in the input, output
and run simultaneous mode. An attempt to do so results in
alarm No. 210.
2 A macro control command cannot be executed in the input,
output and run simultaneous mode. An attempt to do so
results in alarm No. 123.
3 If an alarm condition occurs during the input, output and run
simultaneous mode, a block being processed when the
alarm condition occurs and all blocks before that are input
or output.
4 In the output and run simultaneous mode, if a device used
is a floppy disk drive or FA card, the file name is the
execution program number.
5 When a program is being executed in the output and run
simultaneous mode, if a subprogram is called, only the main
program is output.
993
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
13.7
EXTERNAL
PROGRAM INPUT
General By using the external program input start signal, a program can be loaded
from an input unit into CNC memory.
When an input unit such as the FANUC Handy File or FANUC Floppy
Cassette is being used, a file can be searched for using the workpiece
number search signals, after which the program can be loaded into CNC
memory.
Signal
994
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
File No. 00 is used for special specification; specifying file No. 00 means
that no search operation is to be performed. Therefore, numbers 01 to 31
can be assigned to files.
[Application] This function is applicable to the following case:
When a program to be used for machining is too large to be loaded into
CNC memory, the program is divided into several segments. These
segments are loaded into memory and executed, one by one.
995
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
Yes
End of machining?
Operation terminates.
No
996
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
Strobe signal MF
Automatic operation ST
start signal
CAUTION
The M code used for input of the next program must not be
buffered.
NOTE
While a program is being input, the automatic operation
mode signal STL is set to 1. Upon termination of program
input, STL is set to 0.
Signal Address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G058 MINP
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 MIP
997
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
A program can be input according to the external program
input start signal only when the program has only one
program number.
To read programs having multiple program numbers, reset
the CNC each time the CNC reads one program. After
reset, search for a desired program by using the workpiece
number search signals, then input the program according to
the external program input start signal.
998
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
13.8
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTIONS BASED
ON THE I/O LINK
Master
FANUC I/O Link
Series 16/18
999
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
The user cannot read a program having an arbitrary
program number registered in a Power Mate. All programs
are always read from a Power Mate.
1000
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
4) Select address O.
5) Key in a program number.
6) Using soft keys [OPRT], continuous–menu key ,
[PUNCH], and [EXEC], output the program
corresponding to the keyed–in program number.
· When data input/output function B based on the I/O Link is
used
1) Using the PMC function instruction (WINDW), set the
program number of the program to be output. Specify
–9999 to output all programs.
2) Specify a desired group number with group number
specification signals SRLNI0 to SRLNI3.
3) Select an I/O Link by setting the I/O Link specification
signal IOLS to 1.
4) When external punch start signal EXWT is set to 1, the
program is output to the Power Mate.
(2) Parameter input/output
A Power Mate parameter in tape format is stored as a master–side NC
program in a program memory area. The following program number
is assigned to a Power Mate parameter of group n:
(Value set in parameter No. 8760) + n 10
(a) Parameter input
· When the data input/output function based on the I/O Link
is used
In step 4) of program input (described in (1).(a)), key in a
program number for a Power Mate parameter. The other
steps are the same as those for program input.
· When data input/output function B based on the I/O Link is
used
In step 1) of program input (described in (1).(a)), specify a
program number for the Power Mate parameters. The
remaining steps are the same as those for program input.
(b) Parameter output
· When the data input/output function based on the I/O Link
is used
In step 5) of program output (described in (1).(b)), key in a
program number for a Power Mate parameter. The other
steps are the same as those for program output.
· When data input/output function B based on the I/O Link is
used
In step 1) of program output (described in (1).(b)), specify
a program number for a Power Mate parameter. The
remaining steps are the same as those for program output.
(3) Macro variable input/output
In the same way as for parameters, a Power Mate macro variable in
tape format is stored as a master side NC program in a program
memory area. The following program number is assigned to a Power
Mate macro variable of group n:
(Value set for parameter No. 8760) + n 10 + 1
1001
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
The setting parameter or bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000
must be set to 1 to enable the use of the ISO code for macro
variable output. When a macro variable is output in EIA
code, the Power Mate issues alarm 001, while the Series
16/18 issues alarm 86.
1002
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
NOTE
The addresses of Power Mate DI signals EDG00 to EDG15
and EDN00 to EDN15 differ between Model–D and the
other models, as indicated in the table below. For macro
variable and diagnostic data input, ensure that these
signals are processed correctly. If an invalid value or
number is set, the Power Mate’s external I/O device control
function is not started.
1003
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
Specifying the PMC The PMC function instruction (WINDW) is used to set the program
functions numbers used with data input/output function B based on the I/O Link.
[Data] This function is a window function for specifying the program numbers
used to perform program input/output with the I/O device control
function via the I/O Link.
[Input data structure]
Top address +0 +2 +4 +6 +8 +10
[Completion codes]
0 : Normal termination
5 : Data other than 1 to 9999 or –9999 was specified.
The data length, data number, and data attribute fields are not checked.
For details of the PMC function instructions, refer to the ”FANUC PMC
Programming Manual.”
1004
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
Power Mate state signals When the data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used, the
(input) state signals for a specified Power Mate must be reported to the Series
16/18. These signals must be posted to the Series 16/18 via the following
path:
1)
Power Mate address F Power Mate address Y
2)
3)
Series 16/18 address X Series 16/18 address G
For an explanation of the functions of the Power Mate state signals, see
Section 13.8.(2).
Power Mate control When the data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used, Power
signals (output) Mate control signals must be output from the Series 16/18 to control the
external I/O device control function of a specified Power Mate. These
signals must be posted to the Power Mate via the following path:
1)
Series 16/18 address F Series 16/18 address Y
2)
3)
Power Mate address X Power Mate address G
For an explanation of the functions of the Power Mate control signals, see
Section 13.8.(2).
DI/DO signal timing The DI/DO signal timing charts applicable when data input/output
charts function B based on the I/O Link is used are shown below. When the
ordinary data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used, 1)
through 4) in the figures are subject to MDI–based input/output.
(1) When ordinary input/output is performed
1) Specify a program number with the PMC function
instruction (WINDW).
1005
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
1006
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
(3) (15)
(2)
(5) (14)
1007
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
(2) When an alarm is issued by the Series 18/16 (including the case
where processing is stopped by external read/punch signal EXSTP)
Steps 1) to 10) are the same as those for ordinary input/output.
11) When the Series 16/18 issues an alarm, or when external
read/punch stop signal EXSTP is set to 1, slave read/write
stop signal ESTPIO is set to 1.
12) The Series 16/18 waits for the external I/O device control
function of the Power Mate to terminate. The Series 16/18
merely waits until the external I/O device control function
of the Power Mate terminates.
13) When the external I/O device control function of the Power
Mate terminates, Power Mate read/write in–progress
signal BGION is set to 0.
14) The Series 16/18 sets slave I/O Link selection signal
IOLNK and slave read/write stop signal ESTPIO to 0.
15) I/O Link specification signal IOLS and I/O Link
confirmation signal IOLACK are set to 0.
1008
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
(3) (15)
(2)
(8) Group number specification
signal SRLNIx
(9) (14)
1009
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
1010
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
(3) (13)
(2)
(8) Group number specification
signal SRLNIx
(12)
(5)
1011
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
Troubleshooting The data input/output function based on the FANUC I/O Link is
implemented by various elements such as ladder programs, I/O Link
assignment, Series 16/18 parameters, and Power Mate parameters. So,
problems may occur when the function is started.
The table below lists the symptoms of the problems that may occur,
together with their causes and corresponding corrective actions.
Data input/output is started, but the The background is already active (the
Series 16/18 and Power Mate return background busy signal BGEACT is
no response. set to 1). In this case, the function
cannot be used.
Examples:
1) In MDI mode, the program screen
is selected.
2) Background editing has already
started.
1012
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
1013
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
CAUTION
If these symptoms are detected, the Series 16/18 waits for
a condition to be satisfied in its internal processing. While
such a state exists, the screen is not updated. So, the states
of signals cannot be checked on a real–time basis on a
screen such as the PMC diagnostic screen.
Signal
1014
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
NOTE
I/O Link specification signal IOLS is not used with the
ordinary data input/output function based on the I/O Link.
Group number
specification signals
SRLNI0 to SRLNI3
<G091#0 to #3>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals specify the group number of the Power Mate that acts as a
slave when data input/output function B based on the I/O Link is used.
[Operation] The group number of the Power Mate that acts as a slave is specified with
the values of four binary code signals.
NOTE
Group number specification signals SRLNI0 to SRLNI3 are
not used with the ordinary data input/output function based
on the I/O Link.
1015
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
1016
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
1017
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
Slave parameter
selection signal
EPARM <F177#6>
1018
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
[Function] These signals indicate the group number of the Power Mate that is acting
as a slave.
[Operation] The group number of the Power Mate that is acting as a slave is specified
with the values of four binary code signals.
These signals become active when the slave I/O Link selection signal
IOLNK is set to 1.
External read start signal The signals listed below are used with data input/output function B based
EXRD <G058#1> on the I/O Link. For details, see Section 13.5.
Read/punch in–progress
signal
RPBSY <F053#2>
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD
1019
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
Parameter
0020 I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device
NOTE
An input/output device can also be selected using the
setting screen. Usually the setting screen is used.
Program number for data registration (data input/output function using the
8760
I/O link)
1020
B–62753EN–1/01 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
For a Power Mate in group n, the following program numbers are used:
For parameters: Setting + n 10 + 0
For macro variables: Setting + n 10 + 1
For diagnostic data: Setting + n 10 + 2
Example: When 8000 is set
8000: Parameters of group 0 (I/O channel = 20)
8001: Macro variables of group 0 (I/O channel = 20)
8002: Diagnostic data of group 0 (I/O channel = 20)
8010: Parameters of group 1 (I/O channel = 21)
8011: Macro variables of group 1 (I/O channel = 21)
8012: Diagnostic data of group 1 (I/O channel = 21)
8020: Parameters of group 2 (I/O channel = 22)
8021: Macro variables of group 2 (I/O channel = 22)
8022: Diagnostic data of group 2 (I/O channel = 22)
NOTE
When 0 is set, the input/output of parameters, macro
variables, and diagnostic data cannot be performed, but
program input/output processing is performed.
1021
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–62753EN–1/01
1022
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
14 MEASUREMENT
1023
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
14.1
TOOL LENGTH
MEASUREMENT
(M SERIES)
General
The value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offset memory
as an offset value by a soft key.
Call offset value display screen on the CRT. Relative positions are also
displayed on this screen. Reset the displayed relative position to zero.
Set the tool for measurement at the same fixed point on the machine by
a manual operation. The relative position display at this point shows
difference between the reference tool and the tool measured and the
relative position display value is then set as offset amounts.
ÄÄ ÄÄ
ÄÄ ÄÄ
Reference tool
ÄÄ ÄÄ
ÄÄ ÄÄ
ÄÄ This difference
is set as offset
amount
Fixed point
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.4.2 Tool Length Measurement
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
1024
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
14.2
AUTOMATIC TOOL
LENGTH
MEASUREMENT
(M SERIES) /
AUTOMATIC TOOL
OFFSET (T SERIES)
Signal
Measuring position
reached signals
XAE<X004#0>,
YAE<X004#1>,
ZAE<X004#2>(M series)
XAE<X004#0>,
ZAE<X004#1>(T series)
G37 (M series)
G36, G37 (T series)
1025
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
The tool decelerates and temporarily stops at the distance O before the
measuring position.
The tool then moves to the measuring position at the speed preset by a
parameter no. 6241. If the measuring position reached signal
corresponding to the G code is turned ”1” after the tool has approached
within distance ε of the measuring position and before the tool overshoots
the measuring position by distance ε, the control unit updates the
compensation value and terminates the move command for the block. If
the measuring position reached signal is not turned ”1” even after the tool
has overshot the measuring position by distance ε, the control unit enters
an alarm state and terminates the move command for the block without
updating the compensation value.
Presumed
Feedrate measuring position
Rapid traverse
Measuring speed
Start point e e
[Operation] When the signal is turned ”1”, the control unit operates as follows:
Reads the position of the tool along the axis currently specified and
updates the current compensation value based on the difference
between the specified measuring position and the read measuring
position in the following case: When the measuring position reached
signal corresponding to the G code is turned on in a block where G36
(T series) or G37 is specified after the tool is within distance ε of the
measuring position specified by a program and before the tool
overshoots the measuring position by distance ε. The control unit then
stops the tool, and terminates the move command for the block.
Enters an alarm state and terminates the move command for the block
without updating the compensation value in the following case: When
the measuring position reached signal corresponding to the command
is turned ”1” in a block where G36 (T series), G37 is specified after
the tool is within distance γ of the measuring position but before the
tool is within distance ε of the measuring position.
The control unit does not monitor the measuring position reached
signal for its rising edge but monitors the state of the signal. If the
signal remains ”1” when the next corresponding automatic tool length
measurement (automatic tool compensation) is specified, the control
unit enters an alarm state when the tool is within distance γ of the
measuring position.
1026
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
NOTE
1 The measuring position reached signal requires at least 10
msec.
2 The CNC directly inputs the measuring position reached
signals from the machine tool; the PMC does not process
them.
3 If automatic tool compensation nor automatic tool length
measurement is not used, the PMC can use the signal
terminals corresponding to the measuring position reached
signal as the general-purpose input signals.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 ZAE XAE
ZAE YAE XAE
Parameter
6241 Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation
Feedrate during measurement of tool length automatic compensation
1027
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
CAUTION
Set a radius value irrespective of whether the diameter
programming or the radius programming is specified.
CAUTION
Set a radius value irrespective of whether the diameter
programming or the radius programming is specified.
1028
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
1029
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
1 Measurement speed, γ, and εare set as parameters.ε must
be positive numbers so that γ>ε.
2 The compensation value is updated by the following
formula:
New compensation value =(Current compensation
value)+[(Current position of the
tool along the specified axis
when the measuring position
reached signal is turned on) –
(specified measuring position)]
The following compensation values are updated:
(1)In a M series, the compensation value corresponding to
the tool compensation number selected by an H code.
When offset memory A is used, the offset value is
changed.
When offset memory B is used, the tool wear
compensation value is changed.
When offset memory C is used, the tool wear
compensation value for the H code is changed.
(2)In a T series, the compensation value corresponding to
the tool compensation number selected by a T code and
to the specified axis (X, Z) in G36, G37.
3 The maximum measuring error is calculated as shown
below.
ERRmax = Fm × 1 × 4
60 1000
ERRmax: Maximum measuring error (mm)
Fm : Measuring feedrate (mm/min)
If Fm = 100 mm/min, for example, ERRmax = 0.007 mm
4 After the measuring position reached signal has been
detected, the tool moves for a maximum of 20 msec, then
stops. Values for calculating the compensation amount,
that is the coordinate of the tool where the tool reached the
measuring position are not those obtained after stop, but
those obtained at the position where the measuring position
reached signal was detected.
The overtravel amount for 20 msec is calculated as follows.
Qmax = Fm × 1 × 1
(20 + Ts)
60 1000
Qmax: Maximum overtravel amount (mm)
Fm : Measuring feedrate (mm/min)
Ts : Servo time constant [msec] (1/loop gain)
1030
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEA-
(For Machining Center) SUREMENT (G37)
(B–62764EN)
1031
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
14.3
SKIP FUNCTION
14.3.1
Skip Function
The coordinate values when the skip signal is turned on can be used in a
custom macro because they are stored in the custom macro system
variable #5061 to #5068, as follows:
#5061 X axis coordinate value
#5062 Z axis coordinate value
#5063 3rd axis coordinate value
:
:
#5068 8th axis coordinate value
Signal
Skip Signal
SKIP<X004#7>
SKIPP<G006#6>
(T series) [Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal terminates skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip
signal turns to ”1” in a block containing G31 is stored in a custom macro
variable, and the move command of the block is terminated at the same
time.
[Operation] When a skip signal turns to “1”, the control unit functions as described
below.
(1) When a block contains a skip cutting command G31, the control unit
reads and stores the current position of the specified axis at that time.
The control unit stops the axis, then cancels the remaining distance
that the block was supposed to be moved.
(2) The skip signal is monitored not for a rising edge, but for its state. So,
if a skip signal continues to be “1”, a skip condition is assumed to be
satisfied immediately when the next skip cutting is specified.
1032
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
NOTE
1 The skip signal requires at least 10 msec.
2 The CNC directly reads the skip signal SKIP<X004#7> from
the machine tool; the PMC no longer requires to process the
signal.
3 If the skip function G31 is not used, the PMC can use the
signal terminal SKIP<X004#7> corresponding to the skip
signal as a general purpose input signal.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 SKIP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G006 SKIPP
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SKF SK0 GSK
SKF SK0
1033
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
Warning
WARNING
Disable feedrate override, dry run, and automatic
acceleration/deceleration (enabled with parameter No.
6200#7 SKF=1) when the feedrate per minute is specified,
allowing for reducing an error in the position of the tool when
a skip signal is input. These functions are enabled when the
feedrate per rotation is specified.
Note
NOTE
1 The G31 block is set to G01 mode. The feedrate is specified
by an F code.
2 When the measuring motion is made by utilizing the skip
signal, program a constant feedrate; otherwise, if the
feedrate changes, the measuring error will be noticeable.
With a constant feedrate, the maximum measuring error can
be calculated as follows:
ERRmax = Fm × 1 × 4
60 1000
Qmax = Fm × 1 × 1
(20#1 + Tc + Ts)
60 1000
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.11 SKIP FUNCTION(G31)
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
1034
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
14.3.2
High–speed Skip
Signal
General The skip function operates based on a high-speed skip signal (HDI0 –
HDI7 : connected directly to the NC; not via the PMC) instead of an
ordinary skip signal (X004#7). In this case, up to eight signals can be
input.
Delay and error of skip signal input is 0 - 2 msec at the NC side (not
considering those at the PMC side).
This high-speed skip signal input function keeps this value to 0.1 msec
or less, thus allowing high precision measurement.
Acceleration / The skip function causes the NC to memorize the “current position” of
Deceleration and Servo the tool when a skip signal is input. However, the “current position”
Delay Compensation includes a delay in the servo system. In other words, the ”current
(Type A/B) position” deviates by the distance corresponding to the servo delay from
the position where the tool actually was when the skip signal was input.
This deviation can be calculated from the positional error in the servo
system and the number of remaining pulses due to feedrate acceleration/
deceleration in the NC. Taking this deviation into account eliminates the
necessity to include the servo delay in a measurement error.
The deviation of the “current position” can be compensated for by either
of the following two types, using parameter SEA (bit 0 of parameter No.
6201) or parameter SEB (bit 1 of parameter No. 6201).
(1) Type A: The deviation is calculated from the cutting time constant
and the servo time constant (loop gain).
(2) Type B: The deviation is assumed to be a sum of the number of
remaining pulses due to acceleration/deceleration caused
when the skip signal is turned on, and the positional error.
High–speed
skip signal
Pnc
Q P
Pnc:Position where the tool actually stopped after the skip signal was
input [mm/inch]
1035
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
P = Pnc – Q
where
Fm: Feedrate [mm/min or inch/min]
Tc: Cutting time constant [ms]
Parameter No. 1622: Exponential acceleration/deceleration
Parameter No. 1628: Linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation
If parameter SKF (bit 7 of parameter No. 6200) = 0, Tc = 0.
Ts: Servo time constant [ms]
Assuming that the loop gain (parameter No. 1825) is G (unit: 1/s):
Ts = 1000/G
α: = 1 Exponential acceleration/deceleration
= 1/2 Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
NOTE
For type A (parameter SEA (No. 6201 #0)=1), the skip signal
must be turned on when the tool moves at constant
feedrate.
1036
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
Signal
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F122 HDO7 HDO6 HDO5 HDO4 HDO3 HDO2 HDO1 HDO0
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SRE HSS
1037
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 IGX SEB SEA
NOTE
SKIPP (bit 6 of G006) and +MIT1 to –MIT2 (bits 2 to 5 of
X004) are enabled only when bit 0 (GSK) of parameter No.
6200 is set to 1 and bit 3 (MIT) of parameter No. 6200 is set
to 1. Note also that these signals are enabled only for the
T series.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6202 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1
1S1A1S8
Specify which high-speed skip signal is enabled when the G31 skip
command is issued. The bits correspond to the following signals:
0 : The skip signal corresponding to the bit is disabled.
1 : The skip signal corresponding to the bit is enabled.
1S1 HDI0
1S2 HDI1
1S3 HDI2
1S4 HDI3
1S5 HDI4
1S6 HDI5
1S7 HDI6
1S8 HDI7
NOTE
HDI0 to HDI7 are high-speed skip signals.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL (Hardware) 7.8 HIGH SPEED DI SIGNAL INTERFACE
(B–62753EN)
1038
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
14.3.3
Multi–step Skip
(T Series)
Signal
Skip signal
SKIP, SKIP2 to SKIP8
<X004>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals terminate skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip
signal turns to ”1” in a command program block containing G31P1 (or
G31), G31P2, or G31P3, G31P4 is stored in a custom macro variable, and
the move command of the block is terminated at the same time.
Furthermore, in a block containing G04, G04Q1, G04Q2, G04Q3 or
G04Q4, the dwell command of the block is terminated.
In either case, until all other commands (such as miscellaneous functions)
of the block are completed, machining never proceeds to the next block.
Which of the eight skip signals is applicable to blocks containing the G
codes can be determined by parameter (no. 6202 to 6206). The eight skip
signals can correspond to the G codes on a one-to-one basis. One skip
signal can also be made applicable to multiple G codes. Conversely,
multiple skip signals can be made applicable to one G code.
[Operation] When a skip signal turns to ”1”, the control unit functions as described
below.
(1) When a block contains a G code from (G31, G31P1 to P4) for skip
cutting, and the skip signal is made applicable by parameter setting to
the command, the control unit reads and stores the current position of
the specified axis at that time. The control unit stops the axis, then
cancels the remaining distance that the block was supposed to be
moved.
(2) When a block contains a G04, or G04Q1 to Q4 code for dwell, and the
skip signal is made applicable by parameter setting to the command,
the control unit stops dwell operation, and cancels any remaining
dwell time.
1039
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
(3) The skip signal is monitored not for a rising edge, but for its state. So,
if a skip signal continues to be ”1”, a skip condition is assumed to be
satisfied immediately when the next skip cutting or dwell operation is
specified.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 ESKIP –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE
SKIP (T series)
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
WARNING
1 SKIP2 to SKIP6 are at the same addresses as skip signal
ESKIP (axis control by PMC) and axial manual feed
interlock signals +MIT1, –MIT1, +MIT2, and –MIT2 (direct
input B for tool compensation measurements). Be careful
when using both. (T series)
2 SKIP2 and SKIP6 to SKIP8 are at the same addresses as
skip signal ESKIP (axis control by PMC) and measurement
position arrival signal XAE, YAE, and ZAE (tool length
automatic measurement). Be careful when using both. (M
series)
CAUTION
If the automatic tool compensation option is used, SKIP5 to
SKIP8 cannot be used.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SLS HSS
NOTE
Skip signals (SKIP and SKIP2 to SKIP8) do not depend on
the setting of this parameter. They are always enabled.
1040
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6202 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1
Command G31
G31P2 G31P2 G31P4
Input G31P1 G04
G04Q2 G04Q2 G04Q4
signal G04Q1
NOTE
HDI0 to HDI7 are high-speed skip signals.
1041
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
The skip cutting commands G31 P1, G31 P2, G31 P3, and
G31 P4 are all identical, except that they correspond to
different skip signals. The tool moves along the specified
axis until the SKIP signal is set to “1” or the end point of the
specified movement is reached, while performing linear
interpolation. The feedrate is specified in the program. G31
is the same as G31 P1.
Dwell commands G04, G04 Q1, G04 Q2, G04 Q3, and G04
Q4 are also identical, except that they correspond to
different skip signals.
When no Qn command follows the G04 command, and
when DS1 to DS8, bit 0 to bit 7 of parameter No. 6206, are
not set, dwell is not skipped.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.12 Multi–step Skip (G31)
(For Machining Center)
(B–62764EN)
1042
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
14.3.4
Torque Limit Skip
(T Series)
General Specifying a move command after G31 P99 (or G31 P98) with a motor
torque limit set (for example, specifying a torque limit on the PMC
window) allows the same cutting feed as that specified with G01 to be
performed.
While the tool is moved with a motor torque limit set during cutting feed,
skip is performed when a signal indicating that the motor torque limit has
been reached is input as a result of an operation such as pushing something
against the motor.
Basic operations When the motor torque limit is reached or the SKIP signal <X0004#7>
is input during the execution of G31 P99, the execution of the next block
starts without executing the remaining portion of the move command.
When the motor torque limit is reached during the execution of G31 P98,
the execution of the next block starts without executing the remaining
portion of the move command. (The SKIP signal does not affect the
execution of G31 P98.)
When no torque limit is specified before executing G31 P99 or P98, the
move command is executed without performing the skip operation.
For G31 P99 and P98, the coordinate, indicating the position to which the
tool is to be positioned after skip, is stored in the system variable of the
custom macro.
Alarm No. 244 occurs if errors have accumulated to an amount (32767)
that cannot be corrected in one distribution before the
torque–limit–reached signal is input during the execution of G31 P99 or
P98.
Signal
1043
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F114 TRQL8 TRQL7 TRQL6 TRQL5 TRQL4 TRQL3 TRQL2 TRQL1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 TSA TSE
200
Position stored
Position stored in the system
in the system variable when
variable when TSE = 1
TSE = 0
100
1044
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
015 TOO MANY AXES COM- In the block including the command
MANDED for the skip function (G31 P99/P98),
to be executed under the control of
the torque limit reach signal, no axis
move command is specified, or two or
more axes are specified.
In a single block, specify one axis
only.
244 P/S ALARM When the skip function to be
executed under the control of the
torque limit reach signal is enabled,
an error value (32767) that exceeds
the maximum return value that can be
handled with a single distribution is
detected before input of the torque
limit reach signal.
Retry the processing after changing
the axis feedrate, torque limit, or other
conditions.
Warning
WARNING
Specify a torque limit before G31 P99/P98. If G31 P99/P98
is executed with no torque limit specified, the move
command is executed without a skip operation.
Caution
CAUTION
1 When G31 P99 is specified, the SKIP signal causes a skip
operation. However, avoid using the high–speed skip
operation.
2 Before specifying G31 P99/P98, cancel tool–tip radius
compensation with G40.
3 Set the SKF bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 6200) to 0 to disable
the dry run, override, and automatic
acceleration/deceleration functions for the G31 skip
command.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.13 TORQUE LIMIT SKIP
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN)
1045
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
14.3.5
Continuous
High–speed Skip
Function (M series)
General The continuous high–speed skip function enables reading of absolute
coordinates by using the high–speed skip signals (HD 10 to HD17). Once
a high–speed skip signal has been input in a G31P90 block, absolute
coordinates are read into custom macro variables #5061 to #5068. The
input of a skip signal does not stops axial movement, thus enabling
reading of the coordinates of two or more points.
The rising and falling edges of the high–speed skip signal can be used as
a trigger, depending on the parameter BHIS (No. 6201#5) setting.
See ”14.3.2 High–speed Skip Signal” for details of high–speed skip
signal.
Explanations
Custom macro variables Once a high–speed skip signal has been input in a G31P90 block, absolute
coordinates are read into custom macro variables #5061 to #5068. These
variables are immediately updated once the tool reaches the next skip
position. The feedrate must, therefore, be specified such that the tool does
not reach the next skip position before the application completes reading
of the variables. The PMC program must be created to satisfy this
condition.
#5061 Coordinate along the first axis
#5062 Coordinate along the second axis
#5063 Coordinate along the third axis
#5068 Coordinate along the eighth axis
High–speed skip signal This function is enabled only when a high–speed skip signal is used.
The high–speed skip signal to be used is selected with bits 0 to 7 of
parameter No. 6208 (9S1 to 9S8).
End of block The G31P90 block is terminated when the tool reaches the end point.
Application (Example)
(1) Reads custom macro variables, using the PMC window function.
(2) Saves the values in the PMC data table (address D).
(The PMC window function cannot be used to save data.)
(3) An execution or auxiliary macro is used for computation. They can
directly read PMC address D, using the address function.
Limitations
Controlled axes Only one axis can be specified in the block for the continuous high–speed
skip function (G31P90). If two or more axes are specified, P/S alarm No.
5068 is issued.
1046
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SRE HSS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 CSE SEB SEA
NOTE
Compensation can be performed in either of two ways: type
A or type B. The skip signal of the skip function causes the
NC to store the current position. The current position,
stored in the NC, is subject to the servo delay and differs
from the machine position by an amount corresponding to
the servo delay. This difference can be determined from the
position error of the servo system and the accumulated
pulses caused by feed acceleration/deceleration executed
by the NC. Provided this difference is considered, the servo
delay need not be considered as a measurement error. The
difference can be reduced by applying either of the following
methods, as determined by the parameter settings.
1) Type A:
A value calculated from the cutting time constant and
servo time constant (loop gain) is taken as the difference.
2) Type B:
The value calculated from the position error and the
accumulated pulses caused by
acceleration/deceleration, when the skip signal is
enabled, is taken as the difference.
CSE For continuos high–speed skip command G31 P90, high–speed skip
signals are :
0 : Effective at either a rising or falling edge (depending on the setting of
bit 6 (SRE) of parameter 6200)
1 : Effective for both the rising and falling edges
1047
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6208 9S8 9S7 9S6 9S5 9S4 9S3 9S2 9S1
6220 Period during which input is ignored for continuous high–speed skip signal
Time interval during which signals are ignored (parameter No. 6220)
1048
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
Time interval during which signals are ignored (parameter No. 6220)
Reference item
1049
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
14.4
ENTERING
COMPENSATION
VALUES
14.4.1
Input of Offset Value
Measured A (T series)
Signal
1050
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
NOTE
To use this signal, set parameter PRC (No.5005#2) to 1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G040 PRC
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5005 PRC
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.4.2 Direct Input of Tool Offset Measured
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN)
1051
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
14.4.2
Input of Tool Offset
Value Measured B
(T series)
General
When the touch sensor is provided, the tool offset value is automatically
settable in the tool offset memory, by moving the tool to make contact
with the touch sensor during manual operation. The workpiece
coordinate system shift amount is also automatically settable.
Touch sensor This touch sensor makes contact in two directions in each axis, and
outputs four signals when it detects a tool contact. The contact faces are
selected according to the tool nose figures to be measured.
a) +MIT1 (+MITX) : Contact to X-axis (+) contact face (Contact
in X + direction)
b) –MIT1 (–MITX) : Contact to X-axis (–) contact face (Contact
in X – direction)
c) +MIT2 (+MITZ) : Contact to Z-axis (+) contact face (Contact
in Z + direction)
d) –MIT2 (–MITZ) : Contact to Z-axis (–) contact face (Contact
in Z – direction)
+X
X axis (+) contact face
(+MIT1)
+Z
Touch sensor
1052
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
Setting tool offset value Determine a specific point on the machine tool as the measuring reference
position. In advance, set the distance from this point to the measuring
position (contact face of the touch sensor) as a reference value, using
parameter nos. 5015-5018. Select the tool whose offset value is to be
measured, and bring it to touch the sensor, receiving a contact detection
signal (tool compensation value write signal). The mechanical coordinate
value is the distance from the tool nose position of the measuring tool at
the mechanical reference (home) position to the measuring position; set
the difference between this value and the reference value (parameter
setting) into the tool offset value memory as the tool geometry offset
value. The corresponding tool wear offset value becomes 0.
(Tool offset value to be set)
= (Mechanical coordinate value when tool compensation value write
signal has become “1”) – (Reference value (parameter value)
corresponding to the tool compensation value write signal)
The tool offset value to be set differs according to the method of
determining the measuring reference position.
Example 1 The difference between the reference tool nose tip position and the
measuring tool nose tip position is settable as the tool offset value. Define
the reference tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference position
(machine zero position) as the measuring reference position, then set the
distances Xp, Zp, Xm, Zm, from the measuring reference position to the
contact faces of the sensor as parameters.
1053
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
+Z Zp
XP : Distance from the measuring reference position to X-axis (+) contact face (parameter
no. 5015)
Xm : Distance from the measuring reference position to X-axis (–) contact face (parameter
no. 5016)
Zp : Distance from the measuring reference position to Z-axis (+) contact face (parameter
no. 5017)
Zm : Distance from the measuring reference position to Z-axis (–) contact face (parameter
no. 5018)
Xt : X-axis direction moving distance of the measuring tool up to the contact face of sensor
(X-axis machine coordinate value)
Zt : Z-axis direction moving distance of the measuring tool up to the contact face of sensor
(Z-axis machine coordinate value)
(when Xt and Zt touch the X-axis (–) contact face and Z-axis (–) contact face in the
above figure)
OFSx : Tool offset value to be set (X-axis): OFSx = Xt - Xm
OFSz : Tool offset value to be set (Z-axis): OFSz = Zt - Zm
When the reference tool nose tip position is set as the measuring reference position
1054
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
Machine
Zt
zero point
OFSZ
+Z
Xm OFSx
Zm
Zp Xp
When the imaginary zero position is set as the measuring reference position
Setting the workpiece The workpiece coordinate system shift amount for the Z-axis is settable
coordinate system shift as follows: Bring the tool to touch the workpiece end face. Subtract the
amount tool geometry offset value of the tool (the value shifted in the coordinate
system by the tool geometry offset) from the machine coordinate value
(the distance from the measuring tool nose tip position at the mechanical
reference position (machine zero point) to the workpiece end face).The
result is set as the workpiece coordinate system shift value.
1055
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
Machine
+X zero point
Zt
+Z OFSZ
–EXOFSZ (0,0) Measuring tool nose
position at the mechani-
OFSX cal machine position
Workpiece coordinate
system zero point
(programmed zero point)
+X
EXOFSZ(NEW)
Cutting
allowance
W EXOFSZ(OLD)
1056
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
Basic Procedure to Set 1 Set the tool geometry offset values of each tool in advance.
Workpiece Coordinate 2 Execute manual reference position return.
Shift Value By executing manual reference position return, the machine
coordinate system is established.
The workpiece coordinate system shifting amount is computed based
on the machine coordinate system of the tool.
3 Set the workpiece coordinate system shifting amount writing mode
select signal WOQSM to “1”.
The CRT display is automatically switches to the workpiece shifting
screen, the ”WFST” indicator starts blinking at the status indicator
area in the bottom of the screen, which inform that the workpiece
coordinate system shifting amount writing mode is ready.
1057
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
1058
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
NOTE
This signal is used as the manual feed interlock signal in
each axis direction.
1059
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
This signal is available only when parameter QNI (No.
5005#5) =1.
Workpiece coordinate
system shift value write
mode select signal
WOQSM <G039#6>
Workpiece coordinate
system shift value write
signal
WOSET <G040#7>
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1
SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2
WARNING
Since the same addresses are used for both +MIT1, –MIT1,
+MIT2, –MIT2 and skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP5 (multi–step
skip), be careful for using two kinds of signals.
1060
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G039 GOQSM WOQSM OFN5 OFN4 OFN3 OFN2 OFN1 OFN0
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DIT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5005 QNI
5015 Distance (XP) betweeen reference position and X axis + contact surface
5016 Distance (XM) betweeen reference position and X axis – contact surface
5017 Distance (ZP) betweeen reference position and Z axis + contact surface
5018 Distance (ZM) betweeen reference position and Z axis – contact surface
1061
14. MEASUREMENT B–62753EN–1/01
Measuring
reference
position
Xm
X axis – contact face
Xp
+X Zm
X axis + contact
face
Zp
+Z
5020 Tool offset number used for the input of tool offset value measured B
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.4.3 Direct Input of Tool Offset Measured B
(For Lathe) (B–62754EN)
1062
B–62753EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
14.4.3
Input of Measured
Workpiece Origin
Offsets
General By directly entering the measured deviation of the actual coordinate
system from a programmed work coordinate system, the workpiece zero
point offset at the cursor is automatically set so that a command value
matches the actual measurement.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.4.7 Input of Measured Workpiece Origin Off-
(For Machining Center) sets
(B–62764EN)
1063
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
1064
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
15.1
PMC AXIS
CONTROL/PMC AXIS
SPEED CONTROL
FUNCTION
General The PMC can directly control any given axis, independently of the CNC.
In other words, moving the tool along axes that are not controlled by the
CNC is possible by entering commands, such as those specifying moving
distance and feedrate, from the PMC. This enables the control of turrets,
pallets, index tables and other peripheral devices using any given axes of
the CNC.
The PMC is provided with four paths to control these operations using
input and output signals.
1065
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
PMC CNC
DI/ DO
Commands from path 1 Group A α axis control
In the following description, input/output signals from the four paths are
called group A (path 1), group B (path 2), group C (path 3), and group D
(path 4), respectively.
The name of an input/output signal used for PMC axis control always
contains a lowercase g, as in EBUFg. However, there is no such signal
as EBUFg. The actual signal names represented by EBUFg are EBUFA,
EBUFB, EBUFC, and EBUFD, which respectively correspond to signals
of group A (path 1), group B (path 2), group C (path 3), and group D (path
4).
Basic procedure (1) In parameter No. 8010, specify which DI/DO signal group (A, B, C,
or D) is to be used for PMC axis control on a per–axis basis.
When using the same group for simultaneously controlling two or
more axes, check that the settings of the parameters related to
feedrate (rapid traverse rate, acceleration/deceleration time
constant, diameter/radius, linear axis/rotation axis, etc.) are
identical for each axis to be controlled.
(2) To enable direct PMC axis control, set each control axis selection
signal (EAX1 to EAX8), that corresponds to an axis to be controlled,
to 1.
(3) Determine the operation.
The axis control command signals (EC0g to EC6g) specify the type
of operation. The axis control feedrate signals (EIF0g to EIF15g)
specify the feedrate. The axis control data signals (EID0g to
EID31g) specify the moving distance and other data.
1066
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
~ ~
Block n
1067
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
After the reception of command [4] by the input buffer, the PMC can issue
command [5] to the CNC (the axis control block data signal is set).
EBUFg
(Input)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EBSYg
(Output)
The buffer is full.
(1), (2), (3), (4), (5) : A new block cannot be issued during these
intervals (while EBUFg and EBSYg are in different logical states).
The status of the CNC buffer can be determined by the exclusive OR
of axis control command read signal EBUFg, input from the PMC, and
axis control command read completion signal EBSYg, output from the
CNC.
EBUFg Exclusive
OR CNC buffer status
EBSYg (XOR)
1068
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until all the blocks have been issued.
When the final block has been issued, set control axis selection
signals EAX1 to EAX8 to “0”. Before setting these signals to “0”,
however, check that the blocks stored in the CNC’s input, waiting,
and executing buffers have all been executed. Setting the signals to
“0” while a block is being executed, or while a block remains in any
of these buffers, results in the issue of a P/S alarm. This alarm
suspends the current block execution and invalidates the blocks
stored in the input and waiting buffers.
To ensure no block is being executed, or that there are no blocks
remaining in the input or waiting buffer, check that control axis
selection status signal *EAXSL is set to “0”.
For those axes that are always subject to PMC control, such as those
controlling turrets, pallets, and ATCs, ensure that the EAX1 to
EAX8 signals are always set to “1”. There is no need to set these
signals to “0” after issuing commands from the PMC to the CNC.
When all command blocks have been executed (there are no blocks
remaining to be executed), the CNC automatically stops execution.
(6) When control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 are set to “0”,
control is returned to the CNC.
1069
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal
Signal list
1070
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Signal Detail
NOTE
After setting control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 to
1, it takes at least 8 msec before the PMC can issue
commands to the CNC.
1071
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Axis control
command
Operation
(hexadecimal
code)
Dwell
04h
Performs the same operation as G04, used by the CNC.
06h Moves the tool in the specified direction in jog feed mode.
Performs the same operation as that of JOG feed, done by
the CNC.
1072
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Axis control
command
Operation
(hexadecimal
code)
Auxiliary function
12h Performs the same function as the miscellaneous function
(M function), used by the CNC.
Rapid traverse rate When using the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h), the
feedrate can be specified in either the same parameter as that used by the
CNC (No. 1420) or the PMC’s axis interface feedrate signals EIF0g to
EIF15g. This can be set with RPD, bit 0 of parameter No. 8002.
Cutting feed – feed per When using the cutting feed – feed per revolution command (EC0g to
revolution EC6g: 02h), the optional function for threading in synchronous feed
mode is necessary in the case of the M series.
This operation cannot be performed when IT0 to IT2, bit 4 to 6 of
parameter No. 7501, specify high–speed cycle machining.
Reference position The reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h) enables the
return following operation: When DLZ, bit 1 of parameter No. 1002, specifying
reference position return without dogs for all axes, or DLZx, bit 1 of
parameter No. 1005, specifying reference position return without dogs for
each axis, is valid and the tool has not been returned to the reference
position since the power was turned on, move each axis in the direction
specified by the jog feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) (position the
tool to a point near the reference position) and issue the reference position
return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h). This returns the tool to the
reference position (positions the tool to the grid nearest the current
position) without using the deceleration signal for reference position
return.
Note that, when positioning the tool to a point near the reference position,
the tool must be moved in the direction of reference position return at such
a speed that the servo position error exceeds the value of parameter No.
1836.
The direction of the grid relative to the proximate position depends on
ZMIx, bit 5 of parameter No. 1006.
1073
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Reference position When using the 1st reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g:
return without dogs 07h), if DLZ, bit 1 of parameter No. 1002, specifying reference position
return without dogs for all axes, or DLZx, bit 1 of parameter No. 1005,
specifying reference position return without dogs on a per–axis basis is
valid and the tool has not been returned to the reference position since the
power was turned on, issuing the 1st reference position return command
(EC0g to EC6g: 07h) results in the issue of a P/S alarm (No. 090).
1st to 4th reference When using the 1st to 4th reference position return commands (EC0g to
position return EC6g: 07h to 0Ah), the feedrate can be specified using RPD, bit 0 of
parameter No. 8002, in the same manner as when using the rapid traverse
command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h).
Note that, in the case of the 1st reference position return, if the tool has
not been manually returned to the reference position after the power was
turned on, the feedrate specified by parameter No. 1424 applies.
External pulse When using the external pulse synchronization commands (EC0g to
synchronization EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh), the tool moves backwards if the external pulse
has a negative value. When a manual handle interrupt is executed for the
axis to which the external pulse is being applied, the moving distance is
the sum of the external pulse and the interrupt pulse.
Display of remaining When using the jog feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the external
distance pulse synchronization command (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh), the
displayed remaining distance is always “0”.
Speed command When using the speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h), specify the axis
to be controlled as a rotation axis in ROT, bit 0 of parameter No. 1006.
While position control is being executed for the jog feed command (EC0g
to EC6g: 06h), the speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) exerts speed
control over the servo motor, thus allowing the speed to be dynamically
changed during jog feed. This makes this command suitable for driving
a rotation tool with a servo motor.
Note that, while jog feed is being executed by the speed command, no
coordinate system values are changed. This will result in the loss of the
tool position. Therefore, after jog feed has been completed, always return
the tool to the reference position before executing the move command.
1074
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Machine coordinate The machine coordinate system selection command (EC0g to EC6g:
system selection 20h) performs absolute positioning to move the tool in rapid traverse to
a specified position on the machine coordinate system. This command
is used to move the tool to a position specifically defined for the machine,
such as the tool exchange position.
For a rotation axis, short cut rotation can also be specified. When using
this command for the T series, cancel the tool offset and the tool nose
radius compensation. For the M series, cancel cutter compensation, tool
length compensation, and tool offset.
The machine coordinate system must be set before attempting to use this
command. After turning on the power, return the tool to the reference
position either manually or by using G28. When an absolute position
detector is provided, returning the tool to the reference position is not
necessary because the tool position will be stored in memory.
The following table shows the correspondence between the axis control
commands and their data:
Command block
Axis control code
Operation Command data
signal EC0g to EC6g
Rapid traverse 00h Total moving distance
EID0g to EID31g
Rapid traverse rate
EIF0g to EIF15g
1075
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
1076
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
[Unit of data]
Data unit
Unit
IS–B IS–C
[Valid data range] Specify data within the range given in the following table.
Data range
Unit
IS-B IS-C
WARNING
Cutting feedrate clamp is disabled.
1077
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
CAUTION
When “0” is specified, the CNC continues to perform
buffering without moving the tool. In such a case, release
the buffering by issuing reset signal ECLRg.
[Unit of data] The data increment depends on the settings of bits 6 (FR1) and 7 (FR2) of
parameter No. 8002, as listed in the following table.
Parameter Metric input
p Inch input
p Rotation axis
FR2 FR1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (deg/rev)
1 1
0 0001
0.0001 0 000001
0.000001 0 0001
0.0001
0 0
0 1 0.001 0.00001 0.001
1 0 0.01 0.0001 0.01
<For M series>
[Unit of data] The data unit depends on the settings of bits 6 (FR1) and 7 (FR2) of
parameter No. 8002, as listed in the following table.
Parameter Metric input
p Inch input
p Rotation axis
FR2 FR1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (deg/rev)
1 1
0 01
0.01 0 0001
0.0001 0 01
0.01
0 0
0 1 0.1 0.001 0.1
1 0 1 0.01 1
1078
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
WARNING
1 The value of parameter No. 8022 is used as the upper limit
for clamping the feedrate.
2 Override for the feedrate is effective. Dry run is invalid.
CAUTION
The specified feedrate can be magnified by 1, 10, or 100 by
setting bits 6 (FR1) and 7 (FR2) of parameter No. 8002
accordingly.
CAUTION
The pulse weight is clamped according to the value set for
parameter No. 1424 (parameter for the manual rapid
traverse rate for each axis).
NOTE
When bit 7 (NDI) of parameter No. 8004 is set to diameter
programming, the tool moves with double pulse weight. In
this case, set bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 to 1 and the
tool moves in accordance with a command like in a radius
programming.
1079
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
CAUTION
The maximum feedrate depends on whether override is
applied or canceled. The following table lists the maximum
feedrate when override is canceled.
NOTE
1 Magnification of 200 is valid only for the jog feed command
(EC0g to EC6g: 06h).
2 The actual speed may not be displayed correctly,
depending on the feedrate.
IS–B IS–C
Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input
Magni- 65535mm/min 655.35inch/ 6553mm/min 65.53inch/min
fied by 1 min
1080
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
NOTE
The servo motor speed may contain a slight error, as
follows:
Gears
Speed command
Amplifier Motor
↑
(b) Axis
Detector ↑
(a)
(a) The speed command for PMC axis control requires specification
of the servo motor speed, not the feedrate along an axis. To
specify a feedrate along the axis when gears are used to link the
servo motor and axis, the feedrate must be converted to a rotation
speed of the servo motor speed. As the motor speed must be
specified with an integer, the converted speed is subject to a
round–off error.
(b) The minimum increment for specifying the motor speed is
calculated by the following formula and rounded to the nearest
integer:
Fmin : Minimum increment
Fmin + P 2 1 for the motor speed
15 1000
P : Number of pulses per
rotation of the detector
for velocity feedback
Specify the speed command using the value calculated by the
following formula:
F : Speed command value
F+N P 2 1
(integer)
15 1000
N : Servo motor speed (rpm)
P : Number of detector
pulses issued per rotation
for velocity feedback
NOTE
In speed command mode, the speed after
acceleration/deceleration is specified to the servo control
unit. The loop gain for position control is invalid.
1081
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Bit 7 (NDI) of parameter No. 8004 can be set such that the tool is moved
by the double moving distance in diameter mode, specified with bit 3
(DIAx) of parameter No. 1006. In this way, the tool is moved in the same
way as in radius mode.
(5) Dwell (EC0g to EC6g: 04h)
For this command, the signals are used to specify, in binary format,
the dwell time.
Data range Unit
1 to 9999999 ms
NOTE
When the increment system IS–C is used, the least input
increment for the dwell time can be set to 0.1 ms, according
to the setting of bit 1 (DWE) of parameter No. 8002.
1082
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
1083
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
8 Axis control
temporary stop signal
ESTPg
1084
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
|← More than →|
ESBKg 8 msec
(input)
[1] [2] [3]
Command
block
(input)
EBUFg
(input)
EBSYg
(output)
The buffer is full.
Waiting buffer
[1] [2]
Executing
buffer [1]
Beginning of execution
1085
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
11 Auxiliary function
code signals
EM11g to EM48g
14 Servo–off signal
ESOFg
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] When this signal is set to “1”, the servo motor for the corresponding
PMC–controlled axis is turned off (servo–off state).
When this signal is set to “0”, the servo motor is turned on.
15 Buffering disable
signal EMBUFg
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] When this signal is set to “1”, commands from the PMC are not read while
the executing, waiting, or input buffer contains a block. If this signal is
set to “1” when any of these buffers contain a block, that block is executed
but subsequent commands are read only when the buffers are all empty.
To discriminate the buffering disabled condition, the CNC outputs the
axis control command read completion signal (EBSYg) only when a
command is read when all buffers are empty.
1086
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
EMBUFg
(input)
[1] [2]
Command
block
(input)
EBUFg
(input)
Command
disabled
EBSYg
(output)
Input buffer
Waiting buffer
The following commands, for which reset signal ECLRg is used for
termination, operate as though buffering had been disabled. That is, the
subsequently specified block is not executed but canceled:
(1) Jog feed (EC0g to EC6g: 06h)
(2) External pulse synchronization – main spindle
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh)
(3) External pulse synchronization – first manual handle
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Dh)
(4) External pulse synchronization – second manual handle
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Eh)
(5) External pulse synchronization – third manual handle
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Fh)
(6) Speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h)
1087
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
17 In–position signal
EINPg
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal is set to “1” when the corresponding PMC–controlled axis is
in the in–position state.
When the tool is decelerated, in–position check is performed to disable
the next command until the tool enters the in–position area. The
in–position check, however, can be skipped using bit 6 (NCI) of
parameter No. 8004 to reduce the cycle time.
When the axis fed at a very low speed, in –position signal might turn “1”.
18 Following zero
checking signal
ECKZg
1088
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Reset signal ECLRg cannot be used to reset the CNC in the above cases.
Use the reset button on the setting panel, external reset signal ERS, or
emergency stop signal *ESP.
NOTE
This signal is set to “0” when distribution for the axis is
completed (the signal is set to “0” during deceleration).
1089
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
21 Auxiliary function
executing signal
EDENg
EM11g to EM48g
(output)
TMF
EMFg
(output)
TFIN
EFINg
(input)
EDENg
(output)
TMF and TFIN are set with parameters 3010 and 3011.
22 Negative–direction
overtravel signal
EOTNg
23 Positive–direction
overtravel signal
EOTPg
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] These signals are set to “1” when an overtravel alarm is detected. When
the stroke limit in the negative direction is exceeded, signal EOTNg is set
to “1”. When the stroke limit in the positive direction is exceeded, signal
EOTPg is set to “1”. Simultaneously, alarm signal EIALg is set to “1”.
These signals are set to “0” when the overtravel alarm is released and reset
signal ECLRg is set to “1”. See “Alarm signal EIALg” for details of how
to release an overtravel alarm.
1090
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
24 Feedrate override
signals *FV0E to *FV7E
ȍ |2
7
Override value + i
Vi|%
i+0
25 Override cancellation
signal OVCE
1091
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
26 Rapid traverse
override signals
ROV1E and ROV2E
0 0 100%
0 1 50%
1 0 25%
1 1 F0
* Can also be set to the rapid traverse rate with bit 3 (RDE) of parameter
No. 8001.
1092
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
29 Override 0% signal
EOV0
31 Distribution
completion signals
EADEN1 to EADEN8
33 Controlling signals
EACNT1 to EACNT8
1093
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Signal address
MT→CNC
ADDRESS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 SKIP ESKIP
PMC→CNC
ADDRESS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G136 EAX8 EAX7 EAX6 EAX5 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E
1094
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EMBUFA EFINA
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB EFINB
1095
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G166 EBUFC ECLRC ESTPC ESOFC ESBKC EMBUFC EFINC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G178 EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EMBUFD EFIND
1096
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
CNC→PMC
ADDRESS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F112 EADEN8 EADEN7 EADEN6 EADEN5 EADEN4 EADEN3 EADEN2 EADEN1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F129 *EAXSL EOV0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB
For
group B F134 EABUFB EMFB
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F136 EBSYC EOTNC EOTPC EGENC EDENC EIALC ECKZC EINPC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F139 EBSYD EOTND EOTPD EGEND EDEND EIALD ECKZD EINPD
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Group A F142 EM48A EM44A EM42A EM41A EM38A EM34A EM32A EM31A
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Group B F145 EM48B EM44B EM42B EM41B EM38B EM34B EM32B EM31B
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Group C F148 EM48C EM44C EM42C EM41C EM38C EM34C EM32C EM31C
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Group D F151 EM48D EM44D EM42D EM41D EM38D EM34D EM32D EM31D
1097
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F182 EACNT8 EACNT7 EACNT6 EACNT5 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3105 PCF
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the same axis is controlled
alternately by the CNC and PMC.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8001 SKE AUX NCC RDE OVE MLE
NOTE
Each–axis machine lock signals MLK1 to MLK8 are always
valid, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PMC axis control
0: Same signals as those used for the CNC
(1) Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7
(2) Override cancellation signal OVC
(3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1 and ROV2
(4) Dry run signal DRN
(5) Rapid traverse selection signal RT
1: Signals specific to the PMC
(1) Feedrate override signals *FV0E to *FV7E
(2) Override cancellation signal OVCE
(3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1E and ROV2E
(4) Dry run signal DRNE
(5) Rapid traverse selection signal RTE
RDE Whether dry run is valid for rapid traverse in PMC axis control
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
NCC When a travel command is issued for a PMC–controlled axis (selected by
a controlled–axis selection signal) according to the program:
1098
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
0 : P/S alarm 139 is issued while the PMC controls the axis with an axis
control command. While the PMC does not control the axis, a CNC
command is enabled.
1 : P/S alarm 139 is issued unconditionally.
AUX The number of bytes for the code of an auxiliary function (12H) command
to be output is
0 : 1 (0 to 255)
1 : 2 (0 to 65535)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8002 FR2 FR1 PF2 PF1 F10 SUE DWE RPD
PF1, PF2 Set the the feedrate unit of feed per minute in PMC axis control
0 0 1/1
0 1 1/10
1 0 1/100
1 1 1/1000
1099
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
FR1, FR2 Set the feedrate unit for feed per rotation for an axis controlled by the
PMC.
0 0
0 0001 mm/rev
0.0001 0 000001 inch/rev
0.000001
1 1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8003 PIM
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8004 NDI NCI DSL G8R G8C JFM NMT CMV
1100
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
NOTE
The above setting is effective only when the NAHx bit (bit 7
of parameter No. 1819) is set to 0.
NOTE
The above setting is effective only when the NAHx bit (bit 7
of parameter No. 1819) is set to 0.
NOTE
The above setting is effective only when the DIAx bit (bit 3
of parameter No. 1006) is set to 1.
8010 Selection of the DI/DO group for each axis controlled by the PMC
NOTE
If another value is specified, the axis is not PMC–controlled.
1101
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
8022 Maximum feedrate for feed per rotation along a PMC–controlled axis
Specify the maximum feedrate for feed per rotation along a PMC–con-
trolled axis
8028 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for jog feed specified by the
speed command for each PMC–controlled axis
NOTE
If 0 is specified, the system does not control the
acceleration/deceleration.
Alarm and message A servo alarm or overtravel alarm for a PMC–controlled axis is detected
in the same way as an alarm for a CNC–controlled axis.
If an alarm occurs, the alarm is handled by applying the normal procedure,
alarm signal EIALg being set to “1” to inform the PMC of the alarm.
(If an overtravel alarm occurs, either negative overtravel signal EOTNg
or positive overtravel signal EOTPg is also set to “1”.)
If the PMC issues a command for a CNC–controlled axis, a P/S alarm No.
130 occurs.
Commands issued by the PMC are effective if the axis is in feed hold or
single block stop mode. The command results in the issue of an alarm if
cutting feed is executed with an override of 0%, or if the interlock is
enabled.
If the CNC issues a command for a PMC–controlled axis, a P/S alarm No.
130 occurs.
If the PMC issues a movement command for an axis in the plane of polar
coordinate interpolation in polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1),
a P/S alarm No. 130 occurs.
1102
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Warning
WARNING
1 The mode selection, CNC reset, and other CNC statuses
have no effect.
2 Feed hold, single block stop, reset, or interlock of one or all
axes, performed by the CNC, does not affect a
PMC–controlled axis. Similar control is possible by using
the equivalent signals issued from the PMC.
3 The mirror image functions (setting, parameter, input signal)
are disabled.
Caution
CAUTION
1 Emergency stop or machine lock is enabled. Machine lock
can be disabled if the MLE bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 8001)
is specified accordingly. However, machine lock for an
individual axis is always enabled.
2 In consecutive cutting feed blocks, a new block starts its
operation without waiting for the following zero of the servo
acceleration/deceleration. In other than the above blocks,
a new block starts its operation after the following zero of the
servo acceleration/deceleration is confirmed.
3 Commands for a linear axis that is controlled solely by the
PMC (not used as an axis controlled by the CNC) are not
affected by inch/metric input if the PIM bit (bit 0 of parameter
No. 8003) is specified accordingly. The current position
display, also, is not affected by inch/metric input.
4 For a PMC–controlled axis, manual absolute mode is
always set. If the PMC starts control of an axis after manual
intervention (manual continuous feed, manual handle feed,
etc.) is performed during automatic operation while manual
absolute mode is not set (*ABSM is set to 1), manual
absolute mode is set.
1103
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
1 The actual speed excluding the effect of the movement
along a PMC–controlled axis can be displayed if the PCF bit
(bit 1 of parameter No. 3105) is specified.
2 If an absolute pulse coder is used, a specified reference
position is retained in memory, even after the power is
turned off.
3 If the index table indexing function of the M series is added,
the PMC cannot control the fourth axis.
1104
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
15.2
EXTERNAL DATA
INPUT
General The following signals are used to send data from the PMC to the CNC.
Signal name Signal code
ED0-15
EA0-6
More than
More than 32ms 0ms
ESTB
EREND
1105
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
E ED15 to ED0
SEEE EEEE
No
No. Item
TAAA AAAA
B654 3210 15141312 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
External program
g number Program number(BCD4 digits)
1 1 0 0 0 ××××
search 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9
NOTE
Input an axis code according to the list below.
EA3 to EA0
Axis
3 2 1 0
1st axis 0 0 0 0
2nd axis 0 0 0 1
3rd axis 0 0 1 0
4th axis 0 0 1 1
5th axis 0 1 0 0
6th axis 0 1 0 1
7th axis 0 1 1 0
8th axis 0 1 1 1
WARNING
Though bits EA4 to EA6 distinguish one set of data from
another, the PMC must be interlocked in order to prevent
other function data being fed during a process for which
they are invalid.
1106
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
1) External Program A program number (1 to 9999) is specified from the outside and is selected
Number Search in the CNC memory.
For machines that can load several kinds of workpieces, this function can
automatically select for execution the program corresponding to a
specific workpiece.
Data for the external program number search is accepted regardless of the
mode, but the search execution can be made only in the reset state in MEM
mode.
The ESEND signal switches from “0” to “1” at the end of the external
program number search. This signal does not turn to “0” unless the cycle
start or reset signal is input, or another search is made. Use ESEND to
make a cycle start signal after the search.
NOTE
1 The external program number search is valid when
parameter ESR no. 6300#4=1.
2 The reset state is when the automatic operation lamp is off.
If the start button is pushed in the cycle operation stop or
hold state, search execution starts from the actual position
indicated by the pointer.
3 When there is not a program stored in memory
corresponding to the set program number, alarm no. 59 will
be activated.
4 Program search is not made if the program number is set to
“0”. When the start button is pushed, execution starts from
the position indicated by the pointer, instead.
2) External tool These signals provide for changing the tool compensation amount via the
compensation PMC. When the offset number is specified by a program, data input from
the PMC is added to the offset amount. The offset amount can also be used
as input data itself by specifying the input signal.
1107
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Address Data
E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E
A A A A A A A D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 ABS 0 0 0 s MSB LSB
/ i
INC g Offset amount
n
0 : Incremental specification
(Input value is added to present compensation amount)
1 : Absolute specification
(Input value is replaced with present compensation amount)
Specify “001” for external tool offset
Address Data
E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E
A A A A A A A D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ABS W s
0 0 1 / i MSB LSB
/ X/Z/R g
INC Offset amount
G n
1108
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
3) External workpiece The external workpiece coordinate system shift adjusts the workpiece
coordinate system coordinate system depending on the shift amount set via PMC. Each axis
shift (parameter no. 1220) has this shift amount, and it is added to all the
workpiece coordinate systems for use. The shift amount is not lost by cut
off of the power supply. It is not added incrementally, but each input shift
amount makes a new shift amount. The amount that can be input is
0-+/-7.999 mm or +/-0.7999 inch.
4) External machine The machine coordinate system can be shifted by inputting shift value.
coordinate system When the shift amount is input, compensation is immediately applied to
the corresponding axis and the machine starts operation. The position
accuracy can be improved by combining this function with the sensor.
The specification method for the axis to be shifted is the same as that for
the external workpiece coordinate system shift.
The compensation value is specified for the signals ED0 to ED15 by a
binary code ranging from 0 to 9999. This compensation value should
be absolute and the amount which the machine actually moves on input
is the difference from the previously stored value. When a large amount
of compensation is applied at a time, an alarm such as ”excessive error on
stop” may occur. In this case, input the compensation amount several
times.
1109
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
Two characters are sent at a time (see ISO code given in
Table below).
ED15 - ED8 . . . . . . . Character code in 1st character.
ED7 - ED0 . . . . . . . . . Character code in 2nd character.
If sending only one character, fill the second slot with a code
smaller than 20 and it will be ignored.
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
0 0 0 0 SP 0 @ P –
0 0 0 1 ! 1 A Q #
0 0 1 0 I 2 B R V
0 0 1 1 # 3 C S W
0 1 0 0 $ 4 D T ”
0 1 0 1 % 5 E U ·
0 1 1 0 & 6 F V
0 1 1 1 ’ 7 G W
1 0 0 0 ( 8 H X
1 0 0 1 ) 9 I Y
1 0 1 0 * : J Z
1 0 1 1 + ; K [
1 1 0 0 , < L o
1 1 0 1 = = M ]
1 1 1 0 . > N ^ m
1 1 1 1 / ? O _ #
SP : Space code
1110
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
6) Substituting No. of Substitution is possible for the No. of parts required and the No. of parts
parts required and No. machined.
of parts, machined
Data specifiecation method for No. of parts required and
No. of parts machined.
Address Data
E E E E E E E E E
A A A A A A A D D
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
... 0
5
Set to 110000.
Signals
1111
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Search completion
signal for external data
input ESEND <F060#1>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] The signal reports that program number search, specified by external data
input, has been completed.
[Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when:
The program number search specified by external data input is completed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 PSR
1112
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6300 ESR
1113
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
15.3
EXTERNAL
WORKPIECE
NUMBER SEARCH
General When several part programs are stored in program storage memory, a
program can be searched with the workpiece number search signals PN1
to PN16 from the machine side.
When the cycle operation is actuated in the memory operation mode under
reset status, the workpiece number (program number) specified by PN1
to PN16 is searched and executed from the beginning.
Signal
Workpiece Number
Search Signal PN1, PN2,
PN4, PN8, PN16 <G009#0
to #4> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Select the number of a workpiece to be machined in the memory mode.
Five code signals are provided. These signals are set as binary code to
designate a workpiece number as follows:
Workpiece number search signal Workpiece
p
PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 number
0 0 0 0 0 00
0 0 0 0 1 01
0 0 0 1 0 02
0 0 0 1 1 03
0 0 1 0 0 04
0 0 1 0 1 05
0 0 1 1 0 06
0 0 1 1 1 07
0 1 0 0 0 08
0 1 0 0 1 09
0 1 0 1 0 10
0 1 0 1 1 11
0 1 1 0 0 12
0 1 1 0 1 13
0 1 1 1 0 14
0 1 1 1 1 15
1114
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
1 0 0 0 0 16
1 0 0 0 1 17
1 0 0 1 0 18
1 0 0 1 1 19
1 0 1 0 0 20
1 0 1 0 1 21
1 0 1 1 0 22
1 0 1 1 1 23
1 1 0 0 0 24
1 1 0 0 1 25
1 1 0 1 0 26
1 1 0 1 1 27
1 1 1 0 0 28
1 1 1 0 1 29
1 1 1 1 0 30
1 1 1 1 1 31
NOTE
These signals are also used to specify a file number for file
search during external program input. See Section 13.7,
“External Program Input.”
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G009 PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1
1115
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
1116
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
15.4
SPINDLE OUTPUT
CONTROL BY THE
PMC
General The PMC can control the speed and polarity of each spindle motor,
connected by the optional spindle serial output/spindle analog output
function.
The first, second, and third spindles all have their own individual
interfaces. By using a PMC ladder program, the user can control the
spindles as desired.
This section describes how to use the PMC to control spindle rotation and
provides example applications.
Specifying the spindle The PMC can be used to specify the spindle motor speed upon executing
motor speed the following:
⋅ Switching the controller from the CNC to the PMC, by issuing an
SINDx signal
⋅ Setting the spindle motor speed data, calculated by the PMC, in spindle
control signal R01Ix to R12Ix
When controlled by the PMC, the spindle motor speed is not affected by
any signal (for example, the spindle speed override signal) or parameter
setting (for example, the maximum speed clamp parameter) related to the
spindle speed command of the CNC spindle control function.
→ If the multispindle control function is added, however, the spindle stop
signal *SSTPx <G0027, #3, #4, #5> can be used to stop a PMC–
controlled spindle.
The spindle motor speed data is obtained from the following expression.
Its value can range from 0 to 4095:
Spindle motor speed
Spindle motor speed data = 4095
Maximum spindle motor speed
Remark) Usually, the spindle speed must be controlled. If a gear train is
used to connect the spindle to the spindle motor, first obtain the
maximum spindle speed at the maximum spindle motor speed.
1117
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Spindle speed
Spindle motor speed data = 4095
Maximum spindle speed
By using this expression, the spindle motor speed data can be
obtained easily.
Specifying the output The PMC can specify the spindle motor output polarity when the
polarity for the spindle following are executed:
motor ⋅ Switching the controller from the CNC to the PMC, by issuing an
SSINx signal
⋅ Specifying the output polarity to the SGNx signal
S–code and SF signals To control the spindle, the PMC may require to read the S value specified
by the CNC.
If the spindle serial output/spindle analog control function is added (if the
PMC can control the spindle), the S–code signals <F022 to F025> and SF
signal <F007, #2> can be output only when many conditions, determined
by the CNC spindle control, are satisfied. In some cases, the signals
cannot be used under standard conditions.
Specify the related bits of parameter No. 3705 according to the desired
application, then use the S–code and SF signals.
Twelve code signals Twelve code signals corresponding to S value R01O to R12O <F036, #0
corresponding to the S to F037, #3> are output to the first spindle motor. The output data is
value (output) calculated from the results of the CNC spindle control. (See Section 9.3.)
Even while a spindle is subject to PMC control, an S command that is
issued to the CNC is converted to spindle output data and output.
The SIND signal determines whether the speed output command, issued
to the spindle motor, is obtained from the twelve code signals
corresponding to the S value, or from the R01I to R12I signals calculated
and specified by the PMC.
The use of this signal may simplify PMC ladder processing used to enable
PMC spindle control.
Sample application 1) Controlling the first and second spindles of a lathe system
→ Share the gear stages between the first and second spindles.
(If the first spindle uses two gears, for example, specify parameters
Nos. 3743 and 3744, thus enabling the use of gears 3 and 4 for the
second spindle.)
Perform the necessary setting to enable control of the first and second
spindles by the PMC.
To specify a rotation command for the first spindle, enter the gears for
the first spindle in GR1 and GR2 and obtain the data of the twelve code
signals corresponding to the S value. Specify the data as the speed
output command for the first spindle in the PMC control interface for
the first spindle.
1118
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
To specify a rotation command for the second spindle, enter the gears
to be used for the second spindle in GR1 and GR2 and obtain the data
of the twelve code signals corresponding to the S value. Specify the
data as the speed output command for the second spindle in the PMC
control interface for the second spindle.
Sample application 2) Using a lathe’s orientation function with the stop position of the serial
spindle specified externally, specifying the S value as the angle of the stop
position for spindle orientation after the spindle positioning mode has
been selected
→ Use those gears that are not being used for the first spindle.
(In this application, gear 4 is used to calculate the spindle position. Set
parameter No. 3744 to 360.)
Specify the M code used to set the spindle to positioning mode and
stop the spindle. Enter gear 4 in GR1 and GR2.
Then, specify a spindle positioning angle with the S command. (To
specify the position of 145 degrees, for example, specify S145;.)
Expression 145/360*4095 is calculated and the result is output to the
twelve code signals corresponding to the S value (output signal).
Enter the data in external stop position commands SHA00 to SHA11
<G078, #0 to G079, #3> and perform the orientation.
Signal
1119
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Details of the signals Signal used to select the spindle motor speed command SINDx
→ The above signal is used to select whether the spindle motor speed is
controlled by the CNC or PMC.
1: The spindle motor is controlled according to speed commands
(R01Ix to R12Ix) issued by the PMC.
0: The spindle motor is controlled according to speed commands
issued by the CNC. The spindle speed specified with the S
command is output.
Signals used to input the spindle motor speed command issued by the
PMC R01Ix to R12Ix
→ If the PMC is being used to control the spindle motor speed command,
specify, in binary format, the value obtained using the following
expression.
Spindle motor speed
Value to be specified = 4095
Maximum spindle motor speed
Maximum
spindle motor
speed
Signal used to select the polarity of the spindle motor speed command,
SSINx
→ The above signal selects whether the output polarity of the spindle
motor speed command is controlled by the CNC or PMC.
1 : The spindle motor is controlled according to the polarity command
(SGNx) issued by the PMC.
0 : The CNC controls the polarity. The polarity is determined by the
TCW and CWM bits (bits 7 and 6 of parameter No. 3706) and the
M03 or M04 command.
Signal used to specify the polarity of the spindle motor selected by the
PMC, SGNx
→ If the PMC is used to control the output polarity of the spindle motor
speed command, specify the polarity with this signal.
1 : The output polarity of the spindle is negative.
0 : The output polarity of the spindle is positive.
1120
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Code signal
4095
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3701 SS2
1121
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3705 EVS ESF
SFA NSF ESF
NOTE
For the T series, this parameter is enabled when bit 4 (EVS)
of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1. For the M series, SF is not
output:
(1) For an S command used to specify maximum spindle
speed clamping (G92S–––;) in constant surface speed
control mode
(2) When bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1
EVS When the spindle control function (S analog output or S serial output) is
used, S codes and SF are:
0 : Not output for an S command.
1 : Output for an S command.
NOTE
The output of S codes and SF for an S command in constant
surface speed control mode (G96), or for an S command
used to specify maximum spindle speed clamping
(G50S–––;) depends on the setting of bit 0 (ESF) of
parameter No. 3705.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3709 MSI
1122
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
3821 Offset–voltage compensation value of the analog output of the third–spindle speed
1123
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Note
NOTE
1 If the spindle fails to move after the PMC issues the spindle
motor speed command, check the following:
Type A is selected (the MSI bit, bit 2 of parameter No. 3709,
is set to 0) when the multispindle control function is used.
→ The second or third spindle cannot be controlled. The
first spindle can be controlled only when the spindle
selection signal SWS1 is set to “1”.
The spindle stop signal for each axis is set to “0” when the
multispindle control function is being used.
→ Spindle stop signal for each axis *SSTPx <G027, #3, #4,
#5> stops the spindle.
M03/M04 is not specified when the CNC is being used to
control the output polarity.
→ If the TCW bit, bit 7 of parameter No. 3706, is set to 1, the
M03/M04 command issued to the CNC changes the
output polarity for the spindle motor. If no M03/M04
command is specified after the CNC is turned on, the
specified speed output is not sent to the spindle motor
because the output polarity has not been determined.
2 The SF signal indicates that output of the S code to the PMC
has been completed. The signal does not indicate the end
of the command for specifying the spindle speed.
3 For an explanation of connecting the second or third
spindle, see Sections 9.2 and 9.10.
4 If the multispindle control function is not being used, the
CNC does not issue any commands to the second and third
spindles. The output polarity is controlled by the SGNx
signal. It is not affected by the SSINx signal.
The speed output to the spindle motor can be controlled
only when the SINDx signal is set to “1”.
1124
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
15.5
EXTERNAL KEY
INPUT
General MDI key codes can be sent from the PMC to CNC by means of interface
signals. This allows the CNC to be controlled in the same way as when
the operator performs MDI key operation.
Control is realized by exchanging the following interface signals between
the PMC and CNC:
(START)
no
< EKSET = EKENB > 2) Check whether a key code can be set.
yes
< INHKY = 0 > no
yes
3) When a key code can be set:
Set key code (1) Set the key code to be input.
(2) Invert the (EKSET) signal to instruct the CNC to
read the key code.
Invert EKSET
yes
6) Release external key input control mode.
Set ENBKY = 0
(END)
1125
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
NOTE
Read processing is controlled by exclusive–ORing (XOR)
the key code read signal (EKSET) with the read completion
signal (EKENB). When the EKSET and EKENB signals
differ in their logic, the CNC reads the input key code. Once
reading has been completed, the CNC inverts the EKENB
signal to match its logic with that of the EKSET signal.
In the PMC, on the other hand, a new key code cannot be
set while the EKSET and EKENB signals differ in their logic.
Signals
1126
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G066 EKSET ENBKY
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F053 EKENB PRGDPL INHKY
NOTE
Key configuration for 9 ”CRT, or etc. : 5 keys + 2 keys ([F0] A[F4] and
[FR], [FL])
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
1127
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
Key configuration for 14” CRT, or etc.: 10 keys + 2 keys ([F0]A[F9] and
[FR], [FL])
1128
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
0 Space 0 @ P
1 1 A Q
2 2 B R
3 # 3 C S
4 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 & 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 ( 8 H X
9 ) 9 I Y
A ; * J Z
(EOB)
B + K [
C , L
D – = M ]
E . N
F / ? O
1129
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–62753EN–1/01
0 RESET [F0]
(Note2)
1 [F1]
(Note2)
2 [F2]
(Note2)
3 [F3]
(Note2)
4 INSERT [F4]
(Note2)
5 DELETE [F5]
(Note2)
[F6]
6 CAN ALTER
(Note2)
7 [F7]
(Note2)
C MES-
SAEG
D GRAPH
(CUSTOM)
(Note1)
1130
B–62753EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
15.6
DIRECT OPERATION
BY PMC/MMC
Signal
1131
APPENDIX
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
1135
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
A.1
LIST OF ADDRESSES
A.1.1 Interface addresses among CNC, PMC and Machine Tool are as follows:
List of Addresses
CNC G000– PMC X000– MT
(One–Path Control)
F000– Y000–
1136
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
→
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X000
X001
X002
X003
X005
X006
X007
X008 *ESP
X010
X011
X012
1137
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
→
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0
G003
G015
G017
G020
G021
G022
G024
1138
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G025
G026
1139
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G050 *TLV9 *TLV8
G056
G057
G060 *TSB
G062 *CRTOF
G063 NOZAGC
G065
G067
G068
G069
1140
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G075 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB
G084
G085
G087
G088
G089
G090
G093
G094
G095
G097
G099
1141
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
G101
G103
G104
G105
G107
G109
G111
G113
G115
G117
G119
G121
PK8 PK7
PK6 PK5 PK4 PK3 PK2 PK1 (T series)
G122 PKESS2 PKESS1
PKESS2 PKESS1 (M series)
G123
1142
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G124 DTCH8 DTCH7 DTCH6 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1
G125
G127
G128
G129
G131
G133
G135
G137
G139
G141
1143
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A
G152
G153
G162
G163
G164
G165
1144
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G174
G175
G176
G177
G186
G187
G188
G189
G190
G191
G193
G194
G195
G196
G197
1145
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G199
G200
G201
G202
G203
G210
G211
G212
G213
G214
G215
G216
G217
G218
G219
G220
G221
G222
1146
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
CNC →
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD
F006
F007 BF BF TF SF EFD MF
F018
F019
F020
F021
1147
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24
F035 SPAL
F042
F043
F048
1148
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F050 MORA2B MORA1B PORA2B SLVSB RCFNB RCHPB CFINB CHPB
F052
F062 PRTSF
F067
F068
F074
1149
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO
F082 RVSL
F083
F084
F085
F086
F087
F088
F089
F091
F093
F095
F097
F099
1150
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F100 ZP48 ZP47 ZP46 ZP45 ZP44 ZP43 ZP42 ZP41
F101
F103
F105
F107
F109
F111
F113
F115
F117
F119
F121
F123
F124
1151
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F125
F126
F127
F128
F143
F144
F146
F147
F149
1152
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F150
F152
F153
F154
F155
F156
F157
F158
F159
F160
F161
F162
F163
F164
F165
F166
F167
F171
F172
F173
F174
1153
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F175
F176
F179
F181
F183
F184
F185
F186
F187
F188
F189
F190
F191
F192
F193
F194
F195
1154
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
A.1.2 Interface addresses among CNC, PMC and Machine Tool are as follows:
List of Addresses
(Two–path Control) CNC
G000–
PMC X000– MT
Path 1 F000–
Y000–
G1000–
Path 2 F1000–
However, for the signals common to both paths, those signals are assigned
to path 1. Interface signals between the CNC and PMC are as shown
below:
The signals with suffix #1 are those for path 1 and the signals with suffix
#2 are those for path 2.
1155
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
→
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X000
X001
X002
X003
X005
X006
X008 *ESP
X010
X011
X012
1156
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
PMC →
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G000 ED7 #1 ED6 #1 ED5 #1 ED4 #1 ED3 #1 ED2 #1 ED1 #1 ED0 #1
G003
G015
G017
G020
G021
G022
G024
1157
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G025
G026
SPPHS SPSYC
G038 *BECLP #1 *BEUCP #1 *PLSST#1
SPPHS #1 SPSYC #1
1158
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G050 *TLV9 #1 *TLV8 #1
G052
G056
G057
G060 *TSB #1
G062 *CRTOF#1
G065
G067
G068
G069
1159
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G075 RCHB#1 RSLB #1 INTGB #1 SOCNB#1 MCFNB#1 SPSLB#1 *ESPB#1 ARSTB#1
G084
G085
G086
G087
G088
G089
G090
G093
G094
G095
G097
G099
1160
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G100 +J7#1 +J6#1 +J5#1 +J4 #1 +J3 #1 +J2 #1 +J1 #1
G101
G103
G104
G105
G107
G109
G111
G113
G115
G117
G119
G121
PK7#1
PKESS2#1 PK6 #1 PK5 #1 PK4 #1 PK3 #1 PK2 #1 PK1 #1 (T series)
G122 PKESS1#1
PKESS2#1 PKESS1#1 (M series)
G123
1161
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G124 DTCH7#1 DTCH6#1 DTCH5#1 DTCH4#1 DTCH3#1 DTCH2#1 DTCH1#1
G125
G127
G129
G131
G133
G135
G137
G139
G141
1162
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G149 EID31A#1 EID30A#1 EID29A#1 EID28A#1 EID27A#1 EID26A#1 EID25A#1 EID24A#1
G152
G153
G162
G163
G164
G165
1163
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G174
G175
G176
G177
G186
G187
G188
G189
G191
G193
G194
G195
G196
G197
1164
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G199
G200
G201
G202
G203
G204
G205
G206
G207
G208
G209
G210
G211
G212
G213
G214
G215
G216
G217
G218
G219
1165
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
→
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G1000 ED7#2 ED6#2 ED5#2 ED4#2 ED3#2 ED2#2 ED1#2 ED0#2
G1003
G1015
G1017
G1020
G1021
G1022
G1024
1166
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G1025
G1026
1167
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G1050 *TLV9 #2 *TLV8 #2
G1052
G1056
G1057
G1060 *TSB#2
G1062 *CRTOF#2
G1063 NOZAGC#2
G1065
G1067
G1068
G1069
1168
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G1075 RCHB#2 RSLB#2 INTGB #2 SOCNB#2 MCFNB#2 SPSLB#2 *ESPB#2 ARSTB#2
G1084
G1085
G1086
G1087
G1088
G1089
G1090
G1093
G1094
G1095
G1097
G1098
G1099
1169
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G1100 +J7#2 +J6#2 +J5#2 +J4#2 +J3#2 +J2#2 +J1#2
G1101
G1103
G1104
G1105
G1107
G1109
G1111
G1113
G1115
G1117
G1119
G1121
PK7#2
PKESS2#2 PK6 #2 PK5 #2 PK4 #2 PK3 #2 PK2 #2 PK1 #2 (T series)
G1122 PKESS1#2
PKESS2#2 PKESS1#2 (M series)
G1123
1170
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G1124 DTCH7#2 DTCH6#2 DTCH5#2 DTCH4#2 DTCH3#2 DTCH2#2 DTCH1#2
G1125
G1127
G1128
G1129
G1131
G1133
G1135
G1137
G1139
G1141
1171
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G1149 EID31A#2 EID30A#2 EID29A#2 EID28A#2 EID27A#2 EID26A#2 EID25A#2 EID24A#2
G1152
G1153
G1162
G1163
G1164
G1165
1172
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G1174
G1175
G1176
G1177
G1186
G1187
G1188
G1189
G1191
G1193
G1194
G1195
G1196
G1197
1173
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G1199
G1200
G1201
G1202
G1203
G1204
G1205
G1206
G1207
G1208
G1209
G1210
G1211
G1212
G1213
G1214
G1215
G1216
G1217
G1218
G1219
1174
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
→
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F000 OP#1 SA#1 STL#1 SPL#1 RWD#1
F006
F018
F019
F020
F021
1175
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F025 S31#1 S30#1 S29#1 S28#1 S27#1 S26#1 S25#1 S24#1
F035 SPAL#1
F042
F043
F048
1176
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F050 MORA2B#1 MORA1B#1 PORA2B#1 SLVSB#1 RCFNB#1 RCHPB#1 CFINB#1 CHPB#1
F052
F062 PRTSF#1
F067
F068
F069
F074
1177
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F075 SPO#1 KEYO#1 DRNO#1 MLKO#1 SBKO#1 BDTO#1
F082 RVSL#1
F083
F084
F085
F086
F087
F088
F089
F091
F093
F095
F097
F099
1178
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F100 ZP47#1 ZP46#1 ZP45#1 ZP44#1 ZP43#1 ZP42#1 ZP41#1
F101
F103
F105
F107
F109
F111
F113
F115
F117
F119
F121
F123
F124
1179
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F125
F126
F127
F128
F143
F144
F146
F147
F149
1180
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F150
F152
F153
F154
F155
F156
F157
F158
F159
F160
F161
F162
F163
F164
F165
F166
F167
F168
F169
F170
F171
F172
F173
F174
1181
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F175
F176
F179
F181
F183
F184
F185
F186
F187
F188
F189
F190
F191
F192
F193
F194
F195
1182
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
→
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F1000 OP#2 SA#2 STL#2 SPL#2 RWD#2
F1006
F1018
F1019
F1020
F1021
1183
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F1025 S31#2 S30#2 S29#2 S28#2 S27#2 S26#2 S25#2 S24#2
F1035 SPAL#2
F1042
F1043
F1048
1184
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F1050 MORA2B#2 MORA1B#2 PORA2B#2 SLVSB#2 RCFNB#2 RCHPB#2 CFINB#2 CHPB#2
F1052
F1062 PRTSF#2
F1067
F1068
F1069
F1074
1185
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F1075 SPO#2 KEYO#2 DRNO#2 MLKO#2 SBKO#2 BDTO#2
F1082 RVSL#2
F1083
F1084
F1085
F1086
F1087
F1088
F1089
F1091
F1093
F1095
F1097
F1099
1186
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F1100 ZP47#2 ZP46#2 ZP45#2 ZP44#2 ZP43#2 ZP42#2 ZP41#2
F1101
F1103
F1105
F1107
F1109
F1111
F1113
F1115
F1117
F1119
F1121
F1123
F1124
1187
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F1125
F1126
F1127
F1128
F1143
F1144
F1146
F1147
F1149
1188
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F1150
F1152
F1153
F1154
F1155
F1156
F1157
F1158
F1159
F1160
F1161
F1162
F1163
F1164
F1165
F1166
F1167
F1168
F1169
F1170
F1171
F1172
F1173
F1174
1189
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F1175
F1176
F1179
F1181
F1183
F1184
F1185
F1186
F1187
F1188
F1189
F1190
F1191
F1192
F1193
F1194
1190
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
A.2
LIST OF SIGNALS
A.2.1
f : Available
List of Signals F : Available only with
(In order of functions) 2–path control
– : Unavailable
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
Servo axis abnormal load
ABTQSV F090#0 f f
detected signal
XAE X004#0 f f
Automatic
A t ti tool
t l length
l th
Measuring
gpposition reached YAE X004#1 - f
measurement ((M
14 2
14.2
series)/Automatic tool signal ZAE X004#2 - f
offset (T series)
ZAE X004#1 f -
Canned cycle (M
series)/Canned cycle
Tapping signal TAP F001#5 f f 11.7
for hole machining (T
series)
Canned cycle (T
series)/Multiple
Chamferring signal CDZ G053#7 f - 11.9
repetitive canned
cycle (T series)
1191
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
"! !
! ! *TSB G060#7 f - 2.3.4
"! " ! UI000 ! UI015 G054,G055 f f
13.8,
External read start signal EXRD G058#1 f f
13.5
1192
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
Direct operation by
Direct operation select signal DMMC G042#7 f f 15.6
PMC/MMC
*ESP G008#4 f f
Emergency stop Emergency stop signal 21
2.1
*ESP G008#4 f f
1193
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
+'%" !#'#"
+'%" #$%'#" &" EF F008#0 - f 11.8
("'#" &%&
%' #)%% %' #)%% &" *FV0 '# *FV7 G012 f f 7.1.7.2
'
F1' & ' &" F1D G016#7 - f 7.1.5
&%&
&$ &$
&$ &$ &''(& &" HDO0 '# HDO7 F122 f f 14.3.2
&"
"!'%
" "$(' &" INCH F002#0 f f 11.4
#")%&#"
1194
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
+MIT1,+MIT2 X004#2,#4 f -
Tool offset value write signal
-MIT1,-MIT2 X004#3,#5 f -
Input of tool offset G039#0 to
value measured B (T Tool offset number select signal OFN0 to OFN5,OFN6 f - 14.4.2
#5,G040#0
se es)
series)
Workpiece coordinate system
shift value write mode select WOQSM G039#6 f -
signal
Interlock signal
g for each axis and +MIT1 to +MIT4 G132#0 to #3 - f
direction -MIT1 to -MIT4 G134#0 to #3 - f
Interruption type
Interrupt signal for custom macro UINT G053#3 f f 11.6.2
custom macro
1195
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
Memory protection
Memory protection signal KEY1 to KEY4 G046#3 to #6 f f 12.2.3
key
DM00 F009#7 f f
DM01 F009#6 f f
Decode M signal
DM02 F009#5 f f
DM30 F009#4 f f
2nd auxiliary
y function strobe BF F007#4 f -
signal BF F007#7 - f
1196
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
SWS1 G027#0 f -
SWS3 G027#2 f -
*SSTP1 G027#3 f -
ENB2 F038#2 f -
Spindle enable signal
ENB3 F038#3 f -
SKIP2 to X004#2 to
Skip signal Skip signal f f 14.3.3
SKIP6,SKIP7,SKIP8 #6,#0,#1
Optional
p block Optional block skip signal BDT1,BDT2 to BDT9 G044#0,G045 f f
skip/addition of MBDT1,MBDT2 to 5.5
optional block skip Optional block skip check signal F004#0,F005 f f
MBDT9
1197
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
EBUFA G142#7 f f
EBUFD G178#7 f f
EBSYA F130#7 f f
EBSYB F133#7 f f
(
) EBSYC F136#7 f f
EBSYD F139#7 f f
ECLRA G142#6 f f
ECLRB G154#6 f f
( )
ECLRC G166#6 f f
ECLRD G178#6 f f
ESTPA G142#5 f f
ESTPB G154#5 f f
15 1
15.1
( ) ESTPC G166#5 f f
ESTPD G178#5 f f
ESBKA G142#3 f f
(( ESBKB G154#3 f f
) ESBKC G166#3 f f
ESBKD G178#3 f f
EMSBKA G143#7 f f
(
( EMSBKB G155#7 f f
) EMSBKC G167#7 f f
EMSBKD G179#7 f f
EM11B EM48B F135,F145 f f
( ) EM11C EM48C F138,F148 f f
EMFA F131#0 f f
EMFB F134#0 f f
( ) EMFC F137#0 f f
EMFD F140#0 f f
1198
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
EFINA G142#0 f f
Auxiliary
y function completion
p EFINB G154#0 f f
signal (PMC axis control) EFINC G166#0 f f
EFIND G178#0 f f
ESOFA G142#4 f f
ESOFD G178#4 f f
EMBUFA G142#2 f f
Buffering
g disable signal
g ((PMC EMBUFB G154#2 f f
axis control) EMBUFC G166#2 f f
EMBUFD G178#2 f f
EINPA F130#0 f f
In-position
p signal
g ((PMC axis EINPB F133#0 f f
control) EINPC F136#0 f f
EINPD F139#0 f f
ECKZA F130#1 f f
PMC axis ECKZB F133#1 f f
control/PMC axis Following
g zero checking
g signal
g
speed control (PMC axis control) ECKZC F136#1 f f
15 1
15.1
function
ECKZD F139#1 f f
EIALA F130#2 f f
EIALB F133#2 f f
Alarm signal (PMC axis control)
EIALC F136#2 f f
EIALD F139#2 f f
EGENA F130#4 f f
EGENB F133#4 f f
g signal
Axis moving g (
(PMC axis
control)
EGENC F136#4 f f
EGEND F139#4 f f
EDENA F130#3 f f
EDENB F133#3 f f
Auxiliary
y function executing
g
signal (PMC axis control)
EDENC F136#3 f f
EDEND F139#3 f f
EOTNA F130#6 f f
EOTNB F133#6 f f
g
Negative-direction overtravel
signal (PMC axis control)
EOTNC F136#6 f f
EOTND F139#6 f f
1199
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
EOTPA F130#5 f f
EOTPB F133#5 f f
!"$ " $ " $
! ( &! " )
EOTPC F136#5 f f
EOTPD F139#5 f f
' # ! ( &! " ) DRNE G150#7 f f
&!
" &! # " $ ! !"
RTE G150#6 f f 15.1
! " ! ( &! " )
#"
$ 0% ! ( &!
EOV0 F129#5 f f
" )
!" #" " !
EADEN1 " EADEN8 F112 f f
( &! " )
EABUFA F131#1 f f
EABUFB F134#1 f f
# # !
(( &!
" )
EABUFC F137#1 f f
EABUFD F140#1 f f
F070#0 "
!" !%" !" !%" ! PSW01 " PSW10 f f 1.2.9
F071#1
!" !'
!" !' " ! NPOS1 " NPOS8 G198 f f 12.1.10
"
1200
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
RGSPP F065#0 - f
Spindle rotation direction signal
RGSPM F065#1 - f
Rigid
g tapping
pp g 9.11
Rigid tapping in-progress signal RTAP F076#3 f f
Second feedrate
2nd feedrate override signal *AFV0 to *AFV7 G013 f f 7.1.7.3
override
1201
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
SKIP X004#7 f f
Skip function Skip signal 14 3 1
14.3.1
SKIPP G006#6 f -
1202
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
G078#0 to
SHA00 to SHA11 f f
G079#3
9 13
9.13
Spindle orientation external stop G080#0 to
Spindle orientation SHB00 to SHB11 f f
position command signal G081#3
G208#0 to
SHC00 to SHC11 f f 9.15
G209#3
SIND G033#7 f f
Spindle motor speed command
SIND2 G035#7 f f
select signal
SIND3 G037#7 f f
G032#0 to
R01I to R12I f f
G033#3
SSIN G033#6 f f
Spindle motor command polarity
SSIN2 G035#6 f f
select signal
SSIN3 G037#6 f f
SGN G033#5 f f
Spindle motor command polarity
SGN2 G035#5 f f
select signal
SGN3 G037#5 f f
1203
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
TLMLA G070#0 f f
# "
" LOW
TLMLB G074#0 f f
! ((serial spindle))
TLMLC G204#0 f f
TLMHA G070#1 f f
# "
" HIGH
TLMHB G074#1 f f
! ((serial spindle))
TLMHC G204#1 f f
CTH1A,CTH2A G070#3,#2 f f
#"/
" / !
(serial
( i l
CTH1B,CTH2B G074#3,#2 f f
spindle))
CTH1C,CTH2C G204#3,#2 f f
SRVA G070#4 f f
!
(serial
( i l
SRVB G074#4 f f
spindle))
SRVC G204#4 f f
SFRA G070#5 f f
!
((serial
i l
SFRB G074#5 f f
spindle))
MRDYA G070#7 f f
$
!
((serial
i l
MRDYB G074#7 f f
spindle))
MRDYC G204#7 f f
ARSTA G071#0 f f
!"" !
(serial
( i l
ARSTB G075#0 f f
spindle))
ARSTC G205#0 f f
*ESPA G071#1 f f
$ !"
" !
((serial
i l
*ESPB G075#1 f f
spindle))
*ESPC G205#1 f f
SPSLA G071#2 f f
!"
" !
(serial
( i l
SPSLB G075#2 f f
spindle))
SPSLC G205#2 f f
1204
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
MCFNA G071#3 f f
P
Power li switch
line it h completion
l ti
MCFNB G075#3 f f
g
signal ((serial spindle))
MCFNC G205#3 f f
SOCNA G071#4 f f
Soft
S ft start/stop
t t/ t cancell signal
i l
SOCNB G075#4 f f
((serial spindle))
SOCNC G205#4 f f
INTGA G071#5 f f
Signall for
Si f controlling
t lli velocity
l it
INTGB G075#5 f f
g
integration ((serial spindle))
INTGC G205#5 f f
RSLA G071#6 f f
Output
O t t switch
it h requestt signal
i l
RSLB G075#6 f f
((serial spindle))
RSLC G205#6 f f
RCHA G071#7 f f
Power line
P li status
t t check
h k signal
i l
RCHB G075#7 f f
((serial spindle))
RCHC G205#7 f f
INDXA G072#0 f f
Orientation
O i t ti stop t position
iti change
h
INDXB G076#0 f f
signal
g ((serial spindle))
INDXC G206#0 f f
ROTAA G072#1 f f
Rotation direction command while
Spindle
S i dl serial
i l output/
t t/ 92
9.2,
changing the orientation stop ROTAB G076#1 f f
g output
spindle analog 9.15
position signal (serial spindle)
ROTAC G206#1 f f
DEFMDA G072#3 f f
Differential
Diff ti l mode
d commandd
DEFMDB G076#3 f f
signal
g ((serial spindle))
DEFMDC G206#3 f f
OVRIDA G072#4 f f
Analog
A l overrideid command
d signal
i l
OVRIDB G076#4 f f
((serial spindle))
OVRIDC G206#4 f f
INCMDA G072#5 f f
Incremental command external
setting type orientation signal INCMDB G076#5 f f
(serial spindle)
INCMDC G206#5 f f
MFNHGA G072#6 f f
Main spindle
s indle MCC status signal
while changing spindles signal MFNHGB G076#6 f f
(serial spindle)
MFNHGC G206#6 f f
RCHHGA G072#7 f f
High out ut MCC status signal
High–output
while a magnetic sensor (serial RCHHGB G076#7 f f
spindle)
RCHHGC G206#7 f f
1205
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
MORCMA G073#0 f f
Command for sspindle
indle orientaion
with a magnetic sensor (serial MORCMB G077#0 f f
spindle)
MORCMC G207#0 f f
SLVA G073#1 f f
Slave operation
Sl ti command
d signal
i l
SLVB G077#1 f f
((serial spindle))
SLVC G207#1 f f
MPOFA G073#2 f f
Motor
M t power stop
t signal
i l ((serial
i l
MPOFB G077#2 f f
spindle))
MPOFC G207#2 f f
ALMA F045#0 f f
ALMC F168#0 f f
SSTA F045#1 f f
Speed
S d zero signal
i l
SSTB F049#1 f f
(
(serial spindle))
SSTC F168#1 f f
SDTA F045#2 f f
Speed
S dd detection
t ti signal
i l (serial
( i l
SDTB F049#2 f f
spindle))
SDTC F168#2 f f
SARA F045#3 f f
Spindle
S i dl serial t t/ S
i l output/ Speed
d arrival
i l signal
i l (serial
( i l 92
9.2,
SARB F049#3 f f
g output spindle))
spindle analog 9.15
SARC F168#3 f f
LDT1A F045#4 f f
Load
L d detection
d t ti signal
i l 1 (serial
( i l
LDT1B F049#4 f f
spindle))
LDT1C F168#4 f f
LDT2A F045#5 f f
Load
L d detection
d t ti signal
i l 2 (serial
( i l
LDT2B F049#5 f f
spindle))
LDT2C F168#5 f f
TLMA F045#6 f f
Torque limit
T li it signal
i l
TLMB F049#6 f f
(
(serial spindle))
TLMC F168#6 f f
ORARA F045#7 f f
O i t ti completion
Orientation l ti signal
i l
ORARB F049#7 f f
((serial spindle))
ORARC F168#7 f f
CHPA F046#0 f f
Power line
P li switch
it h signal
i l ((serial
i l
CHPB F050#0 f f
spindle))
CHPC F269#0 f f
CFINA F046#1 f f
Spindle
S i dl switch
it h completion
l ti signal
i l
CFINB F050#1 f f
(
(serial spindle))
CFINC F169#1 f f
1206
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
RCHPA F046#2 f f
' ' &*'
('$(' ' &"
((serial
i l
RCHPB F050#2 f f
spindle))
RCHPC F169#2 f f
RCFNA F046#3 f f
('$('
' ' &*'
' #!$ '#"
' &"
RCFNB F050#3 f f
((serial spindle))
RCFNC F169#3 f f
A F046#4 f f
Slave operation
Sl ti status
t t signal
i l
B F050#4 f f
((serial spindle))
F169#4 f f
A F046#5 f f
" #% $$%#+!' &$"
#%"''#" *' $#&'#" #% B F050#5 f f
(serial spindle)
Spindle serial output/ F169#5 f f 9.,
spindle analog output A F046#6 f f 9.15
" #% #!$ '#" # &$"
#%"''#" *' !"' B F050#6 f f
&"&#% (serial spindle)
F169#6 f f
A F046#7 f f
" #% $$%#+!' &$"
#%"''#" *' !"' B F050#7 f f
&"&#% (serial spindle)
F169#7 f f
A F04#0 f f
" "'" ' &''(& # '
'' #"%#''#" $#&'#"
B F05#0 f f
#% &" (serial spindle)
F#0 f f
A F04#1 f f
"%!"'
' !'#
' #%"''#"
' '
B F05#1 f f
&"
((serial spindle))
F#1 f f
F036#0 '#
S' # &" R01O '# R12O f f
F037#3
1207
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
1208
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Item
series series
G047#0 to
TL01 to TL256 - f
G048#0
Tool g
group
p number select signal
g
TL01 to TL64 G047#0 to #6 f -
G049#0 to
Tool life count override signal *TLV0 to *TLV9 - f
G050#1
Waiting
g M code No-wait signal NOWT G063#1 F F
85
8.5
(two-path control) Waiting signal WATO F063#6 F F
1209
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
A.2.2
f : Available
List of Signals F : Available only with
(In order of symbols) 2–path control
– : Unavailable
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
*+ED1 to *+ED8 External deceleration signal G118 f f 7.1.9
*ESP X008#4 f f
* Emergency stop signal 21
2.1
*ESP G008#4 f f
*ESPA G071#1 f f
*ESPC G205#1 f f
1210
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
*SSTP1 G027#3 f -
G049#0 to
*TLV0 to *TLV9 Tool life count override signal - f 10.3
G050#1
+J1 to +J8 Feed axis and direction selection signal G100 f f 3.1
+Jg, –Jg, +Ja, –Ja Feed axis and direction selection signals G086#0 to #3 f f 3.5
+
+LM1 to +LM8 Stroke limit external setting signal G110 - f 2.3.2
+MIT1,+MIT2 Manual feed interlock signal for each axis X004#2,#4 f - 2.5
+MIT1 to +MIT4 Interlock signal for each axis and direction G132#0 to #3 - f 2.5
-J1 to -J8 Feed axis and direction selection signal G102 f f 3.1
-MIT1 to -MIT4 Interlock signal for each axis and direction G134#0 to #3 - f 2.5
ALMA F045#0 f f
A
ALMB Alarm signal (serial spindle) F049#0 f f 9.2, 9.15
ALMC F168#0 f f
ARSTA G071#0 f f
ARSTC G205#0 f f
1211
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
B00 B31
F030 F033 f f 8.1
BAL
F001#2 f f 2.4
BCLP
F061#1 - f 11.11
BDTO
(BDT) F075#2 f f 12.1.15
BF F007#4 f -
81
8.1
BF F007#7 - f
BFIN G005#4 f -
84
8.4
BFIN G005#7 - f
BUCLP
F061#0 - f 11.11
CDZ
G053#7 f - 11.9
CFINA F046#1 f f
((serial
i l
CFINB F050#1 f f 9., 9.15
spindle))
CFINC F169#1 f f
CHPA F046#0 f f
CHPC F269#0 f f
CHPCYL Chopping cycle signal F039#3 – f 1.12
CSS
F002#2 f f 9.5
CTH1A,CTH2A G070#3,#2 f f
1212
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
A G07#3 f f
Diff ti l mode
Differential d command
d signal
i l ((serial
i l
B G07 #3 f f
spindle))
G #3 f f
DM00 F009#7 f f
DM01 F009#6 f f
! $ 81
8.1
DM02 F009#5 f f
DM30 F009#4 f f
DMMC #% !"#%! $% $ G042#7 f f 15.6
DSP1, DSP2, DSP3 Spindle motor speed detection signals Y(n+1)#0 to #2 f f 2.11
EA0 %! EA6 #$$ $ !# (%# % "&% G002#0 %! #6 f f 15.2
EABUFA F131#1 f f
EABUFB F134#1 f f
&# & $ ( ($ ! %#!) 15 1
15.1
EABUFC F137#1 f f
EABUFD F140#1 f f
EACNT1 %! EACNT
! %#! $ ( ($ ! %#!) F182 f f 15.1
1213
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
EBUFA G142#7 f f
EBUFD G178#7 f f
ECKZA F130#1 f f
ECKZD F139#1 f f
ECLRA G142#6 f f
ECLRB G154#6 f f
( ) 15 1
15.1
ECLRC G166#6 f f
ECLRD G178#6 f f
EDENA F130#3 f f
EDEND F139#3 f f
EFINA G142#0 f f
EFIND G178#0 f f
EGENA F130#4 f f
EGENB F133#4 f f
( ) 15 1
15.1
EGENC F136#4 f f
EGEND F139#4 f f
EIALA F130#2 f f
EIALB F133#2 f f
( ) 15 1
15.1
EIALC F136#2 f f
EIALD F139#2 f f
1214
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
EINPA F130#0 f f
EINPB F133#0 f f
In-position signal (PMC axis control) 15 1
15.1
EINPC F136#0 f f
EINPD F139#0 f f
EMBUFA G142#2 f f
EMBUFB Buffering
g disable signal
g G154#2 f f
15 1
15.1
EMBUFC (PMC axis control) G166#2 f f
EMBUFD G178#2 f f
EMFA F131#0 f f
EMFB Auxiliary
y function strobe signal
g ((PMC axis F134#0 f f
15 1
15.1
EMFC control) F137#0 f f
EMFD F140#0 f f
EMSBKA G143#7 f f
EMSBKD G179#7 f f
EOTNA F130#6 f f
EOTNB Negative-direction
g overtravel signal
g ((PMC F133#6 f f
15 1
15.1
EOTNC axis control) F136#6 f f
EOTND F139#6 f f
1215
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
EOTPA F130#5 f f
EOTPD F139#5 f f
EREND F060#0 f f 15.2
ESBKA G142#3 f f
ESBKB G154#3 f f
(
) 15 1
15.1
ESBKC G166#3 f f
ESBKD G178#3 f f
ESOFA G142#4 f f
ESOFB G154#4 f f
(
) 15 1
15.1
ESOFC G166#4 f f
ESOFD G178#4 f f
ESTB
G002#7 f f 15.2
ESTPA G142#5 f f
ESTPD G178#5 f f
1216
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
GOQSM Tool offset value write mode select signal G039#7 f - 14.4.2
GR21 G029#0 f -
Gear selection signal (input) 9 10
9.10
GR31 G029#2 f -
HS1A to HS1D Manual handle feed axis selection signal G018#0 to #3 f f 3.2
HS2A to HS2D Manual handle feed axis selection signal G018#4 to #7 f f 3.2
HS3A to HS3D Manual handle feed axis selection signal G019#0 to #3 - f 3.2
1217
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
IGVRY1 to IGVRY8 Each-axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal G192 f f 2.9
INCMDA G072#5 f f
IIncremental
t l command d external
t l setting
tti ttype
INCMDB G076#5 f f 9.2, 9.15
orientation signal
g ((serial spindle))
INCMDC G206#5 f f
INCSTA F047#1 f f
IIncremental t l method
th d orientation
i t ti signal
i l
INCSTB F051#1 f f 9.2, 9.15
((serial spindle))
INCSTC F170#1 f f
INDXA G072#0 f f
I Orientation
O i t ti stop t position
iti change
h signal
i l
INDXB G076#0 f f 9.2, 9.15
((serial spindle))
INDXC G206#0 f f
INTGA G071#5 f f
Signall for
Si f controlling
t lli velocity
l it iintegration
t ti
INTGB G075#5 f f 9.2, 9.15
((serial spindle))
INTGC G205#5 f f
LDT1A F045#4 f f
LDT1C F168#4 f f
L
LDT2A F045#5 f f
LDT2C F168#5 f f
MBDT1,MBDT2 to
Optional block skip check signal F004#0,F005 f f 5.5
MBDT9
1218
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
MCFNA G071#3 f f
P
Power li switch
line it h completion
l ti signal
i l ((serial
i l
MCFNB G075#3 f f 9.2, 9.15
spindle))
MCFNC G205#3 f f
1219
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
MORA1A F046#6 f f
Signall for
Si f completion
l ti off spindle
i dl orientation
i t ti
MORA1B F050#6 f f 9.2, 9.15
with a magnetic
g sensor (serial
( spindle))
MORA1C F169#6 f f
MORA2A F046#7 f f
SIgnall for
SI f approximate
i t spindle
i dl orientation
i t ti
MORA2B F050#7 f f 9.2, 9.15
with a magnetic
g sensor (serial
( spindle))
MORA2C F169#7 f f
MORCMA G073#0 f f
Command
C d for
f spindle
i dl orientaion
i t i with ith a
MORCMB G077#0 f f 9.2, 9.15
magnetic
g sensor ((serial spindle))
MORCMC G207#0 f f
MPOFB Motor power stop signal (serial spindle) G077#2 f f 9.2, 9.15
MPOFC G207#2 f f
MRDYA G070#7 f f
MRDYC G204#7 f f
NRROA G072#2 f f
Short distant movement command while
Short–distant
NRROB changing the orientation stop position signal G076#2 f f 9.2, 9.15
(serial spindle)
NRROC G206#2 f f
1220
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
G039#0 to
OFN0 to OFN5,OFN6 Tool offset number select signal f - 14.4.2
#5,G040#0
ORARA F045#7 f f
Orientation
O i t ti completion
l ti signal
i l ((serial
i l
ORARB F049#7 f f 9.2, 9.15
spindle))
ORARC F168#7 f f
ORCMA G070#6 f f
Orientation
O i t ti command
d signal
i l (serial
( i l
ORCMB G074#6 f f 9.2, 9.15
spindle))
ORCMC G204#6 f f
O
Software operator's panel
OUT0 to OUT7 F072 f f 12.1.15
general-purpose switch signal
OVRIDA G072#4 f f
Analog
A l override
id command
d signal
i l (serial
( i l
OVRIDB G076#4 f f 9.2, 9.15
spindle))
OVRIDC G206#4 f f
PC1DEA F047#0 f f
Signal indicating the status of the detected
PC1DEB one-rotation position coder signal (serial F051#0 f f 9.2, 9.15
spindle)
PC1DEC F170#0 f f
G122#6
PKESS1 First spindle synchronous control signal f f 9.16
(G031#6)
P G122#7
PKESS2 Second spindle synchronous control signal f f 9.16
(G031#7)
PN1,PN2,PN4,PN8,
Workpiece number search signal G009#0 to 4 f f 15.3
PN16
PORA2A F046#5 f f
Signall for
Si f approximate
i t spindle
i dl orientation
i t ti
PORA2B F050#5 f f 9.2, 9.15
with a p
position coder ((serial spindle))
PORA2C F169#5 f f
1221
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
G032#0 '#
R01I '# R12I f f
G033#3
G034#0 '#
R01I2 '# R12I2 $" !#'#% &$ #!!" &" f f 15.4
G035#3
G036#0 '#
R01I3 '# R12I3 f f
G037#3
F036#0 '#
R01O '# R12O S' # &" f f 9.3
F037#3
RCFNA F046#3 f f
('$('
' ' &*'
' #!$ '#"
' &"
((serial
i l
RCFNB F050#3 f f 9., 9.15
spindle))
RCFNC F169#3 f f
RCHA G071#7 f f
#*% "
&''(&
' '
&"
(serial
( i l
RCHB G075#7 f f 9.2, 9.15
spindle))
RCHC G205#7 f f
RCH
A G07#7 f f
High–output
Hi h t t MCC status
t t signal
i l while
hil a
RCH
B G07 #7 f f
magnetic
g sensor ((serial spindle))
RCH
G #7 f f
RCHPA F046#2 f f
RCHPC F169#2 f f
RGSPM F065#1 - f
$" %#''#" %'#" &" 9 11
9.11
RGSPP F065#0 - f
RMTDI0 '# RMTDI7 "$(' &" #% %!#' (% G052 f f 13.2
RMTDO0 '# RMTDO7 ('$(' &" #% %!#' (% F069 f f 13.2
A G07#1 f f
Rotation direction command while changing
B the orientation stop position signal (serial G07 #1 f f
spindle)
G #1 f f
1222
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
(
ROV1E,ROV2E G150#0,#1 f f 15.1
)
ROV1O
(ROV1) F076#4 f f 12.1.15
ROV2O
(ROV2) F076#5 f f 12.1.15
RPDO
F002#1 f f 2.8
RSLA G071#6 f f
(serial
( i l
RSLB G075#6 f f 9.2, 9.15
spindle))
RSLC G205#6 f f
RTAP
F076#3 f f 9.11
RTE G150#6 f f 15.1
(
)
RTO
(RT) F077#6 f f 12.1.15
RVS
G007#0 - f 11.15
RVSL
F082#2 - f 11.15
SA
!
F000#6 f f 2.2
SARA F045#3 f f
SARB
(serial spindle) F049#3 f f 9.2, 9.15
SARC F168#3 f f
S
SBK
G046#1 f f 5.3.3
SBKO
(SBK) F075#3 f f 12.1.15
SCLP
F038#0 f - 9.8
SDTA F045#2 f f
SDTC F168#2 f f
1223
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
SFRA G070#5 f f
SFRC G204#5 f f
SGN G033#5 f f
Spindle
S i dl motor
t command
d polarity
l it select
l t
SGN2 G035#5 f f 15.4
g
signal
SGN3 G037#5 f f
G078#0 to
SHA00 to SHA11 f f
G079#3
p
Spindle pp
orientation external stop position
9 13
9.13
command signal G080#0 to
SHB00 to SHB11 f f
G081#3
SIND G033#7 f f
Spindle
S i dl motor
t speed
d command
d select
l t
SIND2 G035#7 f f 15.4
g
signal
SIND3 G037#7 f f
SLVA G073#1 f f
Slave operation
Sl ti command
d signal
i l (serial
( i l
SLVB G077#1 f f 9.2, 9.15
spindle))
SLVC G207#1 f f
SLVSA F046#4 f f
Slave operation
Sl ti status
t t signal
i l (serial
( i l
SLVSB F050#4 f f 9.2, 9.15
spindle))
SLVSC F169#4 f f
SOCNA G071#4 f f
Soft
S ft start/stop
t t/ t cancell signal
i l ((serial
i l
SOCNB G075#4 f f 9.2, 9.15
spindle))
SOCNC G205#4 f f
1224
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
SPSLA G071#2 f f
SPSLC G205#2 f f
SRVA G070#4 f f
SRVC G204#4 f f
SSIN G033#6 f f
Spindle
S i dl motor
t command
d polarity
l it select
l t
SSIN2 G035#6 f f 15.4
g
signal
SSIN3 G037#6 f f
S
SSTA F045#1 f f
SSTC F168#1 f f
SWS1 G027#0 f -
SWS3 G027#2 f -
1225
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
Synchronous/composite/superimposed
SYN1O to SYN7O F118#0 to #6 F - 1.9
control under way signals
TLMA F045#6 f f
TLMC F168#6 f f
TLMHA G070#1 f f
T Torque lilimit
T it command
d HIGH signal
i l (serial
( i l
TLMHB G074#1 f f 9.2, 9.15
spindle))
TLMHC G204#1 f f
TLMLA G070#0 f f
Torque lilimit
T it command
d LOW signal
i l (serial
( i l
TLMLB G074#0 f f 9.2, 9.15
spindle))
TLMLC G204#0 f f
1226
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
X XAE X004#0 f f
Y YAE X004#1 - f
Measuring position reached signal 14 2
14.2
ZAE X004#1 f -
ZAE X004#2 - f
ZP21 to ZP28 2nd reference position return end signal F096 f f 4.5
ZP31 to ZP38 3rd reference position return end signal F098 f f 4.5
Z ZP41 to ZP48 4th reference position return end signal F100 f f 4.5
1227
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
A.2.3
f : Available
List of Signals F : Available only with
(In order of addresses) 2–path control
– : Unavailable
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
X004#0 XAE f f
X004#1 YAE - f
Measuring position reached signal 14 2
14.2
X004#1 ZAE f -
X004#2 ZAE - f
X004#2,#4 Manual feed interlock signal for each axis +MIT1,+MIT2 f - 2.5
X004#3,#5 Manual feed interlock signal for each axis -MIT1,-MIT2 f - 14.4.2
G000,G001 Data signal for external data input ED0 to ED15 f f 15.2
G002#0 to #6 Address signal for external data input EA0 to EA6 f f 15.2
1228
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
G007#0
RVS - f 11.15
G008#6
& " RRW f f 5.2
PN1,PN2,PN4,
G009#0 4
f f 15.3
PN8,PN16
G014#0,#1
! ! ROV1,ROV2 f f 7.1.7.1
G023#7 # ALNGH - f 3.4.1
G027#0 SWS1 f -
G027#2 SWS3 f -
G027#3 *SSTP1 f -
G027#5 *SSTP3 f -
1229
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
G029#0 GR21 f -
Gear select signal (input) 9 10
9.10
G029#2 GR31 f -
G032#0 to
Spindle motor speed command signal R01I to R12I f f 15.4
G033#3
G033#5 SGN f f
Spindle motor command polarity select signal 15 4
15.4
G033#6 SSIN f f
G034#0 to
Spindle motor speed command signal R01I2 to R12I2 f f 15.4
G035#3
G036#0 to
Spindle motor speed command signal R01I3 to R12I3 f f 15.4
G037#3
G039#7 Tool offset value write mode select signal GOQSM f - 14.4.2
G041#4 to #7 Manual handle interrupt axis selection signal HS2IA to HS2ID f f 3.3
1230
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
BDT1, BDT2 to
G044#0,G045 Optional block skip signal f f 5.5
BDT9
G049#0 to
Tool life count override signal *TLV0 to *TLV9 - f 10.3
G050#1
RMTDI0 to
G052 Input signal for remote buffer f f 13.2
RMTDI7
13.8,
G058#1 External read start signal EXRD f f
13.5
13.8,
G058#2 External read/punch stop signal EXSTP f f
13.5
13.8,
G058#3 External punch start signal EXWT f f
13.5
G058#5 Input and run simultaneous mode select signal STRD - f 13.6
G058#6 Output and run simultaneous mode select signal STWD - f 13.6
RGTSP1,
G061#4,#5 Rigid tap spindle select signal f - 9.11
RGTSP2
G063#0 Path selection signal (Tool post selection signal) HEAD F F 2.7
1231
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
G070#0 Torque limit command LOW signal (serial spindle) TLMLA f f 9.2
G071#4 Soft start stop cancel signal (serial spindle) SOCNA f f 9.2
G071#7 Power line status check signal (serial spindle) RCHA f f 9.2
1232
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
G074#0 Torque limit command LOW signal (serial spindle) TLMLB f f 9.2
G075#4 Soft start stop cancel signal (serial spindle) SOCNB f f 9.2
G075#7 Power line status check signal (serial spindle) RCHB f f 9.2
G078#0 to
SHA00 to SHA11 f f
G079#3
p
Spindle pp
orientation external stop position
9 13
9.13
G080#0 to command signal
SHB00 to SHB11 f f
G081#3
1233
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
G086#0 to #3 Feed axis and direction selection signals +Jg, –Jg, +Ja, –Ja f f 3.5
*HROV0 +'
G096#0 +' #6 1% *+( )(" +)-)* '-))" *" &$ f f 7.1.7.1
*HROV6
G096#7 1% *+( )(" +)-)* '-))" *$+ *" &$ HROV f f 7.1.7.1
G108 !."* %!"& $'# *" &$ MLK1 +' MLK8 f f 5.3.1
DTCH1 +'
G124 '&+)'$$ ."* +! *" &$ f f 1.2.4
DTCH8
G8#0 +' '%('*"+ '&+)'$ ."* *$+"'& *" &$* +'
F
G130 &+)$'# *" &$ ') ! ."* *IT1 +' *IT8 f f 2.5
G136 '&+)'$ ."* *$+ *" &$ ( ."* '&+)'$) EAX1 +' EAX8 f f 15.1
SYNC1 +'
G138 "%($ */&!)'&',* ."* *$+ *" &$ f f 1.6
SYNC8
1234
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
G142#6
( ) ECLRA f f 15.1
G143#0 #6 ( ) EC0A EC6A f f 15.1
G144,G145 ( ) EIF0A EIF15A f f 15.1
G146 G149 ( ) EID0A EID31A f f 15.1
G150#0,#1
( ) ROV1E,ROV2E f f 15.1
G154#6
( ) ECLRB f f 15.1
G155#0 #6 ( ) EC0B EC6B f f 15.1
G156,G157 ( ) EIF0B EIF15B f f 15.1
G158 G161 ( ) EID0B EID31B f f 15.1
G166#6
( ) ECLRC f f 15.1
G167#0 #6 ( ) EC0C EC6C f f 15.1
1235
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
G167#7 Block stop disable signal (PMC axis control) EMSBKC f f 15.1
G168,G169 Axis control feedrate signal (PMC axis control) EIF0C to EIF15C f f 15.1
G170 to G173 Axis control data signal (PMC axis control) EID0C to EID31C f f 15.1
G179#0 to #6 Axis control command signal (PMC axis control) EC0D to EC6D f f 15.1
G179#7 Block stop disable signal (PMC axis control) EMSBKD f f 15.1
G180,G181 Axis control feedrate signal (PMC axis control) EIF0D to EIF15D f f 15.1
G182 to G185 Axis control data signal (PMC axis control) EID0D to EID31D f f 15.1
IGVRY1 to
G192 Each-axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal f f 2.9
IGVRY8
NPOS1 to
G198 Position display neglect signal f f 12.1.10
NPOS8
G205#7 Power line status check signal (serial spindle) RCHC f f 9.15
1236
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
1237
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
MBDT1,MBDT2
F004#0,F005 Optional block skip check signal f f 5.5
to MBDT9
F007#4 BF f -
2nd auxiliary function strobe signal 81
8.1
F007#7 BF - f
F009#4 DM30 f f
F009#5 DM02 f f
Decode M signal 81
8.1
F009#6 DM01 f f
F009#7 DM00 f f
F030 to F033 2nd miscellaneous function code signal B00 to B31 f f 8.1
GR1O,GR2O,
F034#0 to #2 Gear selection signal (output ) - f 9.3
GR3O
F036#0 to
12-bit code signal R01O to R12O f f 9.3
F037#3S
F038#2 ENB2 f -
Spindle enable signal 9 10
9.10
F038#3 ENB3 f -
1238
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
1239
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
13.8,
F053#2 Read/punch in–progress signal RPBSY f f
13.5
13.8,
F053#3 Read/punch alarm signal RPALM f f
13.5
13.8,
F053#4 Background busy signal BGEACT f f
13.5
F060#0 Read completion signal for external data input EREND f f 15.2
F060#1 Search completion signal for external data input ESEND f f 15.2
1240
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
F065#0 RGSPP - f
Spindle rotation direction signal 9 11
9.11
F065#1 RGSPM - f
RMTDO0 to
F069 Output signal for remote buffer f f 13.2
RMTDO7
F070#0 to PSW01 to
Position switch signal f f 1.2.9
F071#1 PSW10
F078 Software operator's panel signal (*FV0 to *FV7) *FV0O to *FV7O f f 12.1.15
F079,F080 Software operator's panel signal (*JV0 to *JV15) *JV0O to *JV15O f f 12.1.15
F081#0,#2, #4,#6 Software operator's panel signal (+J1 to +J4) +J1O to +J4O f f 12.1.15
F081#1,#3, #5,#7 Software operator's panel signal (-J1 to -J4) -J1O to -J4O f f 12.1.15
1241
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
F090#3 Abnormal load detection for the third spindle ABTSP3 f f 9.15
F096 2nd reference position return end signal ZP21 to ZP28 f f 4.5
F098 3rd reference position return end signal ZP31 to ZP38 f f 4.5
F100 4th reference position return end signal ZP41 to ZP48 f f 4.5
MDTCH1 to
F110 Controlled axis detach status signal f f 1.2.4
MDTCH8
EADEN1 to
F112 Distribution completion signal (PMC axis control) f f 15.1
EADEN8
F116 Floating reference position return end signal FRP1 to FRP8 f f 4.6
Synchronous/composite/superimposed control
F118#0 to #6 SYN1O to SYN7O F - 1.9
under way signals
F130#1 Following zero checking signal (PMC axis control) ECKZA f f 15.1
F131#0 Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control) EMFA f f 15.1
1242
B–62753EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
F132,F142 Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control) EM11A to EM48A f f 15.1
F133#1 Following zero checking signal (PMC axis control) ECKZB f f 15.1
F134#0 Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control) EMFB f f 15.1
F135,F145 Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control) EM11B to EM48B f f 15.1
F136#1 Following zero checking signal (PMC axis control) ECKZC f f 15.1
F137#0 Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control) EMFC f f 15.1
F138,F148 Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control) EM11C to EM48C f f 15.1
F139#1 Following zero checking signal (PMC axis control) ECKZD f f 15.1
1243
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–62753EN–1/01
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
F140#0 Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control) EMFD f f 15.1
F141,F151 Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control) EM11D to EM48D f f 15.1
SRLNO0 to
F178#0 to #3 Group number output signals f f 13.8
SRLNO3
EACNT1 to
F182 Controlling signal (PMC axis control) f f 15.1
EACNT8
1244
B–62753EN–1/01 Index
[Numbers] Chopping Function (M series), 159
Chuck/Tailstock Barrier (T series), 203
2nd Reference Position Return/3rd, 4th Reference
Position Return, 324 Circular Interpolation, 393
Clock Function, 904
CNC Ready Signal, 186
[A] Command Format, 708
Abnormal Load Detection, 237 Composite Control, 97
Absolute Position Detection, 49 Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Posi-
tion Coder, 698
Acceleration/ Deceleration Control, 529
Constant Surface Speed Control, 635
Actual Spindle Speed Output, 645
Continuous High–speed Skip Function, 1045
Alarm and Message, 526, 750
Controlled Axes, 2
Alarm Signal, 218
Controlled Axes Detach, 13
Alarms and Messages, 114
Conversational Programming with Graphic Function,
Angular Axis Control / Arbitrary Angular Axis Con- 965
trol, 155
Coordinate System Rotation, 884
Automatic Acceleration/ Deceleration, 529
Corner Control, 550
Automatic Corner Deceleration (M series), 478
Cs Contour Control, 667
Automatic Corner Override (M series), 469
Custom Macro, 836
Automatic Feedrate Control Function, 509
Custom Macro Variables Common to Two–path Con-
Automatic Operation, 337 trol (T Series (Two–path Control)), 849
Automatic Setting of a Workpiece Coordinate System, Cutter Compensation, 807
95
Cutter Compensation B, C (M Series), 807
Automatic Tool Length Measurement (M Series) /
Automatic Tool Offset (T Series), 1024 Cutting Feedrate Clamp, 452
Auxiliary Function, 556 Cycle Start/Feed Hold, 338
Auxiliary Function Lock, 569 Cylindrical Interpolation, 413
Axis Control, 1
[D]
[B] Data Input/Output Functions Based on the I/O Link,
999
B–Axis Control (T Series), 140
Decimal Point Programming/Pocket Calculator Type
Background Editing, 963 Decimal Point Programming, 815
Backlash Compensation, 38 Definition of Warning, Caution, and Note, 116
Balance Cut (2–path Control for T System), 371 Differences Between Superimposed Control and Ordi-
nary Synchronous Control, 102
Bell Shaped Acceleration/ Deceleration after Cutting
Feed, 541 Direct Operation by PMC/MMC, 1130
Bell–shaped Acceleration/ Deceleration for Rapid Display Data on the Diagnosis Screen, 704
Traverse, 534 Display of Hardware and Software Configuration, 914
Butt–type Reference Position Setting, 330 Display/Set, 904
Display/Set/Edit, 903
Displaying Alarm History, 908
[C] Displaying Operating Monitor, 931
Canned Cycle (M Series)/Canned Cycle for Hole Displaying Operation History, 905
Machining (T Series), 851
DNC Operation, 373
Canned Cycle (T Series)/Multiple Repetitive Canned
Cycle (T Series), 863 DNC1 Interface, 975
Index B–62753EN–1/01
Manual Reference Position Return, 300 Path Selection/DIsplay of Optional Path Names (Two–
path Control), 231
MANUAL RIGID TAPPING, 297 Playback, 964
Measurement, 1022 PMC Axis Control/PMC Axis Speed Control Func-
Memory Protection Key, 958 tion, 1064
Mirror Image, 18 PMC Control Function, 1063
Mirror Image for Double Turrets (T Series), 870 Polar Coordinate Interpolation, 411
Miscellaneous, 135 Polygonal Turning, 417
Miscellaneous Function/2nd Auxiliary Function, 557 Polygonal Turning (T series), 416
Reference Position Return and its Check During Syn- Single Block, 353
chronous Control, 94 Single Direction Positioning (M Series), 406
Reference Position Return During Composite Control, Skip Function, 1031
99
Small Hole Peck Drilling Cycle (M Series), 896
Reference Position Shift, 319
Smooth interpolation (G05.1), 445
Remote Buffer, 974
Software Operator’s Panel, 935
Remote Diagnosis, 946
Specifying G84 (G74) for Rigid Tapping by Parame-
Reset and Rewind, 343 ters, 730
Restrictions Imposed During Synchronous, Compos- Specifying the Rotation Axis, 9
ite, and Superimposed Control, 118 Spindle Control, 99
Retrace (M Series), 890 Spindle Orientation, 761
RETREAT AND RETRY FUNCTIONS (M Series), Spindle Output Control by the PMC, 1116
376
Spindle Output Switching, 764
Rigid Tapping, 696
Spindle Positioning (T Series), 646
Rigid Tapping Specification, 703
Spindle Serial Output/Spindle Analog Output, 587
Rotary Axis Roll Over, 57
Spindle Speed Control, 595
Run Hour and Parts Count Display, 917
Spindle Speed Control for Two–path Lathe, 623
Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection, 640
Spindle Speed Function, 585
[S]
Spindle Speed Function (S Code Output), 586
Scaling (M Series), 880
Spindle Synchronous Control, 757
Second Feedrate Override, 467
Spindle Tuning Screen, 910
Self–diagnosis, 913
Stamping the Machining Time, 933
Sequence Number Comparison and Stop, 361
Start Lock/ Interlock, 220
Servo Alarms, 115
Status Output Signal, 233
Servo off (Mechanical handle), 23
Status Output Signals for an Axis Under Synchronous,
Servo Tuning Screen, 909 Composite, or Superimposed Control, 121
Servo/Spindle Motor Speed Detection, 247 Stored Pitch Error Compensation, 29
B–62753EN–1/01 Index
01 Feb., ’96